Installing 6200 Programming Software ..............................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... SystemRequirements ................................................................................................................. Installing6200ProgrammingSoftware ......................................................................................... Removing6200ProgrammingSoftware .......................................................................................

1-1
1-1 1-1 1-12 1-19

Starting 6200 Programming Software .................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... UsingtheSmartMenu .................................................................................................................. SpecifyingtheExecutable ............................................................................................................ Using6200ProgrammingSoftwareinW indows ............................................................................ UsingtheDH+,Ethernet,andControlNetWHO Network Menus .................................................... StoringUserConfigurationFiles ................................................................................................... Exiting6200ProgrammingSoftware ............................................................................................

2-1
2-1 2-2 2-4 2-5 2-5 2-8 2-10

Using 6200 Programming Software ....................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... UsingtheMainMenu .................................................................................................................... OverviewoftheSoftware .............................................................................................................. KeysY ouUse ............................................................................................................................. CapturingScreens ...................................................................................................................... DisplayingOnlineHelp ................................................................................................................. ProgrammingOnline[F1] ............................................................................................................. ProgrammingOffline[F3] ............................................................................................................. SpecifyingtheCorrectProcessorSeries ....................................................................................... ClearingMemory .........................................................................................................................

3-1
3-1 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-10 3-12 3-18

Using 6200 Programming Software in a W indows Environment ....................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... SettingtheIRQ ............................................................................................................................ ConfiguringtheMulti-SessionDriver ............................................................................................ InstallingtheMulti-SessionDriver ................................................................................................. CreatingaProgramGroup ............................................................................................................ RunningW indowsand6200ProgrammingSoftware .................................................................... ConfiguringOnlineCommunication .............................................................................................

4-1
4-1 4-5 4-8 4-9 4-12 4-19 4-31

Configuring the Programming T erminal Display Characteristics ...................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... UsingtheSoftwareConfigurationScreen[F6] ................................................................................

5-1
5-1 5-2

Configuring the Programming T erminal for Online Communications ...........

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ConfiguringOnlineConfiguration[F2] ........................................................................................... GeneralConfigurationInformation ............................................................................................... Configuringa1784-KT/KT2 ......................................................................................................... Configuringa1784-KTC .............................................................................................................. Configuringa1784-KTX/KTXD .................................................................................................... Configuringa1784-PCMK ........................................................................................................... RemoteProgrammingfromDH+toDH+ ........................................................................................ UsingaSerialPort ........................................................................................................................ UsingtheVMEDriver ................................................................................................................... ConfiguringW indowsKL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX ............................................................................ ConfiguringW indows/DOSKTC(ControlNet) ............................................................................. CommunicatingwithDevicesonEthernet ..................................................................................... Configuringa1784-KL .................................................................................................................

6-1
6-1 6-2 6-4 6-7 6-12 6-16 6-17 6-19 6-20 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-33 6-38

Configuring a Processor Memory File for Of fline Programming ....................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... UsingtheOfflineConfiguration[F4] ............................................................................................... CreatingOfflineProcessorMemoryFiles ...................................................................................... SelectingOfflineProcessorMemoryFiles .....................................................................................

7-1
7-1 7-2 7-4 7-5

ConvertingA.I.orWINT elligentLOGIC5(.X5Files)to 6200 Series (.AF5 Files) ............................

7-6

Using Communications ........................................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... UnderstandingDH+Communications.......................................................................................... UsingDH+WHO .......................................................................................................................... UsingDH+WHOListen ................................................................................................................ UsingDH+WHOActive ................................................................................................................ GettingStationDiagnostics .......................................................................................................... UnderstandingEthernetCommunications ................................................................................... UsingEthernetWHO ................................................................................................................... UsingEthernetWHOActive .......................................................................................................... UsingEthernetWHOActiveHostDiagnostics ................................................................................ UsingtheEthernetHostListEditor ................................................................................................. UnderstandingControlNetCommunication ................................................................................. UsingControlNetWHO ................................................................................................................ UsingtheControlNetWHOACTIVE ActiveNode Identification Screen ........................................ UsingtheControlNetWHOACTIVE ActiveNode Status Screen .................................................. UsingtheControlNetWHOACTIVE Channel Status Screen ....................................................... UsingtheControlNetWHOACTIVE Network Status Screen .......................................................

8-1
8-1 8-1 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-9 8-18 8-19 8-20 8-21 8-22 8-24 8-25 8-26 8-28 8-29 8-31

Addressing Data T able Files ...............................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... OverviewofDataStorage ............................................................................................................. UnderstandingDataStorage(DataT ableFiles) ............................................................................ OrganizingDataintoFilesandDataBlocks .................................................................................... AddressingFrequentlyUsedFiles ................................................................................................ DataFileV alidRanges ................................................................................................................ AddressingDataFiles .................................................................................................................. SpecifyingLogicalAddresses ...................................................................................................... SpecifyingI/OImageAddresses ................................................................................................... SpecifyingIndirectAddresses ...................................................................................................... SpecifyingIndexedAddresses ..................................................................................................... SpecifyingSymbolicAddresses ...................................................................................................

9-1
9-1 9-1 9-3 9-4 9-6 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-17 9-19 9-20 9-22

Creating Data T able Files ....................................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... CreatingDataT ableFiles ............................................................................................................ AssigningPrivilegestoDataT ableFiles ........................................................................................ ExtendingDataT ableFiles .......................................................................................................... DeletingDataT ableFiles.............................................................................................................

10-1
10-1 10-2 10-4 10-4 10-5

Configuring Y our Processor ...............................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ConfiguringtheProcessor ........................................................................................................... AccessingtheProcessorStatusandProcessor Configuration Screens ........................................ DefineProcessorStart-upProcedure ........................................................................................... ConfigureProcessorResidentRackAddress Enhanced PLC-5 Processors ................................ ConfigureProcessorResidentLocalI/OBlockT ransfer Compatibility Enhanced PLC-5 .............. ConfigureAdapterChannelResponse Enhanced PLC-5 Processors .......................................... ConfigureMemoryProtectFeature ............................................................................................... ConfigureCommunicationT imeSliceBetweenMCPs Enhanced PLC-5 Processors .................. ConfigureaFaultRoutine ............................................................................................................. ConfigureaW atchdogT imer ...................................................................................................... DefineanI/OStatusFile ................................................................................................................ AddressingtheI/OStatusFile ....................................................................................................... ConfigureaStatusFileforPLC-5/VMEProcessors ........................................................................ ConfigureanAdapterImageFilePLC-5/12,-5/15,-5/25, -5/VME Processors ................................ ConfigureProcessorInputInterrupt (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors) ............................................ ConfigureSelectableT imedInterrupt .......................................................................................... ConfigureMainControlPrograms(MCPs) .................................................................................... ConfiguretheVMEPLC-5Processor ............................................................................................

11-1
11-1 11-1 11-3 11-5 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-11 11-12 11-13 11-14 11-15 11-18 11-19 11-20 11-22 11-24 11-26

Using Processor and I/O Status ..........................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ProcessorStatusFile ................................................................................................................... InterpretingProcessorStatusInformation .................................................................................... MonitoringFaults ........................................................................................................................ MonitoringProcessorStatus ........................................................................................................ MonitoringProcessorInformation ................................................................................................ MonitoringArithmeticFlagsandIndexed Addressing Offset ......................................................... MonitoringtheDH+LinkforClassicPLC-5Processors ................................................................... MonitoringProgramScan ............................................................................................................ MonitoringtheProcessorChecksum (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors) .......................................... MonitoringPlls(EnhancedPLC-5ProcessorsOnly) ...................................................................... MonitoringSTls(EnhancedPLC-5ProcessorsOnly) ..................................................................... MonitoringandControllingI/O ...................................................................................................... AutomaticConfiguration ..............................................................................................................

12-1
12-1 12-1 12-6 12-8 12-11 12-13 12-16 12-17 12-18 12-20 12-21 12-22 12-23 12-34

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors ................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ConfiguringChannels ................................................................................................................. AccessingtheChannelOverviewScreen ...................................................................................... SavingEdits ................................................................................................................................ ConfigureChannel0 .................................................................................................................... ConfigureChannels1Athrough2B ............................................................................................... ConfiguringChannel2forEthernetCommunication (Ethernet PLC-5 Processors) ....................... ConfiguringChannel2forControlNetCommunication ................................................................... ConfigureChannel2(PLC-5/40L,-5/V40L,and -5/60L Processors) .............................................. ConfiguringChannel3AforPLC-5EthernetInterface Module Communication (Enhanced ............

13-1
13-1 13-1 13-5 13-7 13-8 13-24 13-36 13-39 13-61 13-66

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors ..........................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... InterpretingChannelStatusData .................................................................................................. InterpretingChannel0Status ....................................................................................................... InterpretingDataHighwayPlusStatusData ................................................................................... InterpretingScannerModeStatusData ......................................................................................... InterpretingAdapterCommunicationModeStatusData ................................................................ InterpretingEthernetStatusData ................................................................................................. InterpretingControlNetStatusData .............................................................................................. InterpretingExtendedLocalI/OStatusData .................................................................................. InterpretingPLC-5EthernetInterfaceModule Status Data ...........................................................

14-1
14-1 14-3 14-5 14-12 14-18 14-22 14-27 14-30 14-33 14-36

Using Passwords and Privileges ........................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... AssigningaPasswordtoaProcessorMemoryFile .......................................................................... AssigningPasswordsandPrivileges ............................................................................................ DefiningPrivilegeClasses ........................................................................................................... AssigningaPrivilegeClasstoaChannelorOfflineFile ..................................................................... AssigningaPrivilegeClasstoaNode ............................................................................................. AssigningPrivilegestoaProgramFile ........................................................................................... AssigningPrivilegestoaDataFile ................................................................................................. ChangingtoaDifferentClass ........................................................................................................ RestoringDefaultPrivilegeClasses .............................................................................................. UsingProtectedPLC-5Processors .............................................................................................. ExampleUsingPasswordsandPrivileges .....................................................................................

15-1
15-1 15-3 15-5 15-8 15-11 15-14 15-17 15-18 15-19 15-20 15-21 15-22

Monitoring Data ....................................................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... DisplayingtheProcessorDataT able ............................................................................................ MonitoringBTRandBTWInstructions ........................................................................................... MonitoringCIOInstructions ......................................................................................................... MonitoringMSGInstructions ........................................................................................................ MonitoringPIDInstructions ..........................................................................................................

16-1
16-1 16-2 16-8 16-10 16-11 16-14

MonitoringStringData .................................................................................................................

16-16

Clearing Faults ......................................................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ClearingaMajorFault ................................................................................................................... ClearingMinorFaults ...................................................................................................................

17-1
17-1 17-2 17-8

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC T ransitions ..........................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... ForcingI/OBitsfromtheLadderEditor ........................................................................................... ForcingI/OBitsfromtheForceMonitorScreen ............................................................................... RemovingI/OForces ................................................................................................................... EnablingandDisablingI/OForces ................................................................................................ ForcingT ransitionsfromtheSFCEditor (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Only) .............................

18-1
18-1 18-2 18-3 18-5 18-6 18-8

Generating a Contact Histogram .........................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... GeneratingaContactHistogram .................................................................................................. PrintingaContactHistogram ........................................................................................................

19-1
19-1 19-1 19-5

Generating and Printing Reports ........................................................................

ChapterObjectives ..................................................................................................................... GeneratingReports ..................................................................................................................... SelectingReportOptions ............................................................................................................. SelectingGeneralReportOptions ................................................................................................ ChangingaReportT itle ............................................................................................................... PrintingReports ..........................................................................................................................

20-1
20-1 20-1 20-7 20-15 20-16 20-17

Instruction Set Quick Reference .........................................................................

InstructionSet .............................................................................................................................

A-1
A-1

ControlNet I/O Map Entry Status W ords and Error Messages ........................
I/OMapEntryStatusW ords ......................................................................................................... I/OMapEntryErrorMessages ...................................................................................................... HowtoUseY ourDocumentation .................................................................................................. WheretoStart .............................................................................................................................. Conventions ............................................................................................................................... UsingtheIndex ............................................................................................................................

B-1
B-1 B-2 i iii iv vi

Summary of Changes ...........................................................................................

NewInformationAddedtothisManual ...........................................................................................

iii
iii

Customer Support ................................................................................................

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Use the information in this chapter to:

Chapter Objectives

check system requirements install your 6200 programming software verify the installation of your 6200 programming software remove old versions of 6200 programming software (if necessary)

System Requirements
Before you install 6200 programming software, you need the following:

Note

For offline and online programming (including utilities): a minimum total system free memory, including conventional, extended, and expanded memory, of 2 Mbytes (after all resident software has been loaded). 13 Mbytes of hard disk space to install 6200 programming software. For release 5.2 and later of 6200 programming software, the Windows multi-session driver software (INTERCHANGE) is no longer included within 6200 programming software. To use the Windows multi-session drivers, you must install either the INTERCHANGE DOS Run-Time Kit (9351-DKTSRT) or the INTERCHANGE Windows Run-Time Kit (9351-WKTSRT). In addition, the optional Block Transfer Disk requires 600 Kbytes and the optional Remote Software Support Disk requires 800 Kbytes for storing files.

Optional 5.6 Mbytes of hard disk space to program over Ethernet with PC/TCP software.

1-1

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

A minimum 80286 computer is required (for most applications, a 80486 computer is recommended) High-density 1.44 Mbyte, 3 1/2-inch disk drive Monochrome or color graphics monitor (80-column display). Based on the type of programming terminal you are using, you need the following DOS version:
You Need: Allen-Bradley DOS version 3.2x If your 1784-T50 has DOS version 2.11 or earlier, you must upgrade to the current version of Allen-Bradley DOS (3.21). MS DOS version 4.01 or later MS DOS version 5.0, 6.x or later MS DOS versions 3.x, 4.x, 5.0, 6.x or later

With this Programming Terminal: 1784-T50

1784-T47, 1784-T53, or 1784-T60 1784-T70 IBM PC/AT or compatible

Note

The following applications and devices are incompatible with release 5.2 and later of 6200 programming software:

The OS/2 1.x environment (which is limited to a maximum of 640K) The ControlView for DOS application window The 1784-T45 programming terminal The IBM-PC/XT (or compatible) programming terminal 1784-KTK1 communication card

Setting CONFIG.SYS
If you are using Windows, read the information in this section and then see chapter 4 for additional configuration requirements.

The CONFIG.SYS file must contain the following statements: FILES=50 BUFFERS=30 DEVICE=ANSI.SYS You can set BUFFERS to any number between 30 and 50. System performance may increase as you increase the number of buffers, although increasing the number of buffers uses additional memory. For more information, see your DOS reference manual.

1-2

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Note Note

If ANSI.SYS is not in the root directory, include the path that contains ANSI.SYS in the DEVICE statement. For example: DEVICE=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYS Be aware that these FILES and BUFFERS statements may conflict with the CONFIG.SYS requirements for other software packages on your programming terminal. If you change these values, the amount of memory available for running applications also changes. If you change the CONFIG.SYS or AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you must reboot to re-initialize the system.

Note

If your hard disk is partitioned larger than 32 Mbytes and you are running a DOS version earlier than 5.0, you must install SHARE.EXE. The SHARE.EXE command helps to:

manage files on large disk drives manage files for multi-session applications use 6200 file locking and file sharing features

See your DOS Reference Manual for information on how to install the SHARE.EXE command. For mouse support in 6200 programming software under DOS or Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11, you must load the DOS mouse driver by entering the following statement in the CONFIG.SYS file: DEVICE=C:\DOS\MOUSE.SYS Note For the above statement, the DOS mouse driver file (MOUSE.SYS) must be located in the C:\DOS directory in order to use the mouse under DOS. Using the mouse, you can to do the following:

Note

select a function key by moving the mouse cursor to a function key and single-clicking the left mouse button

single-click the right mouse button as an equivalent to pressing the [Esc] key When using 6200 programming software in Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11, your DOS mouse driver may be incompatible with your Windows display driver and/or Windows mouse driver. For more information, see your DOS, Microsoft Windows 3.1, Microsoft Windows for Workgroups 3.11, and mouse device reference manuals.

1-3

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

If your DOS mouse driver is not compatible, do the following:

Complete this Task: 1. Go to the Main group and select the Windows Setup icon. The Windows Setup screen appears. In this Window:

2. Go to the Options menu. Select Change System Settings. The Change System Settings screen appears.

(Continued)

1-4

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Complete this Task: 3. In the Display field, select VGA from the list box to change the display driver. Select OK. Note: When changing the display driver, it is recommended that you have easy access to the Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 installation disks. You may be prompted to insert the disks following step 3. 4. In the Mouse field, select Microsoft Mouse version 9.01 from the list box to change the mouse driver. Select OK. Note: When changing the mouse driver, it is recommended that you have easy access to the Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 installation disks. You may be prompted to insert the disks following step 4.

In this Window:

Note

If you are using Windows 95 with release 5.0 or later of 6200 programming software, your DOS mouse driver is automatically configured for use with the Windows display driver and/or Windows mouse driver.

1-5

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

Note

Make sure the device statement for the memory manager excludes the memory address of the communication card. To do this, use the appropriate command for the expanded memory manager to exclude the memory range in CONFIG.SYS:
With This Base Address (hex): E000 A000 A400 A800 AC00 B400 B800 C000 C400 C800 CC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 Exclude This Memory Range (hex): E000 E0FF A000 A400 A800 AC00 B400 B800 C000 C400 C800 CC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 A3FF A7FF ABFF AFFF B7FF BBFF C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF C000 C400 C800 CC00 D000 D400 D800 D000 D400 D800 DC00 D000 D400 D800 DC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 D000 D400 D800 D000 D400 D800 DC00 D000 D400 D800 DC00 C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF D3FF D7FF DBFF D3FF D7FF DBFF DFFF D3FF D7FF DBFF DFFF With This Base Address (hex): Exclude This Memory Range (hex):

If You Are Using This Communication Card: 1784-KL 1784-KT

1784-KT2

1784-KTC

1784-KTX

The 1784-KTX communication card can use any 4KB block of memory on any 4K boundary between A000 and EF00 (hexadecimal). For example, if you are using a 1784-KTX at D400 with the EMM 386 Memory Manager, your CONFIG.SYS file should contain the following line:
DEVICE = C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE X=D400-D4FF

1784-PCMK

A300 A700 AB00 AF00 B300 B700 BB00 BF00 C300 C700 CB00 CF00

A300 A700 AB00 AF00 B300 B700 BB00 BF00 C300 C700 CB00 CF00

A6FF AAFF AEFF B2FF B7FF BAFF BEFF C2FF C7FF CAFF CEFF D2FF

D300 D700 DB00 DF00 E300 E700 EB00

D300 D700 DB00 DF00 E300 E700 EB00

D7FF DAFF DEFF E2FF E7FF EAFF EEFF

6171-IDH Considerations If you use a 6171-IDH module with an Advisor PC (this lets you communicate via DH+ protocol), the CONFIG.SYS file should contain the statements shown above, as well as the following: DEVICE=C:\RTX\BIN\IDH.SYS comnum STATION=stanum NET=DH+ Replace comnum with COM1 or COM2. Replace stanum with the station number of your programming terminal.
1-6

Installing 6200 Programming Software

After you reboot the system, type the following command at the DOS prompt (you can also place this command in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file): MODE comnum:baud,N,8,1 Replace comnum with COM1 or COM2. The comnum you choose must be the same as in the DEVICE statement. Replace baud with the appropriate communication rate. The baud you choose must be the same as the Serial to PLC, KE/KF configuration you set on the Online Configuration screen. See chapter 6. Table 1.A shows the COM numbers, interrupt (IRQ) settings, and communication rates that are generally valid for the 6171-IDH module. (Some programming terminals define different IRQ settings for COM1 and COM2. Check with the hardware manual for your programming terminal to make sure the COM numbers and IRQ settings in Table 1.A are valid for your programming terminal.)

Table 1.A COM and IRQ Settings

COM IRQ for 386, AT Baud Rate in Mode Command 1200 2400 1 4 4800 9600 150 1200 2400 2 3 4800 9600 150 Baud Rate in Online Configuration (serial) 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200

For example, if you specify 19200 baud on the Online Configuration screen, you specify 150 baud with the DOS Mode command. See your DOS reference manual or your computer manual for more information.

1-7

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

Setting AUTOEXEC.BAT
To disable the beep associated with the error messages that appear on your 6200 programming software screens, use the RSI_6200_NOBEEP environment variable. To nullify the error bell, enter the following statement in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: SET RSI_6200_NOBEEP=Y Note You can also enable and disable the beep associated with error messages from the DOS prompt. To enable the beep, enter SET RSI_6200_NOBEEP= (with a blank space following the equals [=] sign). To disable the beep, enter SET RSI_6200_NOBEEP=Y. You cannot enable or disable the beep associated with DOS system errors by entering either of the above mentioned environment variables.

Note

Understanding Conventional, Upper, and Expanded or Extended Memory

There are three different types of memory on your computer: conventional, upper, and extended or expanded (Figure 1.1). Note For release 5.2 and later, 6200 programming software runs in protected mode using a DOS-Extender which manages the interface between the protected-mode program and real-mode DOS. The DOS-Extender is compatible with all PC industry standards for protected mode, expanded memory (EMS), and extended memory (XMS). The DOS-Extender also supports the Virtual Control Program Interface (VCPI), which allows EMS emulators and DOS-extenders to coexist, and the DOS Protected Mode Interface (DPMI), which allows compatibility between DOS-extenders and DOS multitasking environments. Figure 1.1 Conventional, Upper, Extended and Expanded Memory
16MByte 8MByte 1MByte 640KByte Extended/ Expanded Memory Upper Memory Conventional Memory IBM PC-AT or compatible Extended/ Expanded Memory Upper Memory Conventional Memory Extended used as Expanded Memory Upper Memory Conventional Memory 386 computer

1-8

Installing 6200 Programming Software

This Memory: Conventional Upper Extended 1 (XMS)

Is: 0-640 Kbytes 640 Kbytes-1 Mbyte 1 Mbyte-16 Mbytes 2

Description: Reserved for system processes and normal DOS applications. Reserved for hardware devices but can be used for system processes. Used for RAM disks, print spoolers, etc., and is not available for normal DOS applications. With an extended memory manager, the 64 Kbytes of extended memory can be turned into Upper Memory. DOS version 5.0 and other device drivers can be loaded into this area, leaving more conventional memory available for your applications.

Expanded (EMS)

page mapped between 640 Kbytes-1 Mbyte

If required by other applications only; recommended if Extended (XMS) memory is not available. Used for storing data. The software supports expanded memory under the LIM 4.0 (Lotus-Intel-Microsoft) standard. Use expanded memory by adding memory chips or an expanded memory board to your computer. See the instruction manual for your memory board for the appropriate installation and configuration requirements.

1 Extended memory can be configured to emulate Expanded memory using a memory manager (for example, EMM386.EXE or

HIMEM.SYS). For more information, see your DOS reference manual.

2 All 80386 and 80486 processors can support more than 16 Mbytes; some 80486 machines can be configured to support up to

64 Mbytes. For more information, see your memory manager user guide.

1-9

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

Improving the Performance of 6200 Programming Software

To achieve optimum performance from 6200 programming software, keep the following performance enhancements in mind: Disk Caching The performance of 6200 programming software can be improved by using a disk caching program such as SMARTDrive, which reduces the amount of time your computer spends reading and writing data from your hard disk. To use a disk-caching program, you need a computer with a hard drive and expanded or extended memory. In addition, we recommend a minimum of 512K and a maximum of 2048K or half of the available extended or expanded memory (whichever is smaller) to set up the program. Note If you provide too much memory to the disk-caching program, you degrade 6200 programming software performance because the disk-caching program competes with the application software for available memory. When using a disk-caching program, be sure that a minimum of 2 Mbytes of memory is available for 6200 programming software applications. SMARTDrive is available with DOS 4.0 and later and Microsoft Windows. For more information on setting up a disk cache, see your disk caching software manual or the appropriate section on SMARTDrive in your DOS manual. Note After editing a processor program when using a disk cache, do not end the session by turning off power or rebooting via the reset button. Disk caching programs speed up computer operations by temporarily storing information being written to the disk drive in memory. If a situation occurs that causes the computers memory to be cleared (such as losing power or rebooting via the reset button) before the information is actually written to hard disk, the information being held in memory will not be saved.

Note

Defragmenting the Hard Disk In addition to using the disk caching program, you can defragment your hard disk to improve the performance of 6200 programming software. You can use the DEFRAG.EXE program that is supplied with DOS 6.2 or any commercially available defragmenting program.

1-10

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Programming Devices All Allen-Bradley DOS-based (excluding the 1784-T45) and most IBM and IBM-compatible 80286 or higher machines can be used as programming devices with 6200 programming software.

DOS Country Codes

The following DOS country codes are not compatible with release 4.4 and later of 6200 programming software:

Switzerland (041) Latin America (003) Spain (034)

When using a system which is currently configured to one of the above country codes, choose an alternative country with international conventions similar to those required and select the appropriate DOS country code. Note All DOS country codes function with either the 850 (multilingual) or 437 (English) character sets; simply changing the DOS country code will not restrict the character sets available to you. Since 6200 programming software supports only the multilingual or English character sets, you must use the multilingual character set instead of the preferred character set listed in the DOS manual. Databases for comments and symbols created under one DOS country code cannot be used under a different DOS country code. To convert a database for use with another DOS country code, follow these steps: 1. 2. 3. 4. Export the comments and symbols database to a TXT file (using the original country code). Make the desired changes to the international settings in your CONFIG.SYS and AUTOEXEC.BAT files. Reboot the programming terminal. Import the TXT file (using the new country code).

Note

You can change the current country code without rebooting the system by using the CHCTYCODE.EXE utility located in the IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 directory. After you change the country code, use the CHCP command at the DOS prompt to establish the proper character sets for the CON or PRN device. For more information, see your DOS reference manual.

1-11

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

Installing 6200 Programming Software

1. 2. Turn on the computer. When the DOS prompt appears, insert the disk labelled Disk 1 of n into the disk drive, where n is equal to the total number of disks. Type the following: A:
Return Return

INSTALL C:

Note: Remove any previous versions of 6200 programming software before installing the new version. For information about removing software, see page 1-19. a: is the drive where you insert the disk. c: is any destination hard-disk for 6200 programming software.

Note

For release 5.2 and later of 6200 programming software, the Windows multi-session driver software (INTERCHANGE) is no longer included within 6200 programming software. To use the Windows multi-session drivers, you must install either the INTERCHANGE DOS Run-Time Kit (9351-DKTSRT) or the INTERCHANGE Windows Run-Time Kit (9351-WKTSRT). Before you install 6200 programming software on a new system which includes Windows 95, you must first create an AUTOEXEC.BAT file with a PATH statement containing the directory where the DOS commands are located. If you install 6200 programming software on an established system which has upgraded from Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 to Windows 95, this is not necessary.

Note

1-12

Installing 6200 Programming Software

You see:
Rockwell Software Inc., Copyright 1996, All rights reserved. Rockwell Software Inc. (RSI) and its third party licensors grant to you a non exclusivelicense to install and use the software programs in this package (collectively referred to as the Software) on either: (a) a single computer, or (b) a network server for access by one user, by way of terminal or computer attached to the network server. Should you choose to install the Software on additional computers, or increase user access via a network server, you must first acquire a license for each additional user who will use the Software, with the understanding that at any one point in time (and regardless of the number of media sets included with the Soft ware), the number who are permitted to use the Software may not exceed the number of single userlicenses you have acquired. If this Software is an upgrade from a previous version of an RSI product, you may not transfer the prior version to another user. This Agreement supersedes any prior license with respect to your use of the Software.

1 Press any key

************************************************************************************ * ATTENTION: THIS PROGRAM IS PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAW AND * * INTERNATIONAL TREATIES. UNAUTHORIZED REPRODUCTION, * * DISTRIBUTION, OR USE OF THIS PROGRAM, OR ANY PORTION OF IT, * * MAY RESULT IN SEVERE CIVIL AND CRIMINAL PENALTIES. * ************************************************************************************
[press any key to start installation]

2 Enter your company name and address. You can find the serial number on the diskette labels. Serial numbers are 10 numeric characters in length.

Contents: PLC-5 Online/Offline SW Catalog Number: 9323-XXXX Product Registration Release Number: X.X Quantity: x Disks Company Name: Address: : Serial Number:

Information

3 When you are finished, press

F9

As the registered user for this software, you are entitled to a broad range of SupportPlus services from Rockwell Software Inc. at no charge. Your serial number, shown on the diskette labels, is the key to getting all the support services available to you. Please enter the serial number (and company name and address) above, or modify <F9> or accept <ENTER> the previous registration info. NOTE You will only be able to enter the serial number (and name and address) on the initial installation of this disk set. Enter product registration info and press F9

1-13

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

After you enter the product registration, you see:

Contents: Catalog Number: Release Number: Quantity: 0k Copied
NO YES

4 Use the up, down, right, and left arrow keys to select the appropriate password and privilege option, then press
Return

PLC Online/Offline SW 9323-XXXX X.X x Disks

Status

0% Complete

0%

25%

50%

75%

100%

SELECT APPROPRIATE PASSWORD AND PRIVILEGE OPTION Do not provide the ability to configure Passwords & Privileges Provide the ability to configure Passwords & Privileges Refer to Documentation

For more information on Passwords and Privileges, see chapter 15.

RETURN TO DOS

Instructions Use the - keys to select an item, then press ENTER

When appropriate, you are prompted to insert disks until installation is complete.

The percent completion bar advances as the installation progresses.

Contents: Catalog Number: Release Number: Quantity:

PLC Online/Offline SW 9323-XXXX X.X x Disks

Status

98% Complete

10249k Copied The file names are displayed as they are installed to your hard disk.
Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack Unpack IOATY.MBN MDILB.FRM MDVB1A.FRM MDVB2A.FRM MDVB2B.FRM DFADOC5.EXE IOCF5.RUS IOCF5.LVR IOCFGSAV.EXE HELP5.IUS ATT5DOC.EXE to to to to to to to to to to to

0%

25%

50%

75%

100%

5 After 6200 is installed, press Return

C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\IOATY.MBN C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\MDILB.FRM C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\MDVB1A.FRM C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\MDVB2A.FRM C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\MDVB2B.FRM C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\DFADOC5.EXE C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\LANG\US\IOCF5.RUS C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\LANG\IOCF5.LVR C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\IOCFGSAV.EXE C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\LANG\US\HELP5.IUS C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5\ATT5DOC.EXE

Instructions The File Copy portion of Install is Complete: Press ENTER

1-14

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Installing the Smart Menu

Use the Smart Menu to start software packages on your hard disk. Assign the application to a function key on the Smart Menu. Then start the application when you press the function key. For more information on the Smart Menu, see chapter 2. If the Smart Menu is not already installed on your programming terminal, it is automatically installed when you install 6200 programming software. This automatic installation also places the option for starting 6200 programming software on the Smart Menu. The Smart Menu will run any application you have as long as that application is listed on one of the Smart Menu pages. You can also place options on the Smart Menu for starting 6200 programming software through the 6200 programming software main menu and through the DH+ Network Menu. If the programming software detects a different entry already listed for the predefined key for the programming software, the software displays a screen that asks you to move the existing entry. From this screen you can:

Move the existing key definition to a different location and let the software assign the predefined key for programming software. Press [Esc]. This places the programming software entry on the first available key, regardless of the menu level. Press [Alt-U]. This leaves the menu the way it is; this key does not move or add any applications.

Modifying the Smart Menu

The Smart Menu can consist of up to ten levels of executable applications with up to nine applications per level. Each application is assigned to a function key ([F1] [F9]); [F10] is always reserved for Exit to DOS. Use [PageUp] and [PageDown] to move through the screens.

1-15

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

If you want to modify an entry, move the cursor to the page of the Smart Menu where you want to change the selection using
PageUp

or

PageDown

The page must have an entry on it before you can cursor to it. If you want to add an entry to a page that doesnt already have an entry, just leave the cursor on the first screen. The software wont let you use
PageUp

or

PageDown

+================== ROCKWELL SOFTWARE MAIN MENU INTERFACE =====================+ | | | +=== MENU CONFIGURATION =====================================================+ | | | | | 1 | | | 2 PLC 2 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | 3 PLC 3 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | 4 | | | 5 PLC 5 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | 6 | | | 7 | | | 8 | | | 9 | | | | | | | +=+=============================================================[ LEVEL 0 ]====+ | Fri Feb 4, 1994 9:38:46 am | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key. Delete Entry F1 Modify Entry F3 Add Entry F5 Move Entry F7

to move to a page that doesnt already have an entry.

Press the function key for the modification you want to perform. In order to delete, modify, or move an entry, you must move the cursor to that entry (use the up arrow or down arrow keys). The input keys you can use for entering text (such as the application description for the function key) are the same input keys you use in 6200 programming software. For a description of these keys, see chapter 3.

If You Want to: Delete an existing entry Modify an existing entry Add an entry Move an existing entry to a different location

Press this Key: [F1] Delete Entry [F3] Modify Entry [F5] Add Entry [F7] Move Entry

1-16

Installing 6200 Programming Software

When you add or modify an entry on the Smart Menu, supply the information described in the following table.
Field: Menu Level Key Number Press this Function Key: [F1] [F2] Description: The page (0-9) where you want to add an entry. You cannot change this value if you are modifying the entry. The function key (1-9) you want to assign to the new entry. You cannot change this value if you are modifying the entry. The first line of the label (1-7 characters) that you want to appear above the function key. The second line of the label (1-7 characters) that you want to appear above the function key. The description of the entry (1-35 characters) that you want to appear on the menu. The DOS directory path (1-51 characters) to where the executable for the application is stored. For example: C:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 The name (1-12 characters) of the executable file for the application. For example: IT.EXE Any instructions (1-70 characters) you normally type at the DOS command line after specifying the application. For example, in the command: edlin autoexec.bat, edlin is the application, autoexec.bat is a command line parameter.

Function Key Label Top Function Key Label Bottom Application Description Path

[F3] [F4] [F5] [F6]

Application Name Command Line Parameters

[F7] [F8]

When you specify the executable for an application, include the full path and extension for the fastest execution time (the executable is the name you type to start an application). If you do not include the full path, the software uses the path in your AUTOEXEC.BAT to find the executable. If you do not use the extension, the software looks for the executable with the following extensions:
Search Order: First Second Third Extension: .COM .EXE .BAT

1-17

Installing 6200 Programming Software Preface

Specifying 6200 Programming Software through the Smart Menu

You can use the Smart Menu to start 6200 programming software at the main menu of the software or at the DH+ Network Menu. Table 1.B shows the path and application name you need for each method of starting the software.

Table 1.B Starting 6200 Programming Software through the Smart Menu
To Start from Here: Main Menu DH+ Network Menu Use this Path: \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 \IPDS\ATTACH And this Application Name: IT.EXE WHO.EXE

Specifying Other Software Packages through the Smart Menu

If you use the Smart Menu to start other software packages, you might have to specify a batch file as the application. You need this batch file if the other software package is executed from a different directory than the Smart Menu directory. This batch file should change the directory to where the software is installed and then start the software from that location.

Verifying Registration Information

To verify (not change) your registration information, place Disk 1 in the disk drive and type: A:
Return Return

INSTALL MANAGER

The software displays the current registration and status information, such as the maximum number of authorized and active installations. Note Verify that the number of active installations displayed by the software complies with your license agreement.

1-18

Installing 6200 Programming Software

Removing 6200 Programming Software

Note You only need to remove 6200 programming software if you:

are moving 6200 programming software from one programming terminal to another. do not have the required disk space to install the latest version of 6200 programming software over the version of 6200 programming software currently on your programming terminal.

To remove 6200 programming software, follow these steps: 1. 2. Turn on the computer. When the DOS prompt appears, insert the disk labelled Disk 1 of n into the disk drive, where n is equal to the total number of disks. Type the following: A:
Return Return

a: is the drive where you insert the disk. c: is the hard drive from which you remove the software.

UNINSTAL C:

The system displays the following message: OK to continue with the Uninstall (Y=continue, N=abort)? 3. Type
Y

If you want to uninstall any utilities disks, you must remove each separately. Follow the above procedure with each utility disk. Note Certain software files are installed with the READ-ONLY file attribute set. Therefore, you cannot use DOS DELETE and ERASE commands to remove the software unless you initially alter the file attributes.

1-19

Starting 6200 Programming Software

Starting 6200 Programming Software

Chapter Objectives
This chapter explains the methods for starting your 6200 programming software. Use Table 2.A to select a method for starting your programming software. First-time users should use the Smart Menu.

Table 2.A Methods to Start the Software

If You Want to: Have immediate access to 6200 programming software as well as other programming packages If you are a first-time 6200 user, you should use the Smart Menu. Have immediate access to 6200 programming software Have immediate access to 6200 programming software in Windows Specify the executable for 6200 programming software Use the 6200 icon (Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11) or Select 6200 PLC-5 from the A-B 6200 Software submenu (Windows 95) Use the DH+, Ethernet, and ControlNet WHO Network Menus 2-4 2-5 Choose this Method: Use the Smart Menu On Page: 2-2

Choose communications connections and select any processor on the DH+, Ethernet, or ControlNet network before using the software for programming

2-5

This chapter also describes user configuration files (to store configuration information) and how to exit the software.

2-1

Starting 6200 Programming Software Preface

Using the Smart Menu

You can use the Main Menu Interface (Smart Menu) to start any software packages you have on the hard disk of your programming terminal. You select a software package by selecting the associated option from the Smart Menu. For example, one screen of the Smart Menu can look like Figure 2.1.

Figure 2.1 Example of the Smart Menu

+====================== ALLEN BRADLEY MAIN MENU INTERFACE =====================+ | | | Copyright 1987, 1995 Rockwell Software Inc. | | All Rights Reserved | | | | | | F2 PLC 2 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | F3 PLC 3 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | | F5 PLC 5 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | | F7 5/250 Programming Dev & Doc SW | | | | | | | | | | | | | +===============================================================[ LEVEL 0 ]====+ | Fri Oct 6, 1995 2:38:16 pm | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key to select a program or ALT C to modify entries. 6200 PLC 2 F2 6200 PLC 3 F3 6200 PLC 5 F5 6200 5/250 F7 Exit To DOS F10

2-2

Starting 6200 Programming Software

Starting the Smart Menu

To start the Smart Menu, follow these steps: 1. 2. Make sure ABMENU.EXE is in the x:\IPDS directory (where x is the drive on which you installed 6200 programming software). Do one of the following:

Place x:\IPDS\ABMENU as the last line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file and reboot the system to execute AUTOEXEC.BAT. Change the directory to x:\IPDS and type ABMENU [Enter]

where x is the drive on which you installed 6200 programming software. Now you can choose the selections that appear on the Smart Menu to reflect the software you use.

2-3

Starting 6200 Programming Software Preface

Specifying the Executable

You can also start 6200 programming software by specifying the softwares executable command from the DOS command line. To do this: 1. 2. 3. Start on the DOS command line. Change the directory to \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 Type: IT [Enter] You can also type: IT userconfig [Enter] Where userconfig is the path you defined to save your configuration options. For example, IT A:\IPDS\ATTACH. For more information about the user configuration file, see Storing User Configuration Files on page 2-8. If you do not define a user configuration file, the software uses the default configuration file stored in \IPDS\ATTACH on the drive where the 6200 programming software is installed. The system displays the main menu for 6200 programming software.

2-4

Starting 6200 Programming Software

Using 6200 Programming Software in Windows

The following sections discuss how to start 6200 programming software when using Windows 3.1, Windows for Workgroups 3.11, or Windows 95.

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11

To start 6200 programming software while using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11, double-click on the 6200 PLC-5 icon (as shown on the left) in the Windows group for the 6200 programming software. For more information on using 6200 programming software in Windows, see chapter 4.

Windows 95
To start 6200 programming software while using Windows 95, select 6200 PLC-5 from the A-B 6200 Software submenu (as shown below):

For more information on using 6200 programming software in Windows, see chapter 4.

Using the DH+, Ethernet, and ControlNet WHO Network Menus

Through the DH+, Ethernet, and ControlNet WHO Network Menus, you can select the processor you want to use before you start 6200 programming software. This is useful if there are several different programmable controllers installed on your DH+ and/or Ethernet and/or ControlNet networks. You can move the cursor to the processor you want and press [F1] to start the correct programming software.

2-5

Starting 6200 Programming Software Preface

For example, to start 6200 programming software through the DH+ WHO Network Menu, do the following: 1. 2. 3. Start at a DOS prompt. Change the directory to \IPDS\ATTACH Type: WHO [Enter] The system displays the DH+ WHO Network Menu (Figure 2.2). Figure 2.2 DH+ Network Menu
+============================== DH+ NETWORK MENU ==============================+ | | | | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | | | All Rights Reserved | | | | | | | | | +============================================================================+ | Fri Oct 6, 1995 5:52:51 am | + + | Terminal Address: 77 Current Device: 1784 KT PLC Address: 2 | +============================================================================+ Press a function key Online Online Program Configr F1 F2 Who Listen F4 Who Active F5 Sftware Configr F6 Exit System F10

If You Want to: Directly attach to the processor at the previously configured address Modify the communications mode between your terminal and processor (See chapter 6) See which stations are active on the DH+ network Identify the different devices on the DH+ network and attach to any available processor Select system options, color options, directory paths, and start-up states (See chapter 5) Exit the system

Press this Key: [F1] Online Programming [F2] Online Configuration [F4] WHO Listen [F5] WHO Active [F6] Software Configuration [F10] Exit System

2-6

Starting 6200 Programming Software

If you start the software online through WHO Active, the configuration for WHO is the configuration that the system uses for the entire session, regardless of the configuration stored for the individual processor. For example, if you attach to one programmable controller, the software uses the configuration stored for WHO Active. Then, if you return to the DH+ WHO Network menu and attach to a different programmable controller, the same configuration is still active. The WHO configuration remains active until you change the configuration or exit the software. For more information on using WHO with DH+, Ethernet, or ControlNet networks, see chapter 8.

2-7

Starting 6200 Programming Software Preface

Storing User Configuration Files

When you select communication and display options (for example, setting printer configurations or setting the color display for your monitor), the software displays a Save Configuration function key. When you press this key, the software saves the characteristics from the configuration screen you are currently on and stores them in a user configuration file. This lets you save your preferences to your own configuration file, without changing the configurations that some other user may prefer. Another advantage to user configuration files is that you can store your configuration file on a floppy disk. Then you can use any programming terminal and use your configuration from the floppy disk drive. Note If you want to copy your configuration files to a floppy disk from the DOS prompt, select all of the following files from the C:\IPDS\ATTACH directory: LADFG5.P23 SFCCFG5.P23 USER5.P23 USER.P23 To define where you store your user configuration file, follow these steps: 1. Start on any screen in the software that lets you choose a configuration and has a function key labeled Define Directory (such as the Software Configuration or Offline Configuration screen). Press the function key labeled Define Directory. The system lets you define directory paths for the user configuration file. (For more information on defining directory paths, see page 5-7) 3. 4. Press the function key for the user configuration file. Type the drive and directory for your configuration file and press [Enter]. For example, the following are valid paths: C: C:\IPDS\PROGRAM C:\TEST A:

2.

2-8

Starting 6200 Programming Software

If this is a new directory, the system asks you whether to create the directory path. Type one of the following: [Y][Enter] or [F8] Yes [N][Enter] or [Esc] or [F10] No to exit the procedure without creating the directory Any time you change the directory for the user configuration file and save the changes, the software asks you whether or not you want to use the new configuration file. Answer yes to this prompt to use the configuration file in the directory you specified. 5. Press the function key labeled Save Configuration. This saves the configuration characteristics you specified on this screen only. If you make changes on other configuration screens, you must save the configuration on those screens if you want the configurations saved to your user configuration file.

Note

2-9

Starting 6200 Programming Software Preface

Exiting 6200 Programming Software

Exit 6200 programming software by using one of these methods:

Press the appropriate function key. The function key for exiting has one of the following labels: Exit Exit System Return to Menu On most screens, this function is [F3]. On the Main Menu, the exit key is [F10].

Press [Esc] until you return to a screen that has a function key with an exit function. Not all screens have a function key that exits you from the system. Pressing [Esc] returns you to the previous screen.

2-10

Using 6200 Programming Software

Using 6200 Programming Software

Chapter Objectives
Use this chapter to become familiar with 6200 programming software. This chapter explains how to access help text available within 6200 programming software. This chapter also explains the differences between online and offline programming and how to clear memory in the processor when you start.

Using the Main Menu

After you start 6200 programming software, the system displays the Main Menu.
+========================= PLC -5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | All Rights Reserved | | | | Release 5.2 | | | | This software is licensed to: Company Allen-Bradley Co. | | Location 1 Allen-Bradley | | | | Serial Number: AA0AA0AA | +==============================================================================+ | Fri Oct 6, 1995 5:53:09 am | + + | Terminal Address: 77 Current Device: 1784 KT PLC Address: 2 | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key Online Program F1 Online Config F2 Offline Offline Program Config F3 F4 Who F5 Sftware Configr F6 File Reports Compare Utils F7 F8 F9 Exit System F10

3-1

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Overview of the Software

The following diagram shows a simplified map of the 6200 programming software, listing the basic features on the main screens: 6200 Programming Software Main Menu
Online programming/configuration Offline programming/configuration Software configuration WHO Check your DH+ link File utilities (copy, rename, delete) Compare files, generate reports

Program Directory
Processor functions (change mode) Create/delete ladder/SFC files WHO check your DH+ link Save and restore files Change stations Use memory map Use general utility Monitor a SFC or Ladder File

(requires 9313-ST5 programming option)

SFC Main Menu

Edit SFCs Configure SFC display Search SFCs

Ladder Editor Main Menu

Edit ladder program Configure ladder display Search Document ladder programs Change mode

Structured Text Main Menu

Write structured text Use structured text constructions Monitor structured text

Data Monitor, Memory Map

Create/delete data table entries Monitor processor status Configure/monitor processor status Force I/O on or off

For a complete description of the functions you can perform from the Program Directory, SFC and Ladder Editor menus, see the Programming manual. The configuration and maintenance functions such as the Data Monitor or Memory Map are described in chapter 16.

3-2

Using 6200 Programming Software

Keys You Use

Within 6200 programming software, you use certain keys to input information, complete tasks, and move through the software. These keys consist of input keys, navigational keys, and function keys.

Input Keys
The input keys let you navigate easily on the ladder editor screens and accept or cancel the information you type on the input line or in the data entry window on a screen. These keys perform the same tasks on every screen in the ladder editor. Table 3.A shows the tasks you can perform with the input keys. Table 3.A Input Keys
If You Want to: Move the cursor one field up, down, to the left or to the right Move the cursor to the beginning of the rung Move the cursor to the end of the rung Move the cursor to the top or bottom of the screen (if more than one page of information is available) Move the cursor to the previous or next rung in the ladder editor Move to the top of the program file Move to the bottom of the program file Accept the information you typed or selected Not accept the information you typed or selected Return to a previous screen Press this Key: [up arrow] [down arrow] [Ctrl-left arrow] [Ctrl-right arrow] [PageUp] [PageDown] [Ctrl-PageUp] [Ctrl-PageDown] [Home] [End] [Enter] or [Ctrl-M] [Esc] [Esc], [F3], or [F10] [left arrow] [right arrow]

For more information about input keys for the text editor, see Table 3.D on page 3-5.

Navigational Keys
Navigational keys provide short cuts that display frequently used screens and information. Table 3.B shows the navigational keys available in the 6200 programming software, excluding the text editor. Table 3.C shows the navigational keys available in the text editor; Table 3.D shows the input keys available with the text editor.

3-3

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Table 3.B Navigational Keys for Use with 6200 Programming Software

A check mark (n) indicates that the navigational key is active on that particular screen.

If You Want to: Display the Active Window screen

Press this key: [Alt-A] 1 [Alt-B]

n n n

n n n n n n n

Display the instruction buffer for the current instruction on the input line Display the Change Processor Mode screen Display the Data Monitor screen Display the Configure Display screen Display the Transition Forcing screen Display online help text Expand or shrink an SFC macro Display No windows in the SFC Editor Change privilege class Display the SFC Search screen Display SFC Comment screen View a comment Use the Auto scroll function for Run/Test mode Display Cross Reference screen Copy 6200 programming software screens to an ASCII file

[Alt-C] [Alt-D] [Alt-E] [Alt-F] 1 [Alt-H] [Alt-M] [Alt-N] [Alt-P] 2 [Alt-S] [Alt-T] 1 [Alt-V] [Alt-W] [Alt-X] [Ctrl-Z]

n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n

n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n

1 These keys are supported by Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. 2 For more information on passwords and privileges, see chapter 15 of this manual.

3-4

Using 6200 Programming Software

Table 3.C Navigational Keys for Use with the Text Editor
If You Want to: Cursor to the beginning of a line Cursor to the left Cursor to the end of a line Cursor to the right Cursor to the next word Cursor to the previous word Press this Key: [Ctrl-B] [Ctrl-D] [Ctrl-E] [Ctrl-F] [Ctrl-N] [Ctrl-P]

Table 3.D Input Keys for Use with the Text Editor
If You Want to: Toggle between the Insert/Overstrike mode Delete a character Insert a tab Delete a word to the left Paste Insert a carriage return Copy Delete a line to the left Select Cut Delete a line to the right Insert an ASCII character
1 If

Press this Key: [Ctrl-A] [Ctrl-H] [Ctrl-I] [Ctrl-J] [Ctrl-L] 1 [Ctrl-M] [Ctrl-R] [Ctrl-U] [Ctrl-V] [Ctrl-W] [Ctrl-X] ASCII character

this key is not active, an error message will be displayed.

3-5

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Function Keys
The function keys differ for each screen in 6200 programming software. These keys perform specific tasks related to the information on the screen. For example, Table 3.E describes the function keys on the Main Menu and what each key does.

Table 3.E Function Keys

If You Want to: Create ladder programs when your terminal is attached to the processor (perform any online programming functions). (see page 3-8) Specify the active communications mode between your programming terminal and processor. (see chapter 6) Create ladder programs without being attached to a processor (perform any offline programming functions). (see page 3-10) Select or create a processor memory file to edit offline. (see chapter 7) See what stations are active on the DH+ and/or Ethernet and/or ControlNet network. (see chapter 8) Select system options, color options, directory paths, printer configurations, and start-up states. (see chapter 5) Manipulate files. (see chapter 1 in the Programming manual) Create, print, and view histograms and documentation reports. (see chapter 19 for histograms, or chapter 20 for documentation reports.) Compare processor memory files. (see chapter 4 in the Programming manual) Exit the system. Press this Key: [F1] Online Programming

[F2] Online Configuration

[F3] Offline Programming

[F4] Offline Configuration [F5] WHO

[F6] Software Configuration

[F7] File Utilities [F8] Reports [F9] Compare [F10] Exit System

3-6

Using 6200 Programming Software

Capturing Screens
You can capture select 6200 programming software screens and save them to a file by pressing [Ctrl-Z]. For more information on the screens which support [Ctrl-Z], see page 3-4. The screens are appended to a single screen dump file named SCREEN.DMP in the default documentation report directory (\IPDS\LIS\PLC5). You can use DOS commands such as print to print these files.

Displaying Online Help

The online help utility displays contextual information about the current screen or topical information about a topic or instruction you specify. The software displays up to two pages of information for each screen, topic, and instruction that has online help. Use the arrow keys, [PageUp], [PageDown], [Home], and [End] to move through the help information on the screen.
any Ladder Editor screen
From the Documentation screen, you can enter rung, instruction, and address comments, as well as define symbols for addresses. This screen also provides access to the database editor, from which you can modify comments and symbols. See also: Alt H comment database editor [ALT C] [ALT T] [ALT X] save & continue symbol

Press to select additional information about a related topic or Esc instruction, or press to return to the Ladder Editor. Enter the topic or mnemonic for which you want additional information. You can only specify topics that appear on the topic help screen or specify any valid instruction mnemonic for the current processor.

F1

Active Navigational Keys: Change processor mode Documentation Cross reference

Press <F1> for more help. Rem Prog Topical Help F1 Forces:None

To exit, press <ESCAPE>. Edits:None PLC-5/15 Addr 20 LIMIT

Tip

You can get Help on ladder instructions by using topical Help. After entering topical Help, type the mnemonic of the instruction you want help for and press [Enter].

3-7

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Programming Online [F1]

The online programming option lets you develop, document, and monitor ladder logic when your programming terminal is connected (directly or over a DH+ link) to a processor. To program on line, set your online configuration as described in chapter 6. Follow the steps on the left. Note If this is the first time you run your processor on line, you might have to clear memory and name the processor memory file before 6200 programming software allows you to start programming.
6200 Main Menu
+= PROGRAM DIRECTORY FOR PROCESSOR: MEMORY ======================[ ONLINE ]===+ | File Name Type Size(words) | | | | 0 system 4 | | 1 function chart 102 | | 2 ladder 35 | | 3 ladder 1 | | 4 ladder 1 | | 5 ladder 1 | | 6 ladder 1 | | 7 ladder 1 | | 8 ladder 1 | | 9 ladder 1 | | 10 ladder 1 | | 11 ladder 1 | | 12 ladder 1 | | 13 ladder 1 | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key or enter file number or name. > Rem RUN Proc Save Functns Restore F1 F2 Return Change to Menu Station F3 F4 Who Active F5 PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Memory General Monitor Map Utility File F6 F7 F8

Online Prog
F1

3-8

Using 6200 Programming Software

If You Want to: Change mode, change channel passwords (Classic PLC-5 processors only), modify privileges (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only), clear memory, create and delete program files, monitor a program file, rename a processor memory file, or name/change a program file. Save or restore processor memory. (see chapter 3 in the Programming manual) Return to the Main Menu. Attach to a different processor. See what devices are on the DH+ link. (see chapter 8 ) Display the data table layout and change data table files. (see chapter 10) Access processor status, processor configuration, channel configuration, memory map privilege information, contact histogram, write EEPROM, and I/O configuration. Monitor the current program file (ladder, SFC, or structured text). (See the Ladder Logic and SFC sections of the Programming manual)

Press this Key: [F1] Processor Functions

[F2] Save Restore [F3] Return to Menu [F4] Change Station [F5] Who Active [F6] Memory Map [F7] General Utility

[F8] Monitor File

3-9

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Programming Offline [F3]

The offline programming option lets you develop and document ladder logic on a stand-alone programming terminal. You do not have to be attached to a processor. You configure the offline processor memory file to resemble the processor you will eventually use to run the processor memory file. To program off line, set your offline configurations as described in chapter 7. Follow the steps on the left. Note
6200 Main Menu

Make sure you configure the offline processor memory file to match the processor type you will eventually use to run the processor memory file.
or 6200 Main Menu
+= PROGRAM DIRECTORY FOR PROCESSOR: MEMORY =====================[ OFFLINE ]===+ | File Name Type Size(words) | | | | 0 system 4 | | 1 function chart 102 | | 2 ladder 35 | | 3 ladder 1 | | 4 ladder 1 | | 5 ladder 1 | | 6 ladder 1 | | 7 ladder 1 | | 8 ladder 1 | | 9 ladder 1 | | 10 ladder 1 | | 11 ladder 1 | | 12 ladder 1 | | 13 ladder 1 | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key or enter file number or name. > Rem PROGRAM Proc Functns F1 Save/ Merge F2 Return to Menu F3 Change File F4 Memory Map F6 General Utility F7

Offline Prog
F3

Offline Config
F4

Cursor to a file
Offline Prog
F1

PLC 5/15 File DRILL1 Monitor File F8

3-10

Using 6200 Programming Software

If You Want to: Change passwords (Classic PLC-5 processors only), modify privileges (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only), change processor type, clear memory (clears the offline processor memory file in the DOS directory), create and delete program files, monitor a program file, rename a processor memory file, or name a program file. Save your work or merge processor memory files. (See chapter 3 in the Programming manual for information on saving files; see chapter 5 in the Programming manual for information on merging files.) Return to the Main Menu. Attach to a different processor memory file, define the DOS directory for the processor memory, comments, and symbols files, or create a new file. Display the data table layout and change data table files. (See chapter 10) Access processor status, processor configuration, channel configuration, privilege information, and I/O configuration. Monitor the current program file (ladder, SFC, or structured text). (See the Ladder Logic and SFC sections of the Programming manual)

Press this Key: [F1] Processor Functions

[F2] Save/Merge

[F3] Return to Menu [F4] Change File

[F6] Memory Map [F7] General Utility [F8] Monitor File

3-11

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Specifying the Correct Processor Series

The type of processor you use may restrict the tasks you can perform with 6200 programming software. Only certain PLC-5 processors support sequential functions charts (SFCs), I/O image table expansion, and automatic partial-rack configuration. Table 3.F shows which programming features are available with which processors.

Table 3.F Choosing the Correct PLC-5 Processor Series

Processor PLC-5/10 PLC-5/11 PLC-5/12 PLC-5/15 Series, Revision all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs Series A/SFC (Rev K & later) Series B/SFC (Rev C-G) Series B/Partial (Rev H and later) PLC-5/VME PLC-5/20 PLC-5/25 all series, all revs all series, all revs Series A (Rev A-C) Series A/Partial (Rev D and later) PLC-5/26 PLC-5/30 PLC-5/40 PLC-5/46 PLC-5/40L all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs SFCs X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X (Continued)
3-12

I/O Image Table Expansion

Partial Rack Configuration

Using 6200 Programming Software

Processor PLC-5/60 PLC-5/60L PLC-5/80 PLC-5/86 PLC-5/20E PLC-5/40E PLC-5/80E PLC-5/20C PLC-5/40C PLC-5/60C PLC-5/80C PLC-5/V30 PLC-5/V40, -5/V40L PLC-5/V80

Series, Revision all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs all series, all revs

SFCs X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

I/O Image Table Expansion X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

Partial Rack Configuration X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

An X indicates the features which are available with the appropriate processor.

3-13

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

The memory size you choose depends on the PLC-5 family processor you choose. Table 3.G shows how to choose memory size based on the memory you need. Table 3.G Choosing the Correct PLC-5 Memory Size
If You Choose this Processor: PLC-5/10 PLC-5/11 PLC-5/12 PLC-5/15 PLC-5/15 PLC-5/VME PLC-5/20 PLC-5/20E PLC-5/20C PLC-5/26 PLC-5/25 PLC-5/25 PLC-5/30 PLC-5/V30 PLC-5/40 PLC-5/40E PLC-5/40C PLC-5/40L PLC-5/46 PLC-5/V40 PLC-5/V40L PLC-5/60 PLC-5/60C PLC-5/60L PLC-5/80 PLC-5/80E PLC-5/80C PLC-5/86 PLC-5/V80
1

With this Memory Size: BASE BASE BASE BASE EXPANDED BASE BASE

You will get this Amount of Memory: 6K words 8K words 6K words 6K words 14K words 14K words 16K words

BASE EXPANDED BASE BASE

13K words 21K words 32K words 48K words

BASE

64K words 1

BASE

100K words 1, 2

Program files can contain a maximum of 56K words.

2 The total size of the data table is limited to 64K words.

3-14

Using 6200 Programming Software

Based on the PLC-5 processor and series you are using, you need a specific software release. Table 3.H shows the software release required for each processor.

Table 3.H PLC-5 Processor Software Release Requirements

If You Have this Processor: PLC-5/10 PLC-5/11 With this Series: all A C D PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25 PLC-5/20 all A C D PLC-5/20E C D PLC-5/20C C D PLC-5/26 A and C, revision H or later D PLC-5/30 A C D PLC-5/V30 C D You Must Use this Software Release: 3.21 or later 4.3 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later any release 4.3 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 5.1 or later 5.11 or later 5.0 or later 5.11 or later 4.2 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 4.5 or later 5.11 or later (Continued)

3-15

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

If You Have this Processor: PLC-5/40, -5/60

With this Series: A B C, revision A or B C, revision C D

You Must Use this Software Release: 4.1 or later 4.3 or later

4.4 or later 5.11 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 5.1 or later 5.11 or later 5.0 or later 5.11 or later 4.1 or later 4.3 or later

PLC-5/40E

C D

PLC-5/40C

C D

PLC-5/46

A, B, and C, revision H or later D

PLC-5/40L, -5/60L PLC-5/40L, -5/60L

A B C, revision A or B C, revision C D

4.4 or later 5.11 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later 5.2 or later 4.4 or later 5.11 or later (Continued)

PLC-5/V40

A, C D

PLC-5/V40L, -5/V60L

A, C D

PLC-5/60C PLC-5/80

all C D

3-16

Using 6200 Programming Software

If You Have this Processor: PLC-5/80E

With this Series: C D

You Must Use this Software Release: 4.5 or later 5.11 or later 5.2 or later 5.0 or later 5.11 or later 5.0 or later 5.11 or later

PLC-5/80C PLC-5/86

all C, revision H or later D

PLC-5/V80

C D

3-17

Using 6200 Programming Software Preface

Clearing Memory
When you initially power-up your processor and you want to erase processor memory or when you want to erase an offline processor memory file, use the clear memory feature. To clear memory, follow the steps below:
Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

Proc Func
F1

Clear Memory
F4

Pressing [F4] Clear Memory while you are offline will erase a processor memory file.

Yes
F8

or

3-18

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Chapter Objectives
The Microsoft Windows operating system offers a graphical interface for consistent access to applications and also provides multitasking of those applications. By running 6200 programming software under Windows, you can have multiple 6200 sessions active at one time. For example, you can simultaneously edit ladder logic and monitor the data table. Note Unless otherwise stated in this chapter:

Note

references to Windows includes Windows 3.1, Windows for Workgroups 3.11, and Windows 95

examples displaying the \ABIC\BIN directory must substitute the \RSI\IC\BIN directory if you are installing 6200 programming software for the first time You must use the multi-session driver if you intend to: run multiple DH+ sessions of 6200 programming software in Windows at the same time to one or more PLC-5 processors through the same communication device switch between single-session DOS and multi-session Windows

Use this chapter for information on how to configure your computer and how to use 6200 programming software with Windows.

4-1

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

If you are new to Windows, see Table 4.A for definitions: Table 4.A Windows Terminology
This Item: group Has these Characteristics: contains program items (which are icons that represent applications) .GRP file extension represented by group icon (Windows 3.1 and Windows for Workgroups 3.11) or menu selection (Windows 95) Start an application from a group by opening the group window and choosing the program-item icon (Windows 3.1 and Windows for Workgroups 3.11) or selecting 6200 PLC-5 from the A-B 6200 Software submenu (Windows 95) for the application you want to run. Rockwell Software Inc. provides AB_6200.GRP. Whenever you start a non-Windows application, Windows looks for a program information file. It contains information about the application, including how much memory the application needs and how it uses components of your computer, such as communication ports. .PIF file extension Rockwell Software Inc. provides PLC5.PIF and WHO.PIF. contains information that defines the Windows environment. .INI file extension The INTERCHANGE Run-Time Kit (9351-DKTSRT or 9351-WKTSRT) provides CFG_KT.INI to contain the parameters for multiple sessions.

program information file

initialization file

Note

6200 programming software is a DOS application. Through configuration specifications (Figure 4.1), you can run up to 10 DOS sessions of 6200 programming software. Figure 4.1 How to Run 6200 Programming Software in Windows

Complete these tasks:

1
Set the IRQ on the communication card *

to configure your computer:

2
Configure the multi-session driver *

3
Install the multi-session driver *

4
Create a program group

see page 4-8 see page 4-5 * Required for multiple online sessions only.

see page 4-9

see page 4-12

to run 6200 programming software in Windows:

5
Run Windows and then run 6200 programming software see page 4-19

6
Configure online communication see page 4-31 If you save the online communication characteristics, you only have to specify them the first time you run 6200 programming software in Windows.

4-2

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Table 4.B Requirements for Running 6200 Programming Software in Windows

Requirements: minimum 80386, 16 MHz computer 1 communication interface Notes: minimum hardware 1784-KL 1784-KT 1784-KT2 1784-KTX, -KTXD 1784-KTC 1784-PCMK RS-232 port Microsoft Windows 3.1 and Windows for Workgroups 3.11 or Microsoft Windows 95 MS-DOS 2 13 Mbytes of hard disk space for storing files
1 For most applications, Rockwell Software Inc. recommends a 80486, 33 MHz computer for acceptable performance. 2 MS-DOS is required for Microsoft Windows 3.1 and Windows for Workgroups 3.11 only.

1784-T47 IBM 80486 or compatible IBM PS/2 any computer with a 16-bit ISA or EISA expansion slot any computer with a 16-bit ISA or 32-bit EISA expansion slot notebook computer any IBM compatible computer

must be running in 386 Enhanced Mode

MS-DOS 3.2, 3.3, 4.x, 5.0, 6.0, or 6.2

Recommendations for CONFIG.SYS

To run multiple sessions of 6200 programming software, use these guidelines: allocate 30 FILES per online session allocate 40 FILES per offline session For example, add FILES=100 to CONFIG.SYS if you want to run one offline session and two online sessions. Make sure the device statement for the memory manager excludes the memory address of the communication card. To do this:

add EMMExclude=xxxx yyyy to the [386Enh] section of the Windows SYSTEM.INI file

4-3

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

If You Are Using This Communication Card: 1784-KL 1784-KT

use the appropriate command for the expanded memory manager to exclude the memory range in CONFIG.SYS:
With This Base Address (hex): E000 A000 A400 A800 AC00 B400 B800 C000 C400 C800 CC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 Exclude This Memory Range (hex): E000 E0FF A000 A400 A800 AC00 B400 B800 C000 C400 C800 CC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 A3FF A7FF ABFF AFFF B7FF BBFF C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF C000 C400 C800 CC00 D000 D400 D800 D000 D400 D800 DC00 D000 D400 D800 DC00 C000 C400 C800 CC00 D000 D400 D800 D000 D400 D800 DC00 D000 D400 D800 DC00 C3FF C7FF CBFF CFFF D3FF D7FF DBFF D3FF D7FF DBFF DFFF D3FF D7FF DBFF DFFF With This Base Address (hex): Exclude This Memory Range (hex):

1784-KT2

1784-KTC

1784-KTX

The 1784-KTX communication card can use any 4KB block of memory on any 4K boundary between A000 and EF00 (hexadecimal). For example, if you are using a 1784-KTX at D400 with the EMM 386 Memory Manager, your CONFIG.SYS file should contain the following line:
DEVICE = C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE X=D400-D4FF

1784-PCMK

A300 A700 AB00 AF00 B300 B700 BB00 BF00 C300 C700 CB00 CF00

A300 A700 AB00 AF00 B300 B700 BB00 BF00 C300 C700 CB00 CF00

A6FF AAFF AEFF B2FF B7FF BAFF BEFF C2FF C7FF CAFF CEFF D2FF

D300 D700 DB00 DF00 E300 E700 EB00

D300 D700 DB00 DF00 E300 E700 EB00

D7FF DAFF DEFF E2FF E7FF EAFF EEFF

If you intend to use multiple sessions of 6200 programming software in Windows, you must install SHARE.EXE. The SHARE.EXE command helps to:

Note

manage files on large disk drives manage files for multi-session applications

use 6200 file locking and file sharing features If you are using Windows 95, do not install SHARE.EXE. Windows 95 automatically installs VSHARE.386, which allows you to use multiple sessions of 6200 programming software.

4-4

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

To take full advantage of the Windows capability, add the following line to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: C:\DOS\SHARE.EXE /F:n where n is 40 times the number of files in the FILES command in your CONFIG.SYS file. For example, if your CONFIG.SYS file contains the line: FILES=40 you should add (update) the following line in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file: C:\DOS\SHARE.EXE /F:1600 See your DOS Reference Manual for information on how to install the SHARE.EXE command. Note Release 5.2 and later of 6200 programming software includes PHARLAP.386 (located in the x:\IPDS\RUN286 directory, where x is the drive on which you installed 6200 programming software), which allows floating point emulation to work properly under Windows 386 enhanced mode when a 80287 or 80387 numeric coprocessor is not available. Copy PHARLAP.386 to your Windows subdirectory and add the following line to the [386enh] section of your SYSTEM.INI file: DEVICE=PHARLAP.386

Setting the IRQ

Set the IRQ for your communication card. Figure 4.2 shows how to set interrupts for the communication cards. For more information on setting the IRQ for a particular communication card, see the Publication Index.

4-5

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Figure 4.2 Setting Interrupts

If you are using a 1784-KL:

The 1784-KL card comes already installed in the 1784-T47 portable programming terminal. The interrupt is set at IRQ2. You cannot change this setting.

If you are using a 1784-KT:

Remove the jumper and place it on the two pins that correspond to the interrupt you want. Note: If you are using two KT cards, it is not required to select two unique interrupts; two KT cards can share one interrupt. interrupt jumper

Jumper Selection INT 3 INT 4 jumper INT 5 INT 7 INT 3 INT 4 INT 5 (default) INT 7 no interrupt this end faces the PCB edge connector

Interrupt Selection IRQ 3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7

no interrupt

If you are using a 1784-KT2:

Insert the current IBM PS/2 Reference disk into drive A. Turn on the computer. The main menu appears. When the main menu appears, move the cursor to 3. Select configuration and press [Enter]. When the Select Configuration menu appears, move the cursor to 2. Change configuration and press [Enter]. Move the cursor to Interrupt Level Use [F5] and [F6] to scroll through these interrupts: IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 IRQ12 Note: If you are using two KT2 cards, select a unique interrupt for each KT2 card; two KT2 cards cannot share one interrupt.

Change Configuration Total System Memory Installed Memory ......... 2048KB (2.0MB) Useable Memory ........... 2048KB (2.0MB) Built-In Features Installed Memory ........ 2048KB (2.0MB) Diskette Drive A Type .. 1.44MB [3.5] Diskette Drive B Type .. [Not Installed] Math Coprocessor ........ [Not Installed] Serial Port .............. [Serial_1] Parallel Port ........... [Parallel_1] Slot 1-Allen-Bradley Company 1784-KT2 Memory Address .......... [0C0000h-0C3FFFh] Interrupt Level Auxiliary Communication Port ...................... [PLC-2/-3 Direct Connect] Esc=Quit F1=Help F5=Previous F6=Next End F10=Save Page Down Home Page up

4-6

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

If you are using a 1784-KTX, -KTXD:

Remove the jumper and place it on the two pins that correspond to the interrupt you want. Jumper 1 is for channel 1; jumper 2 is for channel 2 Note: If you are using two KTX cards, select a unique interrupt for each KTX card; two KTX cards cannot share one interrupt. If you are using two KTXD cards, select a unique interrupt for each port on each KTXD card; each port on each KTXD card must have a unique interrupt. J2J1

Jumper 2
IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 IRQ12 IRQ15 (shown in

Jumper 1
IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ7 IRQ9 IRQ10 IRQ11 IRQ12 IRQ15

Note: If you are using the no interrupt selected setting, you must place the jumper vertically over two pins on the inside row (as shown). Placing the jumper on the outside row will cause interrupt problems on the motherboard.

(shown in IRQ5 position)

no interrupt selected position)

If you are using a 1784-PCMK:

Edit the CARDWARE.INI file. To begin, select this icon:

Select Cards/Edit Any Card. Select the PCMK card you are configuring and select Edit Device. Click on the arrow next to IRQ Level to select the setting you want. The PCMK card supports four interrupts that your computer assigns as follows: IRQ3Serial Port 2 IRQ4Serial Port 1 IRQ5Parallel Port 2 IRQ7Parallel Port 1 Note: If you are using two PCMK cards, select a unique interrupt for each PCMK card; two PCMK cards cannot share one interrupt.

IRQ5

4-7

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Configuring the Multi-Session Driver

The multi-session driver is a terminate-and-stay-resident (TSR) program that acts as a device driver for these DH+ communication cards: 1784-KL, 1784-KT, 1784-KT2, 1784-KTX, 1784-KTXD, 1784-KTC, and 1784-PCMK. For more information on configuring the multi-session driver for a particular communication card, see the Publication Index. To configure the communication card to run multiple sessions of 6200 programming software when using the INTERCHANGE DOS Run-Time Kit (9351-DKTSRT), edit your CFG_KT.INI file. For more information, see the INTERCHANGE Software for MS-DOS User Manual. To configure the communication card to run multiple sessions of 6200 programming software when using the INTERCHANGE Windows Run-Time Kit (9351-WKTSRT), use the Device Configuration Utility included with INTERCHANGE software. For more information, see the Device Configuration Utility User manual.

Using Multiple Communication Cards

If your control system has multiple DH+ links and you want to access each link in a simultaneous Windows session, specify each communication card in CFG_KT.INI. You can have multiple 1784-KT, 1784-KT2, 1784-KTC, 1784-KTX, 1784-KTXD, or 1784-PCMK cards in a computer. The 1784-T47 is limited to one 1784-KL. Multiple communication cards in one computer is not common, but it is possible. An example is a control system where you want to monitor a transfer line and an assembly line. These lines are relatively long lines so they are installed as separate DH+ links. To access each DH+ link, attach to a processor on one DH+ link through one session and attach to a processor on another DH+ link through another session.

4-8

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Installing the Multi-Session Driver

Install the multi-session driver from the command line or AUTOEXEC.BAT file before you run Windows. For example:
To Install the Multi-session Driver from here: command line AUTOEXEC.BAT Enter these Commands: C:\ABIC\BIN\DTL_KT C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT C:\ABIC\BIN\RNATSR C:\ABIC\BIN\RNA

Note

You must install the multi-session driver immediately after installing the INTERCHANGE Run-Time Kit (9351-DKTSRT or 9351-WKTSRT). If you use DOS 5.0 or higher, you can load the multi-session drivers into high memory, making more base RAM available for applications. To load a driver into high memory, use the following example statements: lh C:\ABIC\BIN\DTL_KT C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT lh C:\ABIC\BIN\RNATSR C:\ABIC\BIN\RNA

Note

If you are using Windows 95 with release 5.1 or later of 6200 programming software, INTERCHANGE software (specifically ABICRUN.BAT) must be loaded in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.

Common Status Messages and Error Messages

The following status messages appear when you install a correctly-configured multi-session driver:
CFG_KT (0022) Reading device configuration from C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT.INI CFG_KT (0023) Reading diagnostic and protocol files from C:\ABIC\BIN CFG_KT (0000) TSR configured, no errors detected

Question marks (????) appear after a node address on the WHO Active screen when the following occurs:

an IRQ conflict exists between the IRQ being used by the Allen-Bradley communication card and some other device in the computer system an IRQ has not been selected for use with the multi-session drivers

4-9

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

The following error messages appear when the IRQ and/or memory settings are incorrect:
C:\ABIC\BIN>lh dtl_kt C:\ABIC\BIN>cfg_kt CFG_KT (0022) Reading device configuration from C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT.INI CFG_KT (0023) Reading diagnostic and protocol files from C:\ABIC\BIN C:\ABIC\BIN>RNATSR C:\ABIC\BIN>rna RNA: WARNING no ports available on driver #1

The following error messages appear when you try to install the driver when it is already running:
C:\ABIC\BIN>lh dtl_kt C:\ABIC\BIN>cfg_kt CFG_KT (000E) TSR already configured, no action taken C:\ABIC\BIN>RNATSR C:\ABIC\BIN>rna RNA: ERROR RNASTR v3.1 is already running

The following error messages appear when you try to run CFG_KT when the System Memory address for the communication card in the CFG_KT.INI file does not match the actual setting of the card:
C:\ABIC\BIN>lh dtl_kt C:\ABIC\BIN>cfg_kt CFG_KT (0013) KT memory diagnostic RAM 0 error (CFG_KT.1) C:\ABIC\BIN>RNATSR C:\ABIC\BIN>rna RNA: WARNING no KT/KL/KT2 devices available

If other status or error messages appear, call your Technical Support Representative for assistance.

4-10

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Removing the Driver

To remove the multi-session driver from memory and free the associated memory for the computer, use the U command. For example. C:\ABIC\BIN\RNA C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT Note Note U U

You can also remove the multi-session driver by running the \ABIC\BIN\ABICSTOP.BAT file. When you are using the multi-session driver with release 4.5 or later of PLC-5 programming software, you cannot communicate with a PLC-2 or PLC-3 processor. In order to communicate with a PLC-2 or PLC-3 processor, it is necessary to remove the multi-session driver from memory, as follows: 1. 2. 3. Exit PLC-5 programming software. Exit Windows. Remove the multi-session driver from memory by entering the following from the command line: C:\ABIC\BIN\RNA C:\ABIC\BIN\CFG_KT 4. 5. U U

Change to the online configuration for the communication card you are using. Go on line to a PLC-2 or PLC-3 processor.

4-11

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Creating a Program Group

Rockwell Software provides the .GRP and .PIF files you need to create a program group.

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11

To create a new program group using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11:
Complete this Task: 1. From the File menu, choose New. In this Window:

2. Choose Program Group and choose the OK button.

3. Enter the Description and Group File and choose the OK button.

4. Double click on the 6200 icon. The PLC-5 and WHO icons appear. Select either of these to start a 6200 session.

4-12

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Windows 95
To create a new program group using Windows 95:
Complete this Task: 1. From the Start button, select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select Windows Explorer submenu. In this Window:

2. From the directory tree, select the \IPDS directory. From the \IPDS directory, select the \ATTACH subdirectory.

3. Double click on the ab_6200.grp group file. The PLC-5 and WHO icons appear. Single click on either the PLC-5 or WHO icon.

4. To open a DOS window to start a 6200 session, go to the Start button and select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select the A-B 6200 Software submenu. From the A-B 6200 Software submenu, select 6200 PLC-5.

4-13

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

If you installed 6200 on a drive other than C:

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 To create a program group with Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 when 6200 programming software is installed on a drive other than C:
Complete this Task: 1. Create a group as described on the page 4-12 (steps 1 through 3) and change the drive specifier as necessary for the group file. In this Window:

2. Create the PLC-5 program item. Select New from the File menu. Choose Program Item. Enter PLC5 for the Description. Enter x:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5.PIF for the Command Line (with x: equal to any drive other than C:). Enter x:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 for the Working Directory.

3. Create the WHO program item. Select New from the File menu. Choose Program Item. Enter WHO for the Description. Enter x:\IPDS\ATTACH\WHO.PIF for the Command Line. Enter x:\IPDS\ATTACH\WHO for the Working Directory.
\who

(Continued)
4-14

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Complete this Task: 4. Select Open from the PIF Editor File Menu. Select PLC5.PIF in the x:\IPDS\ATTACH directory. Change the drive specifier for the program file name and startup directory for each PIF file. Repeat this step for WHO.PIF Note: When using multiple offline sessions, it is possible to increase Windows performance by disabling the Background Execution parameter. Disabling the Background Execution parameter is not recommended when using multiple online sessions. For more information, see your Microsoft Windows manual.

In this Window:

(Continued)

4-15

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Complete this Task: 5. Create the PLC-5 icon. Select the 6200 PLC5 icon in the 6200 group. Select Properties from the File Menu. Choose Change Icon and then choose Browse. Specify x:\IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5.ICO and choose the OK button.

In this Window:

6. Create the WHO icon. Select the 6200 WHO icon in the 6200 group. Select Properties from the File Menu. Choose Change Icon and then choose Browse. Specify x:\IPDS\ATTACH\WHO.ICO and choose the OK button.

4-16

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Windows 95 To create a program group with Windows 95 when 6200 programming software is installed on a drive other than C:
Complete this Task: 1. From the Start button, select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select Windows Explorer submenu. In this Window:

2. From the directory tree, select the drive that 6200 programming software is installed (for example, G:). From the drive contents, select the \IPDS directory. From the \IPDS directory, select the \ATTACH subdirectory.

3. Double click on the ab_6200.grp group file. The PLC-5 and WHO icons appear. Single click on either the PLC-5 or WHO icon.

4-17

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Complete this Task: 4. Select File Properties from the menu bar. From the 6200 PLC 5Properties menu bar, select Program. At the Command line and Working fields, change the drive letter to specify the location of 6200 programming software. Click OK. Note: Repeat this step for the icon you did not select in step 3 (in this example, 6200 WHO).

In this Window:

5. To open a DOS window to start a 6200 session, go to the Start button and select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select the A-B 6200 Software submenu. From the A-B 6200 Software submenu, select 6200 PLC-5.

4-18

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Running Windows and 6200 Programming Software

You must first start Windows before running 6200 programming software.

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11

If you are using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11: 1

At the DOS prompt, enter: Double-click on: Double-click on:

win [Enter]

or

Note Note

To switch back and forth between running an application full screen and running it in a window (i.e., multitasking), press [Alt-Enter]. You must use 386 enhanced mode for multitasking: otherwise, only the active window can communicate. To check whether you are using 386 enhanced mode, look under the Windows Help menu and select About Program Manager.

Windows 95
If you are using Windows 95: 1

Select:

4-19

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

If you want to change the size of the 6200 window:

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 To change the size of the 6200 window using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11:
Complete this Task: 1. Click the left mouse button on the control menu button and select Fonts. In this Window:

2. Select the font size you want and choose the OK button.

4-20

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Windows 95 To change the size of the 6200 window using Windows 95:
Complete this Task: 1. From the 6200 programming software screen, select the Auto Setting button from the tool bar. Note: If the Auto Setting button is not available, select Toolbar from the pull-down menu. Move the cursor to select the font size you want and click the right mouse button. 2. If you want to make the 6200 window full size, click on the Resize button at the right of the tool bar. In this Window:

Tip

To document how a particular instruction is configured or to provide screens for procedure manuals, you can capture 6200 programming software screens in Windows as follows: You can also copy select 6200 programming software screens to an ASCII file by pressing [Ctrl-Z]. For more information, see chapter 3.

Note

4-21

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Capturing 6200 Programming Software Screens in Windows Bit Map Graphics

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11 To capture 6200 programming software screens as bit map graphics using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11:
Complete this Task: 1. In Windows, go to the Accessories group and select the Window Write icon. The Window Write screen appears. In this Window:

2. Select the 6200 PLC-5 icon and open a DOS window to start a 6200 session. On the window you just opened, press [Alt-Enter] until the DOS window is no longer full screen. Note: You can change the size of the DOS window by adjusting the font size (see page 4-20). You can also change the screen display color configuration of the 6200 programming software, if necessary.

(Continued)
4-22

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Complete this Task: 3. Move through the 6200 programming software until the screen you want to capture is displayed; press [Alt-Print Screen].

In this Window:

4. Move the cursor to the Window Write screen that you opened earlier and click on the left mouse button. Place the cursor in the screen where you want to insert the captured 6200 programming software screen. Press [Shift-Insert] to place the captured graphic into the Windows Write screen.

4-23

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Windows 95 To capture 6200 programming software screens as bit map graphics using Windows 95:
Complete this Task: 1. In Windows 95, single click the Start button to select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select the Accessories submenu. From the Accessories submenu, select WordPad. In this Window:

2. From the Start button, select the Programs menu. From the Programs menu, select the A-B 6200 Software submenu. From the A-B 6200 Software submenu, select 6200 PLC-5 to start a 6200 session. On the window you just opened, press [Alt-Enter] until the DOS window is no longer full screen. Note: You can change the size of the DOS window by adjusting the font size (see page 4-21). You can also change the screen display color configuration of the 6200 programming software, if necessary.

(Continued)

4-24

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Complete this Task: 3. Move through the 6200 programming software until the screen you want to capture is displayed; press [Alt-Print Screen].

In this Window:

4. Move the cursor to the Windows 95 WordPad screen that you opened earlier and single click the right mouse button. Select Paste; the captured graphic into the Windows 95 WordPad screen.

4-25

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Capturing 6200 Programming Software Screens in Windows

Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11

ASCII Text

To capture 6200 programming software screens as ASCII text using Windows 3.1 or Windows for Workgroups 3.11:
Complete this Task: 1. On any screen in 6200 programming software, select Edit from the control menu. From the Edit menu, select Mark. In this Window:

2. In the upper left corner below the control menu icon, a blinking yellow cursor will appear. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse over the selected area or the entire screen you wish to capture. When you have finished, release the left mouse button.

(Continued)

4-26

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Complete this Task: 3. From the control menu, select Edit. From the Edit menu, select Copy. The captured image is saved to the Windows clipboard.

In this Window:

4. Open any Windows word processor application (Notepad, for example). From the Edit menu, select Paste. The screen you captured is pasted to the word processor screen. Select the entire pasted screen and change the font to Courier.

4-27

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Windows 95 To capture 6200 programming software screens as ASCII text using Windows 95:
Complete this Task: 1. On any screen in 6200 programming software, select the Mark button from the tool bar. In this Window:

2. In the upper left corner below the Auto Setting button, a blinking yellow cursor will appear. Press the left mouse button and drag the mouse cursor over the selected area or the entire screen you wish to capture. When you have finished, release the left mouse button.

(Continued)

4-28

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Complete this Task: 3. From the tool bar, select the Copy button. The captured image is saved to the Windows 95 clipboard.

In this Window:

4. Open any Windows 95 word processor application (WordPad, for example) and single click the right mouse button. Select Paste to place the captured graphic into the Windows 95 WordPad screen. The screen you captured is pasted to the word processor screen. Select the entire pasted screen and change the font to Courier.

4-29

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment Preface

Using 6200 with Other INTERCHANGE-Compliant Software

6200 programming software is INTERCHANGE software compliant when using the multi-session driver in Windows, so it can share the communication card with other third party INTERCHANGE-compliant software packages. Once you configure the communication card for multiple sessions (maximum of 10 sessions), you can run 6200 programming software in some sessions and third-party INTERCHANGE-compliant software in other sessions. Note To use 6200 programming software in conjunction with other INTERCHANGE-compliant software, perform the following:

Edit the CFG_KT.INI file located in the \ABIC\BIN directory Run the INTERCHANGE drivers located in the \ABIC\BIN directory

Using a 6160-T53 Programming Terminal

The default video mode on a T53 is color even though the display is monochrome. To fix this, use the DOS command MODE BW80. Or you can create a batch file called T53ABMEN.BAT for example which contains the following commands: FILE T53ABMEN.BAT MODE BW80 CD \IPDS ABMENU
This file starts ABMENU and 6200 programming software under Windows.

You could also call the batch file from the .PIF file. For more information on this procedure, see your Microsoft Windows manual.

4-30

Using 6200 Programming Software in a Windows Environment

Configuring Online Communication

Use the online configuration screen with Windows to configure any one of the communication cards to run multiple sessions or set up multiple communication card sessions with Windows. Before you configure online communication, you should have already started Windows and 6200 programming software. For information about using the online configuration screen, see page NO TAG.

4-31

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Chapter Objectives
This chapter explains how to configure the display characteristics of your terminal. You can configure the following software characteristics:

screen highlighting color link communication mode printer specification directory paths width for new databases

5-1

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Using the Software Configuration Screen [F6]

To configure system characteristics for your programming terminal, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | += SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ==================================+ | | | | | | | F1 Editor Highlighting Style Intensify | | | | | | | | F3 Color Selection | | | This| F4 Link Mode Do Not Wait for Acknowledge | | | | F5 Printer Configuration | | | | F6 System Startup State Main Menu | | | | F7 Define Directory Paths | | | | F8 Width for New Databases 10 | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | | | +========+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ==========================+=========+ Press a function key.

Software Config
F6

Press the appropriate function key.

Editor Hilight F1

Color Select F3

Link Mode F4

Printer System Define Configr Startup Dir F5 F6 F7

Com&Sym Save Width Config F8 F9

5-2

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

If You Want to: Toggle between Intensify and Reverse highlighting video modes for the display of active (on) screen elements. Use reverse for LCD displays, such as the T47 display. The default is Intensify. Select colors for the display fields on screens. (see page 5-4) Choose whether or not to wait for an acknowledgement when you transmit packets. The default is Do Not Wait for Acknowledge. (see page 5-6) Define printer characteristics. (see page 5-7) Select the Main Menu, Online Program Directory, Online SFC/Ladder Editor, Offline Program Directory, or Offline SFC/Ladder Editor as the first screen the software displays when you start the software. The default is Main Menu. Specify where you want to store files. (see page 5-7) Specify the width of comments and symbols for a new database. (see page 5-10) Save the configuration options to disk for this screen only. After you press this key, the configuration information remains the same each time you start the software. If you make changes to the configuration on other screens, you must save the configuration on those screens if you want the configurations saved to your user configuration file. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Cancel any changes you made on this screen for the current editing session.

Press this Key: [F1] Editor Highlighting

[F3] Color Selection [F4] Link Mode

[F5] Printer Configuration [F6] System Startup

[F7] Define Directory Paths [F8] Com&Sym Width [F9] Save Configuration

[Enter] [Esc] [Alt-U]

5-3

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Selecting Colors
To select colors for the different areas on the screen, follow the steps on the left.
If you just installed your programming software, the default color selection is monochrome. If you have a monochrome monitor, use the default display. If you use a color display on a monochrome monitor, some items may be difficult or impossible (invisible) to read. For example, if your monitor is monochrome, and you set the background color for the instruction cursor the same as that for main displays, the cursor is invisible.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | += COLOR SELECTION MONOCHROME =========================================+ | | | + Main Displays +< Informational Messages | | | | | True Logic | Errors | | | | | Forces | User Prompts | | | | | Rung/Step Comments | User Input | | | | | Address Comments | Processor Status | | | | | Instruction Comments | Program Modes | | | | | Symbols | Test Modes | | | | | Instruction Cursor | Run Modes | | | | + + Faults | | | | Logo/Processor Directory Function Keys | | | | Processor Dir. Cursor Data Entry Windows | | | | Selection Windows Option Windows | | | | Selection Cursor Who | | +==+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes =======================================+==+ Press a function key

Software Config
F6

Color Selection
F3

Mono/ Recall DfltClr LastClr F1 F2

Bakgrnd Forgrnd Color Color F5 F6

Save Config F9

If you want to change the color mode, press this key.

Press this key to save the color selections that you define.

After you press [F9], the color selections you specify remain the same each time you start the software. If you want to use these color selections for this editing session only, press Return Esc or after you specify the color selections. These color selections remain until you exit the software. Place the cursor on the display item for which you want to specify a color.

5-4

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

If You Want to: Toggle between a monochrome display or a display that uses the default colors. Restore the last color selections that were saved before the current programming session. This restores color for all display options. Configurations saved during the current session are not recalled. Toggle through the eight available color choices for backgrounds of the cursored item. Toggle through the 16 available color choices for foregrounds of the cursored item. Save the color options to disk. Use the color selections you specify for this editing session only. Cancel any changes you made on this screen for the current editing session.
1 You cannot change the foreground color for the instruction, processor directory,

Press this Key: [F1] Monochrome/Default Color [F2] Recall Last Color

[F5] Background Color [F6] Foreground Color 1 [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc] [Alt-U]

and selection cursors.

Note

You can change page header text color by cursoring to True Logic on the Color Selection screen. For more information on page headers, see the Programming manual. The Color Selection screen lists the items for which you can select colors. Except for the instruction cursor, the items in the box in the upper-left corner of the screen use the same background. When you specify a background for one of these items, that color is used for the background for all the items in that box; however, you can specify separate foreground colors for those items.

Note

If you use a 1784-T47 programming terminal, some fields on the 6200 Main Menu, Menu Configuration screens, and I/O configuration screens cannot be seen due to the color display characteristics of the T47. To display these screens properly, do one of the following:

adjust the color settings (foreground/background) of the screen before entering the software (at the DOS prompt), type MODE MONO (you can also add the command to your AUTOEXEC.BAT file)

5-5

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Specifying Link Mode

The link mode option lets you choose whether or not to wait for acknowledgements during network communication with a processor. The link mode choices are:

Wait for Acknowledge

If your network environment is noisy or produces frequent transmission errors, you want this option turned on. The Wait for Acknowledge option tells the terminal to wait for an acknowledgement that the processor received the last packet. Following the acknowledgement, the processor sends a reply. If the terminal does not receive an acknowledgement, the terminal re-sends the packet. After the terminal receives an acknowledgement, the processor sends a reply to the terminals original message. If, after four transmissions, the terminal does not receive an acknowledgement, you receive an error message stating that the processor did not respond.

Do Not Wait for Acknowledge

This option reduces transmission time in that it allows the terminal to send a packet without waiting for an acknowledgement from the processor. If the terminal does not receive a reply, the terminal re-sends the packet and requests an acknowledgement. The Do Not Wait For Acknowledge option is useful for reliable network environments because it eliminates the time needed for receiving an acknowledgement on the first transmission of a packet.

5-6

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Specifying Printer Characteristics

To Specify Printer Characteristics:
6200 Main Menu

To specify a printer and configure the printers characteristics, follow the steps on the left. For more information about configuring printers and using the Printer Configuration screen, see chapter 20.

Software Config
F6

Printer Config
F5

Printer Config

Defining Directory Paths

You can define the paths where you want the system to store certain files on your hard disk. In this way, you can organize the processor files. For example, you can place all the files associated with one processor memory file in one directory. You can define directory paths for the following files:

A.I./WINTelligent LOGIC 5 processor memory, comments, and symbols backup processor memory, comments, and symbols processor memory, comments, and symbols documentation reports exported comments and symbols user configuration Ethernet WHO Host List

If you place a copy of processor memory files in a master directory that you define, you can prevent accidental loss of files. Use the master directory for storage; create work directories for editing files.

5-7

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

To define directory paths, follow the steps on the left.

To Define Directory Paths:
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE ===========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | += SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ==================================+ | | | | | += USER DIRECTORIES =============================================================+ | | | F2 AI/WL5 Proc. Mem., Comments and Symbols:C:\PLC5\PROGS | | F3 Backup Proc. Mem., Comments and Symbols:C:\62BACK1;C:\62BACK2 | | F4 Processor Memory, Comments and Symbols: C:\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5;C:\IPDS\ARCH\BCKP | | F5 Documentation Reports: C:\IPDS\LIS\PLC5 | | F6 Exported Files: C:\IPDS\TEXT\PLC5 | | F7 User Configuration: C:\IPDS\ATTACH | | F8 Ethernet Who Host List: C:\IPDS\ATTACH | | | | F9 Save Configuration File | | | += ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ===============================================+ Press a function key

Software Config
F6

Define Directory Paths

F7

Press the function key for the path you want to define, then enter the new path.

AI/WL5 Dir F2

Backup Process Documen Dir Dir Dir F3 F4 F5

Export Dir F6

Config Hostlst Save Dir Dir Config F7 F8 F9

Press this key to save the directory paths that you define. After you press [F9], the paths you specify remain the same each time you start the software. If you want to use these directory paths for this editing session only, press or
Return

Esc

after you specify the paths. These paths remain until you exit the software.

5-8

Configuring the Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

To Define a Path for this File Type: A.I./WINTelligent LOGIC 5 processor memory and comment and symbol files Backup processor memory and comment and symbol files Processor memory and comment and symbol files Documentation report files Exported documentation files, exported processor memory files, and ASCII files that are ready to import User configuration files If you change this path, you must specify the new path when starting the software with the IT command in order to use the configuration stored in the new path. See chapter 2. Ethernet WHO Host List For more information on Ethernet WHO, see chapter 8.
more information, see chapter 3 of the Programming manual.

Press this Key: [F2] - AI/WL5 Directory [F3] Backup Directory 1 [F4] Processor Directory 2 [F5] Documentation Directory [F6] Export Directory [F7] Configuration Directory

The Default Path Is: (if installed on C:) C:\PLC5\PROGS User defined C:\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5 C:\IPDS\LIS\PLC5 C:\IPDS\TEXT\PLC5 C:\IPDS\ATTACH

[F8] Host List Directory

C:\IPDS\ATTACH
For

1 You are not required to configure the primary backup directory and secondary backup directory for 6200 programming software to function properly.

2 You must configure the primary save directory; the configuration of the secondary save directory is optional. For more information, see chapter 3 of the

Programming manual.

5-9

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal Display Characteristics

Specifying New Database Width

You can specify the width of comment and symbols for new databases; enter a value between 10 and 20. The default database width is 10. To specify the width of the comments and symbols for new databases, follow the steps on the left:
To Specify the Width of Comments and Symbols for New Databases:
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | += SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION ==================================+ | | F1 Editor Highlighting Style Intensify | F2 Display Snow Control | F3 Color Selection This| F4 Link Mode | F5 Printer Configuration | F6 System Startup State | F7 Define Directory Paths | F8 Width for New Databases | | F9 Save Configuration | 10 Main Menu Do Not Wait for Acknowledge Off | | | | | | | | | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

Software Config
F6

Com&Sym Width
F8

Enter a width between 10 and 20 and press [Enter].

+========+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ==========================+=========+ Enter Width for New Databases (10 20 DECIMAL)> >

Tip

The width of existing databases can be changed from the File Utilities screen. For more information, see chapter 5 in the Programming manual.

5-10

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Chapter Objectives
To program online, you have to configure the communication interface between your programming terminal and the processor. Use the information in this chapter to configure the software to use the communication card or serial port you will use to communicate with the processor.

6-1

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring Online Configuration [F2]

To configure online characteristics, follow the steps on the left.
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | C+= ONLINE CONFIGURATION ===================+nc. | | | | | | | F1 Network Access LOCAL | | | Re| F2 Communication Port 1784 KT (DH+) |on) | | | F3 Connection MULTI_DROP | | | This softwa| F4 Terminal Address 77 |o. | | | F5 PLC Address 20 | | | | F6 KT Address 011011 (D800) | | | | F7 Local Bridge Addr 110 | | | | F8 Remote Bridge Addr 376 | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | F10 Terminal Name BUD | | | | | | +===============+====== ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ====+===================+

6200 Main Menu

Online Config
F2

Press the function key for the information you want to change.

Press a function key Network Access F1 Comm Port F2 Connect Term PLC KT Type Address Address Address F3 F4 F5 F6 Local Bridge F7 Remote Bridge F8 Save Config F9 Term Name F10

Press this key until you see the default information for the device you want to configure. The default device is the 1784-KT (DH+).

Press this key to save your changes.

After you press [F9], the information you specify remains the same each time you start the software. If you want to change the configuration information for this editing session only, press Esc after you specify the configuration information. These changes remain active until you exit the software.

Tip Note

To toggle forward through the default options, press F2 Comm Port. To toggle backward through the default options, press Alt-F2, Ctrl-F2, or Shift-F2. You can make changes to the configuration from the Main Menu and from the WHO screen. Each screen has its own configuration file. If you make changes from the WHO screen and save those changes, the next time you enter the Main Menu, those changes will not appear unless you make the same changes on the Main Menu online configuration. Depending on the type of device you select, you need to configure different information. Table 6.A lists the available connections for the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTC, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL cards. Table 6.B lists the available connections for the serial port, VME driver, Windows, and Ethernet.

6-2

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Table 6.A Device Configuration and Connection Information (1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTC, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL)
If You Are Using this Communication Device: DH + 1784-KT 1784-KT2 1784-KTC 1784-KTX 1784-KTXD 1784-PCMK 1784-KL n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n n With this network: DH+ Routing DH II n n n ControlNet For General Information, See Page: 6-4 6-4 n/a 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 For Specific Information, See Page: 6-7 6-7 6-12 6-16 6-16 6-17 6-38

A check mark (n) indicates that the configuration option is available for the specified communication device.

Table 6.B Device Configuration and Connection Information (Serial Port, VME Driver, Windows, and Ethernet)
If You Are Using this Communication Device: Serial Port serial to KFC/KFCD serial to PLC, 1785-KE/KF serial to DHII VME Driver Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX Windows/DOS KTC Ethernet For Specific Information, See Page: 6-20 6-20 6-20 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-33

You can also program from your local DH+ link to a remote DH+ link (communicating with a processor on a DH+ link other than the DH+ link to which your terminal is attached). This remote programming is available through the KL, KT, KT2, KTX, KTXD, and PCMK communication cards (DH+, DH II and Routing) and the serial port (DH II). For more information on configuring the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards, see the section General Configuration Information on page 6-4. For more information on configuring the 1784-KTC communication card, see page 6-12.

6-3

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

General Configuration Information

The following sections describe common configuration characteristics for the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards. For configuration information specific to each card, see the appropriate section in this chapter for the card you are using. Table 6.C shows the common configuration characteristics for the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards when using DH+. Note Some fields may not be available for all communication devices listed above. Table 6.C General Configuration Characteristics for Using DH+
This Key: [F1] Network Access Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between LOCAL and REMOTE (DH+). Local specifies that you want to communicate with a processor on the same DH+ link as your terminal. Remote specifies that you want to communicate with a processor that is on a different DH+ link than your terminal. For more information about remote programming, see Remote Programming from DH+ to DH+ on page 6-19. Selects the configuration screen for the device you are using. Toggles between the two choices, DIRECT and MULTI_DROP. Direct means that the termination resistor on the card is switched in. Multidrop means that the termination resistor is switched out. Note: This entry is ignored by the 1784-PCMK card. Prompts you to enter a station number (0-77 octal for DH+) for the programming terminal on the DH+ link. Prompts you to enter the station number (0-77 octal) of the processor you want to monitor. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor; if you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can configure the station number to be different than the switch settings if communicating through channels 1B, 2A or 2B (where applicable). Prompts you for the DH address (0-376 octal) of the 1785-KA/KE on this (local) DH+ link. The software ignores this field if you specify local network access. Prompts you for the DH address (0-376 octal) of the 1785-KA/KE on the remote DH+ link. The software ignores this field if you specify local network access. Note: If you specify remote programming, bridge address 77 for DH+ link 3 is an invalid address. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal (instead of using the terminal address).

Using DH+

[F2] Communication Port [F3] Connection Type

[F4] Terminal Address [F5] PLC Address

[F7] Local Bridge Address Remote (DH+) [F8] Remote Bridge Address Remote (DH+)

[F9] Save Configuration [F10] Terminal Name

6-4

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Using DH+ Routing

Table 6.D shows the common configuration characteristics for the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards when using DH+ Routing. Note Some fields may not be available for all communication devices listed above. Table 6.D General Configuration Characteristics Using DH+ Routing
This Key: [F2] Communication Port [F3] Connection Selects this Characteristic: Selects the configuration screen for the device you are using. Toggles between the two choices, DIRECT and MULTI_DROP. Direct means that the termination resistor on the card is switched in. Multidrop means that the termination resistor is switched out. Note: This entry is ignored by the PCMK card. Prompts you to enter a station number (0-77 octal for DH+) for the programming terminal on the link. Prompts you to enter the station number (0-77 octal) of the processor you want to monitor. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor; if you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can configure the station number to be different than the switch settings if communicating through channels 1B, 2A or 2B (where applicable). Prompts you for the DH+ address (0-77 octal) of the 5130-RM/KA on the terminals (local) DH+ link. Note: Your 5130-RM/KA must have firmware revision A07 or later. Prompts you for the destination link (0-177777 octal) of the processors (remote) DH+ link. Note: Your 5130-RM/KA must have firmware revision A07 or later. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal.

[F4] Terminal Address [F5] PLC Address

[F7] Bridge Address

[F8] Destination Link

[F9] Save Configuration [F10] Terminal Name

6-5

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Using DH+ II
Table 6.D shows the common configuration characteristics for the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards when using DHII. Note Some fields may not be available for all communication devices listed above. Table 6.E General Configuration Characteristics Using DH II
This Key: [F2] Communication Port [F3] Connection Selects this Characteristic: Selects the configuration screen for the device you are using. Toggles between the two choices, DIRECT and MULTI_DROP. Direct means that the termination resistor on the card is switched in. Multidrop means that the termination resistor is switched out. Note: This entry is ignored by the PCMK card. Specify the following: Source Link the number of the DH II link you are starting from (0-15 octal) Source Node the station number of the local 1779-KP5 (0-77 octal) Source User the station number of the programming terminal on the DH+ link you are starting from (2-20 octal) The link number determines local or remote. If you want DH II local, specify 0 for the source link and the destination link; if you want DH II remote, specify a different value for the source link and the destination link. Specify the following: Destination Link the number of the DH II link you are going to (0-15 octal) Destination Node the station number of the remote 1779-KP5 (0-77 octal) Destination User the station number for the processor on the DH+ link you want to monitor (2-20 octal) The link number determines local or remote. If you want DH II local, specify 0 for the source link and the destination link; if you want DH II remote, specify a different value for the source link and the destination link. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal than by terminal address.

[F4] SRC Link, Node, User Remote (DH II) 1

[F5] DST Link, Node, User Remote (DH II) 1

[F9] Save Configuration [F10] Terminal Name

The link number determines local or remote. If you want DH II local, specify 0 for the source link and the destination link; if you want DH II remote, specify a different value for the source link and the destination link.

6-6

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring a 1784-KT/KT2
Use the 1784-KT or 1784-KT2 to connect an IBM-compatible or IBM PS/2 microchannel computer directly to a processor or to a DH+ link for programming. The 1784-KT or -KT2 also provides DH+ to DH+ programming. To configure information for the 1784-KT and KT2 card, press [F2] Communication Port until the 1784-KT or -KT2 configuration screen for the type of connection you have appears. Figure 6.1 shows example 1784-KT and KT2 connections to a processor. Table 6.F describes the specific characteristics you can configure for the KT and KT2 card when using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII. For configuration characteristics common to the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards, see General Configuration Information on page 6-4.

6-7

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Figure 6.1 Example 1784-KT and 1784-KT2 Connections

Direct Connect Local DH+ T70 with 1784-KT PS/2 with 1784-KT2 T70 with 1784-KT PS/2 with 1784-KT2 T70 with 1784-KT PS/2 with 1784-KT2 T70 with 1784-KT PS/2 with 1784-KT2 T70 with 1784-KT PS/2 with 1784-KT2 DH+ processor

Remote DH+ Through DH

DH+

1785-KA (local)

DH

1785-KA (remote)

DH+

processor

Remote DH+ Through DF1

DH+

1785-KE (local)

DF1

1785-KE (remote)

DH+

processor

Through Local DH II

DH+

1779-KP5 (local)

DH II

1779-KP5 (remote)

DH+

processor

Through Remote DH II

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

processor

T70 with 1784-KT Through PS/2 DH+ Routing with 1784-KT2

DH+

5130-RM, KA PI Backplane 5130-RM, KA channel 2,3 channel 2,3

DH+

processor

DH+ Routing requires A07 or later firmware in both the 5130-RM and 5130-KA

Table 6.F Configuration Characteristics for the 1784-KT/KT2 Using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII
This Key: [F6] KT/KT2 Address Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the bit address of the KT card in the programming terminal. Figure 6.2 shows where the address switches are located. See Figure 6.3 for valid addresses. For the KT, this address must match the address setting for the KT (see Figure 6.3). For the KT2, this address must match the address setting for your KT2 (see Table 6.G ).

6-8

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

KT Addressing Considerations
Figure 6.2 shows where the address switches are located on the 1784-KT card and the IRQ jumper selections. Figure 6.3 shows valid KT addresses. Figure 6.2 Location of 1784-KT Switches and Jumpers
Set the address switches as shown in Figure 6.3. Address switches Interrupt jumper
3 4 5 (default IRQ) 7 no interrupt

When Using the Single-Session Driver: The interrupt jumper should be placed in the no interrupt position as shown.

When Using the Multi-Session Driver: The interrupt jumper should be enabled. Set the jumper to use either IRQ 3, 4, 5, or 7. See your computers user manual for a list of the available IRQs on your system.

Note

Keep the following in mind when you are using the 1784-KT card:

If you are using two KT cards, it is not required to select two unique interrupts; two KT cards can share one interrupt. The setting of interrupts is only necessary when running the multi-session driver. For more information on setting interrupts, see chapter 4.

6-9

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Figure 6.3 Valid KT Addresses

Note: If you are using two KT cards, select a unique memory addresses for each KT card; two KT cards cannot share one memory address. 1 = factory-set address 2 = preferred addresses when re-addressing the 1784-KT card 3 = preferred address when using a 1784-T35 terminal

OFF (open) switch pressed at top switch pressed at bottom

memory address 6200 software

A000 000101 A400 100101 A800 010101 AC00 110101 B400 101101 B800 011101 C000 000011

C400 100011 C800 010011 CC00 110011 D000 001011 D400 1, 2 101011 D800 011011 DC00 111011
2 2, 3

Tip

ABHELP can usually read the address switch setting for the 1784-KT communication card installed in your computer; try ABHELP before you disassemble your computer to find the address switch settings. For more information on these and other features of ABHELP, see the A-B SupportPlus Remote Software Support User Manual.

6-10

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

KT2 Addressing Considerations

Table 6.G shows valid KT2 addresses. Table 6.G Valid KT2 Addresses
If Your KT2 Address is: 0C0000h 0C3FFFh 0C4000h 0C7FFFh 0C8000h 0CBFFFh 0CC000h 0CFFFFh Use this Address in 6200: 000011 100011 010011 110011 If Your KT2 Address is: 0D0000h 0D3FFFh 0D4000h 0D7FFFh 0D8000h 0D8FFFh 0DC000h 0DFFFFh Use this Address in 6200: 001011 101011 011011 111011

Note

Keep the following in mind when you are using the 1784-KT2 card:

If you are using two KT2 cards, select a unique memory address for each KT2 card; two KT2 cards cannot share one memory address. The setting of interrupts is only necessary when running the multi-session driver. For more information on setting interrupts, see chapter 4. If you are using two KT2 cards, select a unique interrupt for each KT2 card; two KT2 cards cannot share one interrupt.

6-11

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring a 1784-KTC
Use the 1784-KTC card to connect a ControlNet PLC-5 processor to a ControlNet link for programming. To configure information for the 1784-KTC card, press [F2] Communication Port from the online configuration screen until you see the 1784-KTC configuration screen. Note If you want to run more than a single online session at one time, use the Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet) online configuration screen to configure the 1784-KTC communication card (see page 6-32).
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | += ONLINE CONFIGURATION ========================+. | | | | | | | | | | | F2 Communication Port 1784 KTC (ControlNet) | | | | | | | | F4 Terminal Node 63 | | | | F5 PLC Node 6 | | | | F6 KTC Address 001011 (D000) | | | | | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | F10 Terminal Name | | | | | | +==============+== ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes =============+===============+ Press a function key

Comm Port F2

Term Node F4

PLC Node F5

KTC Address F6

Save Config F9

Term Name F10

Table 6.H Configuration Characteristics for the 1784-KTC Using ControlNet

This Key: [F4] Terminal Node [F5] PLC Node Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the network address (1-107 decimal) of the ControlNet 1784-KTC device you are communicating through. Prompts you to enter the network address (1-99 decimal) of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor you want to monitor. This is the network address that you set using the two 10-digit rotary switches on the top of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor. (Continued)

6-12

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

This Key: [F6] KTC Address

Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the address of the 1784-KTC card located in the programming terminal. This is the KTC address that you set using the base memory and base I/O space switches on the 1784-KTC communication card (see pages 6-14 and 6-15). Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal (instead of using the terminal address).

[F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Terminal Name

6-13

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

KTC Addressing Considerations

Figure 6.4 shows where the address switches are located on the 1784-KTC card. For more information on 1784-KTC addressing, see the ControlNet Communication Interface Card Installation Instructions. Figure 6.4 Location of 1784-KTC Base Memory and Base I/O Space Switches

Front of Switches

Set the base I/O space address switches as shown in Figure 6.6. Set the base memory address switches as shown in Figure 6.5.

Figure 6.5 shows valid KTC base memory addresses; Figure 6.6 shows valid KTC base I/O space addresses. Figure 6.5 Valid KTC Base Memory Addresses
base memory address 6200 software C000 000011 C400 100011 D000 001011 D400 101011

factory-set address; preferred setting

switch pressed up (1)

switch pressed down (0)

Note: If you are using two KTC cards, select two unique base memory addresses; two KTC cards cannot share one base memory address.

C800 010011 CC00 110011

D800 011011 DC00 111011

6-14

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Figure 6.6 Valid KTC Base I/O Space Addresses

base I/O space address 6200 software
potential device conflict: game port

200h

potential device conflict: prototype cards

300h

switch pressed up (1)

switch pressed down (0)

factory-set address; preferred setting

220h

320h
potential device conflict: HDD

Note: If you are using two KTC cards, select a unique base I/O space address for each KTC card; two KTC cards cannot share one base I/O space address.

240h

340h

260h

360h

280h

potential device conflict: SDLC

380h

2A0h

3A0h

potential device conflict: EGA

2C0h

3C0h

potential device conflict: GPIB

2E0h

3E0h

Note

Keep the following in mind when you are using the 1784-KTC card:

If you are using two KTC cards, select a unique base memory address for each KTC card; two KTC cards cannot share one base memory address. In addition, do not mix 8-bit and 16-bit cards within a 64K segment boundary. For example, a KTC card and a KT card cannot be placed in the same segment range of D000 DFFF or C000 CFFF. The 8-bit card may not work in this setup. The two cards, KTC (16-bit) and KT (8-bit), can be placed with one in the C000 CFFF range and one in the D000 DFFF range.

If you are using two KTC cards, select a unique base I/O space address for each KTC card; two KTC cards cannot share one base I/O space address.

6-15

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring a 1784-KTX/KTXD
Note The configuration characteristics for a 1784-KTXD card using channel B for DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII are identical to those used for a 1784-KTX/KTXD card using channel A. Use the 1784-KTX or 1784-KTXD card to connect any computer with a 16-bit ISA or EISA expansion slot directly to a processor or to a DH+ link for programming. To configure information for the 1784-KTX and -KTXD card, press [F2] Communication Port from the online configuration screen until 1784-KTX/KTXD configuration screen appears. Table 6.I describe specific characteristics you can configure for the KTX and KTXD card when using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII. For configuration characteristics common to the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards, see General Configuration Information on page 6-4. Table 6.I Configuration Characteristics for the 1784-KTX/KTXD Using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII
This Key: [F6] KTX/KTXD Address Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the address of the KTX/KTXD card located in the programming terminal. This address must match the address for setting the KTX/KTXD.

KTX/KTXD Addressing Considerations

The 1784-KTX and -KTXD communication cards can use any 4 KB block of memory on any 4K boundary between A000 and EF00 (hexadecimal). Note Keep the following in mind when using the KTX/KTXD card:

If you are using two KTX cards, select a unique memory address for each KTX card; two KTX cards cannot share one memory address. If you are using two KTXD cards, select a unique memory address for each port on each KTXD card; each port on a KTXD card must have a unique memory address. The setting of interrupts is only necessary when running the multi-session driver. For more information on setting interrupts, see chapter 4. If you are using two KTX cards, select a unique interrupt for each KTX card; two KTX cards cannot share one interrupt. If you are using two KTXD cards, select a unique interrupt for each port on each KTXD card; each port on each KTXD card must have a unique interrupt.

6-16

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring a 1784-PCMK
Use the 1784-PCMK card to connect a notebook computer directly to a processor or to a DH+ link for programming. To configure information for the 1784-PCMK card, press [F2] Communication Port from the online configuration screen until the 1784-PCMK configuration screen appears. Table 6.J describe specific characteristics you can configure for the PCMK card when using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DH II. For configuration characteristics common to the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, and 1784-KL communication cards, see General Configuration Information on page 6-4. Table 6.J Configuration Characteristics for the 1784-PCMK Using DH+, DH+ Routing, and DHII
This Key: [F6] PCMK Address Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the bit address of the PCMK card located in the programming terminal. See Table 6.K for valid addresses.

PCMK Addressing Considerations

Table 6.K shows valid PCMK addresses. Table 6.K Valid PCMK Addresses
Valid PCMK Address: A3 A7 AB AF B3 B7 BB BF C3 C7 Valid PCMK Address: CB CF (PCMK default) D3 D7 DB DF E3 E7 EB

6-17

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Note

Keep the following in mind when using the 1784-PCMK card:

If you are using two PCMK cards, select a unique memory addresses for each PCMK card; two PCMK cards cannot share one memory address. The PCMK card supports four interrupts: IRQ3, IRQ4, IRQ5, and IRQ7. The setting of interrupts is only necessary when running the multi-session driver. For more information on setting interrupts, see chapter 4. If you are using two PCMK cards, select a unique interrupt for each PCMK card; two PCMK cards cannot share one interrupt. If you select an invalid PCMK address, the following message is displayed: Truncated illegal address to nearest legal value

Using the WHO Utility with the 1784-PCMK Communication Card

OUTDATED VERSION. CANT CONNECT.

Online Configuration release 4.5 or later 1784-PCMK

If you use the WHO utility with the 1784-PCMK communication card and you try to connect to a PLC-2, PLC-3, or PLC-5/250 processor and the system displays the following error message: OUTDATED VERSION. CANT CONNECT.

WHO?

WHO?

WHO?

you need to reinstall the PCMK driver from the PCMK utilities disk and select 1784-KT from the online configuration screen. To do this, perform the following: 1. 2.
PCMK Utilities disk

PLC-2

release 4.5 or later

Connected.
Online Configuration 1784-KT

PLC-3

PLC-5250

Insert the PCMK utilities disk in the floppy drive. Enter the following command for each of the appropriate directories: COPY X: \PCMKIPDS\*.BIN
(where X is the floppy drive designator)

WHO?

WHO?

WHO?

\IPDS\ATTACH \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC2 \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC3 \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5250

PLC-2

PLC-3

PLC-5250

For example: COPY A: \PCMKIPDS\*.BIN \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 3. Select 1784-KT, not 1784-PCMK, as the device on the online configuration screen.

Note

If you use a 1784-PCMK card and a 1784-KT card in the same personal computer, these steps disable the 1784-KT card and you cannot use it to communicate.

6-18

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Remote Programming from DH+ to DH+

Programming from DH+ to DH+ provides access to devices on other DH+ links that are attached to your DH+ link through a DH network. These remote programming configurations are available with the 1784-KT/KT2/KTX/KTXD/PCMK/KL cards. Figure 6.7 shows a possible programming configuration from DH+ to DH+. For more information, refer to the Data Highway/Data Highway Plus Communication Module User Manual and 1785-KE Data Highway Plus Communications Interface Module User Manual. Figure 6.7 Remote Programming Example
T70 address 06 DH+ 1785-KA address 025 DH 1785-KA address 122 PLC address 05 DH+ The following rules apply when you set up remote programming: A processor on one DH+ link and a processor on another DH+ link can have the same address. However, you cannot have two processors using the same address on the same local DH+ link. The programming terminal can be on any link. 1785-KA address 212 DH+ Remote Link 2 PLC address 05 PLC address 05 1785-KA address 340 DH+ Remote Link 3 Address 77 octal is an illegal address on link 3 (DH+ link with an address of 3). Such an address translates to 377, which is illegal on a DH link.

Local Link

Remote Link 1

The first octal digit of the 1785-KA/KE determines the link.

6-19

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Using a Serial Port

You can use the serial port (COM1 or COM2) of your programming terminal to attach to a 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD interface or to a processor. Figure 6.8 shows the ways you can connect to a 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD interface or to a processor using the serial port. Note If you are directly connected to a processor through the serial port, the WHO function will not show any stations (thus you cannot go online to any stations except for the station to which you are connected or by using WHO). The WHO function can be used only if a local DH+ link is involved. Figure 6.8 Serial Port Connections
Serial to Processor T70 RS-232 processor Direct connect through the serial port is available on Enhanced PLC-5 processors only.

Serial to KE/KF2 Serial to KFC/KFCD

T70

RS-232

1770-KF2 1785-KE

DH+

processor

T70

ControlNet

1770-KFC 1770-KFCD DH DH+

Serial to DH

T70

RS-232

1771-KE/KF

1785-KA

processor

Serial to DH II (local)

T70

RS-232

1779-KFL

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

processor

Serial to DH II (remote)

T70

RS-232

1779-KFL

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

processor

6-20

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Hardware configurations for serial communication on each of the terminals that the processor supports, their associated peripheral equipment, and cable pinouts are in the 1785 PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware Installation Manual. Note When using the serial port on all Allen-Bradley and IBM computers, set switch 4 in group 6 of the 1770-KF2 to ON or switch 6 in group 1 of the 1785-KE module to ON. The communication driver is interrupt driven, so the serial port must support hardware interrupts. On most machines, COM1 and COM2 support these interrupts. To configure information for serial communications, press [F2] Communication Port until the serial configuration screen for the type of connection you have appears. Table 6.L describes the characteristics you can configure for the serial port to connect to a 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD interface; Table 6.M and Table 6.N describe the characteristics you can configure for the serial port to connect to a processor.

6-21

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.L Configuration Characteristics for the Serial Port to KFC/KFCD

This Key: [F1] - Port [F3] - Baud Rate [F4] - Device Node Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between COM1 and COM2. The default is COM1. Toggles through 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud rates. The default is 2400 baud. Prompts you to enter the network address (1-99 decimal) of the ControlNet 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD device. Note: Be sure that the device network address on the online configuration screen matches the 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD physical address. If these values do not match, 6200 programming software will not perform an auto-configuration and you will be unable to go online. Prompts you to enter the network address (1-99 decimal) of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor you want to monitor. This is the network address that you set using the two 10-digit rotary switches on the top of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor. Toggles through Even, Odd, and None. The default is None. Toggles between Full and Half. If you choose Full, the software automatically changes its communication configuration parameters to match the setting in the communication module, regardless of what is displayed on the Online Configuration screen. If you choose Half, make sure that the device address matches the DIP switch settings in the communication interface module. Toggles between Block Check Character (BCC) and Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking procedures. The default is CRC. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] to use this configuration each time you start the software. Lets you specify whether you want to use a modem. For more information about using a modem, see Using a Modem on page 6-25.

[F5] - PLC Node

[F6] - Parity [F7] - Duplex

[F8] - Error Check

[F9] - Save Configuration

[F10] - Modem Setup

Note

When using the 1770-KFC or 1770-KFCD serial/parallel interface, you must disable duplicate message detection. If you experience disconnection errors during network reconfiguration options, verify that duplicate message detection is disabled. For more information, see the ControlNet Communications Interface User Manual.

6-22

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.M Configuration Characteristics for the Serial Port to Processor or KE/KF
This Key: [F1] Port [F3] Baud Rate [F4] Device Address Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between COM1 and COM2. The default is COM1. Toggles through 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud rates. The default is 2400 baud. Lets you specify the address (0-77 for DH+, 0-376 for DH) of the terminal you are using. This is the address of the processor or the KE/KF. If you are using the RS-232 port for a direct connect to a processor, you do not need to specify a device address or PLC address. Lets you specify the address (0-77 octal for DH+; 0-376 octal for DH) of the processor to which you want to attach. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor; if you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can configure the station number to be different than the switch settings if communicating through channels 1B, 2A or 2B. If you are using the RS-232 port for a direct connect to a processor, you do not need to specify a device address or PLC address. Toggles through Even, Odd, and None. The default is None. Toggles between Full and Half. If you choose Full, the software automatically changes its communication configuration parameters to match the setting in the communication module, regardless of what is displayed on the Online Configuration screen. If you choose Half, make sure that the device address matches the DIP switch settings in the communication interface module. Toggles between Block Check Character (BCC) and Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking procedures. The default is CRC. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Lets you specify whether you want to use a modem. For more information about using a modem, see Using a Modem on page 6-25.

[F5] PLC Address

[F6] Parity [F7] Duplex

[F8] Error Check

[F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Modem Setup

6-23

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.N Configuration Characteristics for the Serial Port Using DH II

This Key: [F1] Port [F3] Baud Rate [F4] Device Address Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between COM1 and COM2. The default is COM1. Toggles through 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 baud rates. The default is 2400 baud. Lets you specify the address (1-376 for DH II) of the terminal you are using. This is the station number of the 1779-KFL. If you are using the RS-232 port for a direct connect, you cannot use a serial to DH ll configuration. Specify the following: Destination Link the number (0-15 octal) of the DH II link you are going to Destination Node the station number (0-77 octal) of the 1779-KP5 Destination User the station number (2-20 octal) for the processor on the DH+ link you want to monitor Toggles through Even, Odd, and None. The default is None. Toggles between Full and Half. If you choose Full, the software automatically changes its communication configuration parameters to match the setting in the communication module, regardless of what is displayed on the Online Configuration screen. If you choose Half, make sure that the device address matches the DIP switch settings in the communication interface module. Toggles between Block Check Character (BCC) and Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) error checking procedures. The default is CRC. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Lets you specify whether you want to use a modem. For more information about using a modem, see Using a Modem on page 6-25.

[F5] DST Link, Node, User DH II

[F6] Parity [F7] Duplex

[F8] Error Check

[F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Modem Setup

Choosing Serial Communication Settings

The switches on the communication interface module on the DH+ dictate the configuration settings that you specify on the Serial Configuration screen. If you change the switch settings, you also have to change the settings on the Serial Configuration screen. If the screen configuration settings and the switch settings do not match, the software tries all combinations of settings until it finds the correct settings.

6-24

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Note

Certain configurations (half-duplex, 1200 baud) can take up to 6 minutes to Load Communication Driver. Therefore, the module switch settings should match the software configuration. The software does not support 300 and 600 baud, so make sure that the module is not configured for either of these baud rates.

Using a Modem
Serial Configuration
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE ======================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 198+= ONLINE CONFIGURATION ====================+ | | | | | | | F1 Port COM1 | | | | F2 Current Device Serial to PLC, KE/KF | | | | F3 Baud Rate 2400 | | | This software | F4 Device Address 77 | Co. | | | F5 PLC Address 20 | | | | F6 Parity NONE |Oh. | | += MODEM CONFIGURATION =====================+ | | | | | | | F7 Use Modem No | | | | F8 Modem String [] | | | | | | +===================+== ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ====+===================+ Press a function key +========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE ======================+ | | Use Modem | A 6200 Series Software Product | Modem String | | F7 F8 | Copyright 198+= ONLINE CONFIGURATION ====================+any, Inc. | | | | | | | F1 Port COM1 | | | | F2 Current Device Serial to PLC, KE/KF | | | | F3 Baud Rate 2400 | | | This software i| F4 Device Address 77 | Co. | | | F5 PLC Address 20 | | | | F6 Parity NONE | | | += MODEM CONFIGURATION =====================+ | |+= MODEM INITIALIZATION STRING ======================================[ OVR ]==+ || | || | || | ++= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ============================================+ Enter text or numeric. (For a single numeric value such as 128, enter decimal as \128, hex as \x80, or octal as \o200).

Change the configuration information

Modem Setup
F10

Use Modem
F7

until the field displays yes

Modem String
F8

Enter the modem initialization string.

The modem initialization string lets you specify special configuration characteristics, such as dial tone or pulse delays. See your modem documentation for additional information.

You can mix ASCII, decimal, hexadecimal, and octal information in the initialization string as long as you use the format prefix for non-ASCII characters (see the table below). If you use a prefix, the software uses that prefix for the next one byte. You can enter a prefix in either upper case or lower case.

6-25

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

If you do not use a prefix, the software sends the ASCII code for each character in the initialization string.
Prefix: \ or \d or \D \x or \X or \h or \H \o or \O Format: decimal hexadecimal octal

If you want to send a non-printable ASCII character to the modem (such as the escape character), use a prefix to identify the ASCII code for that character in decimal, hexadecimal, or octal. The initialization string can only be 40 characters long, not including any prefixes that you use. See the figure below for an example of an initialization string for a Hayes-compatible modem:
ATDT1,216,1234567\x0D
termination character required for ending and then sending the string x indicates hexidecimal 0D (zero D) is the hexadecimal ASCII code for carriage return sample phone number; the comma provides a pause (in seconds) in the dialing string; this pause may be configurable (see the manual for your modem) specifies tone dialing gets the modems attention The same string in octal is as follows:

ATDT1,216,1234567\o15 (The o indicates octal)

Note

When you exit Online Programming or WHO functions, the software shuts off the modem with a high-to-low transition of DTR. Configure your modem to recognize this signal or the modem will remain connected to the phone line.

6-26

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Internal Modem Considerations

If you have an internal modem, use the following line as the first part of your modem initialization string. This information makes sure the modem disconnects when you finish using the modem. Place this part of the initialization string before the phone number and remainder of your modem initialization string (see the figure below):
AT&D2&W
causes the following commands to be written to non-volatile memory in the modem tells the modem to hang up and reset when the modems DTR goes from ON to OFF gets the modems attention For example, to place this hang-up message on the above example for a Hayes-compatible modem, the initialization string looks like:

AT&D2&W DT1,216,1234567\o15

6-27

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Using the VME Driver

Use the VME Driver as an interface between 6200 programming software and the VME backplane to communicate with a PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, or 5/V80 processor. See the PLC-V5 VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for detailed information on installing the driver. You must load a VME bus manager before using the VME Driver. If you havent loaded a VME bus manager, add the following line to your CONFIG.SYS file: device=c:\ipds\attach\plc5\BUSMGR.SYS

Selecting a Work Area:

1 Choose one: If you use a RADISYS Embedded Personal Computer, EPC-4, or EPC-5, select the EPC or User Defined options for a Work Area. 2 If you use a RADISYS Embedded Personal Computer, EPC-1, select the User Defined option for a Work Area. (The Address Space and Base Address fields are only available when the Work Area is User Defined. You must set these fields if the Work Area is User Defined. The User Defined Work Area must be at least 544 bytes.) Note: You must set the EPCs slave memory offset as an A24 address before using the EPC work area option. To set the slave memory offset: 1. Press [Ctrl-Alt-Esc] to see the CMOS EPC setup screen 2. Set the slave memory offset to A24 3. Press [F10] Save 4. Press [F5] Confirm and Reboot

The Work Area you select depends on the type of computer you are using. See the options below:
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE A 6200 Series Software Product Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software All Rights Reserved + ONLINE CONFIGURATION Rele| | F2 Communication Port VME This software i| F3 PLC 5 Address (ULA) FD80 (F6) | F4 Work Area EPC | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | + ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes Inc. + |ution) | |y Co. |ing | | | | | | + + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

Press a function key

Comm Port F2 | | | | | | | | | | | +

PLC Address F3

Work Area F4 ONLINE CONFIGURATION

Save Config F9 | | | | | | | | | | | +

+ Rele| | This software i| | | | | | | | +

+ |ution) F2 Communication Port VME | F3 PLC 5 Address (ULA) FD80 (F6) |y Co. F4 Work Area User Defined |ing F5 Address Space A16 | | F7 Base Address 0000 | | F9 Save Configuration | | ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes +

Press a function key Comm Port F2 PLC Address F3 Work Area F4 Address Space F5 Base Address F7 Save Config F9

Table 6.O describes the characteristics you can configure for the VME Driver.

6-28

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.O Configuration Characteristics for the VME Driver

This Key: [F3] PLC Address Selects this Characteristic: Enter the PLC-5/VMEbus Hexadecimal Address (FC00, FC40, FC80, FCC0, FD00, FD40, FD80, FDC0) or Unique Logical Address (ULA) (F0, F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F5, F6, F7) Toggles between EPC or User Defined. See the figure on the previous page for help in selecting a work area for communications. (The User Defined Work Area must be at least 544 bytes.) Only if Work Area is User Defined. Toggles between A16 or A24 Only if Work Area is User Defined. Enter the base address (0-FFFF hexadecimal if address space is A16, 0-FFFFFF if address space is A24). Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software.

[F4] Work Area

[F5] Address Space [F7] Base Address

[F9] Save Config

6-29

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX

Use the online configuration screen with Windows to configure any one of the communication cards to run multiple sessions or set up multiple communication card sessions with Windows. To configure information for Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX, press [F2] Communication Port until the Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX configuration screen appears. Note Configuring characteristics on this screen alone is not enough to run 6200 programming software in Windows. For more information about running 6200 programming software in Windows, see chapter 4. The selection of the multi-session driver is not required when running 6200 programming software in Windows; only use the multi-session driver when you desire to have more than a single online session at one time. If a single online session is required, use the standard online configuration for the communication card you are using. Table 6.P and Table 6.Q describe the characteristics you can configure for the Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX card.
Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Note

Table 6.P Configuration Characteristics for Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX Using DH+

This Key: [F3] Connection Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between the two choices, DIRECT and MULTI_DROP. Direct means that the termination resistor on the card is switched in. Multidrop means that the termination resistor is switched out. Prompts you to enter a station number (0-77 octal for DH+) for the programming terminal on the DH+ link. Prompts you to enter the station number (0-77 octal) of the processor you want to monitor. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor; if you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can configure the station number to be different than the switch settings if communicating through channels 1B, 2A or 2B. Prompts you to enter an identifier number (decimal 1-8) to associate with a particular KT card specified in the CFG_KT. INI file. For example, Port ID 1 is [DTL_KT.1]. (Continued)

[F4] Terminal Address [F5] PLC Address

[F6] Port ID

6-30

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

This Key: [F9] Save Configuration

Selects this Characteristic: Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal (instead of using the terminal address).

[F10] Terminal Name

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.Q Configuration Characteristics for Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX Using DH+ Routing
This Key: [F3] Connection Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between the two choices, DIRECT and MULTI_DROP. Direct means that the termination resistor on the card is switched in. Multidrop means that the termination resistor is switched out. Note: This entry is ignored if you are using a PCMK card. Prompts you to enter a station number (0-77 octal for DH+) for the programming terminal on the link. Prompts you to enter the station number (0-77 octal) of the processor you want to monitor. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor; if you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can configure the station number to be different than the switch settings if communicating through channels 1B, 2A or 2B (where applicable). Prompts you to enter an identifier number (decimal 1-8) to associate with a particular KT card specified in the CFG_KT. INI file. For example, Port ID 1 is [DTL_KT.1]. See chapter 4. Prompts you for the DH+ address (0-77 octal) of the 5130-RM/KA on the terminals (local) DH+ link. Note: Your 5130-RM/KA must have firmware revision A07 or later. Prompts you for the destination link (0-177777 octal) of the processors (remote) DH+ link. Note: Your 5130-RM/KA must have firmware revision A07 or later. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal (instead of using the terminal address).

[F4] Terminal Address [F5] PLC Address

[F6] Port ID

[F7] Bridge Address

[F8] Destination Link

[F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Terminal Name

6-31

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet)

Use the online configuration screen with Windows to configure the 1784-KTC communication card to run multiple sessions or set up multiple communication card sessions with Windows. To configure information for Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet), press [F2] Communication Port until you see the Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet) configuration screen. Note Configuring characteristics on this screen alone is not enough to run 6200 programming software in Windows. For more information about running 6200 programming software in Windows, see chapter 4. The selection of the multi-session driver is not required when running 6200 programming software in Windows; only use the multi-session driver when you want to run more than a single online session at one time. If you want to run a single online session, use the online configuration screen for the 1784-KTC communication card (see page 6-12).

Note

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

Table 6.R Configuration Characteristics for Windows/DOS KTC Using ControlNet

This Key: [F4] - Terminal Node [F5] - PLC Node Selects this Characteristic: Prompts you to enter the node address (1-107) of the ControlNet 1784-KTC device you are communicating through. Prompts you to enter the node address (1-99) of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor you want to monitor. This is the node address that you set using the two 10-digit rotary switches on the top of the ControlNet PLC-5 processor. Prompts you to enter an identifier number (decimal 1-8) to associate with a particular 1784-KTC card specified in the CFG_KT.INI file. For example, Port ID 1 is [DTL_KT.1]. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] to use this configuration each time you start the software. Prompts you to enter a name for the programming terminal. This name appears on the ControlNet WHO Active screen, which makes it easier to identify your terminal (instead of using the terminal address).

[F6] - Port ID

[F9] - Save Configuration

[F10] - Terminal Name

6-32

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Communicating with Devices on Ethernet

The following table shows the devices, software, and requirements that you can use to connect to Ethernet.
Product: ControlGuardian Catalog Number: 6260-CC Requirements: PC/TCP Network Software for DOS (FTP Software, PC-210) Ethernet Adapter Card (6628-A5) ControlView Man/Machine Interface Software 6190 series PC/TCP Network Software for DOS (FTP Software, PC-210) TCP/IP Services for Open VMS Berkeley-ARPA TCP/IP Services (HP) PC/TCP Network Software for DOS (FTP Software, PC-210) PC/TCP Network Software for DOS (FTP Software, PC-210) 6200 programming software, release 4.4 or later 6200 programming software, release 4.4 or later 6200 programming software, release 4.5 or later 6200 programming software, release 5.2 or later Ethernet Adapter Card (6628-A5) Ethernet Adapter Card (6628-A5) (Continued) 5810-AXMT, -AXMH Required Cables:

VMS INTERCHANGE Software, Version 5.0 and later HP-UNIX Windows

5830-VS 5840-HPUS 5850-WES (Windows) 9321-, 9323-PLC5 1785-L20E 1785-L40E 1785-L80E 1785-ENET

5810-AXMT, -AXMH

6200 PLC-5 Programming Software

DOS

Ethernet PLC-5 Processors

PLC-5/20E PLC-5/40E PLC-5/80E

Ethernet Interface Module Programming Terminals T60 T70

6160-PCD1, -PCN1 6170 series

6-33

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Product: Programming Terminals IBM PC with ISA Bus PS/2 Microchannel Ethernet Interface Module Resource Manager

Catalog Number:

Requirements: 6628-A5 6628-A7

Required Cables:

5820-EI

INTERCHANGE Software, Version 5.0 Ethernet Interface Module (5820-EI) INTERCHANGE Software, Version 5.0 Ethernet Interface Module (5820-EI) INTERCHANGE Software, Version 5.0 5810-AXMT, -AXMH

Pyramid Integrator Modules

5130-RM

DH/DH+ Interface Module

5130-KA

To obtain PC/TCP Software for DOS (part number PC-210) from FTP Software, Inc., write or call: FTP Software, Inc. 2 High Street North Andover, MA 01845 USA (508) 685-3300 For more information on how to install and use this software, see the PC/TCP software manuals.

Note

In order to maintain the FTP Software and 6200 programming software on the same programming terminal, you must use expanded memory or have the ability to load enough applications into high memory so that 6200 programming software will have the required 512 Kbytes (including conventional, extended, and expanded) of DOS memory. For more information on expanded memory or loading applications into high memory, see your DOS reference manual or chapter 1 of this manual. If you are programming over DH+ and using Ethernet for messaging only, you do not need the FTP software.

6-34

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

INTERCHANGEt Software
If you use 6200 programming software to connect to a 5820-EI (Pyramid Integrator Ethernet Interface) module, you must:

have BOOTP server support (either a personal computer, VAX, or UNIX system that has BOOTP server software installed) on the Ethernet network or boot the EI module with INTERCHANGE server software release 5.0 or greater (for more information, see the INTERCHANGE Software user manual for the platform you are using) use 6200 PLC-5 programming software release 4.4 or later, or use 6200 PLC-5/250 programming software release 4.3 or later

Establishing a Connection
To establish online communications with a Ethernet PLC-5 processor, you must configure the online characteristics using 6200 programming software. Follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | += ONLINE CONFIGURATION ===========================+ | | | | | | | F1 Routing DH/DH+, Through PLC-5/250 | | | | F2 Communication Port Ethernet | | | | F3 Interface Module KA | | | This soft| F4 Channel 2 | | | | F5 PLC Address 2 | | | | | | | | F7 Pushwheel 1 | | | | F8 Internet Address | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | | | +=============+== ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ================+=============+ Press a function key Routing F1 Comm Port F2 Intrfce Channel PLC Module Address F3 F4 F5 Push Wheel F7 Intrnet Save Address Config F8 F9

Online Configuration
F2

Press the function key for the information you want to change, then enter the new information.

Press this key to save your changes.

6-35

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Table 6.S shows the configuration characteristics for Ethernet if DH/DH+ routing is used. Table 6.S Configuration Characteristics for Ethernet Using DH/DH+ Routing
This Key: [F1] Routing [F3] Interface Module [F4] Channel [F5] PLC Address Selects this Characteristic: Toggles through DH/DH+, through PLC-5/250 and None Only available if you select DH/DH+ routing. Toggles between two choices: RM or KA Only available if you select DH/DH+ routing. Toggles between the two choices: 2 or 3 Only available if you select DH/DH+ routing. Prompts you to enter the station number (0-77 octal for DH+; 0-376 octal for DH) of the processor you want to monitor. This address must match the switch settings on the processor you want to monitor. Only available if you select DH/DH+ routing and choose KA for the Interface Module. Enter the pushwheel number (1-8 decimal). Enter the Internet address or node name. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software.

Press [F2] Comm Port until you arrive at the configuration screen for the communication device you are using: DH+ 1784-KT DH+ Routing 1784-KT DHII 1784-KT ControlNet 1784-KTC DH+ 1784-KT2 DH+ Routing 1784-KT2 DHII 1784-KT2 DH+ 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ DH+ Routing 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DH+ Routing DHII 1784-KTX/KTXD 1784-KTXD Chan B DHII DH+ 1784-PCMK DH+ Routing 1784-PCMK DHII 1784-PCMK Serial to KFC/KFCD ControlNet PLC, KE/KF Serial Port DHII Serial Port VME Driver DH+ Windows DH+ Routing Windows Windows/DOS KTC ControlNet DH+, PI Ethernet DH+ 1784-KL DH+ Routing 1784-KL DHII 1784-KL

[F7] Pushwheel

[F8] Internet Address [F9] Save Configuration

6-36

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

If you do not want to use DH/DH+ routing for the online characteristics you have selected, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | += ONLINE CONFIGURATION ===========================+ | | | | | | | F1 Routing None | | | | F2 Communication Port Ethernet | | | | | | | This soft| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | F8 Internet Address | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | | | +=============+== ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes ================+=============+ Press a function key Routing F1 Comm Port F2 Intrnet Save Address Config F8 F9

Online Configuration
F2

Routing
F1

Press the function key for the information you want to change, then enter the new information.

Press this key to save your changes.

Table 6.T shows the configuration characteristics for Ethernet if DH/DH+ routing is not used.

Table 6.T Configuration Characteristics for Ethernet Without DH/DH+ Routing

This Key: [F1] Routing Selects this Characteristic: Toggles between None and DH/DH+, through PLC-5/250. Select None if you are not using any bridging or routing. Select DH/DH+, through PLC-5/250 if you want to connect to a DH/DH+ link through a Pyramid Integrator system. Enter the Internet address of the Ethernet PLC-5 to which you want to connect. Saves the configuration you specified on this screen to your user configuration file. Press [F9] if you want to use this configuration each time you start the software.

[F8] Internet Address [F9] Save Configuration

6-37

Configuring Prefacethe Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Configuring a 1784-KL
Use the 1784-KL card to connect a 1784-T47 directly to a processor or to a DH+/DH II link for programming. The 1784-KL also provides DH+ to DH+ programming. To configure information for the 1784-KL card, press [F2] Comm Port until the 1784-KL configuration screen for the type of connection you have appears. Figure 6.9 shows example 1784-KL connections to a processor. Note All of the configuration characteristics for the 1784-KL card are common to the 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, and 1784-PCMK communication cards; for more information, see General Configuration Information on page 6-4.

6-38

Configuring the Programming Terminal for Online Communications

Figure 6.9 Example 1784-KL Connections

Direct Connect Local DH+ T47 with 1784-KL DH+ processor

Remote DH + Through DH

T47 with 1784-KL

DH+

1785-KA (local)

DH

1785-KA (remote)

DH+

processor

Remote DH + Through DF1

T47 with 1784-KL

DH+

1785-KE (local)

DF1

1785-KE (remote)

DH+

processor

Local DH II

T47 with 1784-KL

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

processor

Through Remote DH II

T47 with 1784-KL

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

1779-KP5

DH II

1779-KP5

DH+

processor

Through DH+ Routing

T47 with 1784-KL

DH+

5130-RM, KA channel 2,3

PI Backplane

5130-RM, KA channel 2,3

DH+

processor

DH+ Routing requires A07 or later firmware in both the 5130-RM and 5130-KA.

6-39

Configuring a Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Configuring a Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Chapter Objectives
You can program off line if you do not need to use the processor while you program or if your programming terminal is not attached to a processor (either directly or over a DH+ link). You can then use the program on line by restoring it to an actual processor. (For information on restoring files, see chapter 3 in the Programming manual.) Because offline programming lets you develop and document processor memory files independent of an actual processor, you must configure the offline processor memory file to represent the target processor that will eventually run the file. Use this chapter to learn how to configure offline characteristics for processor memory files.

7-1

Configuring Prefacea Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Using the Offline Configuration [F4]

To use the offline configuration utility, follow the steps at the left.
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series S+=== D:\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5\*.AF5 ==========+ | | Name Size Date | | Copyright 1986, 199 + + | All Rights| DRILL1 1003 02 16 90 | | | PRACTICE 679 02 16 90 | | | VME1 706 07 06 89 | | | | | This software is licensed to: Comp| | | Loca| | | | | | | | | | | | Serial Number: A00A| | | | | | | | +=======================================+======================================+ Press a function key or enter file name > Offline Program F1 Create File F6 Define Dir F7 Save Config F9 Fl Conv Utility F10

6200 Main Menu

Offline Config
F4

Press the function key for the task you want to perform or place the cursor on the file you want to edit.

Press this key to save your changes. After you press [F9], the information you specify remains the same each time you start the software. If you want to change the configuration information for this editing session only, press Return or after you specify the configuration
Esc

information. These changes remain active until you exit the software.

7-2

Configuring a Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

If You Want to: Directly attach to the processor memory file that the cursor highlights Create a new processor memory file Define where you want to store processor memory files, comments and symbols files, exported comments and symbols files, user configuration files and reports, and Ethernet WHO Host List files Save the configuration options to disk Convert files created with version 4.0 and earlier so that you can use them with current software. For more information, see appendix A in the Programming manual. or Convert existing AI or WINtelligent Logic 5 (.X5 files) to 6200 series (.AF5 files). For more information, see page 7-6. Use the configuration options you selected for this editing session only and exit the Offline Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Offline Programming [F6] Create File [F7] Define Directory

[F9] Save Configuration [F10] File Convert Utility

[Esc]

Note

The archive directory (default IPDS\ARCH\PLC5) is limited to 999 DOS files by the 6200 programming software. The archive directory contains several DOS files associated with each offline processor memory file. If you are creating or extending a processor memory file and the system issues the error message **Too Many Files**, you have exceeded the maximum number of files for the DOS directory. If this occurs, you must move additional files to a floppy disk or into another archive directory.

Using the Software Off line

Multiple users can view offline processor memory files and the comment/symbol database simultaneously; however, only one user can modify a processor memory file or write to the comment/symbol database at a single time. If a second user tries to modify a processor memory file or to write to the comment/symbol database while it is already in use by another user, the second user will receive an error message.

7-3

Configuring Prefacea Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Creating Offline Processor Memory Files

Follow the steps on the left to create an offline processor memory file.
6200 Main Menu
+= PROGRAM DIRECTORY FOR PROCESSOR: += D:\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5\*.AF5 ==============+=+ | File Name | Name Size Date Time | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |+= CREATE PROCESSOR FILE ========+ | | | || | | | | || Name: BATCH1 | | | | || Family: PLC 5/10 | | | | || Series: A | | | | || Memory Size: BASE | | | | || | | | | ++= ESC exits ====================+=+========================================+=+ Enter a new file name. > Program PLC 5/15 Series A Create Select Select Select File Proc Series Memory F1 F2 F3 F4

Offline Config
F4

Create File
F6

Enter a new file name Press this key to create the file you have specified.

Revision C

PLC 5/15 File BATCH1

Use these keys to specify the characteristics for the file so that the configuration matches the target processor.

Note

When you select characteristics for your offline processor, make sure the characteristics you select match the target processor on which you will eventually run the processor memory file.
If You Want to: Create a processor memory file using the current processor name. Select one of the following processors: PLC-5/10 PLC-5/11 PLC-5/12 PLC-5/20C PLC-5/25 PLC-5/26 PLC-5/40E PLC-5/40C PLC-5/40L PLC-5/60 PLC-5/60C PLC-5/60L PLC-5/V80 PLC-5/86 PLC-5/VME PLC-5/15 PLC-5/30 PLC-5/V40 PLC-5/80 PLC-5/20 PLC-5/V30 PLC-5/V40L PLC-5/80E PLC-5/20E PLC-5/40 PLC-5/46 PLC-5/80C Press this Key: [F1] Create File [F2] Select Processor

Select the appropriate series for the family processor you select. Select between Base and Expanded memory, depending on which memory type the target processor uses.

[F3] Select Series [F4] Select Memory

If you create a processor memory file and later want to change the processor, series, or memory information, use the [F3] Change Processor key from the Processor Functions menu (Program Directory).
7-4

Configuring a Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Selecting Offline Processor Memory Files

Follow the steps on the left to select an offline processor memory file.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series S+=== C:\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5\*.AF5 ====+ | | Name Size Date | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Ro+ + | All Rights| 540L 20096 09 23 95 | | | 5VME 11392 11 10 95 | | Release 5.2 | CLASSIC 10880 09 23 95 | | | ELMO 37504 11 22 95 | | This software is licensed to: Comp| ELMO1 33408 09 30 95 | | Loca| ETHER 22144 11 01 95 | | | PROTECT 20608 10 17 95 | | Serial Number: AA0A| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +=======================================+======================================+ Press a function key or enter file name > Offline Program F1 Create File F6 Define Dir F7 Save Config F9 Fl Conv Utility F10

Offline Config
F4

Enter an Cursor to existing or the file name file name and press [Enter] Press this key to directly attach to the cursored file.

If you specify a file name that does not exist, the system prompts you to create the file. Choose yes or no by entering one of the following four:
Yes
Y or N or F8 or

No
F10

For more information on creating a processor memory file, see page 7-4.

Note

Keep the following in mind when selecting a processor memory file:

To search for a processor file name, type the full or partial name of the processor file name and press [Enter]. The system moves the cursor to the best fit in the directory. You can also use [Home], [End], [PageUp], [PageDown], [up arrow], and [down arrow] to choose a processor name.

7-5

Configuring Prefacea Processor Memory File for Offline Programming

Converting A.I. or WINTelligent LOGIC 5 (.X5 Files) to 6200 Series (.AF5 Files)
Follow the steps on the left to convert an A.I. or WINTelligent LOGIC 5 offline processor memory file (.X5) to a 6200 series offline processor memory file (.AF5).
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series S+=== C:\PLC5\PROGS\*.X5 ====+ | | Name Size Date | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Ro+ + | All Rights| | | | ONLYONE 28 11-30-94 | | Release 5.2 | SECOND 155 11-30-94 | | | | | This software is licensed to: Comp| | | Loca| | | | | | Serial Number: AA0A| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +=======================================+= AI/WL 5 Format =====================+ Press a function key or enter file name > Convert One F1 Define Dir F7 Select Format F8

Offline Config
F4

Fl Conv Utility
F10

Press the function key for the task you want to perform or place the cursor on the file you want to convert.

If You Want to: Convert the cursored processor memory file from the A.I. Series/WINTelligent LOGIC 5 (.X5) format to the 6200 Series (.AF5) format Define where you want to store imported processor memory and comments and symbols files or specify the current .X5 file location Toggle between the A.I. Series or WINTelligent LOGIC 5 format (.X5 to .AF5) and the old 6200 format (.ACH to .AF5) Return to the Offline Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Convert One

[F7] Define Directory

[F8] Select Format

[Esc]

For more information on converting A.I. Series or WINTelligent LOGIC 5 (.X5 files) to/from 6200 Series (.AF5 files), see Appendix B in the Programming manual. For more information on converting .ACH files to/from .AF5 files, see Appendix A in the Programming manual.

7-6

Using Communications

Using Communications

Chapter Objectives
With the 6200 programming software, you can see what devices are on your Data Highway Plus (DH+), and/or Ethernet, and/or ControlNet link. This chapter explains basic DH+, Ethernet, and ControlNet network communications and how to see what devices are attached to those links.
For More Information About: DH+ communications Ethernet communications ControlNet communications See Page: 8-1 8-18 8-24

Understanding DH+ Communications

The DH+ link uses peer-to-peer communication through a token-passing scheme. The node that has the token (and thus permission to transmit) is called the master. The token is passed between the processors and devices on the link to rotate the ownership of the token. You can connect processors, terminals, and other devices to the DH+ link. PLC-5 processors can connect directly to the DH+ link; PLC-3 processors connect through the 1775-S5, -SR5; and PLC-2 processors connect through the 1785-KA3. The 1770-KF2 (series B) or 1785-KE modules provide an asynchronous link to connect other devices to the DH+ link. Figure 8.1 shows an example DH+ network.

8-1

Using Communications Preface

Figure 8.1 Example Data Highway Plus Configuration

PLC-5/40 Processor T35 Plant Floor Terminal T47 Portable Programming Terminal

Data Highway Plus PLC-5/250 Processor PanelView Operator Terminal PLC-5/25 Processor

RS-422 Connection Remote I/O 2705 Operator RediPANEL 1771-LC Loop Controllers
18083a

8-2

Using Communications

Using DH+ WHO

The DH+ WHO Listen and DH+ WHO Active utilities of the programming software let you see what devices are on your local DH+ link. (The local DH+ link is the link to which you are connected.) The WHO active utility also displays diagnostic counters for devices on your local DH+ link. Note If you connect your terminal directly to an Enhanced PLC-5 processor through the serial port (channel 0), the DH+ Network Menu functions are not active. (The message NO ACTIVE STATIONS FOUND will be displayed if DH+ WHO Listen or DH+ WHO Active is accessed.) To access the DH+ WHO utilities, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+============================== DH+ NETWORK MENU ==============================+ | | | | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | | | All Rights Reserved | | | | | | | | | +==============================================================================+ | Fri Oct 6, 1995 6:02:29 am | + + | Terminal Address: 77 Current Device: 1784 KT PLC Address: 2 | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key

Who
F5

Online Online Program Config F1 F2

Who Listen F4

Who Active F5

Sftware Configr F6

Exit System F10

8-3

Using Communications Preface

Using DH+ WHO Listen

The DH+ WHO Listen screen displays the active node table, which lists the station numbers that are active. To display the active node table, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+============================== DH+ NETWORK MENU ==============================+ | | | | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | | | All Rights Reserved | | | | | | | | += WHO LISTEN Active Node Table =========================================+ | +=| |=+ | | 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 | | + | 00101000 00000000 00000100 01000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 | + | | | | +=+= ESC exits ==============================================================+=+ Press a function key

Who
F5

DH+ Network Menu

Who Listen
F4 Online Configr F2

A one (1) at an address on this screen indicates that a station is active at that address.

Note

If your programming terminal and processor are the only two stations on the DH+ network, no bits are set on the DH+ WHO Listen screen and the terminal running DH+ WHO Listen does not show up as active. If you try to display the DH+ WHO Listen screen, the software displays the message NO ACTIVE STATIONS FOUND. When using the multi-session driver or serial port (to PLC, KE/KF), DH+ WHO Listen does display the terminal as active. If the programming terminal and the processor are the only two stations on the DH+ network, a bit is set for each on the DH+ WHO Listen screen.

8-4

Using Communications

Note

If the programming terminal address does show as active, a conflict is established, indicating that another device is using the same address as the terminal. The software does not let you leave the DH+ WHO Listen screen if the terminal address conflicts with the address of any other station. If there are conflicts with terminal addresses, press [F2] Online Configuration to display the Online Configuration Screen (this screen is the same one you see when you choose Online Configuration from the Main Menu). Enter a new terminal address for that device so that it does not conflict with another active terminal address on the link. For more information about online configuration, see chapter 6. If you start the system from \IPDS\ATTACH\WHO directory, the configuration characteristics you set in DH+ WHO are active; if you start the software from \IPDS\ATTACH\PLC5 directory, the configuration characteristics set through the Main Menu are active. The DH+ WHO utility gives you the capability to change the online configuration for your current needs without changing the configuration characteristics of the programming software set through the Online Configuration utility.

8-5

Using Communications Preface

Using DH+ WHO Active

The DH+ WHO Active screen displays a table that identifies all of the devices that are attached to the DH+ link. Through this screen, you can choose the processor you want to use. Note If you connect your terminal directly to an Enhanced PLC-5 processor through the serial port (channel 0), the DH+ Network Menu functions are not active. (The message NO ACTIVE STATIONS FOUND will be displayed if DH+ WHO Listen or DH+ WHO Active is accessed.) To access the DH+ WHO Active screen, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+============= WHO ACTIVE Active Station Identification =====================+ |00 20 40 60 | |01 21 41 61 | |02 PLC3 CAR_CRW 22 42 62 | |03 23 43 63 | |04 PI_RM NEWTMTST 24 44 64 | |05 25 PLC5 LIMIT 45 65 | |06 26 46 66 | |07 27 47 67 | |10 30 50 70 | |11 31 PLC5 DRILL 51 71 | |12 32 52 72 | |13 33 53 73 | |14 34 54 74 | |15 35 55 75 | |16 36 56 76 | |17 37 57 77 TERM | += ESC exits ==================================================================+ Press a function key

Who
F5

DH+ Network Menu

Who Active
F5

Online Program F1

Station Diags F2

The flashing TERM identifies the programming terminal you are using. The other flashing identification indicates the DH+ station currently in your configuration. If you are using a 1784-KT/KT2, 1784-KTX/KTXD, 1784-PCMK, or 1784-KL communication board, the screen displays the terminal name next to TERM. This screen also displays processor names (these are the names of the processor memory files currently running in the processor). For more information on naming processor memory files, see chapter 2 in the Programming manual. Note If you access the DH+ WHO Active screen from Windows, the terminal and DH+ station identifications have a white background and do not flash.

8-6

Using Communications

If You Want to: Directly attach to the processor that is highlighted by the cursor Display diagnostics for the device that is highlighted by the cursor Note: Station diagnostics are not available when using a SLC 5/04 (Small Logic Controller) processor; if you attempt to access this function when the cursor is located on a SLC 5/04, the following message appears: FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE

Press this Key: [F1] Online Programming [F2] Station Diagnostics

To specify a device to attach to or to specify a device for diagnostics, place the cursor on the device you want using the arrow keys and press the appropriate function key. You can display station diagnostics for many devices on the DH+ network, not just a processor. However, you can only attach to a processor.

SLC 5/04 Support on DH+ WHO

6200 Main Menu

The SLC 5/04 processors can be monitored on the DH+ network from the DH+ WHO Active screen. To proceed on line with the program file stored in the SLC 5/04 processor and activate APS (Advanced Programming Software) from 6200 programming software, follow the steps at the left. If the SLC 5/04 processor has been assigned a program owner, the program owner is displayed and the node address appears (with default prompt line colors) immediately after the 5/04 in the entry.

Who
F5

DH+ Network Menu

Who Active
F5

Select a SLC 5/04 processor

Online Prog
F1

8-7

Using Communications Preface

Note

If APS software has not yet been installed or the selected SLC 5/04 processor already has another program owner, the following error is displayed: UNABLE TO ATTACH TO THIS STATION

Note

If the current device driver is not a 1784-KL (DH+ Direct), 1784-KT (DH+ Direct), 1784-KT2 (DH+ Direct), or Windows DH+, you will not be able to go on line with the SLC 5/04 processor and the following error appears: CANT CONNECT TO A SLC WITH CURRENT CONFIGURATION If you want to return to 6200 programming software, select:

a PLC processor from the APS WHO Active screen and press [F1] - Online Program or [F10] Exit from the APS WHO Active screen

For more information on using DH+ WHO with SLC 5/04 processors, see the APS User Manual.

8-8

Using Communications

Getting Station Diagnostics

Ladder Editor Main Menu

The DH+ WHO Diagnostics information is available through the DH+ WHO Active screen. You can display diagnostics for any device that is connected to the DH+ network. To get station diagnostics, follow the steps on the left. The following table lists where you can find the counters for the specified processors:
For this Processors Counters: See Table: Table 8.A Table 8.B Table 8.C Table 8.D Table 8.E On Page: 8-9 8-11 8-11 8-12 8-16

Who Active
F5

Station Diag
F2

PLC-2 PLC-3 Classic PLC-5 Enhanced PLC-5 PLC-5/250

Table 8.A PLC-2 Diagnostic Counters (through 1785-KA3)

Counter: ACK Timeout Xmit Retries Exhausted NAK: No Memory Rcvd Rcvd ACK/NAK Too Short Rcvd ACK/NAK Too Long Non-ACK/NAK Rcvd Duplicate Token Found Duplicate Node Found Token Pass Timeout Token Pass Aborted Token Claims Tried Tokens Claimed Bad CRC In Rcvd Frame NAK: No Memory Sent Tells You the Number of: acknowledgment time ran out times the KA3 tries to retry transmissions times the KA3 receives a NAK (no acknowledgment) that the target device didnt receive data times the KA3 receives an ACK or NAK that is too short times the KA3 receives an ACK or NAK that is too long times the KA3 receives a message that is not an ACK or NAK duplicate tokens detected duplicate nodes found tokens that were not delivered times the KA3 didnt pass the token when it had the token times the KA3 tried to claim the token tokens the KA3 claimed corrupted messages times the KA3 sent a NAK (no acknowledgment) (Continued)

8-9

Using Communications Preface

Counter: Rcvd Frame Twice Rcvd Frame Aborted Message Sent OK Message Rcvd OK Command Sent OK Reply Rcvd OK Command Rcvd OK Reply Sent OK Reply Could Not Be Sent PLC-2 Resyncs T3 Errors Before FT Cleared Edit Connections Requested Edit Connections Granted Edit Connections Timed Out Rcvd ACK With Bad CRC

Tells You the Number of: times the KA3 received the same frame twice messages that were sent from other stations but were aborted before the transmit was complete messages the KA3 sent that were not corrupted message the KA3 received that were not corrupted commands the KA3 sent that were not corrupted replies the KA3 received that were not corrupted commands the KA3 received that were not corrupted replies the KA3 sent that were not corrupted replies the KA3 couldnt send times the KA3 transmits to the PLC-2 errors with a T3 terminal before a processor fault is cleared edit connections requested on the PLC-2 edit connections granted on the PLC-2 edit connections timed out on the PLC-2 times the KA3 receives an ACK with an error

8-10

Using Communications

Table 8.B PLC-3 Diagnostic Counters

Counter: Messages Transmitted Messages Received Responses Timed Out Aborted Packets Rcvd NAKS: lsap Recvd Crc Error Illegal Packet Size Duplicate Node Seen Link Deadtime Nak No Mem Sent NAKs Rcvd Duplicate Packets Token Timeouts Retries Duplicate Token Undeliverable Tells You the Number of: messages sent to another device on the DH+ messages received from another device on the DH+ responses that timed out messages that were sent from other stations but were aborted before the transmit was complete bad messages sent to the programming software messages corrupted messages that were too large or too small times your station has recovered from a duplicate node condition times the DH+ link has gone down times a message was not acknowledged because there was not enough memory to receive it NAKs (no acknowledgements) received duplicate messages received token was not delivered message retries duplicate tokens detected messages not delivered (no more retries, NAK received)

Table 8.C Classic PLC-5 Diagnostic Counters

Counter: Messages Transmitted Messages Received Commands Generated Requests Executed Reply Sent Transmit Not Acked Transmit NAKed Network Dead Tells You the Number of: messages sent to another device on the DH+ messages received from another device on the DH+ messages that request some action from another device on the DH+ message requests executed message replies sent acknowledgement time ran out messages not acknowledged because the destination did not have enough memory to receive the message the network lost connections (Continued)

8-11

Using Communications Preface

Counter: Received But Full Received With Error Received Re-trans Token Failed Transmit Retries Adapter Timeouts Transmit Timeout

Tells You the Number of: times a message was not acknowledged because there was not enough memory to receive it messages corrupted duplicate messages received token was not delivered message retries scanner/adapter communication time ran out messages not delivered (no more retries)

The PLC-5 diagnostic screen also displays status information about rack errors, timeouts, CRC errors, block transfers, and memory allocations. Table 8.D Enhanced PLC-5 Diagnostic Counters
Counter: Messages Sent Sent With Error Tells You the Number of: Encompasses all data being sent to and from the port valid messages sent by the station. This number should be the sum of the SDA and SDN Transmit Confirm counters. Messages sent that were not acknowledged. This number is the sum of the following counters: SDA transmit NAK (no acknowledge) misc SDA/SDN retrans transmit NAK full dropped token SDA transmit NAKed SAP Error-free messages the station has received This number is the sum of the SDA and SDN received counters. Invalid messages that the station has received This number is the sum of the SDA Received With Error and the SDA Received SAP Off counters. Times the station NAKed an incoming message due to the lack of an available buffer. This number should be the same as the SDA Received But Full counter. (Continued)

Received Received With Error

Unable To Receive

8-12

Using Communications

Counter: Send Data Acknowledged

Tells You the Number of: These counters apply to SDA messages. A sender sending SDA messages requires the receiver to acknowledge receiving the message immediately upon receipt. Receivers acknowledge messages by sending: an ACK (acknowledge), which tells the sender the message was received and will be processed a NAK, which tells the sender the message was received but cannot be processed The device that sent the message automatically sends the message again. Valid SDA messages that the station received SDA messages the station received but were NAKed due to not having an available buffer to process the message This indicates that the messages are coming in to the PLC-5 processor faster than it can process them. Check to see that you: are not scheduling unnecessary traffic (e.g., you are sending continuous messages when you only need updates once per second) are implementing report-by-exception so that data is sent only if it is new data Times the sending station retransmitted an SDA message, which was ACKed or NAKed If node sends a message but does not receive an ACK or a NAK response, the node will retransmit the message. If a node retransmitted a message because the acknowledge response to the first message was lost, the node receiving the message detects the retransmission and sends an acknowledge response, but the receiving node discards the duplicate message. High counts of this counter indicates noise or cable problems; check that the cable is secure and properly shielded from noise. SDA messages that the station received but could not process because its service access point (SAP) was off This counter should always be 0. Invalid SDA messages that the station received Some causes are: bad CRC the message has an invalid source address the message has an unrecognizable control byte the transmission was aborted This counter indicates noise; increase the cables shielding from noise. Incoming SDA messages that were NAKed due to reasons other than the NAKed full and NAKed inactive counters (e.g., a NAK due to a bad CRC) SDA messages sent by the station that were determined to be in error This counter is the sum of the SDA transmit not ACKed and SDA transmit timeout counters. SDA messages successfully sent to and acknowledged by the addressed station (Continued)

Received Received But Full

Received Retransmission

Received SAP Off

Received With Error

Transmit NAK Misc Transmit Failed Transmit Confirm

8-13

Using Communications Preface

Counter: Transmit Not ACKed

Tells You the Number of: SDA messages that were sent but were not ACKed by the receiving station The following could have occurred: message could have been NAKed an invalid ACK was returned nothing was returned This counter can indicate: a noise or a cabling problem the receiving station has been removed from the link the receiving station cannot communicate SDA messages that were sent but not ACKed or NAKed by the receiving station This counter increments even if the message does get through during a retry and if the receiving station is unable to communicate. This counter indicates a noise or a cabling problem (the receiving station is not seeing the messages). times the station received a NAK to a message because the destination station was full This indicates that messages are being sent to the receiving station faster than the PLC-5 processor can process them. Most likely, more than one station on the DH+ link is sending messages to the same station. Check to see that you are: not scheduling unnecessary traffic (e.g., sending continuous messages when you only need updates once per second) implementing report-by-exception so that data is sent only if it is new data SDA messages that were successfully sent to but were NAKed by the addressed station because the SAP specified in the message was illegal This counter should always be 0. These counters refer to SDN send data no acknowledge messages, which means that the sender does not require the receiver to acknowledge receiving the message immediately upon receiving it. SDN messages are only used for broadcast. Valid SDN messages received SDN messages sent by the station that were in error This error should never be seen. Valid SDN messages sent by the station SDA or SDN messages that were retransmitted Some reasons why the station would retry a message are: the ACK was lost or corrupted on an SDA message, indicating a possible noise problem the original message was NACKed These counters track events on the network as seen by the station. Times the station has detected the same station address as itself on the network. As a result, the station goes offline. Times the station did not win the claim token sequence See claims won below for more information. (Continued)

Transmit Timeout

Transmit NAK Full

Transmit NAKed SAP

Send Data No Acknowledge Received Transmit Failed Transmit Confirm SDA/SDN Retrans

Network Duplicate Node Claims Lost

8-14

Using Communications

Counter: Network Dead

Tells You the Number of: Times the station detects no traffic on the network This usually occurs when the station with the token is powered down or is removed from the network. The other stations are waiting for the token to be passed to them. Eventually a network dead situation is declared and a claim token sequence initiated. (See claims won for more information.) Times the station has won the claim token sequence All the stations initiate a claim token sequence when a network goes down, is just powered up and the stations on the network detect that no one has the token, or when a station with the token is powered down or removed from the network. A claim token sequence is when all the stations on a network attempt to claim the token. When multiple stations attempt to claim the token, the lowest numbered station wins. Times that the station detected that a duplicate node existed on the link and consequently dropped itself off the link A station determines that there is a duplicate node when it detects that the response to a message or solicit successor is incorrect. For example, if a response is received from a station which was not communicated with, then the sending station assumes that the response is for a packet sent by another station with the same node number. Once the station drops itself off the link, it waits indefinitely to be solicited back into the network. It will only be solicited back into the network if the duplicate node is removed from the link, because station numbers that already exist on the link are not solicited into the network. Times the station solicited every station number without getting a response See started linear scan below for more information. Times the station had to retransmit a token pass The station retransmits a token pass if it detects that the station it passed the token to did not receive the token. Noise can cause this to occur. Times a complete solicit successor of all stations not on the link is completed A solicit successor occurs during a token pass around the link. Here a station that is currently not on the link is solicited to see if it has been added to the link. During each token pass, a different station number is solicited; solicitation occurs sequentially. A station can only join the link when it is solicited into it. Times the station has attempted to pass the token to everyone in its active node table and no one has responded The station will then start a linear scan where it solicits every station number until a station responds. Times the station found a new successor for the token A new successor occurs when the station detects that a new station with a station number between its own and the station it was passing the token to was added to the link. The station now must past the token to the newly added station. Times station could not pass token to its listed successor This usually occurs due to: the station being removed from the network noise or cabling problems

Claims Won

Dropped Token

Linear Scan Failed Token Retry

Solicit Rotations

Started Linear Scan

New Successor

Token Failed

8-15

Using Communications Preface

Table 8.E PLC-5/250 Diagnostic Counters

Counter: Messages Transmitted Messages Received Responses Timed Out Aborted Packets Rcvd NAKS: lsap Recvd Illegal Packet Size Duplicate Node Seen Link Deadtime Nak No Mem Sent NAKs Rcvd Duplicate Packets Token Timeouts Retries Duplicate Token Undeliverable CRC Error Tells You the Number of: messages sent to another device on the DH+ link messages received from another device on the DH+ link responses that timed out messages that were sent from other stations but were aborted before the transmit was complete bad messages sent to the programming software messages that were too large or too small times your station has recovered from a duplicate node condition times the DH+ link has gone down times a message was not acknowledged because there was not enough memory to receive it NAKs (no acknowledgements) received duplicate messages received token was not delivered message retries duplicate tokens detected messages not delivered (no more retries, NAK received) messages corrupted

The PLC-5/250 screen also displays status information about forces, edit resources, outputs, and memory.
If You Want to: Reset the diagnostic counters Stop the counters from changing on the screen (the counters continue to run in the background). Toggles between Freeze and Unlock. Restore the counters on the screen to their actual values and let the counters change on the screen If you do not want the counters to record information about the packets the terminal is sending and limit the counter information to packets that the processor sends or receives from other stations If you want the counters to again record information about the packets the processor sends or receives from your terminal, as well as other stations Press this Key: [F2] Clear Counter [F3] Freeze Counter [F3] Unlock Counter [F4] Filter On

[F4] Filter Off

8-16

Using Communications

Using Filters
With each transmission, two packets are sent. If you turn the filter on, you remove the packet activity of your terminal from the diagnostic counters. This is useful for tracking messages that are sent to a device from another station. For example, if one station sends messages to another station, the filter shows whether the packets are being sent at the correct intervals.

Setting Packet Delays

Also, on the diagnostics screen, you can use the up and down arrow keys to set packet delays for the WHO utility. Delays reduce traffic on the DH+ network by increasing the amount of time between packet transmissions. For example, you may want to delay (slow down) the packets sent by WHO during a startup, when terminals are constantly attaching and re-attaching to the network. Note Adjusting WHO packet delays does not affect response times from the devices on your network. The [up arrow] increments the delay by one second; the [down arrow] decreases the delay by one second. The packet delay ranges from 0-10 seconds. The default delay is 0 seconds.

8-17

Using Communications Preface

Understanding Ethernet Communications

Ethernet is a local area network that provides communication between various computers (hosts) at 10 Mbps. The communication is via either thick- or thin-wire coaxial cable. Figure 8.2 shows an example Ethernet network.

Figure 8.2 Example Ethernet Configuration

HP 9000 or VAX Host 6200 VMS INTERCHANGE Software Programming Terminal 6200 VMS INTERCHANGE Software

Ethernet TCP/IP Pyramid Integrator 6200 VMS INTERCHANGE Software DH+ link PanelView Operator Terminal Remote I/O Link 1771-LC Loop Controllers Series 8600 CNC with Remote I/O SLC 5/01 Processor with 1747-DCM Module PLC-5/40 Processor (1 channel configured for adapter mode) PLC-5/25 Processor Programming Terminal 6200 INTERCHANGE Software PLC-5/40E Processor

RS-422 Connection

8-18

Using Communications

Using Ethernet WHO

To access Ethernet WHO, follow the steps on the left. Note
6200 Main Menu

To access Ethernet WHO, you must select None as the routing option on the Ethernet Online Configuration screen.
+ ETHERNET NETWORK MENU | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | All Rights Reserved | | | | + | Fri Oct 7, 1995 + | Current Device: Ethernet + Press a function key Online Online Program Configr F1 F2 Who Active F5 Sftware Configr F6 Exit F10 + | | | | | | | | | | | | + | + | +

Who
F5

5:08:53 pm

Note

If you press [F1] - Online Programming when using the Ethernet Driver without routing, the system displays this message: UNABLE TO ATTACH TO THIS STATION To attach to a processor on line, use the Ethernet WHO Active screen.

8-19

Using Communications Preface

Using Ethernet WHO Active

The Ethernet WHO Active screen displays a user defined list of active nodes attached to the Ethernet link. Through this screen, you can choose the processor you want to use. To access the Ethernet WHO Active screen, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+ WHO | Host Name | |enet401 |127.0.0.1 |enet201 |chocolate |enet801 |vanilla.ab.com |fred |strawberry.abc | | | | | | + ESC exits ACTIVE Active Station Identification Host Description L40E np540e 1.18 07 Jul 93 L20E np520E 1.18 08 Jul 93 EI sgmpccc 1.61 22 Oct 92 L80E PLC5 80/E Series C Revi EI PLC 5/250 sgmpccc 1.85 IBM PC MS DOS FTP Software + | | ALLSYS5 | | CORK | | STALLINS | | | | | | | | | | + Program

Who
F5

Allen Bradley 1785 LOCAL TERMINAL Allen Bradley 1785 Allen Bradley 5820 Allen Bradley 1785 Allen Bradley 5820 SNMPD v2.1 (9.3.1) MultiNet

Ethernet Network Menu

Press a function key

Who Active
F5

Online Program F1

Host Diags F2

Edit HostLst F10

The highlighted entry identifies the host you are using. To attach to a particular device, place the cursor on the entry and press [F1] Online Prog.

8-20

Using Communications

Using Ethernet WHO Active Host Diagnostics

The Ethernet WHO Active Host Diagnostics screen resembles the Ethernet Channel 2 Status screen. To access the Ethernet WHO Active Host Diagnostics screen, follow the steps below.
6200 Main Menu or Ethernet Network Menu Who Active
F5

Who
F5

Ethernet Network Menu

Who Active
F5

Host Diags
F2

Host Diags
F2

+= WHO ACTIVE Active Host Diagnostics========================================+ |Commands | | sent: 0 received: 0 | |Replies | | sent: 0 received: 0 | | sent with error: 0 received with error: 0 | | timed out: 0 | |Ethernet IP address: 130.151.136.47 | | In Octets: 0 Out Octets: 0 | | In Packets: 0 Out Packets: 0 | | alignment errors: 0 FCS errors: 0 | | carrier sense errors: 0 excessive collisions: 0 | | MAC transmit errors: 0 MAC receive errors: 0 | | multiple collisions: 0 single collisions: 0 | | late collisions: 0 deferred transmission: 0 | +=ESC exits==============[ Packet Delay 1 ]==================================+ Press a function key or use Up/Down Arrows to adjust packet delay. > Rem Prog PLC5/40E Series C Revision E np540e 1.27 5/40E Direct DRILL Clear Freeze Counter Counter F2 F3

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Lock the diagnostic status counters Exit the Ethernet WHO Active Host Diagnostics screen

Press this Key: [F2] Clear Counter [F3] Freeze Counter [Esc]

For a description of the counters on the Ethernet WHO Active Host Diagnostics screen, see chapter 14.
8-21

Using Communications Preface

Using the Ethernet Host List Editor

To add or remove entries from the host list, follow the steps below. Note Define a directory path for the Ethernet WHO Host List file prior to modifying the Ethernet Host List Editor. For more information, see chapter 6.
6200 Main Menu or Ethernet Network Menu
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

Who
F5

Ethernet Network Menu

Who Active
F5

Edit Host List

F10

Who Active
F5

Edit Host List

F10

Host List Editor Host Name or IP Address enet401 127.0.0.1 enet201 chocolate enet801 vanilla.abc.com fred strawberry.abc.com

ESC quits

+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

Press a function key. Clear List F1 Append F3 Insert F4 Modify F5 Delete F6 Undel F7 Accept F10

If You Want to: Clear the host list Append entries in the host list Insert entries into the host list Modify entries in the host list Delete entries in the host list Undelete entries in the host list Accept entries to the host list

Press this Key: [F1] Clear List [F3] Append [F4] Insert [F5] Modify [F6] Delete [F7] Undelete [F10] Accept

8-22

Using Communications

Host List File

The Host List File contains ASCII strings representing either hostnames or IP addresses, with a single hostname or IP address per line. A hostname can be:

in <host>.<subdomains>.<domain> format an alias for a hostname (60 character maximum) in decimal or octal format

Initial checking of the IP addresses in the Host List Editor occurs when you enter the IP addresses. Additional IP address checking occurs when the software displays the WHO Active screen. For more information, see the PC/TCP network software manuals. You can enter a maximum of 300 entries in the Host List File. Any entries that you make that exceed the maximum of 300 are not recognized by Ethernet WHO. You create the Host List File via the Host List Editor or with any DOS text editor outside the 6200 programming software. If the Host List File does not exist, the Host List is considered to be empty. Note Ethernet WHO requires the Local Terminal hostname and the Online-Configured hostname to be in the Host List and inserts them automatically if they are not present. If the alias for the Local Terminal host and/or Online-Configured host does not match the Host List, Ethernet WHO adds an entry on the Host List. You can prevent Ethernet WHO from inserting the Local Terminal host unexpectedly by placing the loop-back IP address 127.0.0.1 in the Host List. You can prevent Ethernet WHO from inserting the Online-Configured host unexpectedly by always entering the same hostname on the Online Configuration screen and the Host List.

8-23

Using Communications Preface

Understanding ControlNet Communication

The following figure shows example ControlNet networks (without and with redundant media). For more information, see the ControlNet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual or the ControlNet Cable System Planning and Installation Manual. Example of a ControlNet Network without Redundant Media
Personal Computer or Other Serial/Parallel Device and 6200 Programming Software Personal Computer with 1784-KTC Card and and 6200 Programming Software Personal Computer with 1784-KTC Card and and 6200 Programming Software PLC-5/40C Controlling Processor

Serial Connection 1770-KFC/KFCD Interface ControlNet Network

1794-ACN/ACNR Flex I/O Adapter

1771-ACN Adapter

Data Highway Plus Link Remote-I/O Link PLC-5/40C Processor in ControlNet Non-controlling Mode

Example of a ControlNet Network with Redundant Media

Personal Computer or Other Serial/Parallel Device and 6200 Programming Software

Personal Computer with 1784-KTC Card and and 6200 Programming Software

Personal Computer with 1784-KTC Card and and 6200 Programming Software PLC-5/40C Controlling Processor

Serial Connection 1770-KFC/KFCD Interface ControlNet Network

Data Highway Plus Link 1771-ACNR Adapter Remote-I/O Link PLC-5/40C Processor in ControlNet Non-controlling Mode

8-24

Using Communications

Using ControlNet WHO

To access ControlNet WHO, follow the steps on the left:
6200 Main Menu
+ PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE | | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | Copyright 1986, 1995 Rockwell Software Inc. | | All Rights Reserved | | | | + | Mon Feb 6, 1995 + | Terminal Node: 63 Current Device: Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet) + Press a function key Online Online Program Configr F1 F2 Who Active F5 Sftware Configr F6 Exit F10 + | | | | | | | | | | | | + 5:08:53 pm PLC Node: | + 6| +

Who
F5

Note

When you view the ControlNet WHO screens while the ControlNet system is operating, you affect the performance of unscheduled I/O operations.

8-25

Using Communications Preface

Using the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Identification Screen

Active Node

The ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Identification screen displays the active nodes up to the value of the Maximum Unscheduled Nodes. Note The Maximum Unscheduled Node is set to a value of the Maximum Scheduled Node (configured on the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration screen) plus eight (8). If your node address is higher than the Maximum Unscheduled Node, you will not be able to connect to the ControlNet network and use ControlNet WHO. The ControlNet WHO screens are only available when the programming device is communicating through a 1784-KTC communication card or a 1770-KFC/KFCD serial/parallel interface on the ControlNet network. To display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | + 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 ControlNet WHO ACTIVE 5/40C JOSHUA 1771-ACN 5/20C 1794-ACN

Note

Active Node Identification screen,

Active Node Identification

Who
F5

Who Active
F5

ESC exits

[ WHO rate = 4 sec ]

[ Maximum Unscheduled Nodes = 15 ]

+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

Press a function key, or page up or page down. Net Channel A Status: Cable Good Net Channel B Status: Cable Inactive Online Node Channel Network Save Who Program Diags Diags Diags Config Rate F1 F2 F5 F6 F9 F10

8-26

Using Communications

If You Want to: Attach to the highlighted ControlNet PLC-5 processor node Display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Status screen Display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status screen Display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status screen Save all current communication configuration parameters (including the ControlNet WHO update rate) as the permanent ControlNet WHO configuration Enter a new ControlNet WHO update rate (1 to 999 seconds) Return to the ControlNet WHO screen

Press this Key: [F1] Online Program [F2] Node Diagnostics [F5] Channel Diagnostics [F6] Network Diagnostics [F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Who Rate [Esc]

At the bottom of the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE screen, you see:

This Field: Network Channel Status Line Specifies:

Active Node Identification

the status of channel A and channel B. Cable good channel is usable. Cable WARNING channel is experiencing problems, but is usable. Cable FAULTED channel is not usable. Cable Inactive channel unused (in a non-redundant network only).

8-27

Using Communications Preface

Using the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Status Screen

Active Node

The ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Status screen resembles the ControlNet Channel 2 Status screen. To display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Status screen, follow the steps on the left. Note The ControlNet WHO screens are only available when the programming device is communicating through a 1784-KTC communication card or a 1770-KFCKFCD serial/parallel interface on the ControlNet network.
+ ControlNet WHO ACTIVE | |Frames | transmitted good: | received good: | total received: | |Network Capacity | update time overload: | |Moderator Node: | mismatch events: | |Misc | out of step events: | commands received: + ESC exits [ WHO rate Active Node Status + | media usage: A only| channel A errors: 0| channel B errors: 0| channel warnings: none| | | | | | | | | noise detected: 0| | +

6200 Main Menu

Who
F5

0 0 0

transmitted aborted: received aborted: received bad:

0 0 0

0 1 0

blockage:

unheard occurrences

Who Active
F5

0 network silent: 0 collisions: = 4 sec ]

0 0

Node Diags
F2

Press a function key. Remote Program Clear Unlock Counter Counter F2 F3 PLC 5/40C Series C Revision G JOSHUA Node 1 Save Who Config Rate F9 F10

If You Want to: Clear all of the diagnostic counters for this ControlNet node Toggle between Unlock Counter/Lock Counter Save all current communication configuration parameters (including the ControlNet WHO update rate) as the permanent ControlNet WHO configuration Enter a new ControlNet WHO update rate (1 to 999 seconds) Return to the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Status screen

Press this Key: [F2] Clear Counter [F3] Unlock Counter [F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Who Rate [Esc]

For descriptions of the status fields on the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Node Status screen, see page 14-31.

Active

8-28

Using Communications

Using the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Status Screen

Channel

To display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status screen, follow the steps on the left. Note The ControlNet WHO screens are only available when the programming device is communicating through a 1784-KTC communication card or a 1770-KFC/KFCD serial/parallel interface on the ControlNet network.
+ ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status | Node Active Channel A Channel B Bad frame received from node number | Channel Status Status most recent to least recent | | 01 A Good Inactive | 02 A Good Inactive | 03 A Good Inactive | 04 A Good Inactive | 05 | 06 | 07 | 08 | 09 | 10 | 11 | 12 + ESC exits [ WHO rate = 4 sec ] [ Maximum Unscheduled Nodes = 15 ] + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

6200 Main Menu

Who
F5

Who Active
F5

Channel Diags
F5

Press a function key, or page up or page down. Net Channel A Status: Cable good Net Channel B Status: Cable Inactive Network Save Who Diags Config Rate F6 F9 F10

If You Want to: Display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status screen Save all current communication configuration parameters (including the ControlNet WHO update rate) as the permanent ControlNet WHO configuration Enter a new ControlNet WHO update rate (1 to 999 seconds) Return to the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Identification screen

Press this Key: [F6] Network Diags [F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Who Rate [Esc]

Table 8.F describes the fields that appear on the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status screen.

8-29

Using Communications Preface

Table 8.F ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status Screen Fields

This Field: Node Active Channel Channel A Status Specifies: the network address on the ControlNet link. the channel that the node is using when the ControlNet WHO active channel status screen is displayed. the status of channel A. Good channel A is receiving usable frames only. WARNING channel A is receiving a low level of unusable frames. FAULTED channel A is receiving a high level of unusable frames; channel is not usable. Inactive channel A is not currently active. the status of channel B. Good channel B is receiving usable frames only. WARNING channel B is receiving a low level of unusable frames. FAULTED channel B is receiving a high level of unusable frames; channel is not usable. Inactive channel B is not currently active. a log of the last eight nodes from which bad frames were received.

Channel B Status

Bad frame received from node number

At the bottom of the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE

This Field: Network Channel Status Line Specifies:

Network Status screen, you see:

the status of channel A and channel B. Cable good channel is usable. Cable WARNING channel is experiencing problems, but is usable. Cable FAULTED channel is not usable. Cable Inactive channel unused (in a non-redundant network only).

8-30

Using Communications

Using the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Status Screen

Network

To display the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status screen, follow the steps on the left. Note The ControlNet WHO screens are only available when the programming device is communicating through a 1784-KTC communication card or a 1770-KFC/KFCD serial/parallel interface on the ControlNet network.
+ ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status | Total Errors Good Frames Bad Frames Errors/100,000 Frames | Node # Chan A Chan B Received Received Chan A Chan B | | 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 03 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 04 0 0 0 0 0 0 | 05 | 06 | 07 | 08 | 09 | 10 | 11 | 12 + ESC exits [ WHO rate = 4 sec ] [ Maximum Unscheduled Nodes = 15 ] + | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +

6200 Main Menu

Who
F5

Who Active
F5

Network Diags
F6

Press a function key,or page up or page down. Net Channel A Status: Cable Inactive Channel Diags F5 Net Channel B Status: Cable Inactive Save Who Config Rate F9 F10

If You Want to: Go to the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Channel Status screen Save all current communication configuration parameters (including the ControlNet WHO update rate) as the permanent ControlNet WHO configuration Enter a new ControlNet WHO update rate (1 to 999 seconds) Return to the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Active Node Identification screen

Press this Key: [F5] Channel Diags [F9] Save Configuration

[F10] Who Rate [Esc]

8-31

Using Communications Preface

Table 8.G describes the fields that appear on the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status screen. Table 8.G ControlNet WHO ACTIVE Network Status Screen Fields
This Field: Node Total Errors Total Errors Channel A 1 Channel B 1 Specifies: the network address on the ControlNet link. the number of errors received on channel A. the number of errors received on channel B. the number of frames received correctly on the active channel. the number of bad frames received on the active channel. the number of errors received on channel A per 100,000 frames using the following formula: ( Channel A Errors * 100,000)/( Good Frames + Aborted Frames) the number of errors received on channel B per 100,000 frames using the following formula: ( Channel B Errors * 100,000)/( Good Frames + Aborted Frames)

Good Frames Received Bad Frames Received Errors/100,000 Frames Channel A 1 Errors/100,000 Frames Channel B 1

1 Inactive is displayed for the unused channel when the network is non-redundant.

At the bottom of the ControlNet WHO ACTIVE

This Field: Network Channel Status Line Specifies:

Network Status screen, you see:

the status of channel A and channel B. Cable good channel is usable. Cable WARNING channel is experiencing problems, but is usable. Cable FAULTED channel is not usable. Cable Inactive channel unused (in a non-redundant network only).

8-32

Addressing Data Table Files

Addressing Data Table Files

Chapter Objectives
This chapter identifies how to address data files when you write ladder programs.

Overview of Data Storage

All of the data your processor examines or changes are stored in files in data storage areas of memory. These areas store:

data received from input modules data to be sent to output modules; this data represents decisions made by the ladder logic intermediate results made by the ladder logic preloaded data such as presets and recipes

In addition, the processor uses other areas of data storage to: control instructions store system status

9-1

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Figure 9.1 shows the role that data storage plays in a programmable control process.

Figure 9.1 Relationship between I/O Modules, Data Storage, and Ladder Programs
DATA STORAGE

Digital Inputs INPUT MODULES Analog Inputs

I/O Image Files

Digital Outputs Analog Outputs OUTPUT MODULES

Block transfer files

Other Data Files Examine Data LADDER PROGRAM Return Results

This chapter shows you how to organize data storage for your programs.

9-2

Addressing Data Table Files

Understanding Data Storage (Data Table Files)

Data Table Files file # integer file 7 file #

The processor divides data storage into:

Types. Types let you specify different formats and ranges to accommodate different types of data. You can create multiple files of a given type. Files let you group and organize logically related data. When you need to access data, you specify the file in which the data is stored. Some types of files are made up of 16-bit words. Floating-point words are 32 bits. When you need to access this data, you specify it with a formatted address.

File 999

Integer Files File #

sample data 1020 64 7779 2

Integer File 276 0000000100010100 sample data Natural binary bit pattern for 276 (decimal format)

Each word contains multiple bits. This is the smallest division of data. A bit contains a value of zero or one. When you need to access this data, you specify it with a formatted address.

Timer File # Timer #

structure members

2760 preset .PRE 432 accumulated .ACC .EN .TT .DN control bits

Some types of files are divided into structures used to control instruction elements. These structures are subdivided into members at the bit or word level. When you need to access this data, you specify it with a formatted address.

File # Starting addr (Length) Starting addr (Length) Starting addr (Length) up to 1000 words recipe A data recipe B data production counts

In addition to the processor-defined organization of files, you can organize the data within files into data blocks that help group and organize logically related data. When you need to access this data, you specify only the starting address within the file (and length) instead of each individual address.

9-3

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Organizing Data into Files and Data Blocks

When you organize data files, you can use processor-defined data files, where each file starts at word 0, or sub-divide these files into user-defined data blocks, where you specify the starting address of the first word in the data block. When you organize data, group data by similar kind, such as:

the result of calculations batch recipes

Because of the structure of block-transfer instructions, you must group data such as: inputs from analog modules outputs to analog modules

You might also want to leave room for future expansion when grouping data. Do this by leaving gaps between:

Note

data blocks within a file groups of sequentially numbered files

modules in an I/O chassis If you plan on programming online in Run mode, you must leave gaps in the data file or program numbering system (since you cannot create user memory while in Run mode). However, these gaps use several words of overhead memory for each data block you skip. Enhanced PLC-5 processors use 6 words per unused data file; Classic PLC-5 processors use 2 words per unused data file. Use care when leaving gaps. To make efficient use of the processor memory and improve memory performance, follow these rules when organizing your data files:

group large amounts of related data into files. address the data files from 3-999 as needed. Table 9.A on page 9-6 lists the default data table file numbers. address the words needed in each data file consecutively from 0-999.

9-4

Addressing Data Table Files

address the words of I/O image data according to how you configured your I/O:

0-37 (octal) for PLC-5/10, -5/11, -5/12, -5/15, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 processors 0-77 (octal) for PLC-5/25, -5/30, -5/V30 processors 0-177 (octal) for PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L processors 0-277 (octal) for PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C -5/86, -5/V80 processors

When addressing I/O image bits, address them 00-07 or 10-17 (octal).

When organizing bit data, address the bits in each word 0-15 (decimal) for binary or integer files.

9-5

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Addressing Frequently Used Files

The following table shows the amount of memory used by each data-table file. Table 9.A Data Table Memory Usage
Memory Used in Overhead for each File (in 16-bit words) File Type Output Image Input Image Status Bit (binary) Timer Counter Control Integer Floating-Point ASCII BCD Block Transfer 2 ControlNet Transfer 3 Message 2 PID 2 SFC Status 2 ASCII String 2 Unused File Type Identifier O I S B T C R N F A D BT CT MG PD SC ST n/a File Number 0 1 2 31 41 51 61 71 81 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 3 - 999 9 - 999 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Enhanced PLC-5 processors 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 NA NA NA NA NA NA 2 Classic PLC-5 processors Memory Used (in 16-bit words) per Word, Float Word, Character, or Structure 1/word 1/word 1/word 1/word 3/structure 3/structure 3/structure 1/word 2/float word
1/ per character 2

1/word 6/structure 64/structure 56/structure 82/structure 3/structure 42/structure 0

1 This is the default file number. For this file type, you can assign any file number from 3 thru 999. 2 Available on Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. 3 Available on ControlNet PLC-5 processors only.

9-6

Addressing Data Table Files

Data table files are contiguous in memory. Size in words for I/O files 0 and 1 are:
For this processor: -5/10, -5/11, -5/12, -5/15, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 -5/25 -5/30, -5/V30 -5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 File O0 and file I1 memory size is: fixed at 32 words varies from 32-64 words (32 is the default) varies from 32-64 words (64 is the default) varies from 32-128 words (128 is the default) varies from 32-192 words (192 is the default)

Status file 2 is fixed at 32 words for Classic PLC-5 processors and 128 words for Enhanced PLC-5 processors. Files 3-999 vary in size. These files contain only the number of words corresponding to the highest address that you assign. Each B, N, A, and D file can be 1,000 words maximum. Each F file can be 1,000 float words (32-bit words) maximum. Each T, C, R, BT, and SC file can be 1,000 structures maximum. Each MG file can be 585 structures maximum. Each CT file can be 512 structures maximum. Each PD file can be 399 structures maximum. Each ST file can be 780 structures maximum. The largest single data table file is limited to 32K words. The total amount of the data table is limited to 64K words.

9-7

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Figure 9.2 shows an example memory map for each processor.

Figure 9.2 Example Memory Map of File Types for PLC-5 Processors
PLC-5/11, PLC-5/15 -5/20, -5/20E, Word # -5/20C, -5/26 Word # 32 64 32 64 PLC-5/25 Word # PLC-5/30, -5/V30 Word # 32-64 PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L Word # 32-128 PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86 -5/V80 Word # 32-192 File Type output image File # 0

32-64

64-128

64-128

64-256

64-384

input image

96

96-160

192-256

192-384

192-512

status binary, timer, counter, control, integer, floating point Enhanced PLC-5 processors can also use block transfer, ControlNet transfer, message, PID, SFC status, and ASCII strings.

Important: Bit addresses below word 256 and word addresses below 2048 (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) or 4096 (Classic PLC-5 processors) use half as many storage words as addresses above these limits. The processor can also access the addresses below these limits more quickly than addresses above these limits.

3-999 according to your application

This Processors Status File: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15

Is Located: ends at word 95. Use addresses B3:0 - B3:159 in binary file 3 for your most frequently used binary addresses. Use addresses up to word 4096 in files 4 and greater for your most frequently used word addresses. ends at word 159. Use addresses B3:0 - B3:95 in binary file 3 for your most frequently used binary addresses. Use addresses up to word 4096 in files 4 and greater for your most frequently used word addresses. at the end of the data table section.

PLC-5/25

Enhanced PLC-5 processors

9-8

Addressing Data Table Files

The table below lists the number of words used by each type of program file:
Program File: Ladder SFC Structured Text Unused Number of Words Used: 6/file + 1/word 6/file 6/file + 1/word 6/file

9-9

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Data File Valid Ranges

Valid data types/values are:
This Data Type/Value: immediate (program constant) integer float Accepts: any value between 32768and 32767 Constants greater than 1024 use 2 storage words of memory; floating point constants use 3 words of memory. any integer data type: integer, timer, counter, status, bit, input, output, ASCII, BCD, control (e.g., N7:0, C4:0, etc.) any floating point data type (valid range is + 1.1754944e 38 to +3.4028237e+38). Note that the 1784-T50 may round or truncate the number based on the number of significant digits and the size of the floating point number. any block transfer data type (e.g., BT14:0) any CT data type (e.g., CT14:0) any message data type (e.g., MG15:0) or integer data type (e.g., N7:0) any PID data type (e.g., PD16:0) or integer data type (e.g., N7:0) any string data type (e.g., ST12:0) any SFC status data type (e.g., SC17:0)

block transfer ControlNet transfer message PID string SFC status

9-10

Addressing Data Table Files

Addressing Data Files

Valid formats for addressing data files are:
Addressing Format: Logical address I/O image address Description: an alpha-numeric coded format with delimiter to specify the data location logical address format, but relates physical locations in the I/O chassis to memory locations in the I/O image file logical address format, but lets you change address values in the specified address with your ladder program index prefix (#) followed by a logical address format adds an index value from processor status file S:24 to the specified address ASCII character name that relates the address (of a file, word, sub-member, or bit) to what it represents in the application Example: N23:0 I:017/17 Page: 9-12 9-17

Indirect address

N[N8:6]:0

9-19

Indexed address

#N23:0

9-20

Symbolic address

Mixer_1

9-22

9-11

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Specifying Logical Addresses

Use a logical address to access a bit, word, sub-member, data block, file, or I/O image bit. The format of a logical address corresponds directly to the location in data storage. 1. Specify the following:

data type data file number (3-999) Files 0-2 (input, output and status) are already defined by the processor.

Table 9.B Valid Data Section Specifications

Section Type: A B C D F I N O R Description: ASCII binary counter bcd floating point input image integer output image control Section Type: S T BT 1 CT 2 MG 1 PD 1 SC 1 ST 1 Description: status timer block transfer ControlNet transfer message PID SFC status ASCII strings

1 Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. 2 ControlNet PLC-5 processors only.

2.

Include a colon (:) followed by the element number. You can substitute a semi-colon (;) for the colon (:) delimiter.

3. 4.

If you want to specify a bit number, include a front slash (/) or a period (.) followed by the bit number. If you want to address a member, such as a done bit or an accumulated value, include a period (.) followed by the mnemonic.

9-12

Addressing Data Table Files

Table 9.C shows how to address data at different levels. Table 9.C Addressing Data at Different Levels
To Specify the Address of a: File File Type File Number Word within a word file File Type File Number File Delimiter Word Number Bit Within an Integer file File Type File Number File Delimiter Word Number Bit Delimiter Bit Number Bit within a binary file Binary files are bit stream continuous files, and therefore you can address them in two ways: by word and bit, or by bit alone. Bit Within a structure file File Type File Number File Delimiter Structure Number Member Delimiter Member Mnemonic Bit Delimiter Bit Number Use these Parameters:

F 8

N 9 : 2

N 9 : 2 / 5

B 3 / 2 4 5

R 6 :7 .D N

Note

Use the / delimiter only for addressing bit numbers. Do not use it to address data bits by mnemonic. Never use it for a division symbol. The division symbol is the vertical bar (|).

9-13

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

The following table explains the examples shown on the previous page.
Valid Address: F8 N9:2 N9:2/5 B3/245 R6:7.DN Type of Address: File Word Bit Bit Structure Member Explanation: floating-point file 8 integer file 9, word 2 integer file 9, word 2, bit 5 binary file 3, bit 245 control file 6, structure 7, done bit

Using Address Mnemonics

Address mnemonics let you address members at the word or bit level according to name. The available address mnemonics depend on the type of data (timer, counter, or control) and the program instruction that you want to address. Table 9.D shows some address mnemonics. For additional information about the mnemonics for a specific instruction, see the Instruction Set Reference manual. Table 9.D Address Mnemonics
Instruction Type: ASCII Bit Shift BSL, BSR Data Type: ST (string) R (control) Word Level: length length position .LEN .LEN .POS enable error done unload enable start done error continuous enable wait no response time out read write .EN .ER .DN .UL .EN .ST .DN .ER .CO .EW .NR .TO .RW (Continued) Bit Level:

Block Transfer BTR, BTW

BT (control)

requested word count transmitted word count file-type number word number rack/group/slot

.RLEN .DLEN .FILE .ELEM .RGS

9-14

Addressing Data Table Files

Instruction Type: Control

Data Type: R

Word Level: length position .LEN .POS

Bit Level: enable error done found inhibit comparison empty enable unloading unload enable start done error continuous enable wait no response time out count up count down done overflow underflow enable error done found inhibit enable load enable unload done empty enable done error found (FSC only) inhibit (FSC only) no response time out enable start transmission continuous enabled waiting done error .EN .ER .DN .FD .IN .EM .EU .UL .EN .ST .DN .ER .CO .EW .NR .TO .CU .CD .DN .OV .UN .EN .ER .DN .FD .IN .EN .EU .DN .EM .EN .DN .ER .FD .IN .NR .TO .EN .ST .CO .EW .DN .ER (Continued)

ControlNet I/O Transfer CIO

CT

requested word count transmitted word count file-type number word number

.RLEN .DLEN .FILE .ELEM

Counter CTD, CTU

C (counter)

preset accumulated

.PRE .ACC

Diagnostic DDT, FBC

R (control)

length position

.LEN .POS

FIFO FFL, FFU

R (control)

length position

.LEN .POS

File FAL, FSC

R (control)

length position

.LEN .POS

Message

MG (message)

error code requested length done length

.ERR .RLEN .DLEN

9-15

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Instruction Type: PID

Data Type: PD (PID float)

Word Level: setpoint proportional gain integral gain derivative gain output bias % SP max (eng units) SP min (eng units) deadband set output % output limit high % output limit low % update time process variable error output % PV alarm high PV alarm low deviation alarm (+) error low alarm ( ) PV alarm deadband deviation alarm deadband input range max input range min tieback % address of master to this slave .SP .KP .KI .KD .BIAS .MAXS .MINS .DB .SO .MAXO .MINO .UPD .PV .ERR .OUT .PVH .PVL .DVP .DVN .PVDB .DVDB .MAXI .MINI .TIE .ADDR [0] thru .ADDR [3] .LEN .POS .TIM .PRE

Bit Level: status enabled cascade type cascade loop PV tracking derivative of error or PV software A/M mode control action A/M station mode PID equation PID initialized set point out of range output limiting low output limiting high error within DB deviation alarm ( ) deviation alarm (+) PV alarm LOW PV alarm HIGH .EN .CT .CL .PVT .DO .SWM .CA .MO .PE .INI .SPOR .OLL .OLH .EWD .DVNA .DVPA .PVLA .PVHA

Sequencer SQI, SQL, SQO Sequential Function Chart Status

R (control)

length position active time preset

enable error done done scan active first scan last scan timer overflow step errored enable timing done

.EN .ER .DN .DN .SA .FS .LS .OV .ER .EN .TT .DN

SC (SFC status)

Timer TON, TOF, RTO

T (timer)

preset accumulated

.PRE .ACC

9-16

Addressing Data Table Files

Specifying I/O Image Addresses

Use an I/O image address to access an input or output bit in the I/O image table. The I/O image address also corresponds to the physical location of the I/O circuit in the I/O chassis. When you specify an I/O image address, include the following:

Specify I for input or O for output. Include a colon (:) as a file delimiter followed by the I/O rack number:

00-03 octal default for PLC-5/10, -5/11, -5/12, -5/15, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 processors 00-07 octal for PLC-5/25, -5/30, -5/V30 processors 00-17 octal for PLC -5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L processors 00-27 octal for PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 processors Include the I/O group number (0-7).

Include a front slash (/) as a terminal delimiter followed by the terminal number (0-7, 10-17).

9-17

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

For example, Table 9.E shows valid image addresses.

Table 9.E Valid I/O Image Addresses

To Specify This Address: Input Image Bit I for input 2-digit I/O rack Number I/O group number (0-7) Input number (0-7, 10-17) Output Image Bit O for output 2-digit I/O rack Number I/O group number (0-7) Output number (0-7, 10-17) Use These Parameters: In This Format:

I:017/01

O:017/01

Table 9.F shows some I/O image address examples. Table 9.F I/O Image Address Examples
I:017/01 O:017/01 Input rack 1, I/O group 7, terminal 1 Output rack 1, I/O group 7, terminal 1

9-18

Addressing Data Table Files

Specifying Indirect Addresses

You can substitute a component within a logical address with the value in another address by using indirect addressing. The processor uses the value from the substitute address to form the indirect address. You can use ladder logic to change the value stored at that substitute address. Use indirect addressing for applications such as indexing sequential batch files in a multiple batch operation. For example, at completion of each operation, let a counter accumulated value call out the next batch file, such as N10, N11, N12,

N13, ... N[C5:0.ACC].

When you specify indirect addresses, follow these guidelines:

You can indirectly address these address components: file number word number bit number (in a binary file)

The substitute address must be one of the following types: N, T, C, R, B, I, O, or S. Any T, C, or R address must be a word-length sub-member address, such as T4:0.ACC. Enter the substitute address in brackets [ ].

Table 9.G shows examples of indirect addresses. Table 9.G Indirect Address Examples
Valid Address: N[N7:0]:0 N7:[C5:7.ACC] B3/[I:017] N[N7:0]:[N9:1] Variable: File number Word number Bit number File and word number Explanation: The file number is stored in integer address N7:0. The word number is the accumulated value of counter 7 in file 5. The bit number is stored in input word 17. The file number is stored in integer address N7:0 and the word number in integer address N9:1.

9-19

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Specifying Indexed Addresses

Indexed addressing offsets an address by the number of elements you select. Store the offset value in the offset word in the processors status file. The processor starts operation at the base address plus the offset. You can manipulate the offset word in your ladder logic, but you cannot enter the offset value from the processor status file. The indexed address symbol is the # character. Place the # character immediately before the file-type identifier in a logical address. Enter the offset value (using ladder logic or sequential function charts) in word 24 of the status file (S:24). All indexed instructions use the same word S:24 to store an offset. Note You cannot use indexed addressing with the PD or ST data types (Enhanced PLC-5 processors). When you specify indexed addresses, follow these guidelines:

Note

Make sure the index value (positive or negative) does not cause the indexed address to exceed the file type boundary. The processor does not check this unless you use an indexed indirect address or you exceed the data table area of memory. If the indexed address exceeds the data table area of memory, the processor initiates a run-time error and sets a major fault. The processor does not check to see whether the indexed address crosses file types, such as N7 to F8. If you are concerned about exceeding file type boundaries use indexed indirect addressing. When an instruction uses more than two indexed addresses, the processor uses the same index value for each indexed address. Set the offset word to the index value you want immediately before enabling an instruction that uses an indexed address.

Attention: Instructions with a # sign in an address manipulate the offset value stored at S:24. Make sure you monitor or load the offset value you want prior to using an indexed address. Otherwise unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel.

The following instructions manipulate the offset value in S:24:

BSL/BSR DDT FFL/FFU LFL/LFU FAL MVM Bit Shift Left/Right Diagnostic Detect FIFO Load/Unload LIFO Load/Unload File Arithmetic and Logic Masked Move COP FLL FSC SQI/SQL/SQO FBC File Copy File Fill File Search and Compare Sequencer Input/Load/Output File Bit Compare

9-20

Addressing Data Table Files

Example of Indexed Addressing

MVM MASKED MOVE Source Mask Destination #N7:10 00110011 #N11:5

The following MVM example uses an indexed address in the source and destination addresses. If the offset value is 10 (stored in S:24), the processor manipulates the data stored at the base address plus the offset. In this example, the processor uses the following addresses:
Value: Source Destination Base Address: N7:10 N11:5 Offset Address: N7:20 N11:15

9-21

Addressing PrefaceData Table Files

Specifying Symbolic Addresses

With symbolic addresses, you can substitute a name for an address so the address will relate physically to the application. For example, you could substitute the name LS1 for input image bit I:007/10 to indicate the input from Limit Switch 1. When you specify a symbolic address, follow these guidelines:

Start the name with an alpha-character or a number. The symbol must contain at least one alpha-character and can contain between 10 and 20 of the following characters: A - Z (upper and lower case) 0-9 underscore (_) pound sign (#) period (.) [not in the first position] [not in the first position]

[not in the first position]

You can substitute a symbolic address for any of the following types of addresses: word bit

Record the symbols you define and their corresponding logical addresses. The software provides a utility for generating a report that lists all the symbols that are currently defined. For more information about generating reports, see chapter 20.

To use the symbolic addresses, you assign symbols to logical addresses with the programming software. Symbols are a feature of the programming software, not the processor. If you use the programming software on a terminal other than the one in which you defined symbols, you will not have access to the symbol database you created. The software stores the database on the hard disk of the programming terminal you use.

9-22

Addressing Data Table Files

Note

In the Ladder Editor, you can enter a symbol using lower case, but the software automatically converts it to all upper case. For example, the software interprets Upload and UPLOAD as the same symbol. Make sure that you do not solely use upper or lower case to distinguish one symbol from another. However, in the SFC Editor, you can enter lowercase or uppercase and they would be considered unique (i.e., Upload and UPLOAD would be two different symbols). Symbol sets used in the ladder editor, SFC editor, structured text editor, or I/O configuration editor must be unique to each editor. After you define the symbol for an existing logical address, you can use the symbolic address anywhere else in ladder logic to reference that same address. For more information about entering symbolic addresses, see chapter 17 in the Programming manual. When you have the ladder editor configured to display symbols, the symbol appears instead of the address. For example, if you assigned the symbol LIMIT to the address I:00, the system displays this symbol combined with the bit address, LIMIT/03. This combination is for display purposes only; the system does not add it to the comments/symbols database. Note that if you assigned a symbol to the complete address I:00/03 (for example, SWITCH1), the system displays SWITCH1 instead of the combination LIMIT/03. Table 9.H shows some valid symbolic addresses. Table 9.H Symbolic Address Examples
Type of Address: Input image Logical Address: I:015/00 I:015/03 I:015/06 O:013/00 O:013/02 O:013/04 F10:0 F10:1 Symbolic Address: LS1 AUTO1 SW1 M1 CL1 L1 Calc_1 Calc_2

Note

Output image

Word

9-23

Creating Data Table Files

1 0

Creating Data Table Files

Chapter Objectives
A data table file stores the data that your program files use. You can create these data table files:
integer binary BCD ASCII message block transfer PID floating point timer counter control string SFC status ControlNet transfer

Use this chapter to learn how to create data table files. This chapter also explains how to use the memory map to display data table processor memory information. If you want to monitor input or output data, see chapter 16. For a description of the structure of data table files (timer, counter, block transfer, etc.), see chapter 9.

10-1

Creating Data Table Files Preface

Creating Data Table Files

To create a data table file, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
FILE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TYPE output input status binary or bit timer counter control integer floating point unused integer DATA TABLE MAP LAST ADDRESS SIZE (elements) O:037 32 I:037 32 S:31 32 B3/15 1 T4:0 1 C5:0 1 R6:0 1 N7:0 1 F8:0 1 0 N10:201 202 SIZE (words) 32 32 32 1 3 3 3 1 2 0 202

General Utility
F7

O I S B T C R N F N

Memory Map
F1

PROCESSOR MEMORY LAYOUT 311 words of memory used in 11 data table files 153 words of memory used in 17 program files 6357 words of unused memory available Press a function key or enter file number. > Rem Prog PLC-5/15 Ser A Rev A Create Delete DT File DT File F6 F7

5/15 File LIMIT

You can press [Alt-M] to reach this screen from most screens in the ladder editor, or press [F6] from the Program Directory screen.

Create Data Table File

F6

If You Want to: Create a data table file Delete a data table file Page down or up through the data table Go to a specific data table

Press this Key: [F6] Create Data Table File [F7] Delete Data Table File [Page Down] [Page Up] Enter the file number

Enter the last address

10-2

Creating Data Table Files

An example of a valid address is: N9:32 Where: N 9 32 Specifies the file type. In this case, N specifies an integer file. Is the file number you want to create. It is more efficient if you create sequential files. Is the number of the last word you want to create in the data table file. The processor creates words 0-32 (33 words).

Note

Enhanced PLC-5 processors will display additional words of overhead in the size column of the Data Table Map screen.

10-3

Creating Data Table Files Preface

Assigning Privileges to Data Table Files

You can assign privileges to data table files to restrict access/modification. See chapter 15.

Extending Data Table Files

The processor must be in Program mode.
Ladder Editor Main Menu

You can also extend data table files to include more elements. To extend a data table file, follow the steps on the left. For example, if N10 contains 20 words and you want to extend the data table file to contain 100 words, type: N10:99 [Enter] You can extend I/O data table files on all processors except the PLC-5/10 and PLC-5/15. Whatever address you specify, the software adds the full rack. For example, if you type I:033, the software extends the input and output image table to I:037. Likewise, if you type O:033, the input and output image table is extended.

General Utility
F7

Memory Map
F1

Create Data Table File

F6

Enter the last address to extend

10-4

Creating Data Table Files

Deleting Data Table Files

Ladder Editor Main Menu

You can delete all data table files, except for the following:

General Utility
F7

input, output, and status files files that contain addresses required by a ladder program, SFC file, or structured text file

To delete data table files, follow the steps on the left. The information you delete depends on the address you type. For example, you can perform the following delete operations:

Memory Map
F1

If you specify N7:50, the processor deletes word N7:50 and all the words following that address in the same file (such as N7:51). If you specify the first element address or the file type and number, without an element address, the processor deletes the entire data table file. For example, N7:0 and N7 both delete integer file 7 completely.

Delete Data Table File

F7

Enter the starting address

To decrease I/O data table files for an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, type the first address above the last address you want to use. For example, if you want to decrease the output image table to O:037, delete the expanded I/O data table using address O:040. (Note that this will also decrease the input image table.)

10-5

Creating Data Table Files Preface

10-6

Configuring Your Processor

11

Configuring Your Processor

Chapter Objectives
This chapter describes how to configure your processor.

Configuring the Processor

Complete these tasks before configuring the processor or processor channels:

Note
References to: Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Develop the configuration and flow of your application programs. See the 1785 PLC-5 Design Manual. Install your system hardware. See the PLC-5 Family Installation manual.

Use Table 11.A for information on the processor configuration tasks. Unless otherwise stated:
Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors
your application expertise.

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

11-1

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Table 11.A Processor Configuration Tasks

For this Processor: Classic PLC-5 To Configure: processor start-up procedure processor resident rack address memory protect feature processor fault routine an I/O status file a VME status file an adapter image file selectable timed interrupts (if being used) processor start-up procedure processor resident rack address processor-resident local I/O block transfer compatibility adapter channel response memory protect feature processor fault routine an I/O status file an adapter image file processor input interrupts (if being used) and selectable timed interrupts main control programs processor channels for scanner, adapter or Data Highway Plus communication Configuring processor communication channels with 6200 programming software replaces setting switches to define rack or Data Highway Plus addresses and remote I/O scanner or adapter communications the serial port VME PLC-5 PLC-5/40L and -5/60L Ethernet PLC-5 ControlNet PLC-5 VMEbus read and write operations and VMEbus interrupts (if being used) extended local I/O channel Ethernet ControlNet Use this screen: Processor Status See: page 11-5 page 11-7 page 11-10 page 11-12 page 11-14 page 11-18 page 11-19 page 11-22 page 11-5 page 11-7 page 11-8 page 11-9 page 11-10 page 11-12 page 11-14 Adapter Mode Configuration Processor Configuration Configuring Processor Channels, chapter 13 page 11-20 page 11-22 page 11-24 Configuring Processor Channels, chapter 13

Enhanced PLC-5

Processor Configuration

Channel Configuration screens

VME Configuration Channel Configuration screens Channel Configuration screens Channel Configuration screens

page 11-26 Configuring Processor Channels, chapter 13 Configuring Processor Channels, chapter 13 Configuring Processor Channels, chapter 13

11-2

Configuring Your Processor

Accessing the Processor Status and Processor Configuration Screens

To complete the configuration tasks, go to the appropriate screen:
For this Processor: Classic PLC-5 Enhanced PLC-5 Use this Screen: Processor Status Processor Configuration See Page: 11-3 11-4

Processor Status Screen

6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processors

Offline Online Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1983 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A Active node list 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001

Proc Status
F2

Press a function key or enter a value. S:0/3 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal I/O VME Specify Status Config Address F3 F4 F5

Addr:Decimal PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Clear Clear Min Flt Maj Flt F9 F10

11-3

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Processor Configuration Screen

6200 Main Menu
User control bits:

Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Processor Configuration RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 100

00000000 00000000 0 N20 N34

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File: Processor input interrupt

prog file no.: down count: bit mask: compare value: prog file no.:

0 module group: 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0

Selectable timed interrupt

setpoint (ms): 0

General Utilities
F7

Proc Config
F3

Main control program File Name A: 3 proc-ab123 B: 2 proc-ab122 C: 3 proc-ab124 D: E:

Disable 0 (scan MCP) 1 (skip MCP) 0 (scan MCP)

I/O Update 0 (scan I/O) 1 (skip I/O) 1 (skip I/O)

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. S:26/15 = Rem Prog Forces:None 5/V40 File NP540V Proc VME Status Config F2 F4

11-4

Configuring Your Processor

Define Processor Start-up Procedure

The user control bits, (S:26, bits 0 and 1) define how the processor starts in Run mode after a power loss or when you switch to Run mode from Program or Test mode.
6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status

DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

User Control Bits

00000000 00000000 0 0 N34

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

RESTART FIRST STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

Use this Bit: S:26/0

To Do this Task: control processors using SFCs. This bit determines if the SFC restarts or resumes at the last active step after a power loss or change to Run mode.

S:26/1

select power-loss protection. If this bit is set and a power loss occurs, the processor restarts by setting major fault (word 11, bit 5) and executing a fault routine you define before it returns to normal program scan.

11-5

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Table 11.B describes the possible startup routines. For more information about fault routines, see the 1785 PLC-5 Design Manual. Table 11.B Possible Processor Startup Routines
If You Are: With: And You Want To: Then Set S:26 (Bits 0 and 1) as Shown: 15..............0 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx00 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx01 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx0x xxxxxxxx xxxxxx1x xxxxxxxx xxxxxx10 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx11 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx00

Using SFCs

No fault routine

Restart at the first step Restart at the last active step

Not using SFCs

Fault routine

Start at the first ladder file Restart using the first ladder rung in the fault routine file

Using a fault file

SFCs

Restart using the fault file and then the first step Restart using the fault file and then the last active step

Not using a fault file

Not using SFCs

Start at the first ladder file in the processors memory

Each x indicates a bit that can be 0 or 1 for the status value described.

To set and reset bits:

1 Cursor to the bit location. 2 Set or reset the bit by entering 1 or 0, respectively.

11-6

Configuring Your Processor

Configure Processor Resident Rack Address Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

The processor resident rack address is set to 0. If you need the address to be 1, set bit 2 of the user control bits (S:26).
6200 Main Menu

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

User Control Bits

00000000 00000100 0 0 N34

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

START AT RACK 1 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 0

General Utilities
F7

Proc Config
F3

Note

If you use rack 1 as the first resident local rack, rack 0 I/O data cannot be used for remote I/O; it can be used for storage only.

S:26/2 0 1

Defines: the first resident local rack to equal 0 (default). the first resident local rack to equal 1.

11-7

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure Processor Resident Local I/O Block Transfer Compatibility Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
6200 Main Menu

The processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility is set to 0. If you encounter checksum errors when using certain BT modules, set bit 4 of the user control bits (S:26).
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration
Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00010000 0 0 N34 RESTART FIRST STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 0

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

Proc Config
F3

S:26/4 0 1

Defines: a normal block transfer operation (default). the elimination of frequent checksum errors to certain BT modules.

11-8

Configuring Your Processor

Configure Adapter Channel Response Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

6200 Main Menu

The adapter channel response is set to 0. If you need the adapter response to be delayed so that an Enhanced PLC-5 processor (in adapter mode) can communicate with a PLC-3 processor, set bit 5 of the user control bits (S:26).
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration
Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00100000 0 0 N34 RESTART FIRST STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 0

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

Proc Config
F3

S:26/5 0 1

Defines: the adapter channel response operates in the normal response time (default). the adapter channel response is delayed by 1ms

11-9

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure Memory Protect Feature

6200 Main Menu

The memory protect feature defaults to 0. If you need to restrict forcing or data table changes via the data monitor, set bit 6 of the user control bits (S:26).
Classic PLC-5 Processor Status

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status

Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 01000000 00000000 11001000

Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE

General Utilities
F7

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

User Control Bits

00000000 01000000 0 0 N34

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

RESTART FIRST STEP MEMORY PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): Communication time slice (ms):

500 0

S:26/6 0 1

Defines: the data table and forces can be edited in Run mode (default). the data table and forces cannot be edited when the processor keyswitch is in Run mode.

Note

The following message is displayed to confirm the setting of the memory protect bit: Protect Memory (Forces and Data Table) when in RUN mode? The following message is displayed to confirm the clearing of the memory protect bit: Unprotect Memory (Forces and Data Table) when in RUN mode? If the processor is in Run mode, the memory protect bit is set, and the user attempts to change Forces or Data Table values, the change is not made and the following message is displayed: MEMORY PROTECTED IN RUN MODE To achieve the intended memory protection, each programming terminal on your site must use release 5.2 and later. Miscellaneous devices (i.e., operator interfaces, programming terminals without 6200 programming software, etc.) that can access the data table ignore the memory protect setting.

Note

Note

11-10

Configuring Your Processor

Configure Communication Time Slice Between MCPs Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

6200 Main Menu

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

Use the communication time slice (S:77) to add a period of time to basic housekeeping for communication functions, such as DH+, remote block transfers, and serial port operations. Using this feature sets housekeeping time to a constant. This feature is available on Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. For example, if you enter a value of 3, housekeeping is 3 (the value you entered) plus 3.1 (basic housekeeping), which equals a constant value of 6.1 ms.
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

General Utilities
F7 User Control Bits

Processor Configuration 00000000 00000000 0 0 N34 RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

Proc Config
F3

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

Cursor to this field and enter a value (0 - 32767). If you enter 0, this function is disabled.

Note

Any value added to the communication time slice (for example, 3 to 5 ms for correcting major fault code 88) increases the program scan by the value specified.

11-11

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure a Fault Routine

To configure the program file where the fault routine will reside, cursor to the fault routine program file number field (S:29) and enter a file number (3-999). Note
6200 Main Menu

The number of the program file to be executed when a major fault occurs must be defined in S:29. Set this field to zero if you do not use fault routines.
Classic PLC-5 Processor Status
DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Minor fault Major fault Fault code Where faulted Fault routine Select. timed inter. Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

rung: watchdog: setpoint:

0 500 0

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

User Control Bits

00000000 00000000 0 0 N34

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

Note

In addition to specifying the location of the fault routine, you must also create the program file and enter the logic for the fault routine. You can enter the fault routine using ladder logic, sequential function charts (SFCs), or structured text (ST).

11-12

Configuring Your Processor

Configure a Watchdog Timer

If your application requires the watchdog timer value to be changed, cursor to the watchdog timer field and enter a watchdog time (0-32767 ms). Note It is not recommended that the watchdog timer value be changed arbitrarily from the default value.
6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status

DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Minor fault Major fault Fault code Where faulted Fault routine Select. timed inter. Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

rung: watchdog: setpoint:

0 500 0

General Utilities
F7

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

User Control Bits

00000000 00000000 0 0 N34

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

If the watchdog timer expires because the program scan time exceeds the watchdog value, a fault routine is initiated and executed. Note The maximum time (in ms) for the watchdog timer (S:28) must be configured. If you use an SFC, this field contains the maximum time for a single pass through all the active steps. The minimum watchdog timer value is 10 ms. If you attempt to enter a lesser value, the watchdog timer will remain 10 ms.

Note

11-13

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Define an I/O Status File

The I/O status file stores data for I/O rack configuration tables. The I/O status from each remote I/O rack requires two words. These two words store the reset, present, inhibit, and fault bits for each rack. The I/O status file is required for automatic configuration. See chapter 12. The I/O status file is only supported in the following processors:

6200 Main Menu

Enhanced PLC-5 PLC-5/15 B/H and later PLC-5/25 A/D and later
Cursor to the I/O Status File field and enter an unused integer file number (9-255). If you do not want to use I/O rack configuration tables, enter 0. Release 3.21 and later of the programming software automatically creates the correct size I/O status file.

To configure an I/O Status File (S:16, low byte):

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1983 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A

General Utilities
F7

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00000000 0 N12 N34

PLC-5/VME (6008-LTV) processors only See page 11-18.

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

11-14

Configuring Your Processor

Addressing the I/O Status File

In a ladder program, you can address words and fault bits within the I/O status file. Figure 11.1 shows the arrangement of the words in the I/O status file for a given remote or extended local I/O rack. The example status file used for the figures in this section is integer file 15.

Figure 11.1 Word Arrangement in the I/O Status File Defined I/O Word in status file integer file N15:0 N15:1

rack 0 rack 3 (Maximum for PLC-5/11, -5/15, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 processors) (Maximum for PLC-5/25, -5/30, -5/V30 processors)

N15:14 N15:15 N15:30 N15:31 N15:46 N15:47

rack 7

rack 17 (Maximum for PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40,-5/V40L processors)

rack 27 (Maximum for PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 processors)

The first word for a rack contains present and fault bits, the second word contains reset and inhibit bits. Figure 11.2 shows present, fault, reset, and inhibit bit layouts for rack 7 in the I/O status file.

11-15

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Figure 11.2 Bit Layout Diagrams for the First Word Allotted to a Remote I/O Rack or an Extended Local I/O Rack
N15:14 (Rack 7, first I/O status word) 15 14 13 12 11 Present Bits 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 Fault Bits 02 01 00

Not Used

Not Used

This bit: Fault bits 00 01 02 03

Corresponds to: Each quarter rack has a fault bit assigned to it. A fault bit set to 1 indicates that the rack has faulted. If a rack is configured for full, then all 4 fault bits are set when a rack fault occurs.

first 1/4 rack starting I/O group 0 second 1/4 rack starting I/O group 2 third 1/4 rack starting I/O group 4 fourth1/4 rack starting I/O group 6

Present bits 08 09 10 11 first 1/4 rack starting I/O group 0 second 1/4 rack starting I/O group 2 third 1/4 rack starting I/O group 4 fourth 1/4 rack starting I/O group 6

Each quarter rack has a present bit. A present bit set to 1 indicates that the partial rack is present on the remote I/O link for that channel. A present bit appears only for the starting I/O group of each entry in the scan list. Examples: If a chassis contains racks 1 and 2 (full), then racks 1 and 2 will appear as separate entries in the scan list and present bits will be set for rack 1, starting group 0 and rack 2, starting group 0. The present bits for the remainder of racks 1 and 2 will not be set. If a chassis contains a 1/2 rack starting at rack 3, module group 4, then the preset bit for rack 3, module group 4 would be set; the present bit for rack 3, module group 6 would not be set.

11-16

Configuring Your Processor

Figure 11.3 Bit Layout Diagrams for the Second Word Allotted to a Remote I/O Rack or an Extended Local I/O Rack
N15:15 (Rack 7, second I/O status word) 15 14 13 12 11 Reset Bits 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 Inhibit Bits 02 01 00

Not Used

Not Used

This bit: Inhibit bits 00 01 02 03

Corresponds to: Each quarter rack has an inhibit bit. An inhibit bit set to 1 indicates that the partial rack has been inhibited by an auto-configure command or manually through the I/O rack configuration tables. If a rack is configured for full, then all 4 inhibit bits are set when a rack is globally inhibited.

first 1/4 rack starting I/O group 0 second 1/4 rack starting I/O group 2 third 1/4 rack starting I/O group 4 fourth1/4 rack starting I/O group 6

Reset bits 08 09 10 11 first 1/4 rack starting I/O group 0 second 1/4 rack starting I/O group 2 third 1/4 rack starting I/O group 4 fourth 1/4 rack starting I/O group 6 Each quarter rack has a reset bit assigned. A reset bit set to 1 indicates that the partial rack has been reset.

Attention: When you use a ladder program or the software to inhibit and reset an I/O rack, you must set or clear the reset and inhibit bits that correspond to each quarter rack in a given chassis. Failure to set all the appropriate bits could cause unpredictable operation due to scanning only part of the I/O chassis.

11-17

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure a Status File for PLC-5/VME Processors

Use the VME status file field (S:15) to configure an unused file for status data collection.
PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25, -5/VME Processor Status
DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1983 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00000000 0 N12 N34 RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File:

If this file doesnt exist or it is the wrong size, release 3.21 and later of the programming software automatically creates the correct size VME status file. If the processor doesnt support VME, N/A appears and you cannot cursor in this field.

11-18

Configuring Your Processor

Configure an Adapter Image File PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25, -5/VME Processors

An adapter image file is a file through which an adapter-mode PLC-5 processor communicates to a supervisory processor. Use the adapter image file field (S:25) on the Processor Status screen to configure an adapter image file for PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25 and -5/VME processors.
6200 Main Menu

PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25, -5/VME Processor Status

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1983 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: 3 I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

Enter an integer file number to configure the adapter image file.

Proc Status
F2

The file you assign must be an unused integer data file (16 words long). An adapter image file less than 16 words generates a fault. This field shows N/A if the processor is in scanner mode. If you dont enter a file number, the default is the I/O data file section for rack 3 and the default addresses are I:30-I:37 and O:30-O:37. Note You assign adapter image files for Enhanced PLC-5 processors when you configure a channel for adapter mode communications. See chapter 13.

11-19

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure Processor Input Interrupt (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors)

6200 Main Menu

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

A processor input interrupt (PII) causes the processor to interrupt program execution and run a PII program file once to completion. Afterwards, the processor resumes executing the program file from where it was interrupted. PIIs are available with Enhanced PLC-5 processors only.
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration
Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00000000 0 0 N34 RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

General Utilities
F7

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File: Processor input interrupt

Proc Config
F3

prog file no.: 0 module group: down count: 0 bit mask: 00000000 00000000 compare value: 00000000 00000000

For more information about PIIs, see the 1785 PLC-5 Design Manual. To setup a PII, you must:

Specify the program file number where the PII program resides using the Processor Configuration screen. Create the program file and enter the logic for the PII program file. You can write the PII program using ladder logic, sequential function charts (SFCs), or structured text (ST).

11-20

Configuring Your Processor

Use this table to help you configure a PII.

In this PII Configuration Field: program file number module group Do the Following: Enter the number of the program file that contains the PII program. Enter the assigned rack number and I/O group number of the input to monitor (e.g. 21 for rack 2, group 1). Do not enter the address. (Only for inputs in the processor-resident chassis). Each module group (specified in S:47) has a control bit that is used to monitor the module group. To monitor the bit, enter the hexadecimal value for 1. To ignore the bit, enter the hexadecimal value for 0. Each module group (specified in S:47) has a bit that is used when controlling a PII through bit transition. For a false to true transition to count (bit trigger), enter 1. For a true to false transition to count (event trigger), enter 0. Enter a preset value to determine how many conditions you want to occur before the interrupt. Valid range is 0 32,767. If you want the interrupt to occur every time, enter a 0 or 1 . Status File Word: S:46 S:47

bit mask

S:48

compare value

S:49

down count

S:50

Note

Some PII programming considerations are:

Be aware that if your application requires BT modules in the resident local chassis, PII inputs may not be detected when the BT data is transferred into the data table (less than 400 microseconds). To improve the detection of PIIs, use a PII input pulse that is greater than or equal to 400 microseconds. Do not perform online editing while the processor is in Run mode; doing so affects the PII routine. For PIIs to execute, the PII input must be ON (true) for a time period slightly greater than the online edit completion time. Do not use the 1771-IG or -IGD (8 and 16 point) TTL input modules when using PIIs. These modules cause a ram fault to occur after cycling power to the resident local chassis, requiring you to reload memory. Do not use 2-slot addressing when using PIIs.

11-21

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure Selectable Timed Interrupt

A selectable timed interrupt (STI) specifies when a time-driven event causes the processor to periodically interrupt program execution to run an STI program once to completion. Afterwards, the processor resumes executing the original program file from where it was interrupted. To configure a selectable timed interrupt, you must do the following:

specify the program file number where the STI program resides specify the set point, which is the time interval in ms when the interrupt occurs create the program file and enter the logic for the STI program file. You can write the STI program using ladder logic, sequential function charts (SFCs), or structured text (ST).

For more information about using STIs, see the 1785 PLC-5 Design Manual. Use program file and setpoint fields to configure an STI.
6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status

DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Minor fault Major fault Fault code Where faulted Fault routine Select. timed inter. Program scan [msec] Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 prog file: 0 last: 0 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utilities
F7

rung: watchdog: setpoint: max:

0 500 0 10

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration

Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00000000 0 0 N34 RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

Proc Status
F2

Proc Config or
F3

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: VME Status File: Processor input interrupt

bit mask: compare value: prog file no.: prog file no.:

0 0 0 0

down count: module group:

0 0

Selectable timed interrupt

setpoint (ms): 0

11-22

Configuring Your Processor

In this STI Configuration Field: program file number set point

Do the Following: Enter the number of the program file that contains the STI program. If you are not using an STI, enter zero. Enter the time interval between interrupts (1 to 32767 ms). If you are not using an STI, enter zero. Note: Remember to specify an interrupt time longer than the STI file execution time. If you do not, the processor sets a minor fault (S:10, bit 2).

Status File Word: S:31 S:30

Note

Due to run mode editing, an STI cannot interrupt processor memory management. An STI may not be detected if you perform online editing while the processor is in Run mode.

11-23

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure Main Control Programs (MCPs)

6200 Main Menu

The Enhanced PLC-5 processors have the capability of running 16 main control programs. During processor configuration, you can specify:

Online Prog
F1

the program file number of up to 16 main control programs you want to run which programs you want to disable whether or not you want an I/O scan after the MCP; available on the Enhanced PLC-5 processors (PLC-5/30 series A and later, PLC-5/60 series A, revision D and later, and PLC-5/80 series C) only

Select file with cursor keys

For more information about running multiple main control programs, see the 1785 PLC-5 Design Manual. Use the Processor Configuration screen to configure main control programs.
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Configuration
Processor Configuration

General Utilities
F7

Proc Config
F3

User control bits:

00000000 00000000 0 0

Fault routine prog file no.: I/O status file: Processor input interrupt

RESTART FIRST STEP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE Watchdog (ms): 500 Communication time slice (ms): 3

bit mask: 00000000 00000000 compare value: 00000000 00000000 down count: 0 prog file no.: 0 module group: prog file no.: 0 setpoint:

0 0

Selectable timed interrupt

Main control program File Name A: 3 proc-ab123 B: 2 proc-ab122 C: 3 proc-ab124 D: E:

Disable 0 (scan MCP) 1 (skip MCP) 0 (scan MCP)

I/O Update 0 (scan I/O) 1 (skip I/O) 1 (skip I/O)

Use [down arrow] or [PageDown] to scroll the screen down, exposing more MCP set-up fields. Note You can specify any program file as a main control program. Each main control program can be written using ladder logic, sequential function charts (SFCs), or structured text (ST).

11-24

Configuring Your Processor

In this Main Control Program Configuration Field: file

Do the Following: Enter program file numbers for MCPs (Main Control Programs) A to P. If you specify an MCP file that does not exist or is not a ladder program, SFC file, structured text file or unused, a major fault is logged in the status file. A minor fault is also logged if all MCP program files are set to zero. Note: When you change the program file number, 6200 programming software will display the corresponding program file name. This is a read-only field. Note: The program file name can be changed from the Program Directory screen only. For more information on changing a program file name, see the Programming manual. By setting or resetting the bit in these fields, you tell the processor which main control programs you want to scan. If an MCP program file is inhibited, the processor skips the file and goes to the next program file. To set and reset the bits for Main Control Programs A-P, cursor to the appropriate field and type 1 to disable (skip) this MCP or 0 to enable (scan) this MCP. Then, press [Enter]. If the disable bit is set for all the MCP program files, which indicates a skip of all control programs, a minor fault is logged in the processor status file. A 1 in this field tells the processor to skip the I/O scan after this MCP. The default 0 tells the processor to perform the I/O scan after the corresponding MCP. To specify the I/O bit, cursor to the appropriate field and type 0 or 1. Press [Enter]. This feature is available on Enhanced PLC-5 processors (PLC-5/30 series A and later, PLC-5/60 series A, revision D and later, and PLC-5/80 series C) only.

Status File Word: S:80 S:125

name

disable bit

S:79

I/O update bit

S:78

11-25

Configuring PrefaceYour Processor

Configure the VME PLC-5 Processor

Make sure the correct processor memory file is current.
Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

The VME status file is a user selected integer file in the processor memory. The VME status file number is in word 15 of the VME PLC-5 processor status file. Use the VME Configuration screen to configure continuous VME read/write transfers to the VMEbus. For more information on the VME status file, see the PLC-V5 VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual.
VME Configuration Copy from VME: Error: VME address: Length (words): Destination file: ENABLED 0xff 0xffff3f 20 N51:000 Copy to VME: Error: Source file: Length (words): VME address: DISABLED 0x00 N42:000 21 0x000000

General Utility
F7

Proc Config
F3

Proc Status

Source address modifier: 0x3D Data size: D8(EVEN ODD) Interrupt: Status/ID: LEVEL 1 0x56

Destination address modifier: 0x2D Data size: D16 Interrupt: Status/ID: DISABLED 0x00

or

F2

VME Config
F1 F4

or

VME Status
F3 F4

Respond to VME interrupts: Level 1: Respond: YES 2: Respond: NO

Received: Received:

NO NO

Status/ID: 0x43 Status/ID: 0x00

VME Config
F4

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. N40:6/15 = Rem Prog Forces:None 5/40V File NP540 Accept VME Select Edits Status Option F1 F4 F10

If You Want to: Apply the new information to the VME processor 1 Bring up the VME Status screen Make other selections Move to the next screen Go back to the Processor Configuration screen
1

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F4] VME Status [F10] Select Option [PageDown] [Esc]

If you use ladder logic to make changes to your VME status file, you must set word 28, bit 8 to 1 to apply the changes to your VME processor.

11-26

Using Processor and I/O Status

12

Using Processor and I/O Status

Chapter Objectives
This chapter describes how to interpret the information on the Processor Status screen. Use the Processor Status screen to monitor:

processor status information major and minor faults STIs PIIs program scan times I/O status

Processor Status File

Processor status data is stored in data file 2. See Table 12.A for processor status file addresses. Note
References to: Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Unless otherwise stated:

Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and your

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors
application expertise.

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

12-1

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Table 12.A Processor Status File Addresses

This Word of the Status File: S:0 Stores: Arithmetic flags bit 0 = carry bit 1 = overflow bit 2 = zero bit 3 = sign See: 12-16 and Instruction Set Reference manual 12-11 12-13 and PLC-5 Hardware Installation Manual

S:1 S:2

Processor status and flags Switch setting information bits 0 7DH+ station number bit 11 12are set based on the I/O chassis backplane switches bit 12 bit 11 0 0 illegal 1 0 1/2-slot 0 1 1-slot 1 1 2-slot bit 13: 1 = load from EEPROM bit 14: 1 = RAM backup not configured bit 15: 1 = memory unprotected Active Node table for channel 1A Word 3 4 5 6 Bits 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 DH+ Station # 00-17 20-37 40-57 60-77

S:3 to S:6

12-17 and PLC-5 Hardware Installation Manual (Continued)

12-2

Using Processor and I/O Status

This Word of the Status File: S:7 (Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40B, -5/V40L, PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, PLC-5/86, -5/V80) (PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80)

Stores: Global status bits: low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 0-7 high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 0-7 low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 10-17 (octal) high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 10-17 low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 20-27 (octal) high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 20-27 Last program scan (in ms) Maximum program scan (in ms) Minor fault (word 1) Major fault Fault codes Program file where fault occurred Rung number where fault occurred

See: 12-27

S:32

S:34

S:8 S:9 S:10 S:11 S:12 S:13 S:14 S:15 S:16 S:17 S:18 S:19 S:20 S:21 S:22 S:23 S:24 S:25 (PLC-5/12, -5/15, -5/25) Enhanced PLC-5 processors PLC-5/VME processor

12-18 12-18 12-8 12-8 12-9 12-10 12-10 11-18 11-14 12-8 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-14 12-16 11-19 (Continued)

VME Status File I/O Status File Minor fault (word 2) Processor clock year Processor clock month Processor clock day Processor clock hour Processor clock minute Processor clock second Indexed addressing offset I/O Adapter image file

12-3

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

This Word of the Status File: S:26

Stores: User control bits Bit Description 0 Restart/continuous SFC 1 Start-up protection after power loss 2 Define the address of the local rack 4 Configure processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility bit 5 Set adapter channel response time 6 Configure memory protect feature

See:

11-5 11-5 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 12-29

S:27

(Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40B, -5/V40L, PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, PLC-5/86, -5/V80) (PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80)

Rack control bits: low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 0-7 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 0-7 low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 10-17 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 10-17 low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 20-27 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 20-27 Program watchdog setpoint Fault routine file STI setpoint STI file number

S:33

S:35

S:28 S:29 S:30 S:31 S:46 S:47 S:48 S:49 S:50 S:51 S:52 S:53 S:54 S:55 S:56 (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors)

11-13 11-12 11-22 11-22 11-21 11-21 11-21 11-21 11-21 12-21 12-21 12-22 12-22 12-21 12-21 (Continued)

PII program file number PII module group PII bit mask PII compare value PII down count PII changed bits PII events since last interrupt STI scan time (in ms) STI maximum scan time (in ms) PII last scan time (in ms) PII maximum scan time (in ms)

12-4

Using Processor and I/O Status

This Word of the Status File: S:57 S:59 S:60 S:61 S:62 S:63 1 S:76 1 (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (PLC-5/40L, -5/60L) (PLC-5/40L, -5/60L) (PLC-5/40L, -5/60L) (PLC-5/40L, -5/60L) (Protected PLC-5 processors) (ControlNet PLC-5 processors)

Stores: User program checksum Extended local I/O channel discrete transfer scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel discrete maximum scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel block-transfer scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel maximum block transfer scan (in ms) Protected-processor data-table protection-file number Number of slots in processor-resident local rack 0 Illegal 1 4 slots 2 12 slots 3 8 slots 4 16 slots Communication time slice for communication housekeeping functions (in ms) I/O scan after MCP MCP inhibit bits MCP file number MCP scan time (in ms) MCP max scan time (in ms)

See: 12-20 12-26 12-26 12-26 12-26 n/a n/a

S:77 S:78 S:79 S:80-S:127

(Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Enhanced PLC-5 processors)

11-11 11-25 11-25 11-25 12-18

1 These status words are not displayed on the Processor Status screen.

12-5

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Interpreting Processor Status Information

To monitor processor status information, follow the steps on the left:
For this Processors Status Screen: Enhanced PLC-5 Classic PLC-5 See: Figure 12.1 Figure 12.2

Figure 12.1 Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen, Page 1

6200 Main Menu
Processor Status Fault Where Major Minor code: faulted: fault: fault 1: 2: Processor status: I/O status I/O control 0 0:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10001000

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

btx full: rack fault: reset: inhibit:

Mode switch in remote 27 20 17 10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

7 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

General Utilities
F7

Arithmetic flags: S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 RTC date: 0000 00 00 Processor checksum: 0x0000 EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Memory: PROTECTED

RTC time: Indexed addressing offset: Resident I/O chassis addr: Ram Backup:

00:00:00 0 1 SLOT DISABLED

Proc Status
F2

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. S:12 = Rem Prog Forces:None 5/40V File BATCHTES Proc VME Clear Clear Config Status Min Flt Maj Flt F2 F4 F9 F10

If You Want to: Go to the Processor Configuration screen Go to the VME Status screen Reset all minor faults Reset all major faults Access all pages of the Processor Status screen

Press this Key: [F2] Processor Configuration [F4] VME Status (for VME PLC-5) [F9] Clear Minor Fault [F10] Clear Major Fault [Page Up] or [Page Down]

12-6

Using Processor and I/O Status

Figure 12.2 Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control baits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1994 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A Active node list 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001

Press a function key or enter a value. S:0/3 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal I/O VME Status Config F3 F4

Addr:Decimal PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Clear Clear Min Flt Maj Flt F9 F10

If You Want to: Display I/O status information Display additional status information for a PLC-5/VME processor Reset all the minor fault bits Reset all major fault bits

Press this Key: [F3] I/O Status [F4] VME Configuration [F9] Clear Minor Fault [F10] Clear Major Fault

12-7

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Monitoring Faults
Monitor faults that occur in your processor system using the Processor Status screen.
You Can Monitor: minor and major faults Description: Processor faults are categorized into major and minor faults. The processor displays a unique bit for each fault and displays text that describes the fault. Fault codes provide information about processor-defined errors.

fault codes

For information about configuring remote I/O rack faults as minor faults and monitoring and recovering from local or remote I/O rack faults, see the PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Design Manual. When a fault occurs, the Processor Status screen displays program file and rung number indicators that locate where the fault occurred.
Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen
DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Minor fault Major fault Fault code Where faulted Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 0 prog file: 0 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

rung:

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

Processor Status Fault Where Major Minor code faulted: fault: fault 1: 2: 0 0:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

12-8

Using Processor and I/O Status

Interpret Major Faults

The PLC-5 processor stores the major fault bits in S:11. For a list and description of the major faults, see chapter 17. See Table 12.B for information on interpreting and clearing major faults. Table 12.B Understanding and Clearing Major Faults
For these Processors: Classic PLC-5 Follow these Rules for Displaying Major Fault Text: The status text that appears corresponds to most recent major fault. If no bits are set the message area is blank. The status text that appears corresponds to the most significant fault when the cursor is not on the major fault status word. If the cursor is on a major fault word bit and that bit is set, the status text that appears corresponds to the bit that the cursor is on. If no bits are set the message area is blank. Clear Faults by: Pressing [F10] Clear Major Fault on the Processor Status screen to reset all major faults. When you clear major faults, the fault code, program file and rung number fields are also cleared. Resetting individual bits. If you have more than one major fault and you reset a bit, the status text displays the next major fault message.

Enhanced PLC-5

Interpret Fault Codes

Use fault codes to identify processor-defined errors. The processor stores fault codes in S:12. For a list and description of the fault codes, see chapter 17.

Interpret Minor Faults

The PLC-5 processor stores the minor fault bit in S:10. Since the Enhanced PLC-5 processors use two words for minor faults, these processors store the second minor fault word in S:17. For a list and description of the minor faults, see chapter 17.

12-9

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

See Table 12.C for information on interpreting and clearing minor faults.

Table 12.C Understanding and Clearing Minor Faults

For these Processors: Classic PLC-5 Follow these Rules for Displaying Minor Fault Text: The status text that appears corresponds to most recent minor fault. If no bits are set the message area is blank. The status text that appears corresponds to the most significant fault when the cursor is not on the minor fault status words. If the cursor is on a minor fault word bit and that bit is set, the status text that appears corresponds to the bit that the cursor is on. If no bits are set, the message area is blank. Clear Faults by: Pressing [F9] Clear Minor Faults to reset all minor faults

Enhanced PLC-5

Resetting individual bits. If you have more than one minor fault and you reset a bit, the status text displays the next minor fault message.

Locate the Program File and Rung Number where a Fault Occurred
The processor displays on the Processor Status screen the program file and rung number or SFC step where the last fault occurred.
This Value: program file rung number Is Stored in: S:13 S:14

12-10

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitoring Processor Status

Use the processor status field to monitor your processor. The field displays status information in text and in binary format (S:1).
Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen
6200 Main Menu
DH+ station: 20 Ram backup: DISABLED Arithmetic flags User control bits Processor status Minor fault Major fault Fault code Where faulted Mode: SCANNER Memory: UNPROTECTED S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000 00000000 00000010 00000000 00000000 0 prog file: 0 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Prog
F1

rung:

General Utilities
F7

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

Processor Status Fault code Where faulted: Major fault: Minor fault 1: Minor fault 2: Processor status: 0 0:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11001000

Proc Status
F2

Processor status bit values and associated text are as follows:

If the Status Bit Values Are: 15.....8 7......0 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx1 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx10 xxxxxxxx xxxxx100 xxxxxxxx xxxx1000 xxxxxxxx xxx10000 xxxxxxxx xx100000 xxxxxxxx x1000000 xxxxxxxx 10000000 xxxxxxx1 00000000 xxxxxx10 00000000 Bit Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Then the Fault Is: Bad RAM checksum at powerup Processor is in Run mode Processor is in Test mode Processor is in Program mode Currently burning EEPROM Downloading in process Test edits enabled Mode switch in REMOTE Forces enabled Forces present (Continued)
12-11

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

If the Status Bit Values Are: 15.....8 7......0 xxxxx100 00000000 xxxx1000 00000000 xx100000 00000000 x1000000 00000000 10000000 00000000

Bit Number: 10 11 13 14 15

Then the Fault Is: EEPROM successfully burned Performing online programming User program checksum done Last scan of SFC step First scan of Ladder or SFC step

Each x indicates a bit that can be 0 or 1 for the status value described.

Monitoring VME PLC-5 Processor Status

Make sure the correct processor memory file is current.
Online Prog
F1 or

Use the VME Status screen to monitor the data that the VME status file contains, including status of the VMEbus and the VME configuration.
VME Status

Offline Prog
F3 VME A16 Registers: Start address:

0xFC00

SYSFAIL: PLC: System:

ASSERTED NOT ASSERTED

General Utility
F7

A24 Slave Memory: Start address:

DISABLED 0x000000

Bus Options: Slot 1 controller: NO Release type: RELEASE WHEN DONE

Proc Status
F2 or

Proc Config
F3 Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None VME Config F4

VME Status
F4

VME Config
F4

5/40V File NP540

If You Want to:

VME Status
F4

Press this Key: [F4] VME Config

Display the VME Configuration screen

12-12

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitoring Processor Information

6200 Main Menu

Use the Processor Status screen to monitor information about the processor such as:

run-time date and time local I/O chassis backplane settings such as:

Online Prog
F1

addressing method the processor is using RAM backup status memory status EEPROM status

General Utilities
F7

Proc Status
F2

12-13

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

I/O addressing method* EEPROM status* processor memory protection*

Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

RAM backup status *

processor clock

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 User control bits 00000000 00000000 Processor status 00000000 11001000 Minor fault 00000000 00000010 Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 Date/time 1994 10 03 21:59:39

software memory protection**

rung: 0 watchdog: 500 setpoint: 0 max: 10 Indexed addressing offset

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen I/O addressing method* processor clock EEPROM status* processor memory protection*
Arithmetic flags: S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 RTC date: 0000 00 00 Processor checksum: 0x0000 EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Memory: PROTECTED RTC time: Indexed addressing offset: Resident I/O chassis addr: Ram Backup: 00:00:00 0 1 SLOT DISABLED

RAM backup status* If RAM backup displays ENABLED, EEPROM memory transfers to CMOS RAM if the CMOS RAM is not valid. * Determined by the resident I/O chassis backplane setting. ** Determined by the memory protect feature (see page 11-10).

View the Processor Clock

The processor stores the date and time in S:18-S:23. This field displays the current time and date that is set in the processor.
This value: year month day Is stored in: S:18 S:19 S:20 This value: hour minute second Is stored in: S:21 S:22 S:23

12-14

Using Processor and I/O Status

View Local I/O Chassis Backplane Settings

Use the Processor Status display to view the local I/O chassis backplane settings. The status screen lets you see:
This: I/O addressing method selected for the processor Description: The processor displays the I/O addressing switch selection on the local I/O chassis backplane. Valid addressing selections are 1/2-slot, 1-slot, and 2-slot. This field displays N/A for a PLC-5/VME processor. The processor displays whether the RAM backup is enabled or disabled based on the local I/O chassis backplane switch setting. The processor displays whether its RAM memory is protected or unprotected based on local I/O chassis backplane switch setting. An EEPROM is used to store processor memory files in case the files are lost. The EEPROM field displays one of the following power-up transfer settings based on the local I/O chassis backplane switch setting: TRANSFER AT POWERUP the EEPROM memory transfers to processor memory at power-up. TRANSFER DISABLED EEPROM memory does not transfer to processor memory. TRANSFER ON BAD RAM EEPROM memory transfers to processor memory if the processor memory is not valid.

RAM backup status

processor memory protection

EEPROM status

For more information on setting these switches, see the PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Hardware Installation Manual.

12-15

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Monitoring Arithmetic Flags and Indexed Addressing Offset

Use the Processor Status screen to monitor the indexed addressing offset and arithmetic flags values.
6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 User control bits 00000000 00000000 Processor status 00000000 11001000 Minor fault 00000000 00000010 Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 Date/time 1994 10 03 21:59:39 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Prog
F1

General Utilities
F7

rung: 0 watchdog: 500 setpoint: 0 max: 10 Indexed addressing offset

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

Proc Status
F2 Arithmetic flags: S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 RTC date: 0000 00 00 Processor checksum: 0x0000 EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Memory: PROTECTED

RTC time: Indexed addressing offset: Resident I/O chassis addr: Ram Backup:

00:00:00 0 1 SLOT DISABLED

This Field: Arithmetic Flags

Displays: the result of arithmetic operations. The flags are sign, zero, overflow, and carry (S, Z, V, C respectively). The bit values for the processor arithmetic flags are displayed here next to the associated flag. The processor stores these values in S:0. the current offset that is used with indexed addressing. The processor stores this value in S:24 and uses the value to calculate the effective address (base address + offset) for all indexed instructions operations. You can change this value only with ladder logic.

Indexed Addressing Offset

12-16

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitoring the DH+ Link for Classic PLC-5 Processors

View the processors DH+ station number and monitor the active node table using the Processor Status screen.
6200 Main Menu
DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1994 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A Active node list 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001

Online Prog
F1

Select file with cursor keys

General Utilities
F7

For example: The bits set on this screen represent S:4/0 (station 20) and S:6/15 (station 77).

Proc Status
F2

This Field: DH+ Station

Displays: the DH+ address of the processor in octal format. If you are programming online, this information is repeated on the right-hand end of the system status line (line 21). If you are programming offline, this field shows N/A. (S:3-S:6) shows what stations are active on the DH+ network. Each bit represents a station number (0-77 octal) and if set, indicates that the corresponding station is present on the link.

Active Node List

Note

With Enhanced PLC-5 processors, the active node table is stored in status words S:3-S:6, but it is not displayed on the Processor Status screen or the Processor Configuration screen. In order to display the active node table in these processors, move the status words S:3-S:6 to an integer data file or display the DH+ channel diagnostics file (the first four words reflect the DH+ active node table).

12-17

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Monitoring Program Scan

Use the Processor Status screen to monitor:

the last and maximum program scan times (in ms) (S:8, S:9) last and maximum program scan for each main control program being used (for Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

To monitor the program scan of Enhanced PLC-5 processors, use page two of the Processor Status screen. To access this screen, press [Page Down] from the first page of the Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status screen.
6200 Main Menu

Classic PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 User control bits 00000000 00000000 Processor status 00000000 11001000 Minor fault 00000000 00000010 Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 Date/time 1994 10 03 21:59:39 Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE RESTART FIRST STEP MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE DH+ TABLE CHANGE

Online Prog
F1

General Utilities
F7

rung: 0 watchdog: 500 setpoint: 0 max: 10 Indexed addressing offset

Proc Status
F2

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen, Page 2

Processor Status scan [ms] last: 0 events since last interrupt: changed bits

Processor input interrupt

maximum: 0 0 00000000 00000000

Selectable timed interrupt scan [ms] Overall program scan [ms] Main control program File Name A: 3 proc-ab123 B: 2 proc-ab122 C: 3 proc-ab124 D: E:

last: last:

0 0

maximum: maximum:

0 0

last scan (ms) 0 0 0

maximum scan (ms) 0 0 0

12-18

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitor the Program Scan

For this Processor: Classic PLC-5 Use this field to monitor program scan: Program Scan [ms] last: (S:8) This field contains the time it took (in ms) for the current or last scan through the ladder program or for a single pass through all the SFC active steps. The resolution is to the nearest 10 ms. Enhanced PLC-5 Overall Program Scan [ms] last: (S:8) This field displays the current or last scan time through all main control programs and interrupts. The resolution is to the nearest 1 ms. maximum: (S:9) This field displays the maximum value that was displayed in the last scan field. maximum: (S:9) This field contains the maximum value (in ms) that was displayed in the last scan field.

Monitor Main Control Program Scans (S:80-S:127)

These lines display last scan and maximum scan times for each of the 16 possible main control programs (labeled A-P) for Enhanced PLC-5 processors. To scroll the screen so it shows all the main control programs, use the up and down arrow keys.
This Scan Field: Last scan (ms) Maximum scan (ms) Displays: the time it took for the current or last scan for a particular main control program. the maximum value that was displayed in the last scan field for a particular main control program. Do the Following: type a value (0 to 65535) and press [Enter]. type a value (0 to 65535) and press [Enter].

12-19

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Monitoring the Processor Checksum (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors)

Use the processor checksum (S:57) to keep track of changes to your ladder programs. Every time an edit is made to your program, the checksum field changes.
Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen
Arithmetic flags: S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 RTC date: 0000 00 00 Processor checksum: 0x0000 EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Memory: PROTECTED

RTC time: Indexed addressing offset: Resident I/O chassis addr: Ram Backup:

00:00:00 0 1 SLOT DISABLED

For example, you can use the checksum field to compare the program files of two processor memory files to make sure that they are the same. You can also use it to make sure no changes have been made to the program files in a processor memory file.

12-20

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitoring Plls (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Only)

Use the second page of the Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status screen to monitor Processor Input Interrupts (PII).
6200 Main Menu

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen, Page 2

Processor Status Processor input interrupt

Online Prog
F1

scan [ms] last: 0 events since last interrupt: changed bits last: last: 0 0

0 0 00000000 00000000 maximum: maximum: 0 0

maximum:

Selectable timed interrupt scan [ms] Overall program scan [ms]

General Utilities
F7

Main control program File Name A: 3 proc-ab123 B: 2 proc-ab122 C: 3 proc-ab124 D:

last scan (ms) 0 0 0

maximum scan (ms) 0 0 0

Proc Status
F2

This Field: Changed Bits

Displays: (S:51) the mask of bits that have changed. If a bit is 1, the bit has changed since the last interrupt. If a bit is 0, it has not changed since the last interrupt. Note: The changed bits are retentive; it is the users responsibility to reset and clear these bits when executing a PII file. A CLR instruction can be used as the last rung on a PII file. (S:52) the number of events since the last PII. (S:55) the current or last scan time through the PII. (S:56) the maximum value that was displayed in the last scan field.

Events Since Last Interrupt Last Maximum

12-21

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Monitoring STls (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Only)

Use the second page of the Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status screen to monitor Selectable Time Interrupt (STI) scan.
6200 Main Menu

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen, Page 2

Processor Status Processor input interrupt scan [ms] last: 0 events since last interrupt: changed bits last: last: 0 0 0 0 00000000 00000000 maximum: maximum: 0 0 maximum:

Online Prog
F1

Selectable timed interrupt scan [ms] Overall program scan [ms] Main control program File Name A: 3 proc-ab123 B: 2 proc-ab122 C: 3 proc-ab124 D: E:

General Utilities
F7

last scan (ms) 0 0 0

maximum scan (ms) 0 0 0

Proc Status
F2

This Scan Field: Last Maximum

Displays: (S:53) the current or last scan time through the STI. (S:54) the maximum value that was displayed in the last scan field.

12-22

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitoring and Controlling I/O

You monitor and control I/O differently depending upon the processor.
For these Processors: Classic PLC-5 Use this Screen: I/O Status (displays global I/O status and control bits as well as I/O rack configuration tables) Processor Status (displays global I/O status and control bits) Scanner Mode Channel Status (displays I/O rack configuration tables). See Interpreting Scanner Mode Status Data in chapter 14.

Enhanced PLC-5

The software does not display I/O status information if you have an earlier version than a PLC-5/15 series B, rev H or PLC-5/25 series A, rev D in scanner mode.

12-23

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Using the I/O Status Screen

Use the I/O Status screen to both monitor remote rack status and to reset and inhibit remote racks in PLC-5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors.
6200 Main Menu
I/O STATUS 00000000 rack fault 00000000 inhibit:

I/O STATUS I/O CONTROL

btx full reset:

00001110 00000000

Online Prog
F1

Rack 0 FULL

IO 000/00 to 007/17 LOCAL Fault INHIBIT

RESET

IO 010/00 to 017/17 Rack 1 REMOTE Fault INHIBIT

RESET

global status bits global control bits

IO 020/00 to 027/17 Rack 2 REMOTE Fault INHIBIT

RESET

IO 030/00 to 037/17 Rack 3 REMOTE Fault INHIBIT

RESET

General Utilities
F7 Press a function key or enter a value. S:7/15 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal Auto Proc Toggle Toggle Config Status Inhibit Reset F1 F2 F4 F5

I/O rack configuration tables

Proc Status
F2

Addr:Decimal PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Add Remove Rack Rack F8 F10

Specify an integer file of sufficient length in I/O status field

I/O Status
F3

12-24

Using Processor and I/O Status

If You Want to: Reconfigure the I/O scanner system based on the I/O list the scanner creates. Toggle all the bits for the cursored rack in and out of the inhibit state. This key is only active for the status bits in the I/O rack configuration tables, not for the global status bits. Toggle all the bits for the cursored rack in and out of the reset state. This key is only active for the status bits in the I/O rack configuration tables, not for the global status bits. Add an I/O rack to the current I/O configuration if the processor supports multiple-chassis I/O racks. The chassis should already exist. Remove an I/O rack from the current I/O configuration if the processor supports multiple-chassis I/O racks. The chassis must already exist.

Press this Key: [F1] Automatic Configuration [F4] Toggle Inhibit

[F5] Toggle Reset

[F8] Add Rack

[F10] Remove Rack

All of the above options are available for remote I/O racks and processors that support multiple-chassis I/O racks. The I/O Status screen displays the data monitor information contained in the status file, words 7 and 27. The remainder of the screen displays the data in the I/O status file that you specify. The input line displays the address corresponding to the current cursor location (when the cursor is on lines 0 or 1). The status line displays the mode, force status, data radix, address radix, processor type, and its station number on the link. For a system that has I/O racks numbered 4, 5, 6 or 7, the I/O Status screen has two separate screens. The first screen displays the I/O status for racks 0, 1, 2 and 3. The second screen displays the I/O status for the remaining racks. To see the status information for racks 4, 5, 6 and 7, press [Page Down]; press [Page Up] to return to the original screen. If your system has racks 0-5, the second screen displays racks 2, 3, 4 and 5. If your system has racks 0-4, the second screen displays racks 2, 3 and 4.

12-25

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Using the Processor Status Screen

Use the Processor Status screen to monitor and control global rack status bits for Enhanced PLC-5 processors.
6200 Main Menu

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Status Screen

Processor Status Fault Where Major Minor code faulted: fault: fault 1: 2: Processor status 0 0:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10001000

Online Prog
F1

I/O status I/O control

General Utilities
F7

btx full rack fault reset inhibit

Mode switch in remote 27 20 17 10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

7 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

global status bits global control bits

Proc Status
F2

Monitor Extended Local I/O Channel Discrete and Block Transfer Scans (S:59-S:62)
These words display processor status file addresses for local I/O channel discrete transfer and block transfer for -5/40L and -5/60L processors only.
This Word of the Status File: S:59 S:60 S:61 S:62 Stores these Scan Times: Extended local I/O channel discrete transfer scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel discrete maximum scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel block-transfer scan (in ms) Extended local I/O channel maximum block transfer scan (in ms)

12-26

Using Processor and I/O Status

Monitor I/O Status with Global Status Bits

Use the I/O Status field to monitor global status information for each of the possible logical racks. Each bit represents an entire rack, no matter how many chassis make up the rack. Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
Status File: S:7 Global Status Bits: low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 0 to 7

PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80
Status File: S:7 S:32 Global Status Bits: low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 0 to 7 low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 10 to 17 (octal) high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 10 to 17

PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80

Status File: S:7 S:32 S:34 Global Status Bits: low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 0 to 7 low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 10 to 17 (octal) high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 10 to 17 low 8 bits rack fault bits for racks 20 to 27 (octal) high 8 bits rack queue-full bits for racks 20 to 27

12-27

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

The bits are displayed in descending order from left to right (Figure 12.3).

Figure 12.3 Global Status Bits

PLC-5/15, -5/25, -5/VME Processor Global I/O Status Bits btx full 00000000 rack 7 S:7/15 rack 0 S:7/8 rack fault 00000000 rack 7 S:7/7 rack 0 S:7/0

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Global I/O Status Bits btx full 27 20 00000000 rack 27 S:34/15 rack 20 S:34/8 17 10 00000000 rack 17 S:32/15 rack 10 S:32/8 7 0 00000000 rack 7 S:7/15 rack 0 S:7/8

(PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 only)

(PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L only)

rack fault

27 20 00000000 rack 27 S:34/7 rack 20 S:34/0

17 10 00000000 rack 17 S:32/7 rack 10 S:32/0

7 0 00000000 rack 7 S:7/7 rack 0 S:7/0

(PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 only)

(PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L only)

The btx full field indicates that the block transfer request queue to a given I/O rack is full when its bit is set to 1. This field is retentive; once this bit is set, it remains set until you reset it.

12-28

Using Processor and I/O Status

This Field: BTX Full Rack Fault

Indicates: the BT request queue is full when the bit corresponding to the rack is set to 1. This field is retentive; it remains set until you clear it. a chassis within a given rack is faulted when the bit corresponding to the rack is set to 1. This field is non-retentive; it is reset once the fault is cleared. does not reflect faults in an Adapter Mode processor unless the communications between that adapter processor and the scanner are affected. In other words, these bits represent the integrity of the communication link between the racks, not the state of the adapter processor itself.

You can use the global status bits without using the I/O rack configuration tables. This is useful if you only want to know the global status of the racks, without knowing the actual rack configuration. Note The I/O status file field defaults to 0. If you are using PLC-5/15 and -5/25 processors, define the I/O Status file to be zero to use just the global status bits. When you specify an I/O status file of number 0, the global status bits on this screen are accurate, but the I/O rack configuration tables are not. Because there is no information for the software to use to display accurate I/O rack configurations, the software displays each rack as FULL. Also, when you use 0 for the I/O status file number in PLC-5/15 and -5/25 processors, the function keys on the bottom of the I/O status screen are not active. To use these keys for rack configuration, you must first specify an I/O status file number that is appropriate for your configuration (two integer words per logical rack).

Control I/O Using Global I/O Control Bits

Control I/O by either resetting or inhibiting remote racks using the Global I/O Control field. You can turn on (1) or off (0) the inhibit or reset bits for each of a possible logical rack at the full rack level. Each bit controls an entire I/O rack no matter how many chassis make up the rack.

12-29

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status File: S:27 Global Control Bits: low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 0 to 7

PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/V40, -5/46, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80
Status File: S:27 S:33 Global Control Bits: low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 0 to 7 low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 10 to 17 high 8 bits I/O rack rest bits for racks 10 to 17

PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80

Status File: S:27 S:33 S:35 Global Control Bits: low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 0 to 7 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 0 to 7 low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 10 to 17 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 10 to 17 low 8 bits I/O rack inhibit bits for racks 20 to 27 high 8 bits I/O rack reset bits for racks 20 to 27

12-30

Using Processor and I/O Status

The bits are displayed in descending order from left to right (Figure 12.4). Figure 12.4 Global Control Bits
PLC-5/15, -5/25 Processor Global I/O Control Bits reset 00000000 rack 7 S:27/15 rack 0 S:27/8 inhibit 00000000 rack 7 S:27/7 rack 0 S:27/0

Enhanced PLC-5 Processor Global I/O Control Bits reset 27 20 00000000 rack 27 S:35/15 rack 20 S:35/8 17 10 00000000 rack 17 S:33/15 rack 10 S:33/8 7 0 00000000 rack 7 S:27/15 rack 0 S:27/8

(PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 only)

(PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L only)

inhibit

27 20 00000000 rack 27 S:35/7 rack 20 S:35/0

17 10 00000000 rack 17 S:33/7 rack 10 S:33/0

7 0 00000000 rack 7 S:27/7 rack 0 S:27/0

(PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 only)

(PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L only)

Resetting Racks If you turn on (1) a reset bit, each I/O scan of the I/O chassis of that rack results in the outputs of those chassis being turned off (regardless of the setting of the last-state switch at each chassis). These outputs stay turned off until you turn off (0) the reset bit.

12-31

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Inhibiting Racks If you turn on (1) an inhibit bit, the processor does not scan the chassis of the given I/O rack until you turn off (0) the bit. During a time that an I/O chassis is not being scanned, its outputs are either turned off or held in their last state based on the setting of the last-state switch on the chassis.

Using I/O Rack Configuration Tables

I/O rack configuration tables display the four potential I/O chassis configurations within each I/O rack. Configuration information for these racks is stored in the I/O status file. You can find I/O rack configuration tables (Figure 12.5) for PLC-5/15 and -5/25 processors on the I/O Status screen and for Enhanced PLC-5 processors on the Scanner Mode Status screen. See chapter 3 for information about Enhanced PLC-5 processor I/O rack configuration tables.

Figure 12.5 Example I/O Rack Configuration Table

IO 020/00 to 027/17 Rack 2 REMOTE Fault INHIBIT RESET

If the software is monitoring a processor that does not support more than four racks of I/O, then only racks 0-3 are displayed. For processors that support more than four racks of I/O, the software displays all racks up to and including the last existing rack. Each I/O configuration table contains the following information:
This Field: I/O Address Range (I/O xxx/yy TO xxx/yy) Rack # Description: displays the I/O address ranges that make up each rack. The xxx/yy sub-fields indicate the starting I/O group/terminal (word/bit) and ending I/O group/terminal (word/bit). displays the I/O rack number. (Continued)

12-32

Using Processor and I/O Status

This Field: Location field (LLLRRR)

Description: This field indicates either: LOCAL the rack addressing unit exists in the local chassis. REMOTE the rack addressing unit exists in one or more remote chassis. L/R this series/revision of PLC-5 processor does not support multiple-chassis racks. For PLC-5/15 and PLC-5/25: Rack 0 is always local. Racks 1-3 can be either local or remote. Racks 4-7 are always remote (PLC-5/25 processor only). For PLC-5/VME processors all racks are remote. displays the fractional portion of the I/O rack addressed at each chassis. Valid configuration displays are: 1/4 (4 slots), 1/2 (8 slots), 3/4 (12 slots), or FULL (16 slots) in any combination as long as the sum total does not exceed 8 I/O groups. Each rack that is labeled as local is always displayed as full, regardless of the rack size. This field is a read-only field. This is also the only field to which you can move the cursor. Move the cursor to this field if you want to change the other fields (fields 3 and 4) on the line within the configuration table. Each chassis within a rack is listed on the screen in order of starting I/O group: Line Starting I/O Group 6, 13 0 7, 14 2 8, 15 4 9, 16 6 After powerup or after you enter an automatic configure command, the above fields indicate which I/O chassis with adapters are able to communicate. At this same time, an I (inhibit) in field 3 indicates that the potential chassis does not exist or cannot communicate. However, if you remove that inhibit, a false indication of the potential chassis is displayed in this field. Typically, an I (inhibit) and an F (fault) in field 3 indicates that the potential chassis does not exist. You cannot toggle the inhibit or reset bits for a chassis that does not exist. This field is a read-only, one-character field, which when displaying an F, indicates that this chassis is faulted. Unless an I appears in the inhibit field, when a fault indication appears in the fault field, the associated fault bit in the global rack fault status (in line 1) is also set to 1. In the case of a local rack or any chassis for a processor that does not support multiple-chassis I/O racks, if the global rack-fault bit is set to 1, a reverse-video blinking F indicates that the rack has been globally faulted. You gain access to this field by pressing [F4] - Toggle Inhibit. If you select inhibit from this field, the processor stops scanning this chassis. An I in this field indicates that the chassis is inhibited. When you write a 1 to the global rack-inhibit bit for that rack (on line 2), all logical racks of the chassis are inhibited. A blinking I in reverse video indicates that the rack has been globally inhibited. The chassis is inhibited as long as an I appears in this field. You gain access to this field by pressing [F5] - Toggle Reset. If you select reset from this field, the processor turns off the outputs of this chassis (regardless of the setting of the last-state switch at each chassis). An R in this field indicates that the chassis is reset. When you write a 1 to the global rack-reset bit for that rack (on line 2), all logical racks of the chassis are reset. A blinking R in reverse video indicates that rack has been globally reset.

Rack Size (field 1)

Fault (field 2)

Inhibit (field 3)

Reset (field 4)

12-33

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Automatic Configuration
Automatic configuration provides a way to update these screens with the actual hardware configurations:

Scanner mode status or configuration screens for Enhanced PLC-5 processors I/O Status screen for PLC-5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors

For Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Make sure the processor is in Program or Remote Program mode. Define an I/O status file on
Proc Config

To use the automatic configuration for Enhanced PLC-5 processors, you must have configured a channel to be in remote I/O scanner mode and follow the steps on the left. The system updates the information in the I/O status file and the channel scan list (on the Scanner Mode Configuration screen). The system also displays actual chassis configurations on the Scanner Mode Status screen. If the auto configure function produces a NO MORE DATA error message, check to make sure that your input and output image table is extended to accommodate the number of racks in your system. Also, I/O racks 4, 5, 6 or 7 appear after auto configure only if you have ladder logic referencing these racks; if you have no logic programmed, you must extend the I/O image table. For more information on extending your data table, see chapter 9.

Channel Overview

Cursor to channel configured as scanner

Channel Status
F7

Automatic Config
F5

Note

Automatic configuration displays the actual hardware configuration, except for racks that have their global inhibit bit set. In this case, that global bit overrides the automatic configuration. You must first clear the global inhibit and then press [F5] Automatic Configuration for the the Scanner Mode Status or Extended Local I/O Status screen to display the correct configuration for that rack.

12-34

Using Processor and I/O Status

For PLC-5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME Processors

Make sure the processor is in Program or Remote Program mode.
6200 Main Menu

To automatically configure the I/O for PLC-5/15, -5/25 and -5/VME processors, follow the steps on the left.

Online Prog
F1

General Utilities
F7

Proc Status
F2

Specify an integer file in I/O status field

I/O Status
F3

Automatic Config
F1

12-35

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Note

If you add or remove I/O racks, the software configuration you use must match the hardware configuration on the adapter modules for the configuration to work properly. The software lets you change chassis configurations, regardless of whether the hardware configurations are correct. Each logical rack of remote I/O can be configured with one or more chassis containing 2, 4, 6, or 8 I/O groups. To change the chassis configuration in the software, use the I/O Status screen and press [F8] - Add Rack or [F10] - Remove Rack. You can have any combination of 1/4 (4 slots), 1/2 (8 slots), 3/4 (12 slots) chassis such that the result does not exceed 8 I/O groups (16 slots).

Note

If you add or remove I/O racks, the software configuration you use must match the hardware configuration on the adapter modules for the configuration to work properly. The software lets you change chassis configurations, regardless of whether the hardware configurations are correct. If you specify chassis configurations that differ from the hardware configurations, you can use the automatic configuration to return the I/O status screen to show actual hardware configurations. If you use multiple chassis I/O racks other than FULL, you might not want to use the global inhibit and reset bits in your ladder programs. These global bits do not always reflect your configuration information on the racks that contain multiple chassis. For example, if you remove a rack, the screen shows the rack as faulted (F) and inhibited (I). The global fault and inhibit bits, on the other hand, do not show the rack as faulted or inhibited.

Add and Remove Racks in Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Channel Overview

To add or remove racks from the processor scan list, follow the steps on the left. The system displays the Scanner Mode Status screen. See chapter 13 for more information about scanner mode status data.

Cursor to channel configured as scanner

Channel Config
F5

12-36

Using Processor and I/O Status

Add a Rack
Cursor to where you want to add a rack
Insert to List
F7

To add a rack, follow the steps on the left. This table describes what fields you must fill in the blank scan list entry and the valid values.
Field: Scan rack address Values: 1-27 octal 0, 2, 4, 6 1/4, two image-table words 1/2, four image-table words 3/4, six image-table words FULL, eight image-table words

Configure the rack

Starting group number Rack size

A scan list can have a maximum of 64 partial racks. You can enter a rack in the scan list more than one time if you want the I/O updated multiple times within an I/O scan. Assign unique partial and full racks to each channel being used in scanner mode. You can assign different partial racks within the same logical rack to different channels using scanner mode communications.
If You Want to: define scan rack addresses and starting group numbers define a rack size Press this Key: cursor to the field and enter new address or group number cursor to the field corresponding to the rack you want to modify and press [F10] Select Option [F1] Accept Edits

save your edits

If you press [ESC] without saving your edits, the system displays the Pending Edits screen.
Pending edits encountered. > Rem Prog Forces:None

PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Accept Cancel Edits Edits F8 F10

12-37

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

To Remove a Rack from a Scan List: Cursor to the rack you want to delete
Delete from List
F8

If You Want To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Cancel edits made to the channel configuration Exit the Pending Edits screen

Press: [F8] Accept Edits [F10] Cancel Edits [Esc]

The system returns to the Scanner Mode Configuration screen.

Accept Edits
F1

Note

Only the edits made to the channel you are configuring are saved.

Add and Remove a Chassis in PLC-5/40L and -5/60L Processors

To Add or Remove a Chassis: (PLC-5/40L or -5/60L Processors)
Channel Overview

To add or remove entries from the processor scan list, follow the steps on the left. The system displays the Extended Local I/O Status screen. See chapter 14 for more information about status data.

Cursor to channel 2

Channel Config
F5

12-38

Using Processor and I/O Status

Add a Chassis
To Add a Chassis: (PLC-5/40L or -5/60L Processors) Cursor to where you want to add a chassis

To add a chassis, follow the steps on the left.

Field : Scan rack address Starting group number Chassis size Values: 0-27 octal 0, 2, 4, 6 4-slot 8-slot 12-slot 2-slot 1-slot 1/2-slot

Insert to List
F7

Backplane addressing Configure the chassis To Remove a Chassis from a Scan List: Cursor to the chassis you want to delete
Delete from List
F8

A scan list can have a maximum of 16 chassis. Do not repeat entries in the scan list.
If You Want to: define scan rack addresses and starting group numbers define a rack size Press this Key: cursor to the field and enter new address or group number cursor to the field corresponding to the rack you want to modify and press [F10] Select Option [F1] Accept Edits

save your edits

Accept Edits
F1

If you press [ESC] without saving your edits, the system displays the Pending Edits screen.
Pending edits encountered. > Rem Prog Forces:None

PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Accept Cancel Edits Edits F8 F10

12-39

Using Processor and I/O Status Preface

Do one of the following:

If You Want To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Cancel edits made to the channel configuration Exit the Pending Edits screen Press: [F8] Accept Edits [F10] Cancel Edits [Esc]

The system returns to the Extended Local I/O Configuration screen. Note Only the edits made to the channel you are configuring are saved.

Add and Remove Racks in PLC-5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME Processors

If you want to change an existing rack configuration to some combination of smaller rack, you must first remove the existing rack and then add the new configuration. For example, to change a FULL rack to two 1/2 racks, follow the three steps below:
1 Cursor to field displaying FULL for the rack you want to change
Remove Rack
F10

Cursor to starting I/O group 0

Cursor to starting I/O group 4

Add Rack
F8

Add Rack
F8

Yes
F8

No or
F10

to exit without removing the rack

1/2 Rack
F2

1/2 Rack
F2

Yes
F8

No or
F10

Yes

No or
F10

to exit without adding the rack

F8

to exit without adding the rack

12-40

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

13 Configuring Processor Channels

for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
Chapter Objectives
In addition to configuring Enhanced PLC-5 processor information, you must configure communication channels. With Enhanced PLC-5 processors, you configure communications (for example node or rack address, remote I/O scanner or adapter mode) using the channel configuration screens. This chapter explains the options that are available and how to configure each.

Configuring Channels
Table 13.A explains the channels you can configure; Table 13.B explains your configuration options and the default function for each channel. Note
References to: Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Unless otherwise stated:

Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Secured PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

your application expertise.

13-1

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.A Channels You Can Configure for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
Processor: PLC-5/11 PLC-5/20 and -5/26 PLC-5/20E PLC-5/20C PLC-5/30, -5/V30 PLC-5/40, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/60, -5/80, -5/86, and -5/V80 PLC-5/40E and -5/80E PLC-5/40C, -5/60C and -5/80C PLC-5/40L -5/V40L, and -5/60L Channel 0: X X X X X X Channel 1A: X DH+ only DH+ only DH+ only X X X X X X X Ethernet only ControlNet only Channel 1B: Channel 2A: Channel 2B: Channel 2:

X X X

X X X

X X X

Ethernet only ControlNet only Extended local I/O only

An X indicates the configurable channels for the appropriate processor.

Table 13.B Channel Configuration Options and Default Functions

Channel: 0 (RS232/422/423 compatible) Channel Function Options: System DF1 point-to-point System DF1 slave System DF1 master User (ASCII) Data Highway Plus Scanner communications mode Adapter communications mode unused Ethernet ControlNet Default Function: System DF1 point-to-point, at 2400 baud (online) See Page: 13-10 13-12 13-15 13-20 13-24 13-28 13-32 13-35 13-36 13-39 (Continued)

1A 1B 2A 2B 2 (Ethernet PLC-5 processors) 2 (ControlNet PLC-5 processors)

Data Highway Plus at 57.6 Kbaud Scanner communications mode unused 1 unused 1 Ethernet ControlNet

13-2

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Channel: 2 (PLC-5/40L, -5/V40L, and -5/60L) 3A (co-processor)

Channel Function Options: Extended local I/O

Default Function: Extended local I/O

See Page: 13-61

Co-processor MAP ALC VME Profibus Interface PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module

You must have a co-processor module in order to configure this channel. For more information, refer to your co-processor manual. Ethernet 13-66

1 For PLC-5/40 and -5/60 series A processors, channel 2A and 2B default to Adapter and Scanner mode, respectively.

Use the channel configuration screens to configure channels on line or off line. If you are configuring channels online, the processor must be in Remote Program or Program mode. When you are configuring a processor channel for scanner or extended local I/O communications, you can change the scan list in Remote Run mode, but you cannot autoconfigure the channel or modify any other fields. For information on selecting the appropriate communications for each channel, See the 1785 PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Design Manual. Note If you need to change mode from any channel configuration screen, do so through the software Change Mode function do not use the processor keyswitch. If you use the keyswitch, a communication error occurs and the Program Directory appears. When you re-enter channel configuration, your last-saved configurations are in effect. To configure any channel, you must specify:

a channel diagnostic file, which is used to view channel status data (the software automatically creates this file for you when you specify the file)

Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned, or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel.

Note

a channels function using the Channel Configuration screen

more specific configuration information, such as communication rate and node or rack addressing If you have a scanner channel, you must specify an I/O status file to to view scanner status data.
13-3

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Channel configuration information is stored in the configuration data section of the processor memory. Note You can only change the configuration information for one channel at a time. Once you change the information for a channel you must accept the configuration before changing the configuration for another channel. Also note that when you are configuring a processors channels, no other programming terminal can make edits.

13-4

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Accessing the Channel Overview Screen

Use the Channel Overview screen to define a channels function. To access the Channel Overview screen, follow the steps on the left. Figure 13.1 Channel Overview Screen
Enhanced PLC-5 Processors (PLC-5/60 Series B and PLC-5/80 Series B only) defaults are shown
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Channel Overview

Channel 0: Channel Channel Channel Channel 1A: 1B: 2A: 2B:

SYSTEM (POINT TO POINT) DH+ SCANNER MODE UNUSED UNUSED N/A Channel Overview

Channel 3A:

General Utility
F7

Channel 0:

SYSTEM (POINT TO POINT)

Channel Overview
F4

Channel 1A: DH+ Press a function key or enter a value. Channel 1B: SCANNER MODE > 2: EXTENDED LOCAL I/O Rem Prog Channel Forces:None Accept Channel Node Channel Edits Priv Priv Config Channel 3A: N/A F1 F2 F3 F5

Channel Status F7

5/40 File BATCHTES Select Option F10

PLC-5/40L and -5/60L (Series B and later) Processors

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Channel Node Channel Edits Priv Priv Config F1 F2 F3 F5

5/40L File BATCH Channel Select Status Option F7 F10

Note

You must have a co-processor module or an PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module in order to configure channel 3A. If your system uses channel privileges and the class under which you are working does not have read privilege for all channels, NO READ PRIV appears next to the channel. For more information on channel privileges, see chapter 15.

13-5

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

If You Want to: Accept channel configuration edits Assign privileges for channel configuration (For more information on privileges, see chapter 15.) Assign privileges to individual nodes (For more information on privileges, see chapter 15.) Configure the channel the cursor is highlighting Go to the channel status screen for the channel the cursor is highlighting See available functions for each channel, and select a function The function is updated after you accept the edits.

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F2] Channel Privileges [F3] Node Privileges [F5] Channel Configuration [F7] Channel Status [F10] Select Option

13-6

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Saving Edits
After configuring a channel you must save your edits before exiting the configuration screen. This section explains how to save channel configuration. If you are programming on line or off line, changes you made to channel configuration data are displayed to the right of the current channel configuration data. You must save your edits before exiting the configuration screen. Save your edits by pressing [F1] Accept Edits. If you press [Esc] without saving your edits, the system displays the Pending Edits screen.
Pending edits encountered. > Rem Prog

PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Accept Cancel Edits Edits F8 F10

Do one of the following:

If You Want to: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Cancel edits made to the channel configuration Exit the Pending Edits screen Press this Key: [F8] Accept Edits [F10] Cancel Edits [Esc]

The system returns to the channel overview screen you were on before you attempted to save edits.

13-7

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channel 0
Channel 0 is a serial port that supports RS232, RS422, and RS423 compatible communications. Use switch assembly SW2 on the Enhanced PLC-5 processors to specify RS232, RS422, or RS423. For more information, see the PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Hardware Installation Manual, publication 1785-6.6.1. You can configure Channel 0 using 6200 programming software (release 4.1 or later) to communicate using these protocols:

Note

System mode DF1 point-to-point (default configuration for Channel 0) System mode DF1 slave System mode DF1 master Enhanced PLC-5 processors (PLC-5/30 series A, rev A and later, PLC-5/40 and -5/60 series A, rev E, series B, rev B and later, and series C, all revs only) User mode (ASCII) You can also configure the channel to switch communication modes after receiving a command from a remote station. Table 13.C lists the fields which are displayed on the Channel 0 Configuration screen when configuring Channel 0 for all of the protocols listed above: Table 13.C Channel 0 Configuration Fields Common to the DF1 Point-to-Point, DF1 Slave, DF1 Master, and User Mode Protocols

This Field: Diag. file

Specifies: The file containing the channels status information

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (3-999), and press [Enter] Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: ENABLED or DISABLED Cursor to the field, type a character, and press [Enter] If the attention character you want to use is a control character, specify the ASCII equivalent. (Continued)

Remote mode change Mode attention char.

Whether the remote mode change option is enabled The attention character to be used with the system mode or user mode character for a remote mode change

13-8

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: System mode char.

Specifies: The character to be used with the mode attention character (above)

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type a character, and press [Enter] If the attention character you want to use is a control character, specify the ASCII equivalent. When the processor encounters the attention character and the system mode character, the processor sets channel 0 communication to system mode. The remote mode change option must be ENABLED. Cursor to the field, type a character, and press [Enter] If the attention character you want to use is a control character, specify the ASCII equivalent. When the processor encounters the attention character and the user mode character, the processor sets channel 0 communication to user mode. The remote mode change option must be ENABLED. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired rate. Available rates are: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 Baud Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired number. Available stop bit numbers are: 1, 1.5, 2 Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available settings are: NONE or EVEN Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting.
Protocol Option NO HANDSHAKING if you are not using a modem FULL DUPLEX MODEM if you are using a full duplex modem HALF DUPLEX MODEM WITHOUT CONTINUOUS CARRIER if master (or sending device) and the slave (or processor) are using half duplex modems HALF DUPLEX MODEM WITH CONTINUOUS CARRIER if the master (or sending device) has a full duplex modem and the slave (or processor) has a half duplex modem HALF DUPLEX MODEM WITHOUT CONTINUOUS CARRIER when the master and slave modems are half duplex FULL DUPLEX MODEM when the master modem is full duplex and the slave modems are half duplex DF1 Pt -to-Pt DF1 Slave DF1 Master User Mode

User mode char.

The character to be used with the mode attention character (above)

Baud rate

The communication rate for channel 0 The number of stop bits needed to match the device you are communicating with Parity setting for channel 0

Stop bits

Parity

Control line

The modem hardware setup option

n n

n n

n n

n n

13-9

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

For more information on each channel 0 protocol and specific fields on the Channel 0 Configuration screen for each protocol, see the following:
For Information on this Channel 0 Protocol: DF1 Point-to-Point DF1 Slave DF1 Master User Mode See Page 13-10 13-12 13-15 13-20

Configure Channel 0 for DF1 Point-to-Point

To configure channel 0 for DF1 point-to-point communication, follow the steps on the left. Dont forget to save your edits.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
System Mode (DF1 Point to Point) Channel 0 Configuration Diag. file: 0 Remote mode change: DISABLED Mode attention char.: \0x1b Baud rate: 2400 Stop bits: 1 Control line: NO HANDSHAKING Duplicate detect: ON ACK timeout (20 ms): 100 Msg appl timeout (30sec): 0

General Utility
F7

System mode char.: User mode char.: Parity:

S U NONE

Channel Overview
F4

Error detect: NAK receive: DF1 ENQS:

BCC 3 3

Cursor to Channel 0
Select Options

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1

5/40 File BATCHTES Chan 0 Select Status Option F9 F10

(until

F10

DF1 Point-toPoint appears)

Channel Config
F5

Set the device as Serial to PLC and the method of error checking to be the same for the terminal and the PLC processor Choose No Handshaking in this field Make sure the baud rates for the terminal and the processor are identical Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

See Table 13.D

13-10

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

If You Want to: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Monitor channel 0 status Toggle through available configuration options for some of the screen fields displayed Exit the System Mode (DF1 Point-to-Point) Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 0 Status [F10] Select Option [Esc]

In addition to the fields shown in Table 13.C, the DF1 Point-to-Point Channel 0 Configuration screen has the specific fields shown in Table 13.D:

Table 13.D System Mode (DF1 Point-to-Point) Configuration Fields

This Field: Duplicate detect Specifies: Whether you want the processor to detect and ignore duplicate messages Whether you want error detection set to BCC or CRC Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: BCC: the processor sends and accepts messages that end with a BCC byte for error checking. BCC is quicker and easier to implement in a computer driver. CRC: the processor sends and accepts messages with a 2-byte CRC for error checking. CRC is more complete checking. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 65535, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example, to wait 40 ms, type 2. The recommended time is 1 second. Specify 1 second by typing 50. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 1 and 7, and press [Enter] Available options are: 1: 30 to 60 seconds 2: 60 to 90 seconds 3: 90 to 120 seconds 4: 120 to 150 seconds 5: 150 to 180 seconds 6: 180 to 210 seconds 7: 210 to 240 seconds (Continued)

Error detect

ACK timeout

The amount of time you want the processor to wait for an acknowledgement to its message transmission The application timeout of the message the number of seconds within which the ACK must be received if the ACK is received but the message is still in the queue, the number of seconds within which a reply must be received

MSG appl timeout

13-11

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: NAK receive

Specifies: The number of NAKs your processor can receive in response to a message before stopping the transmit The number of inquiries (ENQs) that you want the processor to send after an ACK timeout

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] The recommended setting is 3.

DF1 ENQS

Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] The recommended setting is 3.

Note

DF1 Point-to-Point is also used for programming through Channel 0 with 6200 programming software.

Configure Channel 0 For DF1 Slave

To configure channel 0 for DF1 slave communication, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
System Mode (DF1 Slave) Channel 0 Configuration Diag. file: 0 Remote mode change: DISABLED Mode attention char.: \0x1b Baud rate: 2400 Stop bits: 1 Control line: NO HANDSHAKING

General Utility
F7

System mode char.: User mode char.: Parity: Station address:

S U NONE 1

Channel Overview
F4

Duplicate detect: ON ACK timeout (20 ms): 100 DF1 retries: 3 Msg appl timeout (30sec): 0

Error detect: RTS send delay (20 ms): RTS off delay (20 ms):

BCC 0 0

Cursor to Channel 0
Select Options
F10

(until DF1

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1

5/40 File BATCHTES Chan 0 Select Status Option F9 F10

Slave
appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

See Table 13.E

13-12

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

If You Want to: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Monitor channel 0 status View available configuration options for the screen fields Exit the System Mode (DF1 Slave) Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 0 Status [F10] Select Option [Esc]

In addition to the fields shown in Table 13.C, the DF1 Slave Channel 0 Configuration screen has the specific fields shown Table 13.E: Table 13.E System Mode (DF1 Slave) Configuration Fields
This Field: Duplicate detect Specifies: Whether you want the processor to detect and ignore duplicate messages Whether you want error detection set to BCC or CRC Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: BCC: the processor sends and accepts messages that end with a BCC byte for error checking. BCC is quicker and easier to implement in a computer driver. CRC: the processor sends and accepts messages with a 2-byte CRC for error checking. CRC is more complete checking. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 65535, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. The recommended time is 1 second. Specify 1 second by typing 50. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 1 and 7, and press [Enter] Available options are: 1: 30 to 60 seconds 2: 60 to 90 seconds 3: 90 to 120 seconds 4: 120 to 150 seconds 5: 150 to 180 seconds 6: 180 to 210 seconds 7: 210 to 240 seconds (Continued)

Error detect

ACK timeout

The amount of time you want the processor to wait for an acknowledgement to its message transmission The application timeout of the message the number of seconds within which the ACK must be received if the ACK is received but the message is still in the queue, the number of seconds within which a reply must be received

MSG appl timeout

13-13

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: RTS send delay

Specifies: The time delay between the time the RTS is asserted and the beginning of the message transmission

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. Note: For DF1 Master and User Mode, the recommended time elapse is 0, unless you are using a modem that automatically returns the CTS as soon as it receives the RTS. If this is the case, enter a delay time to make sure the modem is able to transmit before it attempts to send the message. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. Note: For DF1 Master and User Mode, the recommended time elapse is 0, unless you are using a modem that automatically returns the CTS as soon as it receives the RTS. If this is the case, enter a delay time to make sure the modem is able to transmit before it attempts to send the message. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] The recommended setting is 3.

RTS off-delay

The time delay between the time the end of the message transmission and the RTS is de-asserted

DF1 retries

The number of times the processor resends a message to the master without getting an acknowledge

13-14

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channel 0 For DF1 Master

Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

(PLC-5/30 series A, rev A and later, PLC-5/40 and -5/60 series A, rev E, series B, rev B and later, and series C, all revs only)
Ladder Editor Main Menu

To configure channel 0 for DF1 master communication, follow the steps on the left
System Mode (DF1 Master) Channel 0 Configuration Diag. file: 7 Remote mode change: DISABLED Mode attention char.: \0x1b Baud rate: Stop bits: Control line: 2400 1 NO HANDSHAKING

General Utility
F7

System mode char.: User mode char.: Parity: Station address:

S U NONE 1

Channel Overview
F4

Reply msg wait (20 ms): 1792 ACK Timeout (20 ms): 100 DF1 retries: 3 Msg appl timeout (30sec): 0

Error detect: RTS send delay (20 ms): RTS off delay (20 ms):

BCC 0 0

Polling Mode: STANDARD (MULTIPLE MESSAGE TRANSFER PER NODE FILE SCAN)

Cursor to Channel 0
Select Options
F10

(until DF1

Master
appears)

Master message transmit: IN POLL SEQUENCE Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1

5/30 File BATCH30 Chan 0 Select Status Option F9 F10

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

If You Want to: Accept edits made to the channel configuration See Table 13.F Monitor channel 0 status Toggle through available configuration options for some of the screen fields displayed Exit the System Mode (DF1 Master) Configuration screen

Press: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 0 Status [F10] Select Option [Esc]

13-15

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

In addition to the fields shown in Table 13.C, the DF1 Master Channel 0 Configuration screen has the specific fields shown in Table 13.F: Table 13.F System Mode (DF1 Master) Configuration Fields
This Field: Error detect Specifies: Whether you want error detection set to BCC or CRC Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: BCC: the processor sends and accepts messages that end with a BCC byte for error checking. BCC is quicker and easier to implement in a computer driver. CRC: the processor sends and accepts messages with a 2-byte CRC for error checking. CRC is more complete checking. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 65535, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. The recommended time is 1 second. Specify 1 second by typing 50. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 1 and 7, and press [Enter] Available options are: 1: 30 to 60 seconds 2: 60 to 90 seconds 3: 90 to 120 seconds 4: 120 to 150 seconds 5: 150 to 180 seconds 6: 180 to 210 seconds 7: 210 to 240 seconds Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. Note: For DF1 Master and User Mode, the recommended time elapse is 0, unless you are using a modem that automatically returns the CTS as soon as it receives the RTS. If this is the case, enter a delay time to make sure the modem is able to transmit before it attempts to send the message. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. Note: For DF1 Master and User Mode, the recommended time elapse is 0, unless you are using a modem that automatically returns the CTS as soon as it receives the RTS. If this is the case, enter a delay time to make sure the modem is able to transmit before it attempts to send the message. (Continued)

ACK timeout

The amount of time you want the processor to wait for an acknowledgement to a message transmission The application timeout of the message the number of seconds within which the ACK must be received if the ACK is received but the message is still in the queue, the number of seconds within which a reply must be received The time delay between the time the RTS is asserted and the beginning of the message transmission

MSG appl timeout

RTS send delay

RTS off-delay

The time delay between the time the end of the message transmission and the RTS is de-asserted

13-16

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: DF1 retries

Specifies: The number of times a message is retried before being declared undeliverable The current station address on the DH+ link The amount of time the master will wait after receiving an ACK (to a master-initiated message) before polling the slave for a reply The current value of the polling mode (how you want the master to poll the station lists)

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] The recommended setting is 3.

Station address Reply msg wait

Cursor to the field, type a valid DF1 station address, and press [Enter] Valid station addresses are: 0 to 376 octal. Cursor to the field, type a value and press [Enter] Valid values are: 0 to 65535 (in 20 ms increments). Note: This parameter is only valid if the Polling Mode field is configured to be Message Based.

To define a polling scheme, you must specify the following: Polling mode Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: MESSAGE BASED (ALLOW SLAVE TO INITIATE MESSAGES) default this option allows slave-initiated messages to be processed after all master-initiated messages MESSAGE BASED (DO NOT ALLOW SLAVE TO INITIATE MESSAGES) slave-initiated messages will be acknowledged, but not processed STANDARD (MULTIPLE MESSAGE TRANSFER PER NODE SCAN) the master polls stations based on a list; each station can transmit multiple messages per node scan STANDARD (SINGLE MESSAGE TRANSFER PER NODE SCAN) the master polls stations based on a list; each station can transmit only one message per node scan Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available options are: BETWEEN STATION POLLS default the master transmits messages before the next station is polled IN POLL SEQUENCE the master transmits messages only when the station number is encountered in the poll list The processor sets a minor fault if you are using IN POLL SEQUENCE and the masters station is not in either the normal poll list or the priority poll list. Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number and press [Enter] Valid values are: 3 to 255

Master message transmit

The current value of channel 0 master message transmit (when you want the master to send messages)

Normal poll node file

The integer file that contains the normal poll node list (in which you place the station addresses of the slave stations. The default size is 64 words.)

(Continued)

13-17

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Normal poll group size

Specifies: The total number of active stations polled from the normal poll node list (the number of stations that the master polls before it polls a station in the priority poll list) The integer file that contains the priority poll node list (in which you place stations that you need to collect data from more frequently. The default size is 64 words.) The binary file that contains current status of each node (which stores the station addresses of all active stations on the master/slave link. The default size is 18 words.)

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type a value and press [Enter] Valid values are: 0 to 255

Priority poll node file

Cursor to the field, type an integer address and press [Enter] Valid values are: 3 to 255

Active station file

Cursor to the field, type a binary file number and press [Enter] Valid values are: 3 to 255 Note: Both the normal poll list and the priority poll list can have active and inactive stations. A station becomes inactive when it does not respond to a masters request for data. The master station polls the slave station in a definitive sequence: 1. All stations in the active priority poll file. 2. All stations in the inactive priority poll file. 3. Stations in the active normal poll file. The number of stations polled in this file is determined by the normal poll group size specified on the configuration screen. For example, if the group size were 3, then three stations would be polled in the normal file before the master continues to the next step in the sequence. 4. After all active stations are polled, one station in the inactive normal poll file.

Creating Station Lists

To create station lists, place each station address in an individual word in a poll file (normal and priority) starting at word 2. The poll file layout is shown below.
Poll File Word 0 Word 1 Description total number of stations in the list. the address of the station currently being polled. This word is automatically updated by the master station as a new slave station is polled. the slave station address in order that the station should be polled.

Word 2 through word xx

13-18

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To place a station address in a poll file, do the following: 1. 2. 3. Note Go to the Data Monitor screen. Specify the address of the integer file that is either the normal poll file or priority poll file (e.g. if the normal poll file is N11, then specify N11:0). Enter the station addresses of the slave stations you want in the poll list starting at word 2. Put them in the order you want them polled.

Station addresses are octal addresses. The poll files are integer files. To properly enter station addresses in a poll file, you must either:

change the radix of the file to octal convert the octal station addresses to decimal

For information about monitoring data, see chapter 16. Figure 13.2 is an example of a station poll list containing three stations: octal addresses 10, 11, and 12. Station 12 (10 decimal) is being polled.

Figure 13.2 Example Station List

Poll File Word 0 Word 1 Word 2 Word 3 Word 4
N11:0 3 4 08 09 10

Nxx:0 total number of stations word number containing the station address being polled. address of first station in list (decimal) address of second station in list (decimal) address of third station in list (decimal)

13-19

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channel 0 For User Mode (ASCII Protocol)

Ladder Editor Main Menu

To configure channel 0 for user mode, follow the steps on the left.
User Mode Channel 0 Configuration

General Utility
F7

Diag. file: 0 Remote mode change: DISABLED Mode attention char.: \0x1b Baud rate: 9600 Stop bits: 1 Control line: NO HANDSHAKING

XON/XOFF System mode char.: User mode char.: Parity: Bits per character:

DISABLED S U NONE 8

Channel Overview
F4

Echo/delete mode:

CRT

RTS send delay (20 ms): RTS off delay (20 ms):

0 0

Termination 1: Termination 2:

\0xd \0xff

Append 1: Append 2:

\0xd \0xa

Cursor to Channel 0
Select Options
F10 Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1 5/40 File BATCHTES Chan 0 Select Status Option F9 F10

(until User Mode appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

If You Want to: Accept edits made to the channel configuration

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 0 Status [F10] Select Option [Esc]

See Table 13.G

Monitor channel 0 status Toggle through available configuration options for the screen fields displayed Exit the User Mode Configuration screen

13-20

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

In addition to the fields shown in Table 13.C, the User Mode Channel 0 Configuration screen has the specific fields shown in Table 13.G: Table 13.G User Mode Configuration Fields
This Field: XON/XOFF Specifies: Whether or not you want XON/XOFF enabled Configure by Doing the Following: When XON/XOFF is enabled, the processor sends an XOFF (stop sending) character to the device when the buffer is full. The processor sends an XON (start sending) character to the device when more data can be received. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available settings are: ENABLE or DISABLE Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available settings are: 7 or 8. Cursor to the field, type in a value between 0 and 255, and press [Enter] Limits are defined in 20 ms intervals. For example to wait 40 ms, type 2. Note: For DF1 Master and User Mode, the recommended delay is 0, unless you are using a modem that automatically returns the CTS as soon as it receives the RTS. If this is the case, enter a delay time to make sure the modem is able to transmit before it attempts to send the message. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired setting. Available settings are: DISABLE characters received by the processor are sent only to the Echo counter and not to an output device CRT the processor ignores the character immediately in front of the delete character and sends a signal to the CRT to erase the character PRINTER the processor ignores the character immediately in front of the delete character and sends a signal to the printer to erase the character Cursor to the field, type a maximum of two characters (hexadecimal), and press [Enter] Use termination characters with the ASCII Read Line instruction or with the Test Buffer for Line (ABL) to indicate a line has been entered. The default character is the ASCII equivalent for [CARRIAGE RETURN], \0x0D. You can also use the ASCII equivalent for line feed, \0x0A. To specify no character, enter \FF. See the back page of any PLC-5 programming software manual for an ASCII character code chart. (Continued)

Bits per character

The number of bits in a transmission character The time delay between the time RTS is asserted and the beginning of the message transmission

RTS send delay

Echo/delete mode

What the processor should do when it receives an ASCII delete character

Termination 1 Termination 2

The termination characters you have defined

13-21

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Append 1 Append 2

Specifies:

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type a maximum of two characters (hexadecimal), and press [Enter] Use append characters with the ASCII Write with Append (AWA) instruction to indicate the end of a line. Append characters are the last characters sent after a line of information. The default character is the ASCII equivalent for [CARRIAGE RETURN], \0x0D. You can also use the ASCII equivalent for line feed, \0x0A. To specify no character, enter \FF. See the back page of any PLC-5 programming software manual for an ASCII character code chart.

Configure Channel 0 for a Communication Mode Change

To Define Communication Mode Change Characters: Ladder Editor Main Menu Select Options General Utility
F7 F10

You can configure channel 0 so that it switches from one communication mode to another upon receiving a control command. You define a mode attention character and either a system or user mode character. See Table 13.H. Table 13.H Communication Mode Change Characters
Character: Function: tells the processor to expect a change communication mode command tells the processor to switch the communication mode to system mode tells the processor to switch the communication mode to the user mode Default Character: [Esc] S U

(until User Mode appears)

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Config
F5

mode attention character system mode character

Cursor to Channel 0

user mode character

Every time the processor receives the mode attention and either system or user mode character, channel 0s communication mode will be switched to the new mode.
Cursor to Remote Mode Change
Select Option
F10

Remote mode allows you to select or change the processor modes of operation with a peripheral device from a remote location. To configure channel 0 for a remote communication-mode change, follow the steps on the left.
If You Want to: Change the communication mode of channel 0 remotely Not change the communication mode of channel 0 remotely Select: ENABLE DISABLE

13-22

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Note

Make sure the remote mode change option is disabled if you do not want to change channel 0s communication mode over a remote link. Having the mode disabled prevents an unexpected communication mode change. Follow the steps on the left. The Mode Attention character tells the processor to expect a communication mode change. If you are using a control character, enter the ASCII equivalent in hexadecimal. With other characters, just enter the character. Do one of the following:
If You Want to Change the Mode to: system mode user mode Then Cursor to this Field: System mode character User mode character

Cursor to the Mode Attention Character

Select Option
F10

Enter the character you want to use to tell the processor to switch communication modes for channel 0. If you are using a control character, use the ASCII equivalent in hexadecimal. With other characters, just enter the character. Save your edits.

13-23

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channels 1A through 2B

Channels 1A, 1B, 2A and 2B can be configured to support these links (based on the processor capabilities shown in Table 13.A on page 13-2):

Data Highway Plus remote I/O adapter mode or remote I/O scanner mode

If you do not want to use a channel, you configure the channel as unused.

Configure Channels 1A, 1B, 2A, or 2B As Data Highway Plus

Note You can only select DH+ address for channel 1A by setting switch 1 on the processor; you cannot set this node address through the software as you can on other channels. This switch is read at power-up and is used to configure the DH+ node address for channel 1A (if configured for DH+). Channel 1A is configured by default to support Data Highway Plus. If you choose to use another channel as the Data Highway Plus link, you must first configure that channel for Data Highway Plus before you reconfigure channel 1A. If you do not, you lose the Data Highway Plus link connection and must remove and then replace the processor battery to set the channel configuration back to default. Channel configuration information is not cleared using the softwares Clear Memory function.

Note

13-24

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Ladder Editor Main Menu

To configure a channel to support a DH+ link, follow the steps on the left.
Data Highway Plus Channel 1A Configuration

General Utility
F7

Diagnostics file: Baud rate: Global Status flag file: Node address: Link ID:

N14 57.6kB N12 36 0

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel you want to configure for DH+

Select Options
F10 Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces: None Accept Edits F1 File CHANNEL Chan 1A Status F9

(until DH+ appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

To: See Table 13.I Accept edits made to the channel configuration Access status information about the channel you are configuring For channels 1B and 2B, toggle between 57.6k and 1785-ME (230k baud)

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel xx Status [F10] Select Option

13-25

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.I Data Highway Plus Configuration Fields

This Field: Diag. file Specifies: The file containing the channels status information Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (9-999), and press [Enter] The system creates an integer file 40 words long. Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Note: If channel 1A is configured for DH+, the communication rate must be 57.6 Kbaud. Channels 1B and 2B also have a 230k (1785-ME) option. Create an unused integer file number between 9 and 999 for the global status flag file using the data monitor. The system creates an integer file 64 words long. Enter the number of the file you just created in the global status flag on the DH+ Configuration screen. Press [Enter] Attention: When you change the processor from Run or Test to Program mode, the processor writes zeroes in the global status flags file. Any information previously in this file is lost. For more information on the global status flags file, see page 13-27. If your DH+ channel is: 1A specify the DH+ station number by setting SW1 on your processor (see the PLC-5 Family Hardware Installation Manual anything other than 1A cursor to Node Address field, enter a value of 0-77 octal, and press [Enter] If you are using a PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, or -5/60L series A processor, when you change a channel configuration from Scanner or Adapter to DH+, the node address field contains **. In order to accept a node address, you must first either enter a 0 in the global status flag file field or create the global status flag file. If you do not change the global status flag field, the software will not accept edits for the node address. If you are using an Enhanced PLC-5 processor (PLC-5/60 series B and later or PLC-5/80 series C and later processor only), the default configurations for channels 2A and 2B are UNUSED and the above does not occur. Cursor to the field and type an octal number (0-77) to identify the link to which the channel is connected, and press [Enter]

Baud rate

Communication rate for the current channel The file where you want to store token pass data

Global status flag file

Node address

The station address of your processor

Link ID

The link where the channel resides

13-26

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Specifying the Global Status Flags File Use the Global status flag file field to define where to store token-passed data. This file stores a 16-bit data word for each station corresponding to its unique DH+ station address on the DH+ link. The stations automatically pass this file to share station-specific data among each other. When a station receives a token containing this file, its data file is updated. Since this file is continuously shared among all stations, each station on the link sees the newly updated data. The Global Status Flag data for each Enhanced PLC-5 processor node address on your DH+ link is stored in the element (word) address corresponding to the octal node address. For example, if your DH+ link has processors at node addresses 7, 10, 15 and 30 and your global status flag file is N9 for each processor, the global status flag data is stored as follows: Node Address 7 10 15 30 Global StatusFile Address (decimal) N9:7 N9:8 N9:13 N9:24 Octal Address N9:7 N9:10 N9:15 N9:30

Make sure that the global status flags file in all of the processors on your DH+ link is as large as the highest node address, so that all of the nodes can communicate with each other. For example, if station 30 is the highest node number, the global status flag file (N9) in each processor must be 24 words long (octal 30 = decimal 24). You can change the radix in the Data Monitor to display the file address in octal so that you can see the element number of the octal address matching the node address. Since the Classic PLC-5 processors do not support global status flags, the information in the global status file corresponding to the node address is zero. Note Do not manipulate global status flags data table files (not even with DH+ MSG instructions). Manipulating these files faults the processor.

13-27

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channels 1A, 1B, 2A or 2B for Remote I/O in Scanner Mode

Ladder Editor Main Menu

To select a channel as a remote I/O link in scanner mode, follow the steps on the left.
Scanner Mode Channel 1B Configuration

General Utility
F7 Diag. file: N12

Baud rate: 57.6kB Complementary I/O: Enabled Range

Channel Overview
F4

Rack Address 2 C 2 3 3 3 C 7 1

Starting Group 4 4 0 4 6 0 0

Rack Size 1/4 1/4 1/2 1/4 1/4 FULL FULL

Cursor to channel you want to configure

Select Options (until
F10

024 020 030 034 036 170 010

027 021 033 035 037 177 007 *

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Accept Auto Clear Insert Delete Chan 1B Select Edits Config List to List fr List Status Option F1 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

Scanner Mode
appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F5] Auto Configuration [F6] Clear List [F7] Insert to List [F8] Delete from List [F9] Channel XX Status [F10] Select Option [PageUp], [PageDown] [Esc]

See Table 13.J

Automatically configure this channel Clear the scan list of the channel before an autoconfigure Add a rack to the scan list Delete a rack from the scan list Access status information about the channel you are configuring Toggle through available configuration options for the screen fields displayed Move through Scanner Mode screen pages Exit the Scanner Mode screen

13-28

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Specify further scanner mode configuration information using this screen. See Table 13.J. Table 13.J Scanner Mode Configuration Fields
This Field: Diag. file Specifies: The file containing the channels status information Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (9-999), and press [Enter] Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired rate. Available rates are: 57.6, 115 or 230 Kbaud. Cursor to the field, type Enabled or Disabled and press [Enter] Note: Enhanced PLC-5 processors (PLC-5/40 and -5/60 series B and PLC-5/80 series A processors only) support complementary I/O per channel. PLC-5/40 and -5/60 Series A processors support complementary I/O per processor. If complementary I/O is enabled, a C appears before the complemented rack address. See the next section for information on creating and modifying a scan list.

Baud rate

Communication rate for the remote I/O scanner mode link Whether or not you want to complement I/O racks

Complementary I/O

Scan list

The hardware I/O configuration

13-29

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Specifying the Scan List A scan list includes the following:

This Field: 1 scan rack address Contains: 3 octal (PLC-5/11 processors) 1-3 octal (PLC-5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 processors) 1-7 octal (PLC-5/30, -5/V30 processors) 1-17 octal (PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40L processors) 1-27 octal (PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 processors) 0, 2, 4, or 6 1/2, 1/4, 3/4, or FULL Automatically calculated based upon rack address, starting module group and chassis size. An asterisk (*) after a range indicates the last valid rack entry.

starting group number rack size range

1 For more information about rack addressing, refer to the PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Installation Manual.

Keep the following limitations in mind when creating/modifying your scan list:

Two or more channels operating in scanner mode cannot scan the same partial or full rack. Assign unique partial and full racks to each channel used in remote I/O scanner mode. The automatic configuration always displays the actual hardware configuration, except for racks that have their global-rack inhibit bit set. In this case, the global-rack bit overrides the automatic configuration. You must first clear the global-rack inhibit, and then press [F5] Automatic Configuration for the the Scanner Mode screen to display the correct configuration for that rack. Clear global-rack inhibit bits using the Scanner Mode Status screen for the channel that scans the racks you want to uninhibit.

13-30

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

A channel can scan up to 16 logical rack numbers and be connected to up to 32 physical devices. For example: A channel scanning rack 2 can be composed of four 1/4 racks. Only 1 rack number of the 16 available is used and only four devices of the 32 available are used. You can enter a logical address in the scan list more than one time for multiple updates during an I/O scan. Do not assign the same partial or full rack to more than one channel in scanner mode. Each channel must scan unique partial and/or full racks.

If you change a channel configuration from adapter or DH+ mode to scanner mode, use the [F6] Clear List key to clear the scan list. In any other instance where you need to clear entries from the scan list, use the [F8] Delete from List and delete the entries one at a time.
Do the Following: 1. Make sure the processor is in Remote Program or Program mode. 2. Make sure that you defined an I/O status file on the Processor Configuration screen. 3. Accept any edits made to the channel configuration. If you have errors when you accept edits, press [F6] Clear List and then accept edits again. 4. Press [F5] Automatic Configuration Note: If you perform an autoconfigure and receive the Resource not available message, you must define an I/O status file. Make sure the processor is in Remote Program, Program, or Remote Run mode. Position the cursor at the place on the scan list where you want to insert an entry. Press [F7] Insert to List. A blank entry is inserted into the scan list for you. Enter the appropriate values for the entry. Press [F10] Select Option or type the entry and press [Enter] Note: If incorrect information is entered for an entry, the processor will not display the new configuration when you save edits. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1. Make sure the processor is in Remote Program, Program, or Remote Run mode. 2. Position the cursor at the place on the scan list where you want to delete an entry. 3. Press [F8] Delete from List. The entry is deleted.

To: Create a scan list

Insert an entry into the scan list

Delete an entry for the scan list

13-31

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channels 1A, 1B, 2A or 2B for Remote I/O Adapter Mode

To select a channel as a remote I/O link in adapter mode, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Adapter Mode Channel 2A Configuration

General Utility
F7

Diagnostics file: Baud rate:

N12 57.6kB

Channel Overview
F4 Group 0 0

Rack address: 3 Starting group: 0 Rack size: FULL Last Rack: YES Discrete Transfer Configuration: Inputs destination: 001:024 Output source: 000:024 Module 0 1 BTW control BT000:000 BT000:000 BTR control BT000:000 BT000:000

Cursor to channel you want to configure

Select Options
F10

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Accept Edits F1

PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 2A Select Status Option F9 F10

(until Adapter Mode appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing [F1] - Accept Edits.

Channel Config
F5

See Table 13.K

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Access status information about the channel you are configuring Toggle through available configuration options for the screen fields displayed Move through Adapter Mode screen pages Exit the Adapter Mode screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel XX Status [F10] Select Option [PageUp], [PageDown], [Home], [End] [Esc]

13-32

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.K Adapter Mode Configuration Fields

This Field: Diagnostics file Specifies: The file containing the channels status information Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (9-999), and press [Enter] Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired rate. Available rates are: 57.6, 115, or 230 Kbaud. Cursor to the field, type the address, and press [Enter] Valid addresses are: 1 7octal (PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26, -5/30, -5/V30 processors) 1 17octal (PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40L processors) 1 27octal (PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 processors) The default is rack 3. Cursor to the field, type the number, and press [Enter] Valid entries are: 0, 2, 4 or 6. The default is 0. Note: Disable all block transfers to module groups below the starting group by entering a 0 in the BTR and BTW control fields (see below). Cursor to the field, and press [F10] Select Options until you see the desired size. If you want to communicate using: 2 words select 1/4 (starting group is 6) 4 words select 1/2 (starting group is 4) 6 words select 3/4 (starting group is 2) 8 words select FULL (starting group is 0) Cursor to the field, type yes or no, and press [Enter]

Baud rate

Communication rate for the remote I/O link The rack address as it appears to the scanner

Rack address

Starting group

The starting group number of the rack

Rack size

The number of I/O words to exchange with the supervisory processor

Last rack

Notifies the supervisory processor that this is the last rack.

(Continued)

13-33

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Input destination

Specifies: The location where the scanner (host device) places 8 discrete output words into the adapters discrete input file

Configure by Doing the Following: 1. Cursor to the left side of the colon, type the file number (decimal) of the source data, and press [Enter] 2. Cursor to the right side of the colon, type the word number (decimal) of the source data, and press [Enter] Specify an input image, output image, integer, BCD, or Hex file. For example: if you use file N7:0 and the rack size is FULL, the scanner places the 8 discrete words in file N7 words 0-7. This field defaults to the rack 3 image (I:24), file I for inputs and 24 decimal = 030 octal. (Since the input image table is octal, this converts to rack 3). If you are using rack 3 as a remote I/O rack to a scanner channel, set channel 2A to unused (instead of the default Adapter mode). Or, after configuring each adapter channel, make sure that the input source field is set to an unused file.

Output source

The location where the adapter places 8 discrete output words into the scanners discrete input file

1. Cursor to the left side of the colon, type the file number (decimal) of the source data, and press [Enter] 2. Cursor to the right side of the colon, type the word number (decimal) of the source data, and press [Enter] Specify an input image, output image, integer, BCD, or Hex file. For example: if you use file N7:10 and the rack size is FULL, the adapter channel places 8 discrete words in file N7 words 10-17. This field defaults to the rack 3 image (O:24), file O for outputs and 24 decimal = 030 octal. (Since the output image table is octal, this converts to rack 3). If you are using rack 3 as a remote I/O rack to a scanner channel, set channel 2A to unused (instead of the default Adapter mode). Or, after configuring each adapter channel, make sure that the output source field is set to an unused file.

BTW, BTR control

The control files for block transfer reads/writes

In Adapter mode, no block transfer instructions are necessary in your ladder program. Each control word must contain a unique block transfer data word to properly transmit block transfers. Create unused integer files or BT files (using the Memory Map) for each block-transfer read and write. The system creates a 6-word integer or BT data file. Press [PageDown] or [down arrow] to go to page 2 of the Adapter Mode screen. Cursor to the BTW control and BTR control fields, type in block transfer file number and elements, and press [Enter].

On the Data Monitor screen, enter the transfer length and file information for your BTR and BTW control file addresses.

13-34

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Note

When using a processor channel as an adapter to a PLC-3 scanner, set bit 5 of the user control bits (S:26).
Processor Configuration User Control Bits 00000000 00100000 Fault routine prog file no.: 0 I/O status file: 0 VME Status File: N34 RESTART LAST ACTIVE STEP Watchdog (ms): Communication time slice (ms):

Setting this bit and putting the edit into effect causes the PLC-5 processor to delay a reply to a PLC-3 scanner by approximately 1 ms.

500 3

Cursor to this field and enter a value (0 - 32767). If you enter 0, this function is disabled.

Configure Channels 1A, 1B, 2A or 2B As Unused

To configure a channel as unused, follow the steps below.
Ladder Editor Main Menu

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel you want to configure

Select Options
F10

(until Unused appears)

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing F1 - Accept Edits.

13-35

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configuring Channel 2 for Ethernet Communication (Ethernet PLC-5 Processors)

Channel 2 is reserved for Ethernet communication on the Ethernet PLC-5 processors. To configure channel 2 to support Ethernet, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Ethernet Channel 2 Configuration Diagnostics file: Ethernet address: IP address: BOOTP enable: Message connect timeout (msec): Message reply timeout (msec): Advance Functions Broadcast address: Subnet mask: Gateway address:

General Utility
F7

00:00:00:00:00:00 0.0.0.0 YES 15000 3000

Channel Overview
F4

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1

5/40E File 4 Chan 2 Status F9

Select Option F10

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Access status information about the channel you are configuring Use the BOOTP Enable field, toggle between Yes or No

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 2 Status [F10] Select Option

13-36

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Specify further Ethernet mode configuration information using this screen. Refer to Table 13.L. Table 13.L Ethernet Configuration Fields
This Field: Diagnostics file Specifies: the file containing the channels status information. Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (9-999), and press [Enter] The system creates an integer file 40 words long. Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Configured by the system. Displayed as a set of 6 bytes (in hex), separated by colons. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d You must specify the IP Address to have the PLC processor connect to the TCP/IP network. Do not use 0 or 255 as a, b, c, or d in the IP address. Cursor to the field and choose Yes or No by toggling using [F10] - Select Option. If you choose Yes, at powerup the PLC processor tries to obtain network related parameters (name and address) via a BOOTP request. You cannot manually change the IP address with 6200 software if BOOTP is enabled. If you have BOOTP enabled and the message BOOTP response not received appears, check the cabling connections and BOOTP server system. Before you choose No, Make sure that you have an IP address specified. With BOOTP set to No, the PLC processor uses the parameters that you specify locally. If you change this field from No to Yes, the change does not take effect until you cycle power. For more information on using BOOTP, see the Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual. (Continued)

Ethernet Address

the processors Ethernet hardware address. Display only. the processors Internet address.

IP Address

BOOTP Enable

whether BOOTP is enabled.

13-37

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: MSG Conn Timeout

Specifies: the number of milliseconds allowed for an MSG instruction to establish a connection with the destination node. the number of milliseconds the Ethernet interface waits for a reply to a command it initiated (through an MSG instruction). the number of minutes of inactivity before the connection is closed. the processors broadcast address. The broadcast address is used in sending multicast messages as part of the IP protocol and in responding to ARP requests. The broadcast address does not allow the sending of single message instructions to multiple Ethernet processors. the processors subnet mask. The subnet mask is used to interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. the IP address of the gateway that provides a connection to another IP network. The gateway address is required to communicate with other devices not on the a local subnet.

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, and enter a timeout period in milliseconds. (the processor rounds to the nearest 250 ms.) The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 65,535 ms The default is 15,000 ms. Cursor to the field, and enter a timeout period in milliseconds. (the processor rounds to the nearest 250 ms.) The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 65,535 ms The default is 3,000 ms. Cursor to the field and enter a timeout period in minutes. The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 65,535 minutes. The default is 30 minutes. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is all zeroes. If this field contains all zeroes, the processor chooses the appropriate broadcast address (based on the IP address and subnet mask).

MSG Reply Timeout

Inactivity Timeout

Advanced Functions Broadcast Address

Subnet Mask

Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is all zeroes. If this field contains all zeroes, no subnetworking is enabled. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is No Gateway.

Gateway Address

13-38

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configuring Channel 2 for ControlNet Communication

Channel 2 is reserved for ControlNet PLC-5 processor communication. Use the screens in the following sections to configure channel 2. Follow the steps on the left.

ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screens

Ladder Editor Main Menu
Diagnostics file: Coax Repeaters in Series: Fiber Repeater Pairs: ControlNet Node Info Channel 2 Configuration N12 1 0 MONITOR NODE 1

General Utility
F7

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Scheduled Bandwidth Usage: 28% Media Redundancy Usage: A Only Maximum Scheduled Node: 10

Node 1 2 3 4

Node Type PLC-5/40C 1771-ACN PLC-5/20C 1794-ACN

Series/Revision C/H A/A C/H C/H

Status ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE ACTIVE

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a node. number. > Rem Prog Forces:None 5/40C File JOSHUA Map Node Define Chan 2 Monitor Edit Lcl Rack Status F2 F4 F7 F9

To: Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Display the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Display the ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics Screen (off line only) Display the ControlNet Channel 2 Status Screen Display the Channel Overview Screen

Press this Key: [F2] Map Monitor [F4] Node Edit [F7] Define Local Rack [F9] Channel 2 Status [Esc]

Note

When programming off line, NODE is displayed in the upper right corner until you enter the ControlNet PLC-5 node information (see page 13-42).
13-39

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Note

The ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration is displayed on two separate screens: the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen and the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen. The Monitor and Edit screens contain the same fields. The Monitor screen displays network and node information; the Edit screen allows you to enter or update network and node information. The Monitor and Edit screens allow other users to view network and node information while a single user edits the network and node information for a ControlNet PLC-5 processor.

ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics Screen If you are programming off line, configuring Channel 2 for the first time, and entering a Channel 2 edit screen for the first time, you must specify the number of slots in the local chassis and the addressing mode on the ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics screen before the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen (see page 13-43) will be displayed. Note If you are programming on line, the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen (see page 13-43) will appear immediately after pressing [F4] Node Edit.

13-40

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To select the number of slots in the local chassis and the addressing mode from the ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics screen, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu General Utility
F7 ControlNet Node Info Channel 2 Configuration MONITOR NODE

Diagnostics file: 0 Network Update Time(ms): 5 Coax Repeaters in Series: 0 Scheduled Bandwidth Usage: 0% Fiber Repeater Pai A Only Local Rack Characteristics 0 (for reserving I/O image space) Node Node Type Select number of slots: F3 F4 F5 F6 4 Slots 8 Slots 12 Slots 16 Slots Select addressing mode: F8 2 slot F9 1 slot F10 1/2 slot

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, or ESC to exit. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept 4 8 12 Edits Slots Slots Slots F1 F3 F4 F5

16 Slots F6

5/40C File JOSHUA 2 1 1/2 Slot Slot Slot F8 F9 F10

Define Lcl Rack

F7

or

Map Monitor
F2

or

Map Monitor
F2

or

Node Edit
F4

or

Map Monitor
F2

Define Lcl Rack

F7

Monitor Actions
F9

Map Edit
F4

Define Lcl Rack

F7

13-41

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

If You Want to: Accept channel configuration edits Select 4 slots in the local chassis Select 8 slots in the local chassis Select 12 slots in the local chassis Select 16 slots in the local chassis Select 2-slot addressing Select 1-slot addressing Select 1/2-slot addressing Display the previous screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F3] 4 Slots [F4] 8 Slots [F5] 12 Slots [F6] 16 Slots [F8] 2-Slot [F9] 1-Slot [F10] 1/2-Slot [Esc]

Note

When you are entering a Channel 2 edit screen for the first time only, you must also press [F1] Accept Edits and enter the node number of the configured ControlNet PLC-5 processor on this screen:
ControlNet Node Info Channel 2 Configuration Diagnostics file: Coax Repeaters in Series: Fiber Repeater Pairs: 0 0 0 MONITOR MODE

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Scheduled Bandwidth Usage: 0% Media Redundancy Usage: A Only Maximum Scheduled Node: 0

Node

Node Type

Series/Revision

Status

Enter node number of processor being configured. > Rem Prog Forces:None

5/40C File JOSHUA

13-42

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Ladder Editor Main Menu

General Utility
F7

When you have specified the number of slots in the local chassis, the addressing mode, and the node number of the configured ControlNet PLC-5 processor (when you are entering a Channel 2 edit screen for the first time only), follow the steps on the left to display the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen.
ControlNet Node Info Channel 2 Configuration Diagnostics file: Coax Repeaters in Series: Fiber Repeater Pairs: N12 1 0 Network Update Time(ms): 5 Scheduled Bandwidth Usage: 28% Media Redundancy Usage: A Only Maximum Scheduled Node: 10 Status ACTIVE EDIT NODE 1

Channel Overview
F4

Node 1

Node Type PLC-5/40C

Series/Revision C/H

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5 Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None 5/40C File JOSHUA Accept Map Move Copy Auto Delete Insert Delete Select Edits Edit Entry Entry Network List to List Item Option F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F10

Node Edit
F4

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Move a node description to a new network address Copy node information to an existing or new network address, overwriting any previous node information Add all online nodes connected to the channel to the node list (up through the current Maximum Scheduled Node + 8) Delete all nodes (excluding the processor you are configuring) from the list Insert a node or range of nodes into the node list Delete the cursored node from the node list Toggle through the options of the cursored entry Return to the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen
1 Since Auto Network includes getting slot information that is only displayed on the ControlNet I/O

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F2] Map Edit [F3] Move Entry [F4] Copy Entry [F5] Auto Network 1 [F6] Delete List [F7] Insert to List [F8] Delete Item [F10] Select Option 2 [Esc]

Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor or Edit) Screen, you must enter the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen to map the modules. 2 Only available on the Coax Repeaters in Series, Fiber Repeater Pairs, Media Redundancy Usage, Node Type, Series/ Revision, and Status fields.

13-43

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.M describes the fields on the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) screens.

Table 13.M ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screen Fields
This Field: Diagnostic file Specifies: the file containing the channels status information Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999),and press [Enter]. The system creates an integer file 40 words long. Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Unpredictable machine operation can result. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Cursor to the field and enter a number (0 5)or press [F10] Select Option to select a value, and press [Enter]. The default is 0. Cursor to the field and enter a number (0 2)or press [F10] Select Option to select a value, and press [Enter]. The default is 0. Note: Fiber repeaters must always exist in pairs; entering a value of 1 would specify 2 fiber repeaters. When the value of the Fiber Repeater Pairs field is 0, no Pair #x length fields or prompts will be displayed. When the value of the Fiber Repeater Pairs field is 1, the Pair #1 length field will be displayed. When the value of the Fiber Repeater Pairs field is 2, the Pair #2 length field will be displayed. If the value of the Fiber Repeater Pairs field is 1 or 2, cursor to the field and enter a number (100 4000meters). Note: Any number will be rounded to the next higher 100 meter value. Cursor to the field, and enter a number in milliseconds (2 100ms). The default is 5 ms. Calculated by 6200 programming software. The percent of Scheduled Bandwidth Usage changes depending on the network configuration. Cursor to the field and press [F10] Select Option to toggle among A/B, A only, and B only and press [Enter]. Note: If any device on the ControlNet network is non-redundant, you must select A only. Cursor to the field and enter a number (1 99),and press [Enter]. Note: This field must be set to the highest node number on the network which needs to transmit in the scheduled time. (Continued)

Coax Repeaters in Series Fiber Repeater Pairs

the number of coax repeaters in series the number of fiber repeater pairs in series on the ControlNet network the length of the fiber repeater pairs in series used on the ControlNet network

Pair #x Length

Network Update Time (NUT) Scheduled Bandwidth Usage Media Redundancy Usage Maximum Scheduled Node

the repetitive time interval in which data can be sent on the ControlNet network the amount of the available scheduled bandwidth used for the network the redundancy characteristic for the ControlNet channel

the maximum node that sends I/O during the network update interval

13-44

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field:

Specifies:

Configure by Doing the Following:

You can configure nodes connected to a ControlNet link by using the following fields: Node network address on the ControlNet link Press [F3] Move Entry, [F4] Copy Entry, or [F7] Insert To List and enter a network address (1 99);press [Enter]. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Node field: To go directly to a particular node, enter node. on the command line and press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 3., the cursor moves to node 3. To insert a range of nodes, press [F7] Insert to List and enter node node (low to high) on the command line; press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 2 4, nodes 2 through 4 are inserted. Cursor to the field and press [F10] Select Option to toggle through the valid selections (1771-ACN, 1771-ACNR, 1794-ACN, 1794-ACNR, PLC-5/20C, PLC-5/40C, 1784-KTC, 1770-KFC, and 1770-KFCD). Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Node Type field: On the command line, you may also enter enough of the node type string to uniquely identify the desired node type and press [Enter]. If you attempt to toggle this field on the processor that is currently being configured, an error message will be displayed. Calculated by 6200 programming software; the default value will be the latest series and revision of the node type selected. Note: If you press [F5] Auto Network, 6200 programming software displays the actual series/revision of the node type selected. You can toggle to other valid series and revisions by pressing [F10] Select Option. Cursor to the field and toggle between Active or Inactive by pressing [F10] Select Option. Selecting Active specifies the node as a working/communicating node on the ControlNet network (the ControlNet PLC-5 processor should attempt to establish I/O connections with this node); selecting Inactive specifies that the node is not actually connected to the network, though configuration and mapping for the node is included in the computation of the network update time, etc. (the ControlNet PLC-5 processor should not attempt to establish I/O connections with this node). Note: If you attempt to toggle this field on the processor that is currently being configured, an error message is displayed.

Node Type

the node type

Series/Revision

the series and revision of the node

Status

the status of the node

13-45

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screens

To monitor I/O mapping on channel 2 for ControlNet communication, follow the steps on the left. Note For more information on I/O mapping, see Understanding ControlNet I/O Mapping in chapter 2 of the ControlNet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual. If you are programming off line, configuring Channel 2 for the first time, and entering a Channel 2 edit screen for the first time, you must select the correct number of slots in the local chassis, the addressing mode, and the node number of the configured ControlNet PLC-5 processor prior to entering the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen. The local rack image size and the other channels configured as scanner must be taken into account when auto-mapping.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Status File: Data Input File: Data Output File: Dflt Config File: Node S/M 1 1 2 6 7 3 1 Mod/Msg Type N32 N34 N36 N38 ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration MONITOR NODE 1

Note

General Utility
F7

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Sch BW(%): 28 Processors ControlNet Resource Usage Map Entries PLC BW (%) DIF (%) DOF (%) 8 5 10 8 Output File Size n/a n/a N36:0 24 O:010 8 n/a n/a N36:4 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a Status Offset 0 3 6 9 15 Config File Size n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a N38:0 37 N36:64 13 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Channel Overview
F4

Act Net Pckt Input Time(ms) File Size PLC 5/40C n/a n/a n/a Peer Out To 3 5 n/a n/a 1771 ACN 5 I:010 8 1771 IFE/A 10 N34:0 20 1771 OFE/A 10 N34:20 5 PLC 5/20C n/a n/a n/a Peer In 5 N34:25 24

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a node.s/m number. > Rem Prog Forces:None Display:Slot/Message 5/40C File JOSHUA Map Select Node View Monitor Define I/O Monitor Edit Display Monitor Times Status Lcl Rack Monitor Actions F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9

Map Monitor
F2

13-46

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To: Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Select I/O mapping display characteristics Display the Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Toggle between View Times and View Mapping Display the ControlNet Map Entries Status Screen Display the ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics Screen (off line only) Display the I/O Configuration Utility Monitor Screen. For more information on using the I/O configuration utility, see the I/O Configuration Utility manual. Display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Display the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen
1 Available only for I/O modules supported by the I/O Configuration Utility. 2 Available only when the cursor is on a 1794-ACN module. 3 If the display mode is set to Message only, the [F9] Monitor Actions key will not appear.

Press this Key: [F2] Map Edit [F3] Select Display [F4] Node Monitor [F5] View Times/View Mapping [F6] Monitor Status [F7] Define Local Rack [F8] I/O Monitor 1

[F9] Monitor Actions 2, 3 [Esc]

After You Press: [F3] Select Display

Press: [F2] Slot Display [F3] Message Display [F4] Slot/Message

To: Display slot information only Display message information only Display both slot and message information

13-47

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Configuration (Edit) screen, follow the steps on the left. Note The ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration is displayed on two separate screens:
ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen: contains the Actual Network Packet Time (ms) field displays I/O mapping information ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen: contains the Expected Network Packet Time (ms) field allows you to enter I/O mapping information for the nodes

The Monitor and Edit screens allow other users to view I/O mapping information while a single user edits the I/O mapping information for a ControlNet PLC-5 processor.
Ladder Editor Main Menu General Utility
F7 Status File: Data Input File: Data Output File: Dflt Config File: Node S/M 1 1 2 6 7 3 1 Mod/Msg Type N32 N34 N36 N38 ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration EDIT NODE 1

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Sch BW(%): 28 Processors ControlNet Resource Usage Map Entries PLC BW (%) DIF (%) DOF (%) 8 5 9 7 Output File Size n/a n/a N36:0 24 O:010 8 n/a n/a N36:4 5 n/a n/a n/a n/a Status Offset 0 3 6 9 15 Config File Size n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a N38:0 37 N36:64 13 n/a n/a n/a n/a

Channel Overview
F4

Exp Net Pckt Input Time(ms) File Size PLC 5/40C n/a n/a n/a Peer Out To 3 5 n/a n/a 1771 ACN 5 I:010 8 1771 IFE/A 10 N34:0 20 1771 OFE/A 10 N34:20 5 PLC 5/20C n/a n/a n/a Peer In 5 N34:25 24

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a node.s/m number. > Rem Prog Forces:None Display:Slot/Message 5/40C File JOSHUA Accept Select Node Auto Clear Insert Delete Edit Select Edits Display Edit Mapping * to List * Actions Option F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10

Map Monitor
F2

Map Edit
F2

13-48

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Select I/O mapping display characteristics Display the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Automatically map I/O modules that are listed but not mapped Clear the mapping information for the I/O module that the cursor is currently on or clear all of the mapping information for every I/O module on the map table Insert a slot (and/or message) or range of slots (and/or messages) into the node list Clear the mapping information and delete the node information for the slot (and/or message) entry or delete the mapping and node information for every slot (and/or message) entry on the map table Display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Toggle through the options of the cursored entry Display ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen
1 2

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F3] Select Display [F4] Node Edit [F5] Auto Mapping [F6] Clear * [F7] Insert to List [F8] Delete *

[F9] Edit Actions 1, 2 [F10] Select Option [Esc]

Available only when the cursor is on a 1794-ACN module. If the display mode is set to Message only, the [F9] Edit Actions key will not appear.

After You Press: [F3] Select Display

Press: [F2] Slot Display [F3] Message Display [F4] Slot/Message

To: Display slot information only Display message information only Display both slot and message information Select all I/O modules not mapped Select or unselect the cursored I/O module Unselect any selected I/O modules Direct the software to automatically scan configured nodes for module information (online only) Auto map all selected input, output, and configuration information Clear the mapping information for the I/O module that the cursor is currently on Clears all of the mapping information for every module on the map table Clear the map information and delete the node information for the slot (and/or message) entry Delete all of the mapping and node information for every slot (and/or message) entry on the map table

[F5] Auto Mapping

[F2] Select All [F3] Toggle Device [F4] Clear All [F8] Auto Module

[F10] Auto I/O Map [F6] Clear * [F8] Clear Item [F10] Clear List [F8] Delete * [F8] Delete Item [F10] Delete List

13-49

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Note

While you are editing the map-table entries or accepting pending edits on the ControlNet I/O Mapping Configuration (Edit) screen, the screen may display the following message: Maximum transmit size exceeded adjustments necessary. This message indicates that you are attempting to configure a node to transmit more I/O per Network Update Time (NUT) than the system supports. Table 13.N describes the fields on the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) screens.

Table 13.N ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screen Fields
This Field: Status File Specifies: the file which stores the scheduled I/O connection status in the map table the file which stores input data for entries in the map table (peer to peer, analog I/O, or intelligent module communication) the file which stores output data for entries in the map table (peer to peer, analog I/O, or intelligent module communication) the file which stores configuration information for entries in the map table when the auto I/O mapping feature is used Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field and enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999),and press [Enter]. Cursor to the field and enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999),and press [Enter]. Note: Entering a value of zero undefines the Data Input File. Cursor to the field and enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999),and press [Enter]. Note: Entering a value of zero undefines the Data Output File. Cursor to the field and enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999),and press [Enter]. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Default Config File field: Entering a value of zero undefines the Default Config File. Some non-discrete output modules require the configuration data to be included with the actual output data. In those cases, the data output file is also used as the configuration file. If you press [F5] Auto Mapping before you have configured this file, an error message appears prompting you to enter a value. Cursor to the field, and enter a number in milliseconds (2 100ms). The default is 5 ms. Calculated by 6200 programming software. This is a read-only field. (Continued)

Data Input File

Data Output File

Default Config File

Network Update Time (NUT) Scheduled BW(%)

the repetitive time interval in which data can be sent on the ControlNet network the amount of the available scheduled bandwidth used for the network

13-50

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Map Entries

Specifies: the number of scheduled map entries between the processor and other nodes the percentage of bandwidth used for the ControlNet PLC-5 processor you are using the percentage of the Data Input File currently being used the percentage of the Data Output File currently being used the network address

Configure by Doing the Following: Calculated by 6200 programming software. This is a read-only field. Calculated by 6200 programming software. This is a read-only field. Calculated by 6200 programming software. This is a read-only field. Calculated by 6200 programming software. This is a read-only field. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Node field: To go directly to a particular node, enter node. on the command line and press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 3., the cursor moves to node 3. You cannot add nodes on the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen. Node changes must be made on the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen only. Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display slot/message information only. Press [F7] Insert to List and enter a new slot/message number on the command line, and press [Enter]. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Slot/Message field: To go directly to a particular node slot/message destination, enter node.slot/message on the command line and press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 3.1, the cursor moves to node 3, slot/message 1. To insert a range of slots, press [F7] Insert to List and enter slot slot (low to high) when the node to be added to is highlighted or enter node.slot slot (low to high) when the node to be added to is not highlighted. To insert a range of messages, press [F7] Insert to List and enter message message (low to high) when the node to be added to is highlighted or enter node.message message (low to high) when the node to be added to is not highlighted. (Continued)

PLC BW (%)

DIF (%) DOF (%) Node

Slot/Message (S/M)

slot/message information on the ControlNet link

13-51

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Slot

Specifies: slot information on the ControlNet link

Configure by Doing the Following: Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display slot or slot/message information. Press [F7] Insert to List and enter a new slot number on the command line, and press [Enter]. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Slot field: To go directly to a particular node/slot destination, enter node.slot on the command line and press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 3.1, the cursor moves to node 3, slot 1. To insert a range of slots, press [F7] Insert to List and enter slot slot (low to high) when the node to be added to is highlighted or enter node.slot slot (low to high) when the node to be added to is not highlighted. Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display message or slot/message information. Press [F7] Insert to List and enter a new message number on the command line, and press [Enter]. Note: To go directly to a particular node/message destination, enter node.message on the command line and press [Enter]. For example, if you enter 3.1, the cursor moves to node 3, message 1. Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display slot/message information only. When this field is highlighted, press [F10] Select Option to toggle through the valid selections, and press [Enter]. Valid values are dependent on the module/message type. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Module/Message Type field: Only the analog modules can be edited in this field. On the command line, you may also enter enough of the module/message type string to uniquely identify the module/message type and press [Enter]. Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display slot or slot/message information. When this field is highlighted, press [F10] Select Option to toggle through the valid selections, and press [Enter]. Valid values are dependent on the module type. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Module Type field: Only the analog modules can be edited in this field. On the command line, you may also enter enough of the module type string to uniquely identify the module type and press [Enter]. (Continued)

Message (Msg)

message information on the ControlNet link

Module/Message (Mod/Msg) Type

the module/message type

Module Type

the module type

13-52

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Message Type

Specifies: the message type

Configure by Doing the Following: Available when the I/O mapping display characteristics are configured to display message or slot/message information. When this field is highlighted, press [F10] Select Option to toggle through the valid selections, and press [Enter]. Valid values are dependent on the message type. Note: On the command line, you may also enter enough of the message type string to uniquely identify the message type and press [Enter]. Available on the ControlNet I/O Mapping Configuration (Monitor) screen only. This is a read-only field. Note: The Actual Net Packet Time is dependent upon the number of rates supported by the node and is calculated by 6200 programming software. Available on the ControlNet I/O Mapping Configuration (Edit) screen only. Cursor to the field and enter a value between the Network Update Time and 15,000; press [Enter]. Note: The Actual Net Packet Time will be less than or equal to the Expected Net Packet Time. A default size is set by 6200 programming software; sizes can be adjusted depending upon the module. If the module type is digital, I: is displayed; enter an input file offset (0 037for a PLC-5/20C processor; 0 177for a PLC-5/40C processor; 0 277for a PLC-5/60C or PLC-5/80C processor). If the module type is analog or peer-to-peer, the data input file (N3 N999)is displayed and can only be changed in the data input file. Note: This field is valid only for the following module types: 1771-ACN, 1771-ACNR, 1794-ACN, 1794-ACNR, and Peer In To. A default size is set by 6200 programming software; sizes can be adjusted depending upon the module. If the module type is digital, O: is displayed; enter an output file offset (0 037for a PLC-5/20C processor; 0 177for a PLC-5/40C processor; 0 277for a PLC-5/60C or PLC-5/80C processor). If the module type is analog or peer-to-peer, the data output file (N3 N999) is displayed and can only be changed in the data output file. Note: This field is valid only for the following module types: 1771-ACN, 1771-ACNR, 1794-ACN, 1794-ACNR, and Peer Out To. (Continued)

Actual Network Packet Time (ms)

the actual network packet time for each node type and module

Expected Network Packet Time (ms)

the expected network packet time for each node type and module

Input File/Size

the destination file for information received from an I/O module and the amount of information received from an I/O module

Output File/Size

the source file for information sent to an I/O module and the amount of information sent to an I/O module

13-53

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: Status Offset

Specifies: the offset into the status file that contains the status information of the connection the file for storing the I/O configuration needed for a module and the size of the file needed to store the I/O configuration for the module

Configure by Doing the Following: Calculated by 6200 programming software.

Config File/Size

Cursor to the file and enter an unused integer file number (N3 N999) and the configuration size information (valid values are dependent on the module type); press [Enter]. Note: Keep the following in mind when you configure the Config File/Size field: This field is valid only for the 1771 and 1794 analog and intelligent modules. For the 1771 analog and intelligent modules, the configuration and output addresses must be the same; for the 1794 analog and intelligent modules, the configuration and output addresses must not be the same and are associated with the node.

13-54

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

ControlNet View Times Screen

Ladder Editor Main Menu General Utility
F7

To see the view times information on channel 2 for ControlNet communication, follow the steps on the left.
ControlNet View Times Channel 2 Configuration Status File: Data Input File: Data Output File: Dflt Config File: Node S/M 1 1 2 6 7 3 1 Mod/Msg Type N32 N34 N36 N38 MONITOR NODE 1

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Sch BW(%): 28 Processors ControlNet Resource Usage Map Entries PLC BW (%) DIF (%) DOF (%) 8 5 10 8 Exp Net Pckt Time(ms) n/a 5 5 15 13 n/a 5

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Act Net Pckt Time(ms) PLC 5/40C n/a Peer Out To 3 5 1771 ACN 5 1771 IFE/A 10 1771 OFE/A 10 PLC 5/20C n/a Peer In 5

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a node.s/m number. > Rem Prog Forces:None Display:Slot/Message 5/40C File JOSHUA Map Select Node View Monitor I/O Monitor Edit Display Monitor Times Status Monitor Actions F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F8 F9

Map Monitor
F2

To: Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Select I/O mapping display characteristics Display the Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Toggle between View Times and View Mapping Display the ControlNet Map Entries Status Screen Display the I/O Configuration Utility Monitor Screen. For more information on using the I/O configuration utility, see the I/O Configuration Utility manual. Display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen
1 Available only for I/O modules supported by the I/O Configuration Utility. 2 Available only when the cursor is on a 1794-ACN module. 3 If the display mode is set to Message only, the [F9] Monitor Actions key will not appear.

Press this Key: [F2] Map Edit [F3] Select Display [F4] Node Monitor [F5] View Times/View Mapping [F6] Monitor Status [F8] I/O Monitor 1

View Times
F5

[F9] Monitor Actions 2, 3 [Esc]

After You Press: [F3] Select Display

Press: [F2] Slot Display [F3] Message Display [F4] Slot/Message

To: Display slot information only Display message information only Display both slot and message information
13-55

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

ControlNet Map Entries Status Screen

Ladder Editor Main Menu

To display the ControlNet Map Entries Status screen, follow the steps on the left.
ControlNet Map Entries Status Channel 2 Configuration MONITOR

General Utility
F7

Status File: Data Input File: Data Output File: Dflt Config File: Node S/M

N32 N34 N36 N38

Network Update Time(ms): 5 Sch BW(%): 28 Processors ControlNet Resource Usage Map Entries PLC BW (%) DIF (%) DOF (%) 8 9 7 Status Status Offset Data Valid n/a YES YES YES YES YES n/a Inhibit Reset n/a 0 0 0 0 0 n/a n/a 0 0 0 0 0 n/a

Mod/Msg Type

Channel Overview
F4

1 1 2 6 7 7 3 R R W W

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

PLC 5/40C Peer Out To 3 1771 ACN 1771 IFE/A 1771 OFE/A 1771 OFE/A PLC 5/20C

n/a SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS SUCCESS n/a

0 3 6 9 12

Page up or page down, or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Display:Slot/Message Select Display F3

5/40C File JOSHUA

To see whether an entry is a Read (R) or a Write (W) operation, look at this field for that entry.
Map Monitor
F2

After You Press:

Monitor Status
F6

Press: [F2] Slot Display [F3] Message Display [F4] Slot/Message

To: Display slot information only Display message information only Display both slot and message information

[F3] Select Display

Table 13.O describes the fields on the ControlNet Map Entries Status screen. Note See Table 13.N for more information on the Status File, Data Input File, Data Output File, Default Config File, Network Update Rate, Scheduled BW (%), Map Entries, PLC BW (%), DIF (%), DOF (%), Node, Slot/Message, and Module/Message Type fields.

13-56

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.O ControlNet Map Entries Status Screen Fields

This Field: Status Specifies: the status of the connection or node specific status from the I/O module the offset into the status file which stores the status of the connection between the processor and the node/module. whether the data associated with a connection is valid or invalid Configure by Doing the Following: This is a read-only field. For a list of errors that may be displayed and possible corrective actions, see Appendix C. This is a read-only field.

Status Offset

Data Valid

This is a read-only field. For all connections (except 1794 Flex I/O), one of the following is displayed: YES indicates the data for the slot is valid. NO indicates the data for the slot is invalid. For 1794 Flex I/O, one of the following characters is displayed for each flex slot: Y indicates the data for the slot is valid. N indicates the data for the slot is invalid. x indicates the slot is not configured. For example, YYxNNxYx indicates that the data for slots 0, 1 and 6 is valid; the data for slots 3 and 4 is invalid; and slots 2, 5 and 7 are not configured. Enter a value (0 or 1) and press [Enter]. If you enter 0, the reset bit is cleared and the ControlNet PLC-5 processor will attempt to establish a connection with the node. If you enter 1, the reset bit is set and the ControlNet PLC-5 processor will not attempt to establish a connection with the node. Enter a value (0 or 1) and press [Enter]. If you enter 0, the reset bit is cleared and the ControlNet PLC-5 processor will set the output nodes Run/Program command to the processors mode. If you enter 1, the inhibit bit is set and the ControlNet PLC-5 processor will set the output nodes Run/Program command to Program mode.

Inhibit

whether the ControlNet PLC-5 processor will or will not attempt to establish a connection with the node or module whether the controller will set the output nodes Run/Program command to Program mode

Reset

13-57

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screens

To display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen, follow the steps on the left. Note
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Node 2 1794 ACN Fault Action Idle Action Fault Action From Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle

The cursor must be on a 1794-ACN/ACNR module to display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen.
ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration MONITOR NODE 1

General Utility
F7

Module Type Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 Digital IE8/A OE4/A IE4XOE2/A Digital Digital Digital Digital

Channel Overview
F4

Reset Reset Safe Safe Reset Reset Reset Reset

Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Map Monitor F2

Define LclRack F7

5/40C File JOSHUA Edit Actions F9

Map Monitor
F2

To: Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen Display the ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics Screen (off line only) Display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen
1

Press this Key: [F2] Map Monitor or [Esc] [F7] Define Local Rack [F9] Edit Actions 1

Cursor to a 1794-ACN/ACNR module

Monitor Actions
F9

If the display mode of the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) screens is set to Message only, the [F9] Edit Actions key will not appear.

13-58

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen, follow the steps on the left. Note
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Node 2 1794 ACN Fault Action Idle Action Fault Action From Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle Idle

The cursor must be on a 1794-ACN/ACNR module to display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen.
ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration EDIT NODE 1

General Utility
F7

Module Type Slot 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 1794 Digital IE8/A OE4/A IE4XOE2/A Digital Digital Digital Digital

Channel Overview
F4

Reset Reset Safe Safe Reset Reset Reset Reset

Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset Reset

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key or cursor key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Map Edits Edit F1 F2

5/40C File JOSHUA Toggle Toggle All Entry F8 F10

Map Monitor
F2

Cursor to a 1794-ACN/ACNR module

or Map Edit
F2

Monitor Actions
F9

Edit Actions
F9

Edit Actions
F9

13-59

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Display the ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen Toggle the I/O action of the cursored field Toggle the I/O action of the cursored module Display the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F2] Map Edit [F8] Toggle All [F10] Toggle Entry [Esc]

Table 13.P describes the fields on the ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) screens.

Table 13.P ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor and Edit) Screens
This Field: Slot Module Type Fault Action Specifies: the slot of the 1794 chassis occupied by a particular module the module type the action the module should take when it faults Configure by Doing the Following: This is a read-only field. This is a read-only field. Cursor to the field and press [F10] Toggle Entry to toggle the cursored module or press [F8] Toggle All to toggle the entire Fault Action field. Toggle among the following: Reset changes the outputs to a value of zero. Hold Last maintains the current output value. Safe sets the output to the user-specified fail-safe data. Cursor to the field and press [F10] Toggle Entry to toggle the cursored module or press [F8] Toggle All to toggle the entire Idle Action field. Toggle among the following: Reset changes the outputs to a value of zero. Hold Last maintains the current output value. Safe sets the output to the user-specified fail-safe data. Cursor to the field and press [F10] Toggle Entry to toggle the cursored module or press [F8] Toggle All to toggle the entire Fault Action From Idle field. Toggle among the following: Idle specifies the use of the idle action when the fault occurs in idle. Fault specifies the use of the fault action when the fault occurs in idle.

Idle Action

the action the module should take when the connection is idle

Fault Action From Idle

the action the module should take after faulting from idle

13-60

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configure Channel 2 (PLC -5/40L, -5/V40L, and -5/60L Processors)

Channel 2 of PLC-5/40L, -5/V40L, and -5/60L processors supports extended local I/O racks. The scan list for extended local I/O is similar to the scan list for remote I/O. The differences are:

The remote I/O scan list displays rack size. The rack size is determined by the chassis size (number of slots) and backplane addressing used by the chassis. Table 13.Q explains the relationship among chassis size, backplane addressing and rack size (logical racks).

Table 13.Q How Chassis Size and Backplane Addressing Determine the Quantity of Logical Racks
If You are Using this Chassis Size: 4-slot 8-slot 12-slot 16-slot And 2-slot addressing (single density) 1/4 logical rack 1/2 logical rack 3/4 logical rack 1 logical rack Or 1-slot addressing (double density) 1/2 logical rack 1 logical rack 1 1/2 logical racks 2 logical racks Or 1/2-slot addressing (quad density) 1 logical rack 2 logical racks 3 logical racks 4 logical racks

On the extended-local-I/O scan list the actual chassis size and backplane addressing is displayed, not the logical rack size.

The scan list for extended local I/O has one entry for each physical chassis on the extended local I/O channel. If an adapter on a remote I/O channel resides in a physical chassis that contains more than one logical rack, more than one entry appears on the remote I/O scan list for that single chassis.

13-61

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Figure 13.3 shows the scan list for both remote I/O and extended local I/O. Each channel shows a 16-slot chassis using 1-slot addressing with a starting address of rack 4, module group 0. This chassis contains logical racks 4-5. Figure 13.3 Remote I/O Scan List vs Extended I/O Scan List
Remote
Rack ## Starting Group 0 0 Rack Size FULL FULL Range

Extended
4 Address 0 Group 16-SLOT Size Addressing Backplane Range 1-SLOT 040-057

4 5

040-047 050-057

Rack

Starting Chassis

Configure Channel 2 for Extended Local I/O

On the Channel Overview screen, channel 2 is already designated as the extended local I/O scanner. To configure extended local I/O, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Diag. file: N100 Chassis Backplane Size Addressing 16-SLOT 4-SLOT 12-SLOT 1-SLOT 2-SLOT 1-SLOT Range Extended Local I/O Channel 2 Configuration

General Utility
F7

Rack Address 1 3 3

Starting Group 0 0 2

010 027 030 031 032-045 *

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key or enter a value. Rem Prog Accept Edits F1 PLC 5/60L Addr 31 Chan 2 Select Status Option F9 F10

Auto Config F5

Insert to List F7

Delete fr List F8

[F1]

Dont forget to save your edits by pressing Accept Edits.

13-62

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Automatically configure this channel Add a chassis to the scan list Delete a chassis from the scan list Access status information for Channel 2 Toggle through available configuration options for the screen fields displayed Move through Extended Local I/O screen pages Display the Channel Overview screen

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F5] Auto Configuration [F7] Insert to List [F8] Delete from List [F9] Channel 2 Status [F10] Select Option [PageUp], [PageDown], [Home], [End] [Esc]

Specify further configuration information using this screen. See Table 13.R. Table 13.R Extended Local I/O Channel 2 Configuration Fields
This Field: Diag. file Specifies: The file containing the channels status information Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (9-999), and press [Enter] Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. See the next section for information on creating and modifying a scan list.

Scan list

The hardware I/O configuration

13-63

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Specifying the Scan List for Extended Local I/O A scan list includes the following:
For this Field: 1 Scan rack address Starting group number Chassis size Backplane addressing Range Contains: 1-17 octal (PLC-5/40L and -5/V40L processors) 1-27 octal (PLC-5/60L processors) 0, 2, 4, or 6 4-slot, 8-slot, 12-slot, 16-slot 1-slot, 2-slot, or 1/2-slot Automatically calculated based upon rack address, starting module group, and chassis size. An asterisk (*) after a range indicates the last valid rack entry.

1 For more information about rack addressing, see the PLC-5 Family Programmable Controllers Installation Manual.

Keep the following limitations in mind when creating/modifying your scan list:

A scan list can only have 16 entries because only 16 adapters can be on channel 2. The automatic configuration always displays the actual hardware configuration except for chassis that have their global inhibit bit set. In this case, that global bit overrides the automatic configuration. You must first clear the global inhibit bits for all chassis on the channel, and then press [F5] Automatic Configuration for the Extended Local I/O screen to display the correct configuration for that channel. Clear global inhibit bits using the Processor Status Status screen.

A scan list can have a maximum of 16 chassis. Entries cannot be repeated on the scan list.

13-64

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Use the following table for information about creating/modifying your scan list:
To: Create a scan list Do the Following: Make sure the processor is in Remote Program or Program mode. 1. Make sure that you defined an I/O status file on the Processor Configuration screen. 2. Accept any edits made to the channel configuration 3. Press [F5] Automatic Configuration If you have errors when you accept edits, press [F6] Clear List and then accept edits again. If some or all adapters are not on the scan list and should be, check to see that they are powered-up and that the channels are connected properly. Also verify that all switch settings on the adapters are set correctly. Make sure the processor is in Remote Program, Program, or Remote Run mode. 1. Position the cursor at the place on the scan list where you want to insert an entry. 2. Press [F7] Insert to List. A blank entry is inserted into the scan list for you. 3. Enter in the appropriate values for the entry. Press [F10] Select Option or type in the entry and press [Enter] Note: If incorrect information is entered for an entry, the processor will not display the new configuration when you save edits. Make sure the processor is in Remote Program, Program, or Remote Run mode. 1. Position the cursor at the place on the scan list where you want to delete an entry. 2. Press [F8] Delete from List. The entry is deleted. Note: If incorrect information is entered for an entry, the processor will not display the new configuration when you save edits.

Insert an entry into the scan list

Delete an entry for the scan list

13-65

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Configuring Channel 3A for PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module Communication (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors)
Channel 3A can be used for Ethernet communication through the PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module on the Enhanced PLC-5 processors. To configure channel 3A to support Ethernet, follow the steps on the left:
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Ethernet Channel 3A Configuration Diagnostics file: N7 Ethernet address: 00:00:00:00:00:00 IP address: 0.0.0.0 BOOTP enable: YES Message connect timeout (msec): 15000 Message reply timeout (msec): 3000 Inactivity timeout (min): 3 Advance Functions Broadcast address: Subnet mask: Gateway address:

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0

Cursor to channel 3A
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Edits F1

5/40ES File 4 Chan 3A Select Status Option F9 F10

To: Accept edits made to the channel configuration Access status information about the channel you are configuring Use the BOOTP Enable field, toggle between Yes or No

Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F9] Channel 3A Status [F10] Select Option

Specify further PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module mode configuration information using this screen. Refer to Table 13.S.

13-66

Configuring Processor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Table 13.S PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module Configuration Fields

This Field: Diagnostics file Specifies: the current and pending edit value of the file containing the channels status information. Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, type an unused integer file number (3-999), and press [Enter] The system creates an integer file 40 words long. Attention: Assign a unique diagnostic file to each channel. Do not assign a diagnostic file that is the I/O status file you assigned or any other used integer file. Otherwise, unpredictable machine operation could occur with possible damage to equipment and/or injury to personnel. Note: You must define a diagnostics file for a channel configured for anything but unused (even if you are not using the channel) if you want to get status information for that channel. Configured by the system. Displayed as a set of 6 bytes (in hex), separated by colons. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d You must specify the IP Address to have the PLC processor connect to the TCP/IP network. Do not use 0 or 255 as a, b, c, or d in the IP address. Cursor to the field and choose Yes or No by toggling using [F10] Select Option. If you choose Yes, at powerup the Enhanced PLC-5 processor tries to obtain network related parameters (name and address) via a BOOTP request. You cannot manually change the IP address with 6200 software if BOOTP is enabled. If you have BOOTP enabled and the message BOOTP response not received appears, check the cabling connections and BOOTP server system. Before you choose No, Make sure that you have an IP address specified. With BOOTP set to No, the Enhanced PLC-5 processor uses the parameters that you specify locally. If you change this field from No to Yes, the change does not take effect until you cycle power. For more information on using BOOTP, see the Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual. Cursor to the field, and enter a timeout period in milliseconds. (The processor rounds to the nearest 250 ms.) The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 65,535 ms The default is 15,000 ms. (Continued)

Ethernet Address

the processors Ethernet hardware address. Display only. the processors Internet address.

IP Address

BOOTP Enable

whether BOOTP is enabled.

MSG Conn Timeout

the number of milliseconds allowed for an MSG instruction to establish a connection with the destination node.

13-67

Configuring PrefaceProcessor Channels for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

This Field: MSG Reply Timeout

Specifies: the number of milliseconds the Enhanced PLC-5 processor waits for a reply to a command it initiated (through an MSG instruction). the number of minutes of inactivity before the connection is closed. the processors broadcast address. The broadcast address is used in sending multicast messages as part of the IP protocol and in responding to ARP requests. The broadcast address does not allow the sending of single message instructions to multiple Enhanced PLC-5 processors. the processors subnet mask. The subnet mask is used to interpret IP addresses when the internet is divided into subnets. the IP address of the gateway that provides a connection to another IP network. The gateway address is required to communicate with other devices not on the local subnet.

Configure by Doing the Following: Cursor to the field, and enter a timeout period in milliseconds. (the processor rounds to the nearest 250 ms.) The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 32,768 ms The default is 3,000 ms.

Inactivity Timeout

Cursor to the field and enter a timeout period in minutes. The valid range for a timeout period is 0 - 65,535 minutes. The default is 30 minutes. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is all zeroes. If this field contains all zeroes, the processor chooses the appropriate broadcast address (based on the IP address and subnet mask).

Advanced Functions Broadcast Address

Subnet Mask

Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is all zeroes. If this field contains all zeroes, no subnetworking is enabled. Cursor to the field, and enter an address of the following form: a.b a.b.c Where: a, b, c, d are between 0-255 (decimal) a.b.c.d The default address is No Gateway.

Gateway Address

13-68

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

14 Using Channel Status Data for

Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
Chapter Objectives
You can monitor the configuration and view the status of the Enhanced PLC-5 processor channels using a channel status screen. The channel status screen lets you monitor the communications on each of the channels and keep track of messages received and sent by the processor. Note
References to: Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Unless otherwise stated:

Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and your

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

application expertise.

14-1

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

For Status Information for this Channel: Channel 0 (serial port) System Mode (DF1 Point-to-Point) System Mode (DF1 Slave) System Mode (DF1 Master) User Mode (ASCII) Data Highway Plus Remote I/O Scanner Mode Remote I/O Adapter Mode Ethernet (PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E) ControlNet (PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C) Extended Local I/O (PLC-5/40L and -5/60L) PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module

See Page: 14-5

14-12 14-18 14-22 14-27 14-30 14-33 14-36

14-2

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Interpreting Channel Status Data

Access channel status information through the Channel Overview screen. To get to this screen, follow the steps on the left.

Figure 14.1 Channel Overview Screen Enhanced PLC-5 Processors (PLC-5/30 Series A, PLC-5/40 and -5/60 Series B, and PLC-5/80 Series C only), Excluding PLC-5/40L and -5/60L
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Channel 0: Channel Overview

SYSTEM (POINT TO POINT) DH+ SCANNER MODE UNUSED UNUSED N/A

General Utility
F7

Channel Channel Channel Channel

1A: 1B: 2A: 2B:

Channel 3:

Channel Overview
F4

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Channel Node Channel Edits Priv Priv Config F1 F2 F3 F5

Channel Status F7

5/40 File BATCHTES Select Option F10

14-3

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Figure 14.2 Channel Overview Screen PLC-5/40L and -5/60L Processors

Ladder Editor Main Menu
Channel 0: Channel Overview

SYSTEM (POINT TO POINT) DH+ SCANNER MODE EXTENDED LOCAL I/O N/A

General Utility
F7

Channel 1A: Channel 1B: Channel 2: Channel 3:

Channel Overview
F4

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Accept Channel Node Channel Edits Priv Priv Config F1 F2 F3 F5

5/40L File BATCH Channel Select Status Option F7 F10

If You Want to: Display status for scanner channel Display status for all other channels If You Want to: Accept channel configuration edits

You Must Define: an I/O Status file (on the Processor Configuration screen) and a diagnostic file (on the Channel Configuration screen) a diagnostic file (on the Channel Configuration screen) Press this Key: [F1] Accept Edits [F2] Channel Privileges [F3] Node Privileges [F5] Channel Configuration [F7] Channel Status [F10] Select Option

Assign privileges for channel configuration (For more information on privileges, see chapter 15.) Assign privileges for individual nodes (For more information on privileges, see chapter 15.) Configure the channel the cursor is highlighting Go to the channel status screen for the channel the cursor is highlighting See available functions for each channel, and select a function

14-4

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Interpreting Channel 0 Status

Ladder Editor Main Menu

To monitor the status of channel 0, follow the steps on the left. These screens display the information stored in the diagnostic file you specified when you configured channel 0.
If Channel 0 is in this Mode: System Mode (DF1 Point-to-Point) The System Displays: System Mode (DF1 Point-to-Point) Configuration Screen, Figure 14.3 System Mode (DF1 Slave) Configuration Screen, Figure 14.4 System Mode (DF1 Master) Configuration Screen, Figure 14.5 User Mode (ASCII), Figure 14.6

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

System Mode (DF1 Slave) System Mode (DF1 Master)

Cursor to Channel 0
or Channel Status
F7

Cursor to Channel 0

User Mode (ASCII)

Channel Config
F5

Channel 0 Status
F9

14-5

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Using the System Mode Status Display

This section explains the status data displayed on system mode screens: DF1 Point-to-Point, DF1 Slave, and DF1 Master. Figure 14.3 System Mode (DF1 Point-to Point) Status Screen
System Mode (DF1 Point to Point) Channel 0 Status DCD recover: Messages sent: Messages received: Inquiry received: Received NAK: Lack of memory/sent NAK: Modem lines DTR DCD OFF OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lost modem: Undelivered messages: COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0

Inquiry sent: Bad packet/ no ACK: Duplicate message received:

0 0 0

DSR OFF

RTS OFF

CTS OFF

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2

Forces: NONE

5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 0 Config F9

14-6

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Figure 14.4 System Mode (DF1 Slave) Status Screen

System Mode (DF1 Slave) Channel 0 Status DCD recover: Messages sent: Messages received: Polling received: Received NAK: Lack of memory/no ACK sent: Modem lines DTR DCD OFF OFF 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bad packet/ no ACK: Duplicate messages received: 0 0 Lost modem: Undelivered messages: Messages retry: COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0 0

DSR OFF

RTS OFF

CTS OFF

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2

Forces: NONE

5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 0 Config F9

Figure 14.5 System Mode (DF1 Master) Status Screen

System Mode (DF1 Master) Channel 0 Status DCD recover: Messages sent: Messages received: EOT received on first poll: 0 0 0 0 Lost modem: Undelivered messages: Messages retry: Bad packet/no ACK: Duplicate messages received: last: last: 0 0 max max : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Normal Poll List scan [100 ms] Priority Poll List scan [100 ms] Modem lines DTR DCD OFF OFF

DSR OFF

RTS OFF

CTS OFF

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Clear Lock Counter Counter F1 F2

5/30 File BATCH30 Chan 0 Config F9

14-7

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to a System Mode Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock (Lock) Counter [F9] Channel 0 Configuration

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. The remaining lines are specific to the type of System Mode configuration: DF1 Point-to Point, DF1 Slave, or DF1 Master (Table 14.A).

Table 14.A Descriptions of System Mode Status Screen Fields

Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter word 11 word 12 word 1 word 2 word 3 word 4 word 6 word 4 Displays the number of times the processor detects the DCD-handshaking line has gone low to high. Displays the number of times a modem was disconnected. Displays the total number of DF1 messages sent by the processor (included message retry). Displays the number of messages the processor received with no error. Displays the number of messages that were sent by the processor but not received by the destination device. For Slave and Master mode, displays the number of messages resent. For Point-to-point mode, displays the number of inquiries made by the destination device. For Point-to-point mode, displays the number of inquiries made by the processor. (Continued)

DCD recover Lost modem Messages sent Messages received Undelivered messages Messages retry Inquiry received Inquiry sent

14-8

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field Polling received Duplicate messages received Received NAK EOT End of Transmission Bad packet/no ACK Lack of memory/sent NAK Lack of memory/no ACK sent Normal Poll List scan last (100 ms) Normal Poll List scan maximum (100 ms) Priority Poll List scan last (100 ms) Priority Poll List scan maximum (100 ms) DTR Data Terminal Read DCD Carrier Detect DSR Data Set Ready RTS Request to Send CTS Clear to Send

Location word 6 word 9 word 5 word 8 word 7 word 8

Description For Slave mode, displays the number of times the a DF1 master device has polled the processor for a message. Displays the number of times the processor received a message packet identical to the previous message packet. For Point-to-point and Slave mode, displays the number of NAK messages received by the processor. Displays the number of times the Master received an EOT in response to the first poll of a station. Displays the number of incorrect data packets that the processor has received. For Point-to-point and Slave mode, displays the number of times the processor could not receive a message because it did not have enough memory. The time it took to complete the previous scan of the normal station poll list. The maximum time taken to complete a scan of the normal station poll list. The time it took to complete the previous scan of the priority station poll list. The maximum time taken to complete a scan of the priority station poll list. Displays the status of the DTR handshaking line (asserted by the processor). Displays the status of the DCD handshaking line (received by the processor). Displays the status of the DSR handshaking line (received by the processor). Displays the status of the RTS handshaking line (asserted by the processor). Displays the status of the CTS handshaking line (received by the processor).

word 5 word 6 word 10 word 13 word 0; bit 4 word 0; bit 3 word 0; bit 2 word 0; bit 1 word 0: bit 0

14-9

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Using the User Mode (ASCII) Status Display

This section describes the user-mode status data displayed on the User Mode (ASCII) Status screen, Figure 14.6.

Figure 14.6 User Mode Status Screen

User Mode Channel 0 Status COUNTERS LOCKED DCD recover: Chars. received with error: Modem lines DTR DCD OFF OFF 0 0 Lost modem: 0

DSR OFF

RTS OFF

CTS OFF

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2

Forces: NONE

5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 0 Config F9

Table 14.B describes the tasks you can perform using the User Mode (ASCII) Status screen. Table 14.B Available Tasks on the User Mode Status Screen
If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to a System Mode Configuration screen Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock (Lock) Counter [F9] Channel 0 Configuration

14-10

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name and the processors station on the link. See Table 14.C for a description of these fields. Table 14.C Descriptions of User Mode Status Screen Fields
Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter word 11 word 12 word 0; bit 4 Displays the number of times the processor detects the DCD-handshaking line has gone low to high. Displays the number of times a modem was disconnected. Displays the status of the DTR handshaking line (asserted by the processor).

DCD recover Lost modem DTR Data Terminal Read DCD Carrier Detect DSR Data Set Ready RTS Request to Send CTS Clear to Send Character received with error

word 0; bit 3 word 0; bit 2 word 0; bit 1

Displays the status of the DCD handshaking line (received by the processor). Displays the status of the DSR handshaking line (received by the processor). Displays the status of the RTS handshaking line (asserted by the processor).

word 0: bit 0 word 10

Displays the status of the CTS handshaking line (received by the processor). Displays the number of characters the processor received with parity or with errors and discarded.

14-11

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Interpreting Data Highway Plus Status Data

Use the Data Highway Plus Status screen to monitor channels that are configured to support a Data Highway Plus link. The data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined on the Data Highway Plus Configuration screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu Ladder Editor Main Menu
Messages sent: 0 received: 0 Send data acknowledged received: 0 received SAP off: 0 transmit failed: 0 transmit timeout: 0 Send data no acknowledged received: 0 SDA/SDN retranss.: 0 Duplicate node: 0 Claims won: 0 Token retry: 0 New successor: 0 Data Highway Plus Channel 1A Status sent with error: received with error: received received transmit transmit but full: with error: confirm: NAK full: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 COUNTERS LOCKED

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

unable to receive: received transmit transmit transmit retrans.: NAK misc.: not ACKed: NAKed SAP:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

transmit failed: Claims lost: Dropped token: Solicit rotations: Token failed:

transmit confirm: Network dead: Linear scan failed: Started linear scan:

Cursor to channel configured for DH+

Cursor to channel configured for DH+

Channel Config
F5

Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2

5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 1A Config F9

Channel Status
F7

Channel Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to a Data Highway Plus Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock (Lock) Counter [F9] Channel XX Configuration

14-12

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Using the Data Highway Plus Status Display

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. See Table 14.D for a description of these fields. Table 14.D Descriptions of Data Highway Plus Status Screen Fields
Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter words 0-3 Stores the active node table for channels configured for DH+. This information is stored in user-defined diagnostic counters. If Channel 1A is configured for DH+, Channel 1A information is also stored in words S:3-S:6 of the status file. This information is not displayed on the screen. Active Node table Word 0 1 2 3 Messages sent word 5 Bits 0-15 0-15 0-15 0-15 DH+ Station # 00-17 20-37 40-57 60-77

Active Node Table (not displayed)

Encompasses all data sent to and from the port. Displays the number of messages sent by the station. Messages = SDA messages + SDN messages. This number is the sum of the send data acknowledge counters (SDA) and send data no acknowledge (SDN) transmit confirm counters. Displays the number of messages sent that were not acknowledged. This number is the sum of the following counters: SDA transmit NAK misc transmit NAK full SDA transmit NAKed SAP SDA/SDN status dropped token (Continued)

sent with error

word 7

14-13

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Status Field received received with error unable to receive

Location word 4 word 6 word 8

Description Displays the number of error-free messages the station has received. This number is the sum of the SDA and SDN received counters. Displays the number of messages containing errors that the station has received. This number is the sum of the SDA received with error and the SDN received SAP counters. Displays the number of times the station NAKed an incoming message due to the lack of an available buffer. This number should be the same as the SDA received but full counter. These counters apply to SDA messages. A sender sending SDA messages requires the receiver to acknowledge receiving the message immediately upon receipt. Receivers acknowledge messages by sending: an ACK (acknowledge), which tells the sender the message was received and will be processed a NAK (no acknowledge), which tells the sender the message was received but cannot be processed The device that sent the message automatically sends the message again. Displays the number of error-free SDA messages that the station received. Displays the number of SDA messages the station received but were NAKed due to not having an available buffer to process the message. This indicates that the messages are coming in to the PLC-5 processor faster than it can process them. Check to see that you: are not scheduling unnecessary traffic (e.g., you are sending continuous messages when you only need updates once per second) are implementing report-by-exception so that data is sent only if it is new data Displays the number of times the sending station retransmitted an SDA message, which was ACKed or NAKed. If node sends a message but does not receive an ACK or a NAK response, the node will retransmit the message. If a node retransmitted a message because the acknowledge response to the first message was lost, the node receiving the message detects the retransmission and sends an acknowledge response. But the receiving node discards the duplicate message. High counts of this counter indicates noise or cable problems; check that the cable is secure and properly shielded from noise. Displays the number of SDA messages that the station received but could not process because its service access point (SAP) was off. This counter should always be 0. (Continued)

Send Data Acknowledge Counters

received received but full

word 19 word 22

received retransmission

word 21

received SAP off

word 23

14-14

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field received with error

Location word 20

Description Displays the number of invalid SDA messages that the station received. Some causes are: bad CRC the message has an invalid source address the message has an unrecognizable control byte the transmission was aborted a noise or a cabling problem This counter indicates the number of invalid messages that may be caused by noise. To lessen the number of messages due to noise, increase the cables shielding. Displays the number of incoming SDA messages that were NAKed due to reasons other than the NAKed full and NAKed inactive counters (e.g., a NAK due to a bad CRC). Displays the number of SDA messages sent by the station that were determined to be in error. This counter is the sum of the SDA transmit not ACKed and SDA transmit timeout counters. Displays the number of SDA messages successfully sent to and acknowledged by the addressed station. Displays the number of SDA messages that were sent but not were not ACKed by the receiving station. The following could have occurred: message could have been NAKed an invalid ACK was returned nothing was returned This counter can indicate: a noise or a cabling problem the receiving station has been removed from the link the receiving station cannot communicate Displays the number of SDA messages that were sent but not ACKed or NAKed by the receiving station. This counter increments even if the message does get through during a retry and if the receiving station is unable to communicate. This counter indicates a noise or a cabling problem (the receiving station is not seeing the messages). Displays the number of times the station received a NAK to a message because the destination station was unable to receive the message. This indicates that messages are being sent to the receiving station faster than the PLC-5 processor can process them. Most likely, more than one station on the DH+ link is sending messages to the same station. Check to see that you are: not scheduling unnecessary traffic (e.g., you are sending continuous messages when you only need updates once per second) implementing report-by-exception so that data is sent only if it is new data (Continued)

transmit NAK misc. transmit failed

word 25 word 29

transmit confirm transmit not ACKed

word 24 word 27

transmit timeout

word 26

transmit NAKedfull

word 30

14-15

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Status Field transmit NAKed (inactive) SAP

Location word 31

Description Displays the number of SDA messages that were successfully sent to but were not NAKed by the addressed station because the SAP specified in the message was illegal. This counter should always be 0. These counters refer to SDN send data no acknowledge messages, which means that the sender does not require the receiver to acknowledge receiving the message immediately upon receiving it. SDN messages are only used for broadcast. Displays the number of valid SDN messages received. Displays the number of SDN messages sent by the station that were in error. This error should never be seen. Displays the number of valid SDN messages sent by the station. Displays the total number of SDA or SDN messages that were retransmitted. Some reasons why the station would retry a message are: the ACK was lost or corrupted on an SDA message, indicating a possible noise problem the original message was NACKed These counters track events on the network as seen by the station. Displays the number of times the station has detected the same station address as itself on the network. As a result, the station goes offline. Displays the number of times the station did not win the claim token sequence. See claims won below for more information. Displays the number of times the station selects no traffic on the network. This usually occurs when the station with the token is powered down or is removed from the network. The other stations are waiting for the token to be passed to them. Eventually a network dead situation is declared and a claim token sequence initiated. (See claims won for more information.) Displays the number of times the station has won the claim token sequence. All the stations initiate a claim token sequence when a network goes down, is just powered up and the stations on the network detect that no one has the token, or when a station with the token is powered down or removed from the network. A claim token sequence is when all the stations on a network attempt to claim the token. When multiple stations attempt to claim the token, the lowest numbered station wins. (Continued)

Send Data No Acknowledge Counters transmit received transmit failed transmit confirm SDA or SDN transmit retry word 35 word 33 word 32 word 28

Network Link Maintenance Counters Duplicate node Claims lost Network dead word 17 word 11 word 9

Claims won

word 10

14-16

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field Dropped token

Location word 18

Description Displays the number of times that the station detected that a duplicate node existed on the link and consequently dropped itself off the link. A station determines that there is a duplicate node when it detects that the response to a message or solicit successor is incorrect. For example, if a response is received from a station which was not communicated with, then the sending station assumes that the response is for a packet sent by another station with the same node number. Once the station drops itself off the link, it waits indefinitely to be solicited back into the network. It will only be solicited back into the network if the duplicate node is removed from the link, because station numbers that already exist on the link are not solicited into the network. Displays the number of times the station solicited every station number without getting a response. See started linear scan below for more information. Displays the number of times the station had to retransmit a token pass. The station retransmits a token pass if it detects that the station it passed the token to did not receive the token. Noise can cause this to occur. Number of times a complete solicit successor of all stations not on the link is completed A solicit successor occurs during a token pass around the link. Here a station that is currently not on the link is solicited to see if it has been added to the link. During each token pass, a different station number is solicited; solicitation occurs sequentially. A station can only join the link when it is solicited into it. Displays the number of times the station has attempted to pass the token to every member in its active node table without a response. The station will then start a linear scan where it solicits every station number until a station responds. Displays the number of times the station found a new successor for the token. A new successor occurs when the station detects that a new station with a station number between its and a the station it was passing the token to was added to the link. The station now must past the token to the newly added station. Displays the number of times the station could not pass the token to its listed processor. This usually occurs due to: the station being removed from the network noise or cabling problems

Linear scan failed

word 16

Token retry

word 13

Solicit rotations

word 34

Started linear scan

word 15

New successor

word 12

Token failed

word 14

14-17

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Interpreting Scanner Mode Status Data

To monitor channels configured as remote I/O scanner mode, use the Scanner Mode Status screen. The diagnostic counter data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined on the Scanner Mode Configuration screen. The remaining information displayed is stored in the I/O status file defined on the Processor Configuration screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu Ladder Editor Main Menu
Scanner Mode Channel 2B Status Messages sent: Messages received: Messages unable to receive: Rack Address 1 2 2 3 3 3 17 1 Starting Group 0 0 2 0 4 6 0 0 Rack Size FULL 1/4 3/4 1/2 1/4 1/4 FULL FULL 0 0 0 Range COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0

Messages sent with error: Messages received with error:

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

Fault

Inhibit

Reset

Retry

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

010 020 022 030 034 036 170 010

017 021 027 033 035 037 177 017 *

I 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Cursor to channel configured for Scanner Mode

Channel Status
F7

Cursor to channel configured for Scanner Mode

Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, page up or page down, or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces: NONE 5/40 File TEMP Clear Unlock Auto Chan 2B Counter Counter Config Config F1 F2 F5 F9

Channel Status
F9

14-18

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Autoconfigure the channel Go to a Scanner Mode Configuration screen Access other pages of the screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock (Lock) Counter [F5] Autoconfigure [F9] Channel XX Configuration [PageUp] [PageDown]

Using the Scanner Communication Mode Status Display

The Scanner Mode Status screen is made up of as many pages as necessary to display all the status data. The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. Table 14.E describes the fields on the scanner mode status display. Table 14.E Descriptions of Scanner Mode Status Screen Fields
Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter Messages = SDA messages + SDN messages. word 1 word 3 word 0 word 2 word 4 Displays the number of messages sent by the channel. Displays the number of messages containing errors sent by the channel. Displays the number of error-free messages received by the channel. Displays the number of messages containing errors received by the channel. Displays the number of messages that the channel was unable to receive due to lack of memory or protocol-related problem. Displays the number of retries for the corresponding rack entry. Entry 1 Entry 2 Entry 3 etc. Entry 64

Message Counters sent sent with error received received with error unable to receive Retry

word 5 word 6 word 7 etc. word 69

14-19

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

The remaining scanner mode status data is in tables that display logical I/O rack configurations of each rack being controlled by the channel (Figure 14.7). Figure 14.7 I/O Rack Status Display
Rack Starting Rack Address Group Size 23 5 2 0 1/4 FULL Range 232-233 050-057 Fault F Inhibit Reset Retry 1 I 1 1 10 100

If complementary I/O is enabled (on the Scanner Mode configuration screen), the complement of a rack is identified with a C to the left of the rack address column on the status screen. Note All Enhanced PLC-5 processors support complementary I/O per channel, except PLC-5/40 and -5/60 series A processors.
Status Field: Rack Address Description: This field indicates the rack number of the remote racks being hosted by the scanner channel as follows: 3 for PLC-5/11 processors 1-3 for PLC-5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 processors 1-7 for PLC-5/30, -5/V30 processors 1-17 for PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L processors 1-27 for PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 processors This field indicates the first I/O module group in the rack that the processor scans. This field displays the portion of the I/O rack addressed by each chassis. Configurations can be 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, or FULL as long as the total sum of the rack does not exceed 8 I/O groups. This field displays the rack address and module groups being scanned for a rack in the scan list. For example: In Figure 14.7, the range of 232-233 means I/O module groups 2 and 3 of rack 23 are being scanned in that scan list entry. An asterisk (*) after a range indicates that it is the last valid rack entry. (Continued)

Starting Group Rack Size

Range

14-20

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field: Fault

Description: An F displayed in this field indicates that the corresponding chassis is faulted. When a fault indicator appears, the system sets the associated fault bit in the global rack fault status on the Processor Status screen. When the global rack fault bit is set, all configuration information starting at the faulted quarter is lost. When a rack faults, F is displayed. If both the fault and inhibit bits are set for a rack, no rack exists at that I/O group.

Inhibit

Inhibit a rack by cursoring to the Inhibit field of the rack you want to inhibit and type: 1. When a chassis is inhibited the processor stops scanning it. You can inhibit an entire rack by setting the global rack-inhibit bit for that rack on the Processor Status screen. See chapter 12 for more information. All chassis within that rack are inhibited, and an I appears in the Inhibit field indicating the rack was globally inhibited. Reset a rack by cursoring to the Reset field of the rack you want to reset and type: 1. When a chassis is reset, the processor turns off the outputs of the chassis regardless of the last-state switch setting. You can reset an entire rack by setting the global rack-reset bit on the Processor Status screen. See chapter 12 for more information. All chassis within that rack are reset, and an R appears in the Reset field indicating the rack was globally reset. This field displays the number of times the rack was re-scanned. You can reset this counter by pressing [F1] Clear Counter.

Reset

Retry

14-21

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Interpreting Adapter Communication Mode Status Data

To monitor channels that are configured to support a remote I/O adapter mode link, use the Adapter Mode Status screen. The data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined in the Adapter Mode Configuration screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu Ladder Editor Main Menu
Adapter Mode Channel 2A Status Messages sent: Messages received: Messages unable to receive: Link timeout: Mode changed: Missed turn around time: 0 0 0 0 0 0 COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0

Messages sent with error: Messages received with error:

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

No scans received: Protocol fault:

0 0

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

Press a function key.

Cursor to channel configured for Adapter Mode

Cursor to channel configured for Adapter Mode

Rem Prog Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2

Forces: NONE

5/40 File CHANNEL Chan 2A Config F9

Channel Status
F7

Channel Config
F5

Channel Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to the Adapter Mode Configuration screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock/Lock Counter [F9] Channel XX Configuration

14-22

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Using the Adapter Mode Status Display

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. Table 14.F describes the fields on the Adapter Mode status display. Table 14.F Descriptions of Adapter Mode Status Screen Fields
Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter Messages = SDA messages + SDN messages. word 1 word 3 word 0 word 2 word 4 Displays the number of messages sent by the channel. Displays the number of messages containing errors sent by the channel. Displays the number of error-free messages received by the channel. Displays the number of messages containing errors received by the channel. Displays the number of messages that contained protocol errors or packets that were garbled by the adapter.

Message Counters sent sent with error received received with error unable to receive Adapter Mode Status Diagnostic Counters Link timeout No scans received Mode changed Protocol fault Missed turn around time word 5 word 6 word 7 word 8 word 9

Displays the number of times a timeout occurred on the remote I/O link. Displays the number of times an adapter channel did not receive a packet addressed to itself. Displays the number of times the adapter channel switched to online. Displays the number of invalid I/O messages the adapter channel received. Displays the number of times the adapter channel took longer than 2 ms to process a message packet. The turn around-time for message packet processing is 2 ms.

14-23

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Transferring Bits between Supervisory and Adapter-Mode Processors

Figure 14.8 shows ladder logic for transferring bit 17 of the supervisory processors output image word 7 and bit 16 of the adapter-mode processors output image word 5. The x represents the adapter-mode processors rack number; rack 3 is the simulated rack for the adapter-mode processor. This example assumes 1-slot or 2-slot hardware addressing. Figure 14.8 Transferring Bits Using Rack 3 in the Adapter-Mode Processor
Supervisory Processor (PLC-2) 0x7 Ix5 16 17 Adapter Processor (PLC-5) I:37 17

O:35 16

When the supervisory processor sets its output file bit 0x:7/17, input file bit I:37/17 in the adapter-mode processor is automatically set. In the same way, when the adapter-mode processor sets output file bit O:35/16, input file bit Ix:5/16 in the supervisory processor is automatically set. Figure 14.9 shows the ladder logic if you created an adapter image file because you need rack 3 addresses for local I/O. This example uses N51 as the adapter image file. Figure 14.9 Transferring Bits Using Your Own Adapter Image File
Supervisory Processor (PLC-2) 0x7 17 Adapter Processor (PLC-5) N51:15 15

Ix5 16

N51:05 14

For PLC-5/12, -5/15 and -5/25 processors, words 0-7 in the integer file represent output, words 8-15 represent input; for Enhanced PLC-5 processors, input source and output source entries determine input and output words.

14-24

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Monitoring the Status of the Adapter Channel

The supervisory processor receives status bits from the adapter-mode processor in word 0 of the input image table for the rack that the adapter-mode processor is emulating.
Scanners Input Image Table (Octal) Word 0 17 14 13 10 07 04 03 00 Adapter Channels Output Source File Integer File Status bits sent to scanner 15
x

12 11

08 07
x

04 03 00

Status bits received from adapter channel

Reserved

When this bit is set: Octal 10 15 Decimal 8 13

It indicates this condition: data not valid adapter-mode processor is in program or test mode

Write ladder logic in the supervisory processor to monitor the rack-fault bits for the rack that the adapter-mode processor channel is emulating to determine the status of the remote I/O link.

14-25

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Monitoring the Status of the Supervisory Processor

The adapter-mode processor channel reserves status bits 10-17 of the first word of the input destination file for status. These bits tell the adapter-mode processor channel the status of the supervisory processor and the integrity of the remote I/O communication link.
Scanners Output Image Table Word 0 17 14 13 10 07 04 03 Status bits sent to adapter channel 00 Adapter Channels Input Destination File Integer File 15
x

12 11

08 07
x

04 03 00

Not used by adapter channel

Reserved

When this bit is set: Octal 10 11 13 15 Decimal 8 9 11 13

It indicates that the adapter-mode processor channel: detects a communication failure or receives a reset command from the supervisory processor receives a reset command from the supervisory processor (processor in program or test mode) detects that the supervisory processor has powered up; this bit is reset with the first communication from the supervisory processor detects a communication failure (e.g., no communication activity on the remote I/O communication link within the last 100 ms)

14-26

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Interpreting Ethernet Status Data

To monitor Ethernet status data associated with channel 2 for Ethernet PLC-5 processors, use the Ethernet Channel 2 Status screen. The diagnostic counter data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined on the Ethernet Configuration screen. If a diagnostic file has not been defined, you will not be able to display the Ethernet Status screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Ladder Editor or Main Menu Main Menu
Commands sent: Replies sent: sent with error: timed out: Ethernet In Octets: In Packets: alignment errors: carrier sense errors: excessive deferrals: MAC transmit errors: multiple collisions: late collisions: Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Clear Lock Counter Counter F1 F2 Ethernet Channel 2 Status COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 received: received: received with error: BOOTP reply received: Out Octets: Out Packets: FCS errors: excessive collisions: MAC receive errors: single collisions: deferred transmission: 0 0 0 NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Status
F7

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

5/40E File DRILL Chan 2 Config F9

Channel Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to a Ethernet Configuration screen Exit the Ethernet Status screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock/Lock Counter [F9] Channel 2 Configuration [Esc]

14-27

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Using the Ethernet Status Display

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. Table 14.G describes the fields on the Ethernet status display.

Table 14.G Descriptions of Ethernet Status Screen Fields

Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter

Commands sent received Replies sent received sent with error received with error timed out BOOTP reply received Ethernet In Octets Out Octets word 14-15 word 16-17 Displays the number of octets received on the interface. Displays the number of octets sent on the interface. (Continued) word 4-5 word 8-9 word 6-7 word 10-11 word 12-13 CS6:42/0-0 CS6:43/0-0 Displays the number of replies sent by the channel. Displays the number of replies received by the channel. Displays the number of replies with error status sent by the channel. Displays the number of replies with error status received by the channel. Displays the number of replies that were not received within the time out period specified on the Ethernet Configuration screen. Displays whether the BOOTP enable is disabled or enabled with a valid or invalid BOOTP response. Valid values are DISABLED, YES, or NO. word 0-1 word 2-3 Displays the number of commands sent by the channel. Displays the number of commands received by the channel.

14-28

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field In Packets Out Packets alignment errors FCS errors carrier sense errors excessive collisions excessive deferrals MAC receive errors MAC transmit errors single collisions multiple collisions deferred transmission late collision

Location word 18-19 word 20-21 word 22-23 word 24-25 word 26-27 word 28-29 word 30-31 word 32-33 word 34-35 word 35-36 word 38-39 word 40-41 word 42-43

Description Displays the number of packets received on the interface, including broadcast packets. Displays the number of packets sent on the interface, including broadcast packets. Displays the count of frames received that are not an integral number of octets in length. Displays the count of frames received that do not pass the FCS check. Displays the number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or failed to be asserted when attempting to transmit a frame. Displays the count of frames for which a transmission fails due to excessive collisions. Displays the count of frames for which a transmission is deferred for an excessive period of time. Displays the count of frames for which reception on an interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. Displays the count of frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error. Displays the count of successively transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. Displays the count of successively transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. Displays the count of frames for which the first transmission attempt is delayed because the medium is busy. Displays the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.

14-29

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Interpreting ControlNet Status Data

To monitor ControlNet status data associated with channel 2 for ControlNet PLC-5 processors, use the ControlNet Channel 2 Status screen. The data displayed is stored in a diagnostic file defined on the ControlNet Device Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) screen. If a diagnostic file has not been defined, you will not be able to display the ControlNet Channel 2 Status screen. To display the ControlNet Channel 2 Status screen, follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu
Frames transmitted good: received good: total received: Network Capacity update time overload: Moderator Node: mismatch events: Misc out of step events: commands received: Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2 0 0 0 ControlNet Channel 2 Status COUNTERS LOCKED media usage: A only channel A errors: 0 channel B errors: 0 channel warnings: none

General Utility
F7

transmitted aborted: received aborted: received bad:

0 0 0

0 1 0

blockage:

Channel Overview
F4

unheard occurrences:

0 0

network silent: collisions:

0 0

noise detected:

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config or
F5

5/40C File JOSHUA Chan 2 Config F9

Channel Status
F7

Channel 2 Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear all of the diagnostic counters for this ControlNet node Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to the ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) screen Return to the Channel Overview screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock/Lock Counter [F9] Channel 2 Configuration [Esc]

14-30

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Using the ControlNet Channel 2 Status Screen

Table 14.H describes the fields on the ControlNet Channel 2 Status screen.

Table 14.H Descriptions of ControlNet Channel 2 Status Screen Fields

Status Field Counters Locked Location Displays:1 in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks the counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter.

Frames
media usage transmitted good word 6; bit 15-8, word 5; bit 7-0, word 5; bit 15-8 word 9; bit 7-0 word 8; bit 7-0 word 7; bit 7-01, word 7; bit 15-8, word 6; bit 7-0 word 12; bit 7-0 word 9; bit 15-8 the redundancy characteristic for the ControlNet channel. the number of good frames transmitted.

transmitted aborted channel A errors received good

the number of frames that could not be completely transmitted and were aborted in the middle of transmission. the number of frames received on the channel A cable that were unusable, independent of the active channel (channel selected for reception). the number of good frames received on the active channel.

received aborted channel B errors total received received bad channel warnings

the number of frames received that were aborted during transmission on the active channel. the number of frames received on the channel B cable that were unusable, independent of the active channel (channel selected for reception). the total number of frames (good and bad) received on the active channel.

word 8; bit 15-8 word 23; bit 7-6

the number of unusable frames received on the active channel. any channel that is receiving a low level of unusable frames (frames containing data errors). (Continued)

14-31

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Status Field

Location

Displays:1

Network Capacity
update time overload blockage word 10; bit 7-0 word 11; bit 7-0 word 15; bit 15-8 word 16; bit 15-8 word 16; bit 7-0 the number of times that the network update interval passes with no opportunity to transmit. the number of times that a network update interval does not contain enough room to allow the transmission of a particular frame. the network address of the node that is transmitting the moderator frame (always the lowest active network address). the number of times a moderator frame was received with network parameters different from those in the receiving node. the number of times a node can receive a frame from a lower network address but cannot receive a moderator.

Moderator Node
mismatch events unheard occurrences

Misc
out of step events network silent commands received collisions noise detected word 10; bit 15-8 word 13; bit 5-8 word 17; bit 15-8 word 14; bit 7-0 word 14; bit 15-8 the number of times any event prevents a frame from being transmitted in the required network update interval. the number of times a node loses contact with any network activity for three consecutive network update intervals. the number of station management commands received directly from the network that bypasses the host processor node. the number of times a node prevents the transmission of a frame because it would cause a collision to occur. the number of times that a start of frame could not be detected.

1 All counters display only the status of the node being configured.

14-32

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Interpreting Extended Local I/O Status Data

To monitor extended local I/O of PLC-5/40L and PLC-5/60L processors, use the Extended Local I/O Channel 2 Status screen. The diagnostic counter data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined on the Extended Local I/O Configuration screen. The remaining information displayed is stored in the I/O status file defined on the Processor Configuration screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Main Menu Ladder Editor Main Menu
Channel retry counter: Extended Local I/O Channel 2 Status COUNTERS LOCKED 999

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

Rack Address 3 0 0 0 0 0

Starting Group 2

Chassis Backplane Range Size Addressing 4-SLOT 1-SLOT 032 000 000 000 000 000 035 * 000 000 000 000 000

Fault

Inhibit

Reset

Retry

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

1 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0

10000 0 0 0 0 0

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Status
F7

Cursor to channel 2
Channel Config
F5

Press a function key, page up or page down or enter a value. Rem Prog Clear Unlock Counter Counter F1 F2 Forces: NONE Auto Config F5 PLC 5/60L Addr 31 Chan 2 Config F9

Channel Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Autoconfigure the channel Go to a Extended Local I/O Configuration screen Access other pages of the screen

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock/Lock Counter [F5] Autoconfigure [F9] Channel 2 Configuration [PageUp] [PageDown]

14-33

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Using the Extended Local I/O Status Display

The Extended Local I/O Status screen is made up of as many pages as necessary to display all the status data. The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name and the processors station on the link. Table 14.I describes the fields on the extended local I/O status display.

Table 14.I Descriptions of Extended Local I/O Status Screen Fields

Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter word 0 Displays the number of times extended local I/O scanner tried and failed to communicate with all adapters on the channel. This value is the sum of all adapter retry counts. Displays the number of retries for the corresponding rack entry (word numbers are in multiples of 10). Entry 1 Entry 2 Entry 3 etc. Entry 16

Channel retry counter Retry

word 10 word 20 word 30 etc. word 160

The remaining extended local I/O status data is structured in tables that display the information about the chassis being scanned. Figure 14.10 describes the local I/O configuration tables.

Figure 14.10 I/O Rack Status Display Rack Starting Chassis Backplane Address Group Size Addressing
1 4

Range 012-015 040-047

Fault Inhibit Reset Retry F 1 0 1 1 1000 100

2 0

4-SLOT 16-SLOT

1-SLOT 2-SLOT

14-34

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Status Field: Rack Address

Description: This field indicates the rack number of the remote racks being hosted by the scanner channel as follows: 1-17 for PLC-5/40L processors 1-27 for PLC-5/60L processors This field indicates the first I/O module group in the rack that the processor scans. This field displays the portion of the chassis being addressed. Configurations can be 4-slot, 8-slot, 12-slot, and 16-slot. This field displays addressing for the backplane. Configurations can be 2-slot, 1-slot, and 1/2-slot. This field displays the rack address and module groups being scanned for a rack in the scan list. For example: In Figure 14.10, the range of 012-015 means I/O module groups 2 and 5 of rack 01 are being scanned in that scan list entry. An asterisk (*) after a range indicates that it is the last valid rack entry. An F displayed in this field indicates that the corresponding chassis is faulted. When a fault indicator appears, the system sets the associated fault bit in the global rack fault status on the Processor Status screen. When the global rack fault bit is set, all configuration information starting at the faulted quarter is lost. When a rack faults, F is displayed. If both the fault and inhibit bits are set for a rack, no rack exists at that I/O group.

Starting Group Chassis Size Backplane Addressing Range

Fault

Inhibit

Inhibit a rack by cursoring to the Inhibit field of the rack you want to inhibit and type: 1. When a chassis is inhibited the processor stops scanning it. You can inhibit an entire rack by setting the global rack-inhibit bit for that rack on the Processor Status screen. See chapter 12 for more information. All chassis within that rack are inhibited, and an I appears in the Inhibit field indicating the rack was globally inhibited. Reset a rack by cursoring to the Reset field of the rack you want to reset and type: 1. When a chassis is reset, the processor turns off the outputs of the chassis regardless of the last-state switch setting. You can reset an entire rack by setting the global rack-reset bit on the Processor Status screen. See chapter 12 for more information. All chassis within that rack are reset, and an R appears in the Reset field indicating the rack was globally reset. This field displays the number of times the rack was re-scanned. You can reset this counter by pressing [F1] Clear Counter.

Reset

Retry

14-35

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Interpreting PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module Status Data

To monitor Ethernet status data associated with channel 3A through the PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module for Enhanced PLC-5 processors, use the Ethernet Channel 3A Status screen. The diagnostic counter data displayed is stored in the diagnostic file defined on the Ethernet 3A Configuration screen. If a diagnostic file has not been defined, you will not be able to display the Ethernet Channel 3A Status screen. Follow the steps on the left.
Ladder Editor Ladder Editor or Main Menu Main Menu
Commands sent: Replies sent: sent with error: timed out: Ethernet In Octets: In Packets: alignment errors: carrier sense errors: excessive deferrals: MAC transmit errors: multiple collisions: late collisions: Press a function key. > Rem Prog Forces:None Clear Lock Counter Counter F1 F2 Ethernet Channel 3A Status COUNTERS LOCKED 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 received: received: received with error: BOOTP reply received: Out Octets: Out Packets: FCS errors: excessive collisions: MAC receive errors: single collisions: deferred transmission: 0 0 0 NO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

General Utility
F7

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

Channel Overview
F4

Cursor to channel 3A
Channel Status
F7

Cursor to channel 3A
Channel Config
F5

5/40S File DRILL Chan 3A Config F9

Channel Status
F9

If You Want to: Clear diagnostic status counters for all channels Unlock or lock the diagnostic status counters Go to a Ethernet Configuration screen Exit the Ethernet Status screen
14-36

Press this Key: [F1] Clear Counter [F2] Unlock/Lock Counter [F9] Channel 3A Configuration [Esc]

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors

Using the Ethernet Channel 3A Status Display

The status line displays the processor mode, force status, processor type, processor name, and the processors station on the link. Table 14.J describes the fields on the Ethernet Channel 3A status display.

Table 14.J Descriptions of Ethernet Channel 3A Status Screen Fields

Status Field Counters Locked Location Description This field is displayed in reverse video if the counters are locked. Pressing [F2] Lock (Unlock) Counter locks or unlocks counter display. Counters locked: the display of the counters stops changing, but the counters continue to run in the background. Counters unlocked: the system displays the current value. Clear counters for all channels by pressing [F1] Clear Counter

Commands sent received Replies sent received sent with error received with error timed out BOOTP reply received Ethernet In Octets Out Octets word 14-15 word 16-17 Displays the number of octets received on the interface. Displays the number of octets sent on the interface. (Continued) word 4-5 word 8-9 word 6-7 word 10-11 word 12-13 CS6:42/0-0 CS6:43/0-0 Displays the number of (PCCC) replies sent by the channel. Displays the number of (PCCC) replies received by the channel. Displays the number of (PCCC) replies with error status sent by the channel. Displays the number of (PCCC) replies with error status received by the channel. Displays the number of (PCCC) replies that were not received within the time out period specified on the Ethernet Channel 3A Configuration screen. Displays whether the BOOTP enable is disabled or enabled with a valid or invalid BOOTP response. Valid values are DISABLED, YES, or NO. word 0-1 word 2-3 Displays the number of (PCCC) commands sent by the channel. Displays the number of (PCCC) commands received by the channel.

14-37

Using Channel Status Data for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Preface

Status Field In Packets Out Packets alignment errors FCS errors carrier sense errors excessive collisions excessive deferrals MAC receive errors MAC transmit errors single collisions multiple collisions deferred transmission late collision

Location word 18-19 word 20-21 word 22-23 word 24-25 word 26-27 word 28-29 word 30-31 word 32-33 word 34-35 word 36-37 word 38-39 word 40-41 word 42-43

Description Displays the number of packets received on the interface, including broadcast packets. Displays the number of packets sent on the interface, including broadcast packets. Displays the count of frames received that are not an integral number of octets in length. Displays the count of frames received that do not pass the FCS check. Displays the number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or failed to be asserted when attempting to transmit a frame. Displays the count of frames for which a transmission fails due to excessive collisions. Displays the count of frames for which a transmission is deferred for an excessive period of time. Displays the count of frames for which reception on an interface fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. Displays the count of frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error. Displays the count of successively transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision. Displays the count of successively transmitted frames for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision. Displays the count of frames for which the first transmission attempt is delayed because the medium is busy. Displays the number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times into the transmission of a packet.

Note

When working online, the PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module must be attached to a Enhanced PLC-5 processor for configuration. When working offline, the user can toggle between Unused and 1785-ENET When using the PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module, the attached Enhanced PLC-5 processor will have an S appended to the end of the the name string on the status line (for example, -5/60S)

Note

14-38

Using Passwords and Privileges

15

Using Passwords and Privileges

Chapter Objectives
This chapter explains how to protect your programs by restricting access to processor files and functions. You can assign different privilege access based on:

whether or not you install the passwords and privileges option (see chapter 1 for more information) the type of processor you are using

15-1

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Figure 15.1 helps to define password and privilege access.

Figure 15.1 Password and Privilege Access

Passwords and Privileges Installed No
Are you using one of the following processors: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 PLC-5/30, -5/V30 PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series/revs series A, rev B and later series B, rev B and later

Yes

Yes

You can assign passwords and privileges for: . overall privilege classes . channels . stations/nodes . individual program and data files See the description on page 15-5. You can also generate a report listing the privileges you have assigned. See chapter 20.

all series/revs

You can assign a single password for the entire processor memory file. See the description on page 15-3.

No

If your application requires privileges beyond those provided by the Enhanced PLC-5 processors, see the PLC-5 Protected Processor Product Data for 1785-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors.

15-2

Using Passwords and Privileges

Assigning a Password to a Processor Memory File

This functionality applies if: you do not install the passwords and privileges option (regardless of the processor you are using) or you are using a: a Classic PLC-5 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev A PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series A (except PLC-5/40E, -5/V40), series B, rev A

Assign a password to a processor memory file to limit access to that processor memory file and its associated files. When a processor memory file has a password, the system prompts you to type the password before the system displays the program directory. If someone types the wrong password three times in a row, the software only displays a subset of the options that are normally available. This subset of options only lets you do the following from the Program Directory:
Save a processor memory file:
Save Program
F2

Save & Continue or

F2

(on line) Exit the system:

Return to Menu
F3

(off line)

Attach to another processor:

Change Station
F4

Change File or
F4

(on line) Use the WHO Utility:

WHO Active
F5

(off line)

(on line)

15-3

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

To add, change, or remove a password to a processor memory file, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+= PROGRAM DIRECTORY FOR PROCESSOR: RUNBATCH ====================[ OFFLINE ]===+ | File Name Type Size(words) | | | | 0 system 60 | | 1 undefined 0 | | 2 ACTION_1 ladder 1 ^| | 3 ACTION_2 ladder 3 | | 4 Main_SFC function chart 231 | | 5 Second_SFC function chart 47 | | 6 ACTION_3 ladder 3 | | 7 ACTION_4 ladder 3 | | 8 ACTION_5 ladder 3 | | 9 ACTION_6 ladder 1 | | 10 ladder 6 | | 11 ACTION_7 ladder 3 | | 12 ladder 1 | | 13 ACTION_8 ladder 1 | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key. > Rem Prog Set Passwrd F2

Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

Proc Func
F1

Change Password
F2

PLC 5/40 Series A Remove Passwrd F4

Revision A

PLC 5/40 File RUNBATCH

Press this key to remove the password. Press this key to set the password. Enter the new password. You will be prompted to verify the password. A valid password can contain up to 10 of the following characters: - A-Z (both upper and lower case) - 0-9 - underscore (_) Xs appear as you type the password. Write the password down in a secure place so that you dont forget it. The processor does not use the new password until you return to the Main Menu.

15-4

Using Passwords and Privileges

Assigning Passwords and Privileges

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You can assign a privilege class to a node, channel or file. The privilege class defines the level of access (read or write) or type of function (I/O forcing, memory clearing) the PLC-5 processor allows.
This privilege: Node Channel File Restricts access: from a particular node (station address) to the processor. to a particular channel on the processor. to view or change a file.

15-5

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Figure 15.2 Privileges Hierarchy

Channel Privilege Channel 1A Default Privilege Class Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Class 4 RW RW R

and

DH+

Node Privilege Class Channel 1A Node (Stations Address) Privilege Class 12 Class 1 17 Class 2

Channel 1A Node Program Data

Type System Undefined Ladder

Program File Privileges Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 RW RW RW R RW RW RW R RW RW RW R

Station 12

Station 17

Station 32

Station 34

Type Output Input Status

Data Table Privileges Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 RW RW RW R RW RW RW R RW RW RW R

Privilege Class Information Privilege Class Names Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 Class 4 Modify Privileges X Data Table File Cr/Del X X X Program File Cr/Del X X X

In Figure 15.2, the channel and node privileges determine the default class of a particular node on a specific channel. The default class then specifies the privileges available to users who access the processor though a particular class. In Figure 15.2: each channel on the processor has a configurable default privilege for any node (programming terminal, processor, etc.) which communicates with the processor via the specified channel. node privileges are used to list nodes which require different privileges for each specific channel. In the above example, station 12 has class 1 privileges (Read and Write access) for station 34 and station 17 has class 2 privileges (Read and Write access to the channel configuration information) for station 34. Since station 32 is not presented as an exception (via node privileges), station 34 grants station 32 the default privilege class (class 4) for channel 1A, which denies both Read and Write access to the configuration information. program file and data table privileges for each station are determined by the assigned privilege class. Attention: There is no System Administrator selection for passwords and privileges. If you assign a password to a class, and later do not recall that password, you will not have access to that class. There is no reset function to delete a forgotten password.

15-6

Using Passwords and Privileges

Here are some guidelines to follow:

You must define the passwords and privileges information for each processor in your system if you want each processor to utilize the password protection feature; password and privilege information is stored in the processor. You cannot assign default class privileges to channels configured as scanner or adapter. The read/write privileges you see on the Channel Privileges screen apply to read/write access of the channel configuration screen of that channel. The read/write privileges for each channels diagnostic file (Channel Status screen) must be set up through the data table privileges screen. The default privilege fields on the channel privileges screen determine the privilege class of all stations/nodes that are attached through that channel. Tell all of the users of your software which privilege class they can use and the appropriate password. If they want to change to a different class (other than the default class), they must enter the new class and password (see page15-19). The passwords and privileges feature helps to prevent unauthorized or accidental changes to the system. However, the passwords and privileges feature has limitations; it will not prevent acts of malicious tampering nor can it ensure that changes made by an individual with the password will be appropriate for a particular application.

To establish basic password and privilege protection and to become familiar with the functionality, you must perform the following:
To Define: Privilege Classes and Passwords Channel Privileges See Page: 15-8 15-11

To establish advanced password and privilege protection to allow the user access to specified areas of the program, you can perform the following:
To Define: Node Privileges Program File Privileges Data File Privileges Changing to a Different Privileges Class Restoring Default Privileges See Page: 15-14 15-17 15-18 15-19 15-20

For an example using passwords and privileges, see page 15-22.

15-7

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Defining Privilege Classes

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You can define up to four privilege classes (class 1-4), each with its own password. Within each class, you can enable access to certain software operations (such as modifying program or data table files or channel configurations), creating a tiered level of class privileges. These privilege classes form the upper level organization for your password structure. You can define class 1 to have all privileges. Define the remaining three classes, allowing progressively fewer privileges. For example, you can set privilege classes as follows (an X indicates that the privilege is enabled):
+==============================================================================+ | Privileges \ Privilege Class Names Class1 Class2 Class3 Class4 | | | | Modify Privileges | X | | | | | Data Table File Create/Delete | X | X | X | | | Program File Create/Delete | X | X | X | | | Logical Write | X | X | X | X | | Physical Write | X | X | X | X | | Logical Read | X | X | X | X | | Physical Read | X | X | X | X | | Mode Change | X | X | X | X | | I/O Force | X | X | | | | SFC Force | X | X | | | | Clear Memory | X | | | | | Restore | X | | | | | On line Editing | X | | | n | +==============================================================================+

Note

Rockwell Software Inc. recommends that you define class 2, class 3, and class 4 so that privilege modification (Modify Privileges) is not enabled. The ability to modify privileges should only be allowed in class 1.

15-8

Using Passwords and Privileges

To define a privilege class and its password, follow the steps on the left.
a
6200 Main Menu
Current: Class1 Privilege Class Information Default: Class1 +==============================================================================+ | Privileges \ Privilege Class Names Class1 Class2 Class3 Class4 | | | | Modify Privileges | X | X | X | X | | Data Table File Create/Delete | X | X | X | X | | Program File Create/Delete | X | X | X | X | | Logical Write | X | X | X | X | | Physical Write | X | X | X | X | | Logical Read | X | X | X | X | | Physical Read | X | X | X | X | | Mode Change | X | X | X | X | | I/O Force | X | X | X | X | | SFC Force | X | X | X | X | | Clear Memory | X | X | X | X | | Restore | X | X | X | X | | On line Editing | X | X | X | X | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key or enter a new class name. > Rem Prog Modify Passwrd F1

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

General Utility
F7

Passwords and Privileges

F5

5/40 File PASSWD Toggle Priv F10

Modify Passwrd
F1

Press this key to assign a password to the privilege class. Do this for each privilege class. Note: If the class 1-4 user is not assigned the Modify Passwords privilege and you press [F1] -Modify Passwrd, the following message is displayed:
NO ACCESS. THIS SCREEN REQUIRES THE MODIFY PASSWORDS PRIVILEGE

Enter the privilege class name, the old password (if it exists; if it does not exist or you are defining a password for the first time, press [Enter]), and the new password. There is no default password assigned to these classes. Do this for each privilege class. On the Privilege Class Information screen (shown above), cursor to each privilege that you want associated with each class. Toggle Privileges
F10

To enable or disable the privilege. A valid password can contain up to 8 of the following characters: - A-Z (both upper and lower case) - 0-9 - underscore (_) An X in the field indicates that a privilege is allowed for that class.

Current: Class1 Privilege Class Information Default: Class1 +==============================================================================+ | Privileges \ Privilege Class Names Class1 Class2 Class3 Class4 | | | | Modify Privileges | X | X | X | X | | Data Table File += Modify Privilege Class Password ===+ | X | X | | Program File Cr| | | X | X | | Logical Write | Privilege Class Name | | X | X | | Physical Write | Old Password: | | X | X | | Logical Read | New Password: | | X | X | | Physical Read | Verify Password: | | X | X | | Mode Change | | | X | X | | I/O Force += ESC exits ==========================+ | X | X | | SFC Force | X | X | X | X | | Clear Memory | X | X | X | X | | Restore | X | X | X | X | | On line Editing | X | X | X | X | +==============================================================================+ Enter the class name and password or press a function key. Rem Prog 5/40 File PASSWD

Press [Esc] when you are finished assigning privileges.

15-9

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Table 15.A lists the functions you can specify for a each privilege class. Table 15.A Available Functions for a Privilege Class
If You Want this Class to Have the Ability to: Enable/Disable privileges for each class Create or delete data table files Create or delete program files Write to the processor using a logical address (in general, this should be paired with a Physical Write). Note: You cannot delete the logical write privilege from class 1. Note: Logical Writes are normally used by DH+ message commands and DH+ operator interface terminals. Read from the processor using a logical address (in general, this should be paired with a Physical Read). Note: You cannot delete the logical read privilege from class 1. Note: You must have the logical read privilege to save. Note: Logical Reads are normally used by DH+ message commands and DH+ operator interface terminals. Write to the processor using a physical address (in general, this should be paired with a Logical Write). Note: 6200 programming software does not access internal physical addresses. If you enable/disable a physical write, you should also enable/disable a logical write. Note: You cannot delete the physical write privilege from class 1. Read from the processor using a physical address (in general, this should be paired with a Logical Read). Note: 6200 programming software does not access internal physical addresses. If you enable/disable a physical read, you should also enable/disable a logical read. Note: You cannot delete the physical read privilege from class 1. Change processor mode when the keyswitch on the processor is set to REMOTE Enable or disable forces in the system, or to clear all I/O forces Enable or disable SFC forces, force individual transitions on or off, or clear all SFC forces Clear the processor memory Restore or merge a processor memory file Edit a program file online 1 Change the password for the four privilege classes
1 The processor will not allow online edits if the keyswitch is in the Run position.

Enable this Operation: Modify Privileges Data Table File Create/Delete Program File Create/Delete Logical Write

Logical Read

Physical Write

Physical Read

Mode Change I/O Force SFC Force Clear Memory Restore Online Edit Modify Passwords

15-10

Using Passwords and Privileges

Assigning a Privilege Class to a Channel or Offline File

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You can assign a default privilege class to channels and offline files. Each channel and offline file has a Class 1 privilege by default; you can limit the privileges for each channel and/or offline file by changing the default privilege class (Class 1 4). You can assign read/write privileges to channel 0, any channel configured for the DH+ network, and channel 3 (if you have a co-processor). The read/write privileges you see on the Channel Privileges screen apply to read/write access of the channel configuration for that channel. The read/write privileges for each channels diagnostic file (Channel Status screen) must be set up through the data table privileges screen (see page 15-18). The default privilege fields on the channel privileges screen determine the privilege class of all stations/nodes that are attached through that channel.

15-11

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Note

When you are using 6200 programming software, each channel has a Class 1 privilege by default. If you change the mode of a channel, you must initially set all default channel privileges to class 4 to ensure that a specific user is not receiving a higher privilege than the class assigned. When you save an image file from an Enhanced PLC-5 processor to an offline file, the offline file class is automatically set to the default class of the channel/port through which the save was performed. You cannot assign default privilege classes to scanner or adapter channels. All stations/nodes linked to a channel have the same default privilege class as that channel. If you have a specific node that needs different privileges than the channel allows, you can specify the privileges for that node separately (see Assigning a Privilege Class to a Node on page 15-14).

Note

Note

Note

After restoring a program that is protected by passwords and privileges from an EEPROM to an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, set the channel privileges for the type of protection you want. When a protected program is restored to an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, all passwords and privileges are restored as originally configured except channel privileges. Channel privileges are restored with full read/write privileges.

15-12

Using Passwords and Privileges

To specify the privilege class for a channel or offline file, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu Online Prog
F1 Channel Privileges Default Priv. Class CLASS 1 CLASS 1 Privilege Class Class 2 Class 3 RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW

Offline Prog or
F3

Channel 0: Channel Channel Channel Channel 1A: 1B: 2A: 2B:

SYSTEM (P 2 P) DH+ SCANNER MODE UNUSED UNUSED

Class 1 RW RW RW RW RW

Class 4 RW RW RW RW RW

General Utility
F7

Channel 3A: N/A Offline:

CLASS 1 CLASS 3

Channel Overview
F4 Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None Node Priv F3 5/40 File PASSWD Select Priv F10

Channel Overview

Cursor to this field for channel 0, DH+, Ethernet, ControlNet, Channel 3A, or the offline file. Note: To change the default privilege class, you must have the Modify Privileges option (on the Privilege Class screen) enabled for the class within which you are working. Press [Esc] when you are finished assigning privileges. Press Select Privileges
F10

Channel Privileges
F2

Toggles between classes.

Cursor to the right and select read/write privileges for the appropriate class. Do this for all other channels configured for DH+. Press Select Privileges
F10

See table below.

If You Want the Class to Be Able to: Read the configuration information only Read and change the configuration information Neither read nor modify channel configuration information

Then Select this Option: read read/write (blank)

15-13

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Assigning a Privilege Class to a Node

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

All stations/nodes default to the same privilege class as that of its channel. You can give a node its own privilege class if you want it to have a different privilege class than the default assigned to that channel. Note Note Node privilege classes override the default privilege class of the channel assigned on the Channel Privilege screen. If you are using the multi-session driver, node privileges do not function properly. On processors which support passwords and privileges, changes made to node privileges while in the multi-session driver environment do not take effect.

15-14

Using Passwords and Privileges

To specify a privilege class for a node, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
Channel 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Node Privilege Class Station Address Link ID 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Privilege Class Name

Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

General Utility
F7

Channel Overview
F4

Press a function key or enter a value. > Rem Prog Forces:None

5/40 File PASSWD Select Priv F10

Channel Overview

Cursor to the channel column.

Select Privileges

Node Privileges
F3

Press

F10

until the desired channel is displayed.

Cursor to the right to select the station address column for the channel and enter the new value. (Valid station addresses are 0-77 octal). Cursor to the Link ID column for the channel and enter the new value.
Select Privileges

Cursor to the privilege class column for the channel and press until the desired privilege class is displayed.

F10

15-15

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

The Node Privilege screen displays the following fields:

This Field: Channel Station Address Link ID Specifies: the processor channel communicating to the network the station address of the node on the network When you are using DH+ networks routed through a PLC-5/250, the link number is used to identify the DH+ link to which you want the information sent. You specify this link number on the PLC-5/250 configuration screens. If you are not using DH+ bridging, the link ID field defaults to the current link number (i.e., 0 for the local link). the privilege class of the node (By default, the privilege class of the node is the privilege class of the channel.)

Privilege Class Name

15-16

Using Passwords and Privileges

Assigning Privileges to a Program File

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You can assign read and write privileges for each program file in a processor. These privileges limit the access of users to view or change your program files. Two different privileges determine whether a user can read or write to a program file: the users privilege class

whether read and write privileges have been assigned to the program file itself

You cannot assign a privilege to program file 0 or to program files of the type unknown. To assign read and write privileges to a program file, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+= PROGRAM FILE PRIVILEGES ======================================[ ONLINE ]===+ | File Name Type Class1 Class2 Class3 Class4 | | | | 0 system RW RW RW RW | | 1 undefined RW RW RW RW | | 2 ladder RW RW RW RW | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +==============================================================================+ Press a function key to toggle the privilege. > Rem Prog PLC 5/40 Series B Revision B

Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

Proc Func
F1

Modify Privileges
F2

5/40 File PASSWD Toggle Priv F10

Press [Esc] when you are finished assigning privileges. Press

Cursor to the program file and class.

Toggle Privileges
F10

until the desired privilege is displayed.

Repeat for all program files and classes.

15-17

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Assigning Privileges to a Data File

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You can modify read and write privileges for each data file in a processor. These privileges limit the access of users to view or change data file values. Two different privileges determine whether a user can read or write to a data file: the users privilege class whether read and write privileges have been assigned to the data file itself Note You cannot assign a privilege to a data file of the type undefined. Removing both the read and write access from a data table file prevents you from accessing that file. To assign read and write privileges to a data file, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
FILE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TYPE output input status binary or bit timer counter control integer floating point DATA TABLE PRIVILEGES Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW Class 4 RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW RW

Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

O I S B T C R N F

General Utility
F7 PROCESSOR MEMORY LAYOUT 397 words of memory used in 9 data table files 5 words of memory used in 3 program files 48678 words of unused memory available Press a function key to toggle the privilege. > Rem Prog PLC 5/40 Series B Revision B

Memory Map
F1

5/40 File PASSWD Toggle Priv F10

Memory Map

Cursor to the data file and class. Press

Toggle Privileges
F10

Modify Privileges
F2

until the desired privilege is displayed.

Repeat for all data files and classes.

Press [Esc] when you are finished assigning privileges.

15-18

Using Passwords and Privileges

Changing to a Different Class

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

If you want to change to a different class (other than the default class), you must enter the new class and password. To change the privilege class, follow the steps on the left.
Choose One: a
6200 Main Menu or
Alt += PROGRAM DIRECTORY FOR PROCESSOR: PASSWD ======================[ OFFLINE ]===+ | File Name Type Size(words) | | | | 0 system 4 | | 1 undefined 0 | | 2 ladder 1 | | | | | | | | | | += Select New Privilege Class =========+ | | | | | | | Privilege Class Name | | | | Password: | | | | | | | += ESC exits ==========================+ | | | +==============================================================================+ Enter the class name and password or press a function key. Rem Prog Return Default F7 5/40 File PASSWD

b
P

Online Offline Prog Prog or F1

F3

Enter Password
F10

Enter the privilege class name, then enter the password.

Note

If you use the multi-session driver in Windows and you set the Default Privileges to class 1 (enable all privileges) and the Current Class to class 2 (enable Logical and Physical reads and writes only), 6200 programming software allows the class 2 user to restore a file. To prevent someone from restoring the file, set both the Default Privileges and the Current Class to class 2.

15-19

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Restoring Default Privilege Classes

This functionality applies if: you install the passwords and privileges option and you are using a: PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C, -5/26 all series, revs PLC-5/30, -5/V30 series A, rev B and later PLC-5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/46, -5/V40, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L series B, rev B and later PLC-5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/86, -5/V80 all series, revs

You may want to restore default privileges for a class, for example, if you need to change the privilege class at a certain terminal temporarily, and then want to change the class back to the default. To return the default privilege class, follow these steps:
6200 Main Menu Online Prog
F1

Offline Prog or
F3

Enter Password
F10

Return Default Privileges

F7

15-20

Using Passwords and Privileges

Using Protected PLC-5 Processors

To avoid compromising security when importing and exporting files to and from Protected PLC-5 processors that contain series C/revision H or later firmware, be sure to program with release 5.0 or later of 6200 programming software. Earlier releases of 6200 programming software will not communicate with revision H and later Protected PLC-5 processors and may incorrectly identify them. Likewise, early releases of programming software from other manufacturers will not recognize revision H and later Protected PLC-5 processors.4. For more information about programming Protected PLC-5 processors, see the PLC-5 Protected Processor Supplement.

15-21

Using Passwords and Privileges Preface

Example Using Passwords and Privileges

Note
1

The following represents an example only and is not required when using 6200 programming software.
Note: If you were to only remove the write privilege from channel 1B for class 3, you would be able to enter the channel configuration screen for channel 1B (as a class 3 user), but you would not be able to edit any entries in the channel 1B configuration. 5 Define node privileges. After performing step 3, all terminals accessing the processor via channel 1A will be forced to upgrade to a higher class. Override this default condition by using node privileges to allow a specific terminal (station address) access to the processor via a higher class. a. At DH+ station address 24, assign a node privilege for channel 1A, such that station 24 obtains access to this port with class 1 access rather than the default of class 4. This enables you to access the processor with your terminal at class 1 automatically, bypassing the entry of a new/higher class and password. Note: You would not want to define node privileges if other individuals, who should not have class 1 access, could use your computer or station number to access the processor. 6 Define program file read/write privileges. a. On the Program File Privileges screen, remove the read and write privileges from program file 2 for class 3. b. Attempt to access the processor using the class 3 password; read and write privileges are denied for program file 2. Note: If you attempt to use [F8] Monitor File to access program file 2, the software beeps and displays the error NO ACCESS OR PRIVILEGE VIOLATION. Note: If you only remove the write privilege from program file 2 for class 3, you can monitor the program file, but cannot edit the program file. 7 Define data table read/write privileges. a. On the Data Table Privileges screen, remove the read and write privileges from data file N7 for class 3. b. Attempt to access the processor using the class 3 password; read and write privileges are denied for data table file N7. Note: If you attempt to use [F8] Monitor File to access data table file N7, the software beeps and displays the error NO PRIVILEGE TO READ FILE N7. Note: If you only remove the write privilege from data table file N7 for class 3, you can monitor the data table file, but cannot change/modify data in the data table file.

Define privileges for each class. a. Remove all privileges from class 4. b. Change the default class to class 4 (see step 3 below), forcing all users to upgrade to a higher class upon entry online or offline. c. Enable all privileges for class 1; remove specific privileges for class 2, and further privileges for class 3. Note: Disable the Modify Privilege from class 2, class 3, and class 4. Class 1 should only have the ability to modify privileges.

Define passwords for each class. a. A default password is not assigned. Press Enter to bypass the old password (when assigning for the first time). Define passwords for all classes. b. Distribute the passwords to the appropriate individuals requiring access to specific class levels. c. Once the password for a specific class has been distributed, anyone having access to the password can modify the password for the appropriate class. Attention: There is no System Administrator selection for passwords and privileges. If you assign a password to a class, and later do not recall that password, you will not have access to that class. There is no reset function to delete a forgotten password.

Define default classes for offline and online channels. a. Change the default for the offline class and channel 1A (the DH+ channel you will use for an online connection) to class 4. Assigning class 4 as the default class will force all users to enter a class and a password to gain offline or online access, upgrading the user from class 4 (no privileges) to the class they are permitted to access. Note: If you do not assign a default class (below class 1), all privileges will be assigned.

Define channel read/write privileges. a. Remove the read and write privilege from channel 1B for class 3. b. Attempt to access the processor using the class 3 password. The following occurs: read and write privileges for the channel 1B screen do not exist. the Channel Overview screen displays No Read Privileges beside channel 1B. channel 1B configuration screen will not appear.

15-22

Monitoring Data

16 Monitoring Data
Chapter Objectives
This chapter explains how to monitor inputs or outputs of your program or the status of certain instructions. This chapter explains how to:

display the processor data table change data formats change data monitor modules monitor data for ControlNet I/O (CIO) instructions monitor data for message instructions monitor data for PID instructions monitor string data

16-1

Monitoring Data Preface

Displaying the Processor Data Table

6200 Main Menu

To display the processor data table, follow the steps on the left.
Address I:000 I:001 I:002 I:003 I:004 I:005 I:006 I:007 I:010 I:011 I:012 I:013 I:014 I:015 I:016 I:017 AC: 17 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Address I:020 I:021 I:022 I:023 I:024 I:025 I:026 I:027 I:030 I:031 I:032 I:033 I:034 I:035 I:036 I:037 17 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to an instruction

Press a function key or enter a value. I:000/12 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Binary Change Specify Radix Address F1 F5

Addr:Octal PLC 5/40 Addr 20 Next Prev Force File File Monitor F7 F8 F9

Data Monitor
F8

If You Want to: Change the format of the data display Change the address for which the data is displayed Display the data table values for the next file Display the data table values for the previous file Force I/O. This key is active only if you are monitoring the input or output sections of the data table

Press this Key: [F1] Change Radix [F5] Specify Address [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File [F9] Force Monitor

At the bottom of the data table display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-2

Monitoring Data

Changing the Radix

6200 Main Menu

You can change the format of the data that the data monitor displays. To change the radix, follow the steps on the left.
Address I:000 I:001 I:002 I:003 I:004 I:005 I:006 I:007 I:010 I:011 I:012 I:013 I:014 I:015 I:016 I:017 AC: 17 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Address I:020 I:021 I:022 I:023 I:024 I:025 I:026 I:027 I:030 I:031 I:032 I:033 I:034 I:035 I:036 I:037 17 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Data 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Press a function key for desired radix.

Cursor to an instruction
Data Monitor
F8

Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Binary Binary Octal Decimal HEX/BCD ASCII Data Data Data Data Data F1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Addr:Octal

PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Octal Decimal Address Address F9 F10

Press the function key for the data format you want to display. If You Want to: Display data in binary format Press this Key: [F1] Binary Data [F2] Octal Data [F3] Decimal Data [F4] Hexadecimal/BCD Data [F5] ASCII Data [F9] Octal Address [F10] Decimal Address

Change Radix
F1

Display data in octal format Display data in decimal format Display data in BCD or hexadecimal format Display data in ASCII format Display addresses in octal format Display addresses in decimal format

You can change the radix at any time by pressing [F1] - Change Radix. At the bottom of the data table display, you see:
This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.
16-3

Monitoring Data Preface

Note

For floating point and formatted data types, you can change the address radix (octal address, decimal address), but you cannot change the data radix (binary data, octal data, ASCII data, etc.). For a list of the default data formats for each file type, see the following table.
File Type: O I S N B D T A F output input status integer binary BCD timer ASCII floating point Default Data Format: binary binary formatted decimal binary BCD/hex formatted ASCII floating point File Type: C R BT CT MG PD ST SC counter control block transfer ControlNet transfer message PID data string SFC status Default Data Format: formatted formatted formatted formatted formatted formatted formatted formatted

16-4

Monitoring Data

Specifying Addresses
You can specify the address that you want to monitor. To specify an address, follow the steps below. To Specify An Address:
6200 Main Menu

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Data Monitor
F8

Specify Address
F5

Enter address to monitor

Note

The Data Monitor does not display data for status file (S) addresses. For more information, see chapter 11.

16-5

Monitoring Data Preface

Entering and Changing Data

To Enter and Change Data:
Cursor to data to change Enter new data

You can enter new data or change existing data in all of the data displays. To change data, follow the steps on the left.

Note

Certain bits and words in the status files are read only. The processor prevents you from changing these values when you are programming online.

Displaying Cross References

You can display the cross reference database for any address from the Data Monitor screen. The cross reference shows you all the occurrences of an address in the current processor memory file. Follow the steps on the left.
Go to any Data Monitor screen
I:004/05 ] [ 2:2 ] [ 2:0

Alt

Press a function key. I:004/05 Rem Prog Forces:Disabled Go to Toggle Rung Window F1 F3

Edits:None Specify Address F5

5/40 File EXAMPL Next XR Prev XR Address Address F9 F10

16-6

Monitoring Data

If You Want to: Select a rung to display. Select a different address to view. View cross reference information for the next address View cross reference information for the previous address Move the cursor up one row in the display. Move the cursor down one row in the display. Move the cursor right one field in the display. Move the cursor left one field in the display. Move the cursor to the first entry in the display. Move the cursor to the last entry in the display. Move the cursor to the last line on the current page. Move the cursor to the first line on the current page. Move the cursor to the beginning of the current line. Move the cursor to the end of the current line. Change processor mode. Exit the X-Ref window.

Follow these Steps: Cursor to the rung number within the cross reference information and press [F1] Go to Rung Press [F5] Specify Address and enter the address Press [F9] Next XR Address Press [F10] Prev XR Address [y] [b] ['] [a] [Home] [End] [Ctrl-PageDown] [Ctrl-PageUp] [Ctrl-a] [Ctrl-'] [Alt-C] [Escape]

16-7

Monitoring Data Preface

Monitoring BTR and BTW Instructions

6200 Main Menu

To monitor BTR/BTW instructions from the ladder file and view the BTR/BTW Data Monitor screen, follow the steps on the left.
| | + | | | | | | + | | | | | | | | | | + | | | | | | + | | | | | | | |

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

+TON + +TIMER ON DELAY + |Timer T4:0| |Time base 1.0+ |Preset 15| |Accum 15| + + +BTR + +BLOCK TRNSFR READ + |Rack 0| |Group 0+ |Module 0| |Control Block N10:100+ |Data file O:000| |Length 0| |Continuous N| + +

(EN) (DN)

(EN) (DN) (ER)

Cursor to BTR/BTW instruction

Data Monitor
F8

Press a function key for desired monitor function. (file 2, rung 3) Program Forces:None Edits:None I/O Monitor Specify Monitor File Address F1 F3 F5

PLC 5/40

Addr 20

DRILL1

Move the cursor to the BTR or BTW instruction and press this key.

Monitor File
F3

If You Want to: Use the I/O configuration utility For more information about using this utility, see the I/O Configuration Utility manual. Display the Data Monitor screen for the data file address of the current block transfer instruction Specify the address that you want to monitor

Press this Key: [F1] I/O Monitor

[F3] Monitor File [F5] Specify Address

16-8

Monitoring Data

Address N10:0 N10:10 N10:20 N10:30 N10:40 N10:50 N10:60 N10:70 N10:80

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

4 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

AC:

Press a function key or enter a value. N7:20 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal Change Specify Radix Address F1 F5

Addr:Decimal 5/40 File BATCH40 Next Prev File File F7 F8

At the bottom of the BTR/BTW data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-9

Monitoring Data Preface

Monitoring CIO Instructions

6200 Main Menu

The Data Monitor for ControlNet I/O Transfer Control Block screen displays the parameters for the control block of the current CIO instruction. To monitor an CIO instruction, follow the steps on the left.
Data Monitor for ControlNet I/O Transfer Block CT12:1

Online Offline Prog or Prog

F1 F3

Communication Command: PLC 5 Data Table Address: Size in Elements: Elements Transmitted

1771 WRITE N7:3 10 0

Cursor to program file

Local ControlNet Node: Slot Number: Port Number: Error Code: 0000 (HEX) 1 0 2

ignore if timed out: awaiting execution: continuous: error: transfer done: transfer started: transfer enabled:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO EW CO ER DN ST EN

Monitor File
F8

AC:

Cursor to CIO instruction

Data Monitor
F8

Press a function key or enter a value. CT12:1.TO = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:None Toggle Size in Specify Bit Elemnts Address F2 F3 F5

Addr:Decimal Next File F7

5/40C File JOSHUA Prev Next Prev File Element Element F8 F9 F10

If You Want to: Toggle the control bit that the cursor is on. You can toggle among the TO, EW, CO, ER, DN, ST, and EN bits. Change the size of the block of data to send or receive. Change the address for which the data is displayed. Display the data table values for the next file. Display the data table values for the previous file. Display the data table values for the next element. Display the data table values for the previous element.

Press this Key: [F2] Toggle Bit [F3] Size in Elements [F5] Specify Address [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File [F9] Next Element [F10] Previous Element

Monitor File
F3

At the bottom of the CIO data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-10

Monitoring Data

Monitoring MSG Instructions

6200 Main Menu

To monitor an MSG instruction, follow the steps on the left.

If You Are Using this Data Type: N (integer) MG (message) MG (message) over ControlNet See this Figure: Figure 16.1 Figure 16.2 Figure 16.3

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

Cursor to program file

Figure 16.1 MSG Data Monitor Screen Using an N Control Block

Data Monitor For Message Control Block N7:10

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to MSG instruction

Communication Command PLC 5 Data Table Address: Size in Elements: Local/Remote: Remote Station: Link ID: Remote Link Type: Local Node Address: Destination Data Table Address:

PLC-5 TYPED WRITE I:000 ignore if timed out: 1 to be retried: LOCAL awaiting execution: N/A continuous: N/A error: N/A message done: 00 message transmitting: O:000 message enabled: control bit addr: N7:10/8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO NR EW CO ER DN ST EN

ERROR CODE: 0

(DEC)

Data Monitor
F8

BLOCK SIZE = 9 WORDS AC: Press a function key to change a value. Program Forces:None Size in Elemnts F3 Data:Formatted PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Toggle Bit F9 DRILL1

The MSG Data Monitor screen displays the parameters for the control block of the current MSG instruction. For more information about these parameters, see the chapter on MSG instructions in the Instruction Set Reference manual.
If You Want to: Change the size of the block of data to send or receive Toggle the control bit that the cursor is on You can toggle between TO, NR, EW, CO, ER, DN, ST, and EN bits. Press this Key: [F3] Size in Elements [F9] Toggle

At the bottom of the MSG data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.
16-11

Monitoring Data Preface

In Program mode, you can use [F9] Toggle to toggle any bit on the MSG Data Monitor screen. This might be useful to set all bits to zero when you are troubleshooting. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the bit you want to toggle. Figure 16.2 MSG Data Monitor Screen Using an MG Control Block
Data Monitor for Message Control Block MG7:10

Communication Command PLC 5 Data Table Address: Size in Elements: Local/Remote: Remote Station: Link ID: Remote Link Type: Local Node Address: Destination Data Table Address: Port Number ERROR CODE: 0000 (HEX)

PLC-5 TYPED WRITE I:000 ignore if timed out: 1 to be retried: LOCAL awaiting execution: N/A continuous: N/A error: N/A message done: 00 message transmitting: O:000 message enabled: 1A

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO NR EW CO ER DN ST EN

AC: Press a function key or enter a value. Program Forces:None Toggle Size in Bit Elemnts F2 F3 Data:Formatted Specify Address F5 Addr:Decimal PLC 5/40 Addr 20 DRILL1 Next Prev Next Prev File File Element Element F7 F8 F9 F10

If You Want to: Toggle the control bit that the cursor is on You can toggle between TO, NR, EW, CO, ER, DN, ST, and EN bits. Change the size of the block of data to send or receive Change the address for which the data is displayed Display the data table values for the next file Display the data table values for the previous file Display the data table values for the next element Display the data table values for the previous element

Press this Key: [F2] Toggle Bit

[F3] Size in Elements [F5] Specify Address [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File [F9] Next Element [F10] Previous Element

At the bottom of the MSG data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-12

Monitoring Data

Figure 16.3 MSG Data Monitor Screen Using an MG Control Block Over ControlNet
Data Monitor for Message Control Block MG20:50

Communication Command: PLC 5 Data Table Address: Size in Elements: Local/Remote: Remote Station: Link ID: Remote Link Type: Local ControlNet Node: Destination Data Table Address: Port Number: Error Code: 0000 (HEX)

PLC 5 TYPED WRITE N8:0 ignore if timed out: 1 to be retried: LOCAL awaiting execution: N/A continuous: N/A error: N/A message done: 6 message transmitting: N11:0 message enabled: 2

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TO NR EW CO ER DN ST EN

AC: Press a function key or enter a value. MG20:50.TO = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal Toggle Size in Specify Bit Elemnts Address F2 F3 F5

Addr:Decimal Next File F7

5/40C File JOSHUA Prev Next Prev File Element Element F8 F9 F10

If You Want to: Toggle the control bit that the cursor is on You can toggle between TO, NR, EW, CO, ER, DN, ST, and EN bits. Change the size of the block of data to send or receive Change the address for which the data is displayed Display the data table values for the next file Display the data table values for the previous file Display the data table values for the next element Display the data table values for the previous element

Press this Key: [F2] Toggle Bit

[F3] Size in Elements [F5] Specify Address [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File [F9] Next Element [F10] Previous Element

At the bottom of the MSG data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-13

Monitoring Data Preface

Monitoring PID Instructions

6200 Main Menu

To monitor a PID instruction, follow the steps on the left.

If You Are Using this Data Type: See this Figure: Figure 16.4 Figure 16.5

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

N (integer) PD (PID)

Cursor to program file

Figure 16.4 PID Data Monitor Screen Using an N Control Block

equation: mode: error: output Limiting: set output mode: setpoint scaling: derivative input: last state resume: deadband status: upper CV Limit alarm: lower CV Limit alarm: setpoint out of range: PID done: PID enabled: 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0:AB/1:ISA) (0:auto/1:manual) (0:SP PV/1:PV SP) (0:NO/1:YES) (0:NO/1:YES) (0:YES/1:NO) (0:PV/1:error) (0:NO/1:YES) feed forward: max scaled input: min scaled input: deadband: set output value %: upper CV limit %: lower CV limit %: scaled PV value: scaled error: current CV %: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 7 516 1792

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to PID instruction

Data Monitor
F8 AC:

(scaled) setpoint: proportional gain (Kp) [.01]: integral gain (Ki) [.001/secs]: derivative gain (Kd) [.01 secs]: loop update time [.01 secs]:

0 0 0 0 1031

Enter value or press <ESCAPE> to exit monitor. N7:0/0 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Formatted

PLC 5/15 Addr 20

DRILL1

At the bottom of the PID data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

The PID Data Monitor screen displays the parameter values for the control block of the current PID instruction. You can use the arrow keys, [Home], and [End] to move the cursor to parameter values that you want to change. For more information about these parameters, see chapter 14 in the Instruction Set Reference manual.

16-14

Monitoring Data

Figure 16.5 PID Data Monitor Screen Using a PD Control Block

Setpoint: Process Var.: Error: Output %: Mode: PV Alarm: Deviation Alarm: Output Limiting: SP Out Of Range: Error Within Deadband: PID Initialized: A/M Station Mode: Software A/M Mode: Status Enable (EN ): AC: Press a function key or enter a value. PD0:1.EN = Rem Prog Forces:Disabled Data:Float Toggle Specify PID Address Config F3 F5 F6 5.889e 38 3.371e 11 1.520e+14 1.520e+14 AUTO NONE NONE NONE NO NO NO AUTO AUTO 0 Proportional Gain (Kp): Integral Gain (Ki) [/secs]: Derivative Time (Kd) [secs]: 5.889e 30 5.8893 39 5.889e 39

Deadband: Output Bias %: Tieback %: Set Output %:

2.718e+23 5.889e 39 2.309e+28 4.174e 08

PLC 5/40 Addr 20 Drill1 Next Prev Next Prev File File Elemnt Elemnt F7 F8 F9 F10

If You Want to: Toggle the control bit that the cursor is on Change the address for which the data is displayed Define characteristics of the PID instruction Display the data table values for the next file Display the data table values for the previous file Display the data table values for the next element Display the data table values for the previous element

Press this Key: [F3] Toggle [F5] Specify Address [F6] PID Config [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File [F9] Next Element [F10] Previous Element

At the bottom of the PID data monitor display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-15

Monitoring Data Preface

Monitoring String Data

6200 Main Menu

To monitor data at a string address (such as ST13:0), follow the steps on the left.
Address LEN 17 STRING TEXT Station 6 stopped

Online Prog
F1

or

Offline Prog
F3

ST12:16

ST12:17

17

Normal operation

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

ST12:18

28

Station 12 waiting for input

AC: Press a function key or enter a value. ST12:16 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal Addr:Decimal Change Edit Specify Next Radix String Address File F1 F3 F5 F7

Cursor to ST address
Data Monitor
F8

PLC 5/40 Addr 20 Prev File F8

Drill1

If You Want to: Change the radix of the address display Enter or edit string data

Press this Key: [F1] Change Radix [F3] Edit String The string moves to the input line; use the arrow keys to move to the part of the string you want to edit.

Specify the address that you want to monitor Display the data table values for the next file Display the data table values for the previous file

[F5] Specify Address [F7] Next File [F8] Previous File

At the bottom of the string address display, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

16-16

Monitoring Data

Entering a String
You can enter any ASCII character in the string text field by typing on the input line and then pressing [Enter]. Each ASCII string can be a maximum of 82 characters. You can also enter these ASCII characters (each entry counts as 1 character):
To Enter this Character: hexadecimal value a single backslash (\) control code ASCII character codes Type this: \xx where xx are valid hexadecimal digits (for example: 00, 2C, FF, etc.) \\ see the ASCII character chart located on the inside back cover of this manual

Deleting a String
If you want to delete the string text for an address, move the cursor to that address and press [Enter]. The system uses the blank input line to clear the string text.

Copying a String
If you want to copy data to/from a string, keep the following in mind:

the ST data file type stores the string length in the first word the first word of the source file must match the amount of characters in the string you want to copy (2 characters occupy each data table word)

16-17

Monitoring Data Preface

Example:
COP Copy 4 characters in file A22:0 to file ST52:0. COPY Source Dest Length #A22:0 #ST52:0 4

Source ASCII Radix A22:0

0 \00\04

1 a b

2 c d

After the COPY command executes: Dest LEN ST52:0 4 abcd

16-18

Clearing Faults

17Clearing Faults
Chapter Objectives
Processor faults result when hardware or software problems occur that the processor cannot resolve. A major fault halts the processor and stops it from processing information. For example, a hardware error or bad address specification can cause a major fault. You need to clear a major fault, either manually or in ladder logic, before your process can continue. A minor fault indicates a status change (for informational purposes only) or that a problem occurred, but that the problem is not severe enough to halt the processor. For example, an STI overlap or an invalid I/O file specification can cause a minor fault. This chapter shows you how to clear a major or minor fault in PLC-5 processors. Note
References to: Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Unless otherwise stated:

Include these Allen-Bradley processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and your

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

application expertise.

17-1

Clearing Faults Preface

Clearing a Major Fault

A major fault halts the processor. You have to clear a major fault before the processor can continue to run the current program. To clear a major fault, follow the steps on the left, using Figure 17.1 or Figure 17.2. Figure 17.1 Processor Status Screen for Enhanced PLC-5 Processors
Ladder Editor or Main Menu Program Directory
Processor Status Fault Where Major Minor code: faulted: fault: fault 1: 2: Processor status: I/O status I/O control 0 0:0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 10001000

General Utilities
F7

btx full: rack fault: reset: inhibit:

Mode switch in remote 27 20 17 10 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

7 0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

Processor Status
F2

Arithmetic flags: S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 RTC date: 0000 00 00 Processor Checksum: 0x03FB EEPROM: TRANSFER ON BAD RAM Memory: PROTECTED Press a function key or enter a value. S:10/15= Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Octal Proc Config F2

RTC time: 00:00:00 Indexed addressing offset: 0 Resident I/O chassis addr: 1/4 SLOT Ram Backup: ENABLED

Addr:Octal

PLC 5/40 File CHANNEL Clear Clear Min Flt Maj Flt F9 F10

Bit values for major and minor faults

17-2

Clearing Faults

Figure 17.2 Processor Status Screen for Classic PLC-5 Processors

DH+ station: 20 Mode: SCANNER Local hardware addressing: 2 SLOT Ram backup: DISABLED Memory: UNPROTECTED EEPROM: TRANSFER AT POWERUP Arithmetic flags S:0 Z:0 V:0 C:0 MEMORY NOT PROTECTED IN RUN MODE User control bits 00000000 00000000 RESTART FIRST STEP Processor status 00000000 11001000 MODE SWITCH IN REMOTE Minor fault 00000000 00000010 DH+ TABLE CHANGE Major fault 00000000 00000000 Fault code 0 Where faulted prog file: 0 rung: 0 Fault routine prog file: 0 watchdog: 500 Select. timed inter. prog file: 0 setpoint: 0 Program scan [msec] last: 0 max: 10 Date/time 1983 10 03 21:59:39 Indexed addressing offset 0 Adapter Image file: N/A I/O Status File: 0 VME status file: N/A Active node list 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 00000000 00000000 10000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001

Press a function key or enter a value. S:0/3 = Rem Prog Forces:None Data:Decimal I/O VME Specify Status Config Address F3 F4 F5

Addr:Decimal PLC 5/15 Addr 20 Clear Clear Min Flt Maj Flt F9 F10

Bit values for major and minor faults

For these Processors: Enhanced PLC-5

Faults are Displayed: The status text that appears corresponds to the most significant fault when the cursor is not on the major fault status word. If the cursor is on a major fault word bit and that bit is set, the status text that appears corresponds to the bit that the cursor is on. If no bits are set the message area is blank.

Clear the Faults By: Resetting individual bits. Position the cursor on the bit associated with the fault (fault bit set to 1) and type 0 [Enter] If you have more than one major fault and you reset a bit, the status text displays the next major fault message. Pressing [F10] Clear Major Fault on the Processor Status screen. This resets all major faults. When you clear major faults, the fault code, program file and rung number fields are also cleared. Pressing [F10] Clear Major Fault on the Processor Status screen. This resets all major faults. When you clear major faults, the fault code, program file and rung number fields are also cleared.

Classic PLC-5

The status text that appears corresponds to most recent major fault. If no bits are set the message area is blank.

17-3

Clearing Faults Preface

Table 17.A Possible Major Faults (Stored in S:11)

If the Status Bit Values Are: 15.....8 7......0 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx1 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx10 xxxxxxxx xxxxx100 xxxxxxxx xxxx1000 xxxxxxxx xxx10000 xxxxxxxx xx100000 xxxxxxxx x1000000 xxxxxxxx 10000000 xxxxxxx1 00000000 xxxxxx10 00000000 xxxxx100 00000000 xxxx1000 00000000 xxx10000 00000000 xx100000 00000000 x1000000 00000000 10000000 00000000
1 For Enhanced PLC-5 processors only.

Bit Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Then the Fault is: Bad user program file (see fault codes 10-19) Illegal operand address (see fault codes 20-29) Programming error (see fault codes 30-49) SFC fault (see fault codes 71-79) Program assembly error (see fault code 70) Powerup protection fault Channel 3 device fault 1 User generated fault (see fault codes 0-9) Watchdog timer fault Bad system configuration (see fault codes 80-89) Hardware error MCP does not exist or is not ladder 1 PII file does not exist or is not ladder 1 STI file does not exist or is not ladder 1 Bad fault program Non ladder file

Each x indicates a bit that can be 0 or 1 for the status value described.

17-4

Clearing Faults

Major Fault Codes

Table 17.B lists major fault codes. The processor stores the fault code in word 12 of the status file. An asterisk (*) next to the fault indicates that this fault is available on Enhanced PLC-5 processors. Table 17.B Major Fault Codes (Stored in S:12)
This Fault Code: 00-09 Indicates this Fault: reserved for user-defined fault codes You can use user-defined fault codes to identify different types of faults or error conditions in your program by generating your own recoverable fault. To use these fault codes, choose an input condition that decides whether to jump to a fault routine file, then use the JSR instruction as the means to jump to the fault routine file. To use the JSR instruction, enter the fault code number 0-9 (an immediate value) as the first input parameter of the instruction. Any other input parameters are ignored (even if you have an SBR instruction at the beginning of your fault routine file. You cannot pass parameters to the fault routine file using JSR/SBR instructions). Note that you do not have to use the user-defined fault codes to generate your own fault. If you program a JSR with no input parameters, the processor will write a zero to the Fault Code field. The purpose of using the user-defined fault codes is to allow you to distinguish among different types of faults or error codes based on the 0-9 fault code numbers. When the input condition is true, the processor copies the fault code number entered as the first input parameter of the JSR instruction into word 12 of the processor status file (S:12), which is the Fault Code field. The processor sets a Major Fault Flag S:11/7 User-Generated Fault. The processor then goes into FAULTED mode unless you clear the Major Fault Flag word (S:11) or the specific fault bit via ladder logic in the fault routine. 10 * 11 * 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 run-time data table check failed bad user program checksum bad integer operand type, restore new processor memory file bad mixed mode operation type, restore new processor memory file not enough operands for instruction, restore new processor memory file too many operands for instructions, restore new processor memory file corrupted instruction, probably due to restoring an incompatible processor memory file cant find expression end; restore new processor memory file missing end of edit zone; restore new processor memory file download aborted you entered too large an element number in an indirect address you entered a negative element number in an indirect address (Continued)
17-5

* This fault applies only to Enhanced PLC-5 processors.

Clearing Faults Preface

This Fault Code: 22 23 24 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 * 44 * 45 * 46 * 47-69 70 71 * 72 * 73 * 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

Indicates this Fault: (Continued) you tried to access a deleted program file you used a negative file number, you used a file number greater than the number of existing files, or you tried to indirectly address files 0, 1, or 2 you tried to indirectly address a file of the wrong type you tried to jump to one too many nested subroutine files you did not enter enough subroutine parameters you jumped to an invalid (non-ladder) file you entered a CAR routine file that is not 68000 code you entered a negative preset or accumulated value in a timer instruction you entered a negative time variable in a PID instruction you entered an out-of-range setpoint in a PID instruction you addresses an invalid module in a block transfer, immediate input, or immediate output instruction you entered a return instruction from a non-subroutine file FOR instruction with missing NXT the control file is too small for the PID, BTR, BTW, or MSG instruction NXT instruction with missing FOR you tried to jump to a deleted label file is not an SFC error using SFR invalid channel number IDI or IDO instruction length operand too large (>64 words) reserved the processor detected duplicate labels the processor tried to start an SFC subchart that is already running the processor tried to stop an SFC subchart that isnt running the processor tried to start more than the allowed number of subcharts SFC file error detected the SFC has too many active functions the SFC step loops back to itself the SFC references a step, transition, subchart, or SC file that is missing, empty or too small the processor cannot continue to run the SFC after power loss you tried to download an SFC to a processor that cannot run SFCs you incorrectly installed a 32-point I/O module in a 1-slot configuration (PLC-5/15, -5/25) you have an I/O configuration error (Enhanced PLC-5 processors) (Continued)

17-6

Clearing Faults

This Fault Code: 81 82 * 83 * 84 * 85 * 86 * 87 * 88 *

Indicates this Fault: you illegally set an I/O chassis backplane switch; either switch 4 or 5 must be off illegal cartridge type for selected operation user watchdog fault error in user-configured adapter mode block transfer card bad card is incompatible with host scanner rack list overlap scanner channels are overloading the remote I/O buffer; too much data for the processor to process To correct this fault, use the communication time slice feature (S:77) on the Processor Configuration screen and add 3 to 5 ms, allowing the Enhanced PLC-5 processor more time to handle I/O tasks. For more information on the communication time slice feature, see page 11-11 of this manual. coprocessor extensive memory test failed coprocessor undefined message type coprocessor illegal pool index coprocessor illegal maximum pool size coprocessor illegal ASCII message coprocessor reported fault coprocessor present signal lost coprocessor illegal minimum pool size coprocessor first/last 16 bytes RAM test failed coprocessor data transfer faulted processor to coprocessor transfer failed coprocessor end of scan transfer failed the file number specified for raw data transfer through the coprocessor is an illegal value the element number specified for raw data transfer through the coprocessor is an illegal value the size of the transfer requested through the coprocessor is an illegal size the offset into the raw transfer segment of the coprocessor is an illegal value ControlNet output transfer missed ControlNet input data missed ControlNet diagnostic data missed ControlNet scheduled transmit data overflow ControlNet configuration too complex for the PLC-5 ControlNet configuration exceeded PLC-5 bandwidth

* This fault applies only to Enhanced PLC-5 processors.

90 * 91 * 92 * 93 * 94 * 95 * 96 * 97 * 98 * 99 * 100 * 101 * 102 * 103 * 104 * 105 * 200 * 201 * 202 * 203 * 204 * 205 *

* This fault applies only to Enhanced PLC-5 processors.

17-7

Clearing Faults Preface

Clearing Minor Faults

Ladder Editor Main Menu or Program Directory

General Utilities
F7

A minor fault indicates a status change (for informational purposes only) or that a problem occurred, but that the problem is not severe enough to halt the processor. To clear a minor fault, follow the steps on the left (using the appropriate Processor Status screen for your processor).

Processor Status
F2

For these Processors Enhanced PLC-5

Follow these Rules for Displaying Minor Fault Text: The status text that appears corresponds to the most significant fault when the cursor is not on the minor fault status words. If the cursor is on a minor fault word bit and that bit is set, the status text that appears corresponds to the bit that the cursor is on. If no bits are set the message area is blank. The status text that appears corresponds to most recent minor fault. If no bits are set the message area is blank.

Clear Faults By: Resetting individual bits. Position the cursor on the bit associated with the fault (fault bit set to 1) and type 0 [Enter] If you have more than one minor fault and you reset a bit, the status text displays the next minor fault message. Pressing [F9] Clear Minor Faults to reset all minor faults Pressing [F9] Clear Minor Faults to reset all minor faults

Classic PLC-5

17-8

Clearing Faults

Table 17.C lists the possible minor faults. Since Enhanced PLC-5 processors have two minor fault words, minor faults in word 2 are listed in Table 17.D.

Table 17.C Possible Minor Faults in Word 1 (Stored in S:10)

If the Status Bit Values Are: 15.....8 7......0 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx1 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx10 xxxxxxxx xxxxx100 xxxxxxxx xxxx1000 xxxxxxxx xxx10000 xxxxxxxx xx100000 xxxxxxxx x1000000 xxxxxxxx 10000000 xxxxxxx1 00000000 xxxxxx10 00000000 xxxxx100 00000000 xxxx1000 00000000 xxx10000 00000000 xx100000 00000000 x1000000 00000000 10000000 00000000
1 For

Bit Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Then the Fault Is: Battery is low (replace in 1-2 days) or missing DH+ table changed STI overlap EEPROM transferred Edits prevent SFC continuing Invalid I/O status file Memory cartridge battery low 1 No more command blocks exist 1 EEPROM too small, burn failed 1 No MCP configured to run 1 MCP not allowed 1 PII word number isnt in local rack 1 User PII routine overlap 1 No command blocks exist to get PII 1 Arithmetic overflow occurred 1 SFC lingering action overlap 1

Each x indicates a bit that can be 0 or 1 for the status value described. Enhanced PLC-5 processors only.

17-9

Clearing Faults Preface

Table 17.D Possible Minor Faults in Word 2 Enhanced PLC-5 Processors only (Stored in S:17)
If the Status Bit Values in Word 2 Are: 15.....8 7......0 xxxxxxxx xxxxxxx1 xxxxxxxx xxxxxx10 xxxxxxxx xxxxx100 xxxxxxxx xxxx1000 xxxxxxxx xxx10000 xxxxxxxx xx100000 xxxxxxxx x1000000 Bit Number: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Then the Fault Is: Queue full between local and remote I/O Queue full servicing channel 1A Queue full servicing channel 1B Queue full servicing channel 2A Queue full servicing channel 2B No modem on serial port Remote I/O rack in local rack table or Remote I/O rack is greater than the image size. This fault can also be caused by the local rack if the local rack is set for octal density scan and the I/O image tables are smaller than 64 words (8 racks) each. Firmware revision for channel pairs 1A/1B or 2A/2B does not match the processor firmware revision ASCII instruction error Duplicate node address DF1 Master poll list error Protected PLC-5 processor data table element violation Protected PLC-5 processor file violation Using all 32 ControlNet MSGs Using all 32 ControlNet 1771 Read and/or 1771 Write CIOs Using all 8 ControlNet Flex I/O CIOs

xxxxxxxx 10000000

xxxxxxx1 00000000 xxxxxx10 00000000 xxxxx100 00000000 xxxx1000 00000000 xxx10000 00000000 xx100000 00000000 x1000000 00000000 10000000 00000000

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Each x indicates a bit that can be 0 or 1 for the status value described.

17-10

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions

18 Forcing I/O and Forcing

SFC Transitions
Chapter Objectives
Forcing I/O lets you turn specific input and output bits in a processor on or off for testing purposes. Forcing bits on or off or forcing SFC transitions lets you simulate operation or control of an output device. This chapter explains how to force I/O and how to force SFC transitions. This chapter also discusses monitoring input forces and output forces. Note Note Note Forcing inputs lets you force the bit in the input data file; forcing outputs lets you force the actual output module, leaving the output data file in its original state. Forces are held by the processor (and not the programming terminal). Forces remain even if the programming terminal is disconnected. If you have forces in a program and then write that program to an EEPROM, all forces are removed. For more information on writing to an EEPROM, see chapter 3 in the Programming manual. You can prevent force changes (in Run mode) via the memory protect feature. For more information, see page 11-10.

Tip

18-1

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions Preface

Forcing I/O Bits from the Ladder Editor

To force bits on or off directly from the ladder editor, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to file to view

Monitor File
F8

The status line displays the state of I/O forces (not SFC forces).

| + | | | | | + | | | | | | | | | |

I:000 I:000 I:000 + ]/[ + ]/[ ] [ | 12| 11 10 |I:000| + ] [ + 15 I:000 I:000 I:000 I:000 +++ ] [ ] [ ] [ + ]/[ ++ ||| 10 11 16| 12|| |||I:002 | || ||+ ]/[ + || || 10 || ||I:003 I:000 || |+ ]/[ ] [ +| | 11 10 | |I:003 | + ]/[ + 12

O:005 | ( ) + 00 | | | | O:000 | ( ) + 13 | | | | | | | | | |

Force
F9

Press a function key for desired forcing function. (file 2, rung 0) Rem Prog Forces:None Edits:None 5/15 Addr 20 LIMIT Force Force Remove Remove Specify Enable Disable Monitor Monitor Off ON Force All Bit Inputs Outputs F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F9 F10

Note

You can only force live I/O points, which are bits in an input or an output word that are physically attached to and configured for your system. Also you cannot force output addresses on input instructions or input addresses on output instructions. Other bit addresses, such as N, B, T, C, etc., also cannot be forced.
If You Want to: Force the current bit off (0) Force the current bit on (1) Remove the current forced bit from the force table Remove all forced bits from the force table Find and display a bit in the force monitor Enable all forced bits Disable all forced bits Display the force table for inputs Display the force table for outputs Press this Key: [F1] Force Off [F2] Force On [F3] Remove Force [F4] Remove All [F5] Specify Bit [F6] Enable [F7] Disable [F9] Monitor Inputs [F10] Monitor Outputs

Note

The Enable, Disable, Remove, and Remove All functions only affect I/O forces; if you have SFC transition forces (in the SFC Editor), they are not affected.

18-2

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions

Forcing I/O Bits from the Force Monitor Screen

To view the Force Monitor screen, follow the steps on the left.
Address I:000 I:001 I:002 I:003 I:004 I:005 I:006 I:007 I:010 I:011 I:012 I:013 I:014 I:015 I:016 I:017 AC: Press a function key or enter force value. I:037/11 = Rem Prog Forces:None Force Force Remove Remove Specify Enable Off On Force All Bit F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 17 .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... Data .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 0 .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... Address I:020 I:021 I:022 I:023 I:024 I:025 I:026 I:027 I:030 I:031 I:032 I:033 I:034 I:035 I:036 I:037 17 .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... Data .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... 0 .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... .... ....

6200 Main Menu

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Disable F7

File LIMIT Data Monitor F8

Press the function key for the task you want to perform.
Force
F9

or

Cursor to an instruction

To Force a Bit On or Off:

Specify Bit
F9

Monitor Inputs
F9

Monitor Outputs or
F10

Data Monitor
F8

Cursor on the bit you want to force

Force Off Force On
F2

or

Enter an input or output bit address

Force Monitor
F9

F1

or

18-3

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions Preface

If You Want to: Force the cursored bit off (0) Force the cursored bit on (1) Remove the current forced bit from the force table Remove all forced bits from the force table Find and display a bit in the force monitor Enable all forced bits Disable all forced bits Go to the Data Monitor screen

Press this Key: [F1] Force Off [F2] Force On [F3] Remove Force [F4] Remove All [F5] Specify Bit [F6] Enable [F7] Disable [F8] Data Monitor

At the bottom of this screen, you see:

This Field: Address Comment Line Specifies: the address comment of the cursored address, preceded by AC:. Note: If an address comment is not specified for the cursored address, AC: is displayed only.

This Symbol: 0 1 .

Means this: Bit forced off Bit forced on Bit not forced (removed)

You can also move the cursor to the bit and type a 1, 0, or . to force that bit on, off, or remove a force, respectively. Note Forcing a bit on or off only changes the state of that bit in the force table. In order for the force to affect an input or an output, forces must be enabled. (See page 18-6)

18-4

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions

Removing I/O Forces

To remove a single forced bit, follow the steps on the left. To remove all forces in the processor, follow the steps on the right. To Remove a Single Forced Bit:
6200 Main Menu

To Remove All Forces in the Processor:

6200 Main Menu

Online Prog
F1

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Choose One: a
Force
F9

b
Force
F9

c Cursor to an instruction
Data Monitor
F8

Remove All
F4

Yes

No or
F10

Confirm your selection by entering

Specify Bit
F9

F8

Monitor Inputs
F9

Monitor Outputs or
F10

Enter an input or output bit address

Force Monitor
F9

Cursor on the bit you want to remove the force from

Remove Force
F3

18-5

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions Preface

Enabling and Disabling I/O Forces

6200 Main Menu

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Choose One: a
Force
F9

b
Force
F9

c Cursor to an instruction
Data Monitor
F8

Specify Bit
F9

Monitor Inputs
F9

Monitor Outputs or
F10

Enter an input or output bit address

Force Monitor
F9

Enable
F6

Disable or
F7

Yes

No or
F10

Confirm your selection by entering

F8

18-6

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions

When you enable forced input or output bits, the processor enables the on or off condition specified for the bits. Disabling forced bits tells the processor to ignore the on or off condition that appears in the force table for each forced bit. Attention: When any output is forced on or off, keep personnel away from the machine area. Forcing an output can cause unexpected machine motion that could injure personnel. To enable or disable I/O forces, follow the steps on the left. When you enable forces, the software intensifies the forced instructions and displays Forces:Enabled on the status line.

18-7

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions Preface

Forcing Transitions from the SFC Editor (Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Only)
When you monitor an SFC with an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, you can force transitions on and off. This lets you override the flow of your SFC for troubleshooting purposes. Attention: When any transition is forced on or off in an SFC program, keep personnel away from the machine area. Forcing a transition can cause unexpected machine motion that could injure personnel. To force a transition, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to SFC program file The status line displays the state Monitor of SFC forces File (not I/O forces).
F8

START + + | + 11 | + + + |12 | + + + + 11 | | 3: | + + + |12|

Press a function key. MONITOR (0,0) > Rem Prog SFCFrc:Disabled Force Force Remove Remove On Off Force All F1 F2 F3 F4

Ser A Rev A Enable F7

5/40 Addr 20 Disable F8

LIMIT

SFC Main Menu

Press the function key for the task you want to perform.

Cursor to transition to force

Force
F9

18-8

Forcing I/O and Forcing SFC Transitions

If You Want to: Force the current transition on (true) Force the current transition off (false) Remove the force from the current transition Remove all transition forces (for current SFC only) Enable all transition forces (in all SFCs in the processor) Disable all transition forces (in all SFCs in the processor)

Press this Key: [F1] Force On [F2] Force Off [F3] Remove Force [F4] Remove All [F6] Enable [F7] Disable

Note

All of the functions affect SFC transition forces; if you have I/O forces (in the Ladder Editor), they are not affected.

18-9

Generating a Contact Histogram

19

Generating a Contact Histogram

Chapter Objectives
Use a contact histogram to view the transition history (the on and off states) of a data table value. This chapter shows you how to generate and print a contact histogram so you can monitor a specific input or output.

Generating a Contact Histogram

You can generate a contact histogram for any data table address (except floating point addresses), as long as it is a direct, logical address. Note Note The PLC-5 processors can support only 1 contact histogram at a time. The contact histogram is updated every 10 ms for Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 processors (except the contact histogram for Ethernet PLC-5 processors, which is updated every 20 ms); if you have events that occur faster, not all of the contact histogram information may be valid.

19-1

Generating Prefacea Contact Histogram

To generate a contact histogram, follow the steps on the left.

6200 Main Menu
CONTACT HISTOGRAM for I:001/00 with mask 0001 accumulated time delta time data * * * Monitoring with a new mask * * * 00:00:03.21 00:00:03.21 ON 00:00:04.18 00:00:00.97 OFF 00:00:05.70 00:00:01.52 ON 00:00:06.42 00:00:00.72 OFF 00:00:07.13 00:00:00.71 ON 00:00:07.30 00:00:00.17 OFF 00:00:07.44 00:00:00.14 ON 00:00:07.58 00:00:00.14 OFF 00:00:07.69 00:00:00.11 ON 00:00:07.84 00:00:00.15 OFF 00:00:12.98 00:00:05.14 ON 00:00:13.92 00:00:00.94 OFF 00:00:17.57 00:00:03.65 ON 00:00:22.77 00:00:05.20 OFF 00:00:34.63 00:00:11.86 ON Press a function key for desired histogram function. > Rem RUN Hist:Started Mode:Contin Recording:Off Start Stop Contnue Paged New New Clear History History Mode Mode Mask Address Mask F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to instruction
General Utility
F7

Addr 24 APPNOTE Write To Disk F8

Use this key to stop the histogram.

Contact History
F6

19-2

Generating a Contact Histogram

If You Want to: Begin monitoring the current address. Stop monitoring the current address. Display data continuously on the screen as new data is collected. If new data is generated faster than the display can be updated, eventually the data buffer overflows and ***HISTOGRAM BUFFER OVERFLOWED. DATA WAS LOST *** is displayed. Display data one page at a time. Enter a new mask. You can enter a new mask while the histogram is running. Enter a new address or symbol to monitor. Clear the present bit mask. You can clear the mask while the histogram is running. Start or stop writing the histogram data on disk. Exit the histogram screen and stop the histogram

Press this Key: [F1] Start History [F2] Stop History [F3] Continuous Mode

[F4] Paged Mode [F5] New Mask [F6] New Address [F7] Clear Mask [F8] Write to Disk [Esc]

The following table describes the columns available on the Contact Histogram screen:
This Column: accumulated time delta time data Displays: the time from the start of the histogram until the transition occurred the time between transitions the status of the data table value

When in Paged mode, use [PageUp] and [PageDown] to move to the previous or next page if more than one page of data exists. Note Do not disconnect the terminal or reboot the terminal while a contact histogram is running. Exit the histogram screen or stop the histogram before disconnecting the terminal from the DH+ link. If you do lose connection with the processor while a histogram is running (i.e., cable disconnected or terminal rebooted), you must re-connect to the processor using the same DH+ terminal address that was used when the histogram was started. In other words, you must stop a histogram from the same terminal from which it was started.

19-3

Generating Prefacea Contact Histogram

Using Masks
The software monitors an entire 16-bit word, but you can specify which bits the software should monitor or ignore. You use a bit mask to identify how to treat each bit. Specify a 0 to ignore a bit; specify a 1 to monitor a bit. Each hundredth of a second (10 ms), the software checks the monitored bit. If any bits are in a different state than the last time they were checked, the data word (with all ignored bits cleared) is recorded in a histogram buffer along with the time since the last value was recorded (in hundredths of a second). If the mask has only one bit set to 1, only one data bit is monitored, so the data is displayed as ON or OFF. If the mask has more than one bit set to 1, the data is displayed as binary numbers with the ignored bits blanked out with Xs. Note Masks cannot be cleared or set when monitoring a bit address; masks can only be cleared or set when monitoring a word. If you do not use a mask, all bits are recorded and the software displays the data in the default format.

19-4

Generating a Contact Histogram

Printing a Contact Histogram

To print a histogram, follow the steps on the left. Note
6200 Main Menu

Keep track of the monitoring process if you write the histogram to a file on the terminal. The write process continues to write to the disk until the disk is full.

Online Prog
F1

Cursor to program file

Monitor File
F8

Cursor to instruction for which you want the histogram

General Utility
F7

Contact History
F6

Write to Disk
F8

If the histogram file already exists, the system prompts you to determine whether the existing data should be overwritten or appended with the new information. The information is stored in a file with the extension .HIS in the documentation reports directory (default directory \IPDS\LIS\PLC5).
6200

Return to Main Menu

Print/View
F8

19-5

Generating and Printing Reports

20

Generating and Printing Reports

Chapter Objectives
The programming software generates and prints reports about your programs so that you can maintain and/or modify your programs. Use this chapter to learn how to:

select report options select general report options change the report title print a report view a report

To configure your printer, see chapter 5.

Generating Reports
Table 20.A lists the types of reports you can generate. Table 20.A Types of Reports
If You Want to See: A printed copy of your Sequential Function Chart program What program files are used by which steps and transitions in your Sequential Function Chart Structured Text programs Ladder programs What addresses are used by which rungs in your ladder program
1 The 9313-ST5 Programming option is required to generate this report.

Generate this Report: SFC Listing SFC Cross Reference Structured Text Listing 1 Ladder Program Listing Program Cross Reference (Continued)

20-1

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

If You Want to See: The types of files that are defined and the associated file descriptors and file sizes The amount of processor memory assigned to each file type The processor configuration information and data in the status file I/O information for the processor The values in the data table Which bits are forced The symbols used and their associated addresses Which addresses have been documented and are in the database, but are not used in ladder program files All addresses currently used in a project which do not have associated documentation Which addresses are used in your program The privilege class information, channel privileges, node privileges and program and data file read/write privileges

Generate this Report: Program Directory Memory Map Processor Status I/O Status Data Table Force Status Symbol Table Unused Addresses Undocumented Addresses Memory Usage Privilege Class

To generate reports, follow the steps on the left.

6200 Main Menu
+======================== PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Software Inc. | | All Rights Reserved | | | | Release 5.2 | | += REPORTS ==========================+ | | This software i| | | | | F1 Create Reports Online | | | | F2 Change Online Configuration 20 | | | | F3 Create Reports Offline | | | | F4 Select Offline File DRILL | | | | | | | | F8 Print or View Reports | | | | | | +===================+= ESC exits ========================+=====================+ Press a function key.

Reports
F8

Create Online F1

Online Config F2

Create Offline Offline File F3 F4

Print/ View F8

20-2

Generating and Printing Reports

If You Want to: Select and create reports for a processor online Change your online configuration (the number that appears in the window next to this option is the address of the current processor) Select and create reports for a processor memory file you attach to offline Select an offline processor memory file (the name that appears in the window next to this option is the name of the current offline file) Print or view a report

Press this Key: [F1] Create Online [F2] Online Configuration [F3] Create Offline [F4] Offline File

[F8] Print/View

Creating Reports Online

To select and create reports for a processor online, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | += Online ============ 20 ==+ | A 6200 Series Software Pro| SFC Listing | | | SFC Cross Reference | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Soft| Structured Text Listing | | All Rights Reserved | Ladder Program Listing | | | Program Cross Reference | | += SFC Listing =====================+ | Program Directory | | | Display Mode OVERVIEW | | Memory Map | | | SFC Cross Reference NO | | Processor Status | | | Address Display SYMBOL | | I/O Status | | | Act/Cnd Display FILE NUMBER| | Data Tables | | | | | Force Status | | | Starting File 1 | | Symbol Table | | | Ending File 999 | | Unused Addresses | | | | | Undocumented Addresses | | | | | Memory Usage v | +============+===================================+=+===========================+ Press a function key.

Reports
F8

Create Online
F1

Create Select Reports All F1 F2

Toggle Report F3

Reset Report General Define Reports Options Options Dir F4 F5 F6 F7

Title F8

Save Config F9

If you want to attach to a different processor than is defined in your current online configuration, press [F2] - Online Configuration and select the processor you want.

Press [down arrow] to view the remaining reports on the Documentation Reports screen.

20-3

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

If You Want to: Generate the selected reports Select all of the reports listed in the Documentation window Toggle between selecting and not selecting the current report (selected reports are marked with an asterisk) Cancel all report selections Select report options for the content of the current report Select general display options for selected reports Define directories where you want to store the selected reports Specify the title for selected reports Save the configuration options to disk 1
\IPDS\ARCH\PLC5). The ONLINE.TTL file is used for all online report generation.

Press this Key: [F1] Create Reports [F2] Select All [F3] Toggle Report [F4] Reset Reports [F5] Report Options [F6] General Options [F7] Define Directory [F8] Title [F9] Save Configuration

1 These configuration options are stored in a file, ONLINE.TTL, in the archive directory (default archive directory is

Select reports to create

Create Reports
F1 + | | | | | + Proc Addr: Output File: Phase: + | | | | | | | | + ROCKWELL SOFTWARE INC. 6200 SERIES SOFTWARE PLC-5 DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE + | | | | | +

020 SSE_SPEC.SXR COMPLETED

Report: Config: Status:

CROSS REFERENCE REPORT Files 1-9999 SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION + | | | | | | | | +

** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

QUADRANT (0,0), PAGE 2 COMPLETED ** GENERATE SFC CROSS REFERENCE ** PAGE 3 COMPLETED ** PAGE 4 COMPLETED ** SFC CROSS REFERENCE COMPLETED ** PAGE 5 COMPLETED ** SFC LISTING COMPLETED ** SFC DOCUMENTATION COMPLETE **

PRESS A KEY TO CONTINUE

20-4

Generating and Printing Reports

Creating Reports Offline

To create reports offline, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC 5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =========================+ | | | A 6200 Series Software Product | | += Ladder Program Listing =================+ += Offline ======= LIMIT ===+ | | | | SFC Listing | | | Starting File:Rung 2:0 | | SFC Cross Reference | | | Ending File:Rung 999:32767 | | Structured Text Listing | | | | | Ladder Program Listing | | | Power Rail YES | | Program Cross Reference | | | Address Comments YES | | Program Directory | | | Address Display SYMBOL | | Memory Map | | | Rung Comments YES | | Processor Status | | | Ladder Cross Reference ALL | | I/O Status | | | Output Cross Reference NO | | Data Tables | | | | | Force Status | | | | | Symbol Table | | | | | Unused Addresses | | | | | Undocumented Addresses | | | | | Memory Usage v | +=====+==========================================+=+===========================+ Press a function key. Create Select Reports All F1 F2 Toggle Report F3 Reset Report General Define Reports Options Options Dir F4 F5 F6 F7 Title F8 Save Config F9

Reports
F8

Create Offline
F3

If you want to generate reports for a different processor memory file than is defined in your current offline configuration, press [F4] - Offline File and select the processor you want.

Press [down arrow] to view the remaining reports on the Documentation Reports screen. The name of the current processor memory file is displayed in the upper right corner of the report listing window (LIMIT in this example).

20-5

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

If You Want to: Generate the selected reports Select all of the reports listed in the Documentation window Toggle between selecting and not selecting the current report (selected reports are marked with an asterisk) Cancel all report selections Select report options for the content of the current report Select general display options for the selected report Define directories where you want to store the selected reports Specify the title for the selected report Save the configuration options to disk1
1 The system uses the name of the current processor memory file and extension .TTL

Press this Key: [F1] Create Reports [F2] Select All [F3] Toggle Report [F4] Reset Reports [F5] Report Options [F6] General Options [F7] Define Directory [F8] Title [F9] Save Configuration
to name the file that contains the

report title.

Select reports to create

Create Reports
F1

+ | | | | | + Proc File: Output File: Phase: + | | | | | | | | +

ROCKWELL SOFTWARE INC. 6200 SERIES SOFTWARE PLC-5 DOCUMENTATION SOFTWARE

+ | | | | | +

LIMIT SSE_SPEC.SXR COMPLETED

Report: CROSS REFERENCE REPORT Config: Files 1-9999 Status: SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION + | | | | | | | | +

** ** ** ** ** ** ** **

QUADRANT (0,0), PAGE 2 COMPLETED ** GENERATE SFC CROSS REFERENCE ** PAGE 3 COMPLETED ** PAGE 4 COMPLETED ** SFC CROSS REFERENCE COMPLETED ** PAGE 5 COMPLETED ** SFC LISTING COMPLETED ** SFC DOCUMENTATION COMPLETE **

PRESS A KEY TO CONTINUE

20-6

Generating and Printing Reports

Selecting Report Options

The report options specify what information you want to include in the reports you choose. You can choose report options for the following reports:

Note

SFC Listing SFC Cross Reference Structured Text Listing Ladder Program Listing Program Cross Reference Data Table Symbol Table Unused Addresses Undocumented Addresses

Memory Usage In order to generate cross reference information for the SFC Listing, SFC Cross Reference, Ladder Listing, Program Cross Reference, Unused Address or Memory Usage report, the privilege class in which you are working must have read privileges for all program files. For more information on privileges, see chapter 15. Unused address, symbol table, cross-reference, and memory usage reports require a cross-reference database to exist. Therefore, you must have a ladder file containing at least one address in it in order to run these reports. If you select one of these reports and no cross-reference database can be generated (you do not have a ladder file containing at least one address), the following occurs:

Note

a message stating that no cross-reference database can be generated appears on the screen selected reports requiring a cross-reference database (listed above) are not created if you have selected other reports that do not require a cross-reference database, these reports are created normal exit from the reports option

20-7

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

To select report options for the above reports, follow the steps below.
6200 Main Menu

Reports
F8

Create Offline Create Online

F3

or

F1

Cursor to the report you want

Report Options
F F8

Use [left arrow] and [right arrow] to switch between the report window and the report options window for the current report.

SFC Listing Options Table 20.B lists the report options for the SFC Listing. Table 20.B Report Options for SFC Listing
If You Want to: Select the SFC display mode for the report (toggles through Overview, Normal, and Expanded). Specify whether you want to include SFC cross reference information (toggles between Yes and No). Select the address display mode for the report (toggles between Symbol and Address) Select the action and condition display (toggles between File Number and Structured Text) Specify the starting and ending file range (default is 1 to 999). Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only.
20-8

Press this Key: [F1] SFC Mode [F2] SFC Cross Reference [F3] Address Display [F4] Act/Cnd Display [F5] File Range [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Generating and Printing Reports

The software automatically adjusts page length so that step or transition blocks are not split between pages. The page length displayed on the header page may be different than what you configured in general options. Note The display mode selected for one SFC report will be the display mode selected for the other SFC report. Also, with Enhanced PLC-5 processors, the file range specified for the SFC Listing report is the same file range that will be used for the SFC Cross Reference report. (This file range does not apply for Classic PLC-5 processors.)

SFC Cross Reference Options Table 20.C lists the report options for the SFC Cross Reference. Table 20.C Report Options for SFC Cross Reference
If You Want to: Select the SFC display mode for the report (toggles through Overview, Normal, and Expanded). Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] SFC Mode [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Structured Text Listing Options Table 20.D lists the report options for the Structured Text Listing. Table 20.D Report Options for Structured Text Listing
If You Want to: Specify the starting and ending file range (default is 2 to 999). Select whether to display the actual addresses or any assigned symbols (toggles between Address and Symbol). The report prints addresses if there are no symbols, regardless of your selection. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] File Range [F2] Address Display

[F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

20-9

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Ladder Program Listing Options Table 20.E lists the report options for the Ladder Program Listing. Table 20.E Report Options for Ladder Program Listing
If You Want to: Specify beginning and ending rung numbers for the program listing. Select whether or not to print the right power rail (toggles between Yes and No). The printing time and file size are significantly lower if you choose No. Select whether or not to print address comments (toggles between Yes and No). Select whether to display the actual addresses or any assigned symbols (toggles between Address and Symbol). The report prints addresses if there are no symbols, regardless of your selection. Select whether or not to print rung comments (toggles between Yes and No). Select the amount of cross reference information in the report. Toggle through the following options: Outputs Only If you select this option, the output address is cross referenced under the rung, along with each occurrence of the address and the type of address instruction. All If you select this option, both the output and input addresses are cross referenced under the rung. No If you select this option, the cross reference information is not printed. Include the output cross reference. Toggle through the following options: Yes If you select this option, the location(s) where each input instruction address is used as an output is provided. For each instance, the rung number is shown below the instruction in parenthesis. If the input is not used as an output, there is not a listing below the rung. No If you select this option, the output cross reference information is not printed Press this Key: [F1] Rung Range [F2] Power Rail

[F3] Address Comments [F4] Address Display

[F5] Rung Comments [F6] Ladder Cross Reference

[F7] Output Cross Reference

(Continued)

20-10

Generating and Printing Reports

If You Want to: Process the page header and page break formatting commands. Toggle through the following options: Active If you select this option, page headers and page breaks are processed when generating a ladder listing report. Inactive If you select this option, page headers and page breaks are visible when generating a ladder listing report, but the commands are viewed as text only and are not processed by 6200 programming software. For more information on page headers and page breaks, see chapter 17 in the Programming manual. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only.

Press this Key: [F8] Format Commands

[F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Program Cross Reference Options Table 20.F lists the report options for the Program Cross Reference. Table 20.F Report Options for the Program Cross Reference
If You Want To: Specify the beginning and ending type for the cross reference information. Select the sort order (toggles between Address and Symbol). Select whether or not to print address comments (toggles between Yes and No). Select whether or not to print instruction mnemonics (toggles between Yes and No). Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] File Range [F2] Sort Order [F3] Address Comments [F4] Instruction Mnemonics [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

20-11

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Data Table Options Table 20.G lists the report options for the Data Table report. Table 20.G Report Options for the Data Table
If You Want To: Specify the beginning and ending range of the data table. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] File Range [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Symbol Table Options Table 20.H lists the report options for Symbol Table report. Table 20.H Report Options for the Symbol Table
If You Want To: Select the sort order. Toggle between the following options: Address If you select this option, all database addresses, including addresses that are not defined with symbols, are listed. Symbol If you select this option, only database addresses that are defined with symbols are listed. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] Sort Order

[F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Unused Addresses Options Table 20.I lists the report options for the Unused Addresses. Table 20.I Report Options for Unused Addresses
If You Want to: Specify whether you want to clear out unused addresses from the database (toggles between Yes and No). The default is No. Save the configuration options to disk. Press this Key: [F1] Purge DB [F9] Save Configuration

20-12

Generating and Printing Reports

Undocumented Addresses Options Table 20.J lists the report options for the Undocumented Addresses. Table 20.J Report Options for Undocumented Addresses
If You Want to: Specify a single file type or a range of file types. Specify whether you want to include address comment and/or symbol entries for undocumented addresses (toggles among AC, SYM, and AC and SYM). The default is AC and SYM. Select the justification of address comments (toggles between Center and Left). The default is Left. Select whether you want to use word wrap with address comments (toggles between On and Off). The default is Off. Save the configuration options to disk. Press this Key: [F1] File Range [F2] DOC Type

[F3] Comment Justify [F4] Word Wrap [F9] Save Configuration

Note

Unlike any of the other reports, the output file for the Undocumented Addresses report contains default documentation in a format that is accepted by the Comments and Symbols Importer and is stored in the \IPDS\TEXT\PLC5 directory. There are no page breaks or page headers (other than a few comments at the top of the report which provide instructions on modifying the report for the import/export of the comments and symbols database). For more information on importing and exporting the comments and symbols database, see the Programming manual.

Tip

You can use the Undocumented Addresses report to complete the documentation of a program by editing the report with a text editor, adding the missing text to the report, and importing the revised file into 6200 programming software.

20-13

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Memory Usage Options Table 20.K lists the report options for the Memory Usage report. Table 20.K Report Options for the Memory Usage Report
If You Want To: Specify the beginning and ending range of the data table. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only. Press this Key: [F1] File Range [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

Attention: If the memory usage report is used as a guide to delete processor memory, keep in mind that 6200 programming software does not prevent you from deleting processor memory. Doing so could result in improper machine operation, damage to equipment, and/or injury to personnel. It is your responsibility to make sure the processor memory you delete is unused.

20-14

Generating and Printing Reports

Selecting General Report Options

Some general report options pertain to all the reports you can generate. These options specify how the report will appear when you print it. To select these options, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | += Online ============ 20 ==+ | A 6200 Series Software Pro| SFC Listing | | | SFC Cross Reference | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Soft | Structured Text Listing | | All Rights Reserved | Ladder Program Listing | | | Program Cross Reference | | += General Listing Options ============+ | Program Directory | | | | | Memory Map | | This | F1 Destination FILE | | Processor Status | | | F2 Insure Valid X Ref Info NO | | I/O Status | | | F3 Graphics Mode NO | | Data Tables | | | F4 Page Width 80 | | Force Status | | | F5 Page Length 66 | | Symbol Table | | | | | Unused Addresses | | | F9 Save Configuration | | Memory Usage | | | | | Privilege Class | +=========+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes =====+=+===========================+ Press a function key.

Reports
F8

Create Offline
F3

Create Online
F1

or

General Options
F6

Dest F1

Valid X Ref F2

Graphic Mode F3

Page Width F4

Page Length F5

Save Config F9

Press the function key for the option you want to change. If You Want to: Select either a File or a Printer as the destination for the report. If you select File, the software stores the report in a file; if you select Printer, the software prints directly to the printer you specify in the printer configuration. Create or update the cross reference database to insure a valid report. Note: If you select Yes, 6200 programming software will only generate the cross reference database, if necessary, to insure a valid report. Specify whether to use graphic characters or only ASCII characters. Specify the number of characters (80-255) that you want to print across each page. Specify the number of lines (40-132) that you want to print on each page. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this session only. Press this Key: [F1] Destination

[F2] Valid Cross Reference

[F3] Graphics Mode [F4] Page Width [F5] Page Length [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

20-15

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Changing a Report Title

You can specify the title you want for reports that you generate. The software uses this title for all the reports you select and generate at one time. If you want each report to have a separate name, you must select and generate each report individually. To change a title for a report, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | += Online ============ 20 ==+ | A 6200 Series Software Pro| SFC Listing | | | SFC Cross Reference | | Copyright 1986, 1995, Rockwell Soft | Structured Text Listing | | All Rights Reserved | Ladder Program Listing | | | Program Cross Reference | | Release 5.2 | Program Directory | | | Memory Map | | This software is licensed to: Company Alle| Processor Status | | += SFC Listing =====================+ | I/O Status | | | | | Data Tables | | | SFC Display Mode OVERVIEW | | Force Status | | += LISTING TITLE =============================[ OVR ]==+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | +===========+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes =====================+===========+ Press function key or enter string ( 50 Char maximum )

Reports
F8

Create Offline Create Online

F3

or

F1

Cursor to report to name

Title
F8

Save Config F9

Enter a title of up to 50 characters.

Press this key to save the title to disk.

When changing a report title offline, the system uses the name of the current processor memory file and extension .TTL to name the file that contains the report title. The saved title is used for all reports created for the current processor memory file (until you specify another title). When changing a report title online, the configuration options are stored in a file, ONLINE.TTL, in the archive directory (default archive directory is \IPDS\ARCH\PLC5). The saved ONLINE.TTL file is used for all online report generation.

20-16

Generating and Printing Reports

Printing Reports
You can print reports that have been generated to a file using either of the following methods:

Note

the DOS print command

the softwares print utility Since there are no page breaks or page headers (other than a few comments at the top of the report which provide instructions on modifying the report for the import/export of the comments and symbols database), the Undocumented Addresses report may be difficult to read.

Using the DOS Print Command

To print reports using the DOS print command, do the following: 1. 2. Start at the DOS prompt. Type the following: PRINT directory\program.extension
This Field: directory program extension Is the: directory path where you stored the report. The default directory is \IPDS\LIS\PLC5 1 name of the processor with which the report is associated identification of the type of report

1 Excluding the Undocumented Addresses report, which is stored in the \IPDS\TEXT\PLC5 directory.

To print the Undocumented Addresses report, you must specify the \IPDS\TEXT\PLC5 directory.

20-17

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Table 20.L lists the possible extensions for report files. Table 20.L Possible Report File Extensions
Extension: .DDR .FDR .LDR .PDD .DTR .FSR .HIS .IOR .LIS .MMR .MUR .PSR .PDR .PVR .SLR .SXR .STR .TXR .UAR .TXU .XRF Report Type: Compare Data Table Compare Forces Compare Ladder Logic Compare Program Directory Data Table Force Status Contact Histogram I/O Status Ladder Program Listing Memory Map Memory Usage Processor Configuration/Processor Status Program Directory Privilege Classes SFC Listing SFC Cross Reference Symbol Table Structured Text Unused Address Undocumented Addresses Ladder Cross Reference

20-18

Generating and Printing Reports

Using the Print Utility

You can also print reports that you have already generated through the softwares print utility. To use this utility, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu
+======================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =====================+ | +== Print ==================================+ +== PROCESSOR =+ | | Report Size Date | | | | + + | PLC | | | | | DRILL1 | | | | | DRILL2A | | | | | DRILL2A3 | | | | | AUTO11 | | | | | STRING | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +================+===========================================+==+==============+ Press a function key, or Enter file name to search for >

Reports
F8

Print/View
F8

Press this key to select the report to print.

Select F3

Define Dir F7

Specify the processor name you want to use: Enter the name of the processor OR Cursor to the processor name.

20-19

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Cursor to report to print.

+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | +== Print PLC ==============================+ | | | Report Size Date | | | + + | | | Program Listing 9141 02 13 90 | | | | Cross Reference 1928 05 30 90 | | | | Memory Map 2098 05 30 90 | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +================+===========================================+=================+ Press a function key

Print Files F1

Select All F2

Toggle Selectn F3

Clear All F4

Printer Select Config Process F5 F6

View File F10

If You Want to: Start printing the reports you selected. Select to print all reports for the current processor memory file. Toggle whether or not to select to print the current report. Cancel all print selections. Configure printer characteristics. Select another processor memory file as current (move the cursor to the file you want and press [F3] if you want to print reports other than the ones you just selected). View the current report on the screen without printing the report.

Press this Key: [F1] Print Files [F2] Select All [F3] Toggle Select [F4] Clear All [F5] Printer Configuration [F6] Select Processor

[F10] View Files

20-20

Generating and Printing Reports

Configuring the Printer

The system displays the Printer Configuration screen for a parallel printer (Figure 20.1) or a serial printer (Figure 20.2). To configure the printer, follow the steps on the left. To change between the display for a parallel and serial printer, press [F1] Printer Type Figure 20.1 Printer Configuration Screen for a Parallel Printer
6200 Main Menu or 6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | +== Print ==================================+ | | | Report Size Date | | | + + | | Copyright | P+= PRINTER CONFIGURATION =========+0 | | | | C| |0 | | | | M| F1 Printer Type PARALLEL |0 | | | | | F2 Port LPT1 | | | | | | | | | | This softwar| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | F8 Printer Setup | | | | | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | | | | | | +================+====+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes +====+=================+ Press a function key.

Reports
F8

Sftware Configr
F6

Print/View
F8

Printer Config
F5

Select processor
Select
F3

Printer Port Type Number F1 F2

Printer Save Setup Config F8 F9

Press the function key for the parallel printer selection you want to display.
Printer Config
F5

20-21

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Figure 20.2 Printer Configuration Screen for a Serial Printer

+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | +== Print ==================================+ | | | Report Size Date | | | + + | | Copyright | P+= PRINTER CONFIGURATION =========+0 | | | | C| |0 | | | | M| F1 Printer Type SERIAL |0 | | | | | F2 Port COM1 | | | | | | F3 Baud 9600 | | | | This softwar| | F4 Bits/Char 8 | | | | | | F5 Stop Bits 2 | | | | | | F6 Parity NONE | | | | | | F7 Handshaking HARDWARE | | | | | | F8 Printer Setup | | | | | | | | | | | | F9 Save Configuration | | | | | | | | | +================+====+= ESC exits/ALT U aborts changes +====+=================+ Press a function key.

Printer Port Type Number F1 F2

Baud Rate F3

Bits / Char F4

Stop Bits F5

Select Parity F6

Hand Printer Save Shaking Setup Config F7 F8 F9

Press the function key for the serial printer selection you want to display.

If You Want to: Define the printer as Serial or Parallel. For serial printers, select COM1 or COM2. For parallel printers, select LPT1 or LPT2. For serial printers, select the baud rate. For serial printers, select between 7 or 8 bits per character. For serial printers, select between 1 or 2 stop bits. For serial printers, select Even, Odd or None parity. For serial printers, select between Hardware and XON/XOFF protocols. Specify a printer initialization string. Save the configuration options to disk. Use the configuration options you specify for this editing session only.

Press this Key: [F1] Printer Type [F2] Port Number [F2] Port Number [F3] Baud Rate [F4] Bits/Character [F5] Stop Bits [F6] Select Parity [F7] Handshaking [F8] Printer Setup [F9] Save Configuration [Enter] [Esc]

20-22

Generating and Printing Reports

Note

If you specify a serial printer and use 9600 baud for the communication rate, you must also specify 8 bits per character for the configuration to work properly. For more information about using modems, see chapter 6. On the printer configuration screen for serial printers, make sure you choose hardware handshaking. The XON/XOFF handshaking option does not work properly.

Note

Specifying the Printer Initialization String

The printer initialization string identifies the printer configuration commands that you want to use. To use the initialization string, follow the steps on the left.
6200 Main Menu or 6200 Main Menu
+========================= PLC-5 PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE =======================+ | +== Print ==================================+ | | | Report Size Date | | | + + | | Copyright | P+= PRINTER CONFIGURATION =========+0 | | | | C| |0 | | | | M| F1 Printer Type PARALLEL |0 | | | | | F2 Port LPT1 | | | | | | | | | | This softwar| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | += PRINTER CONFIGURATION ==============+ | | | | | | | | | | | F7 Use String No | | | | | | F8 Printer String [ ] | | | | | | | | | +================+==^+== ESC exits =========================+=+=================+ Press a function key.

Reports
F8

Sftware Configr
F6

Print/View
F8

Printer Config
F5

Select processor
Select
F3

Use String F7

Printer String F8

Printer Config
F5

Press the function key for the printer initialization string selection you want to display.

Printer Setup
F8

If You Want to: Select whether or not to use a printer initialization string. Modify the printer initialization string.

Press this Key: [F7] Use String [F8] Printer String

20-23

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

One possible use for printer initialization strings is to define escape sequences for the printer. For example, to send [Esc-A] as an escape sequence, type the following for the printer initialization string: \27A where: 27 65 Is the decimal value for the ASCII [Esc] character Is the decimal value for the ASCII [A] character or \27\65

For information about printer initialization strings, see the documentation for your printer.

20-24

Generating and Printing Reports

Viewing Reports
You can view reports on the screen before you send them to the printer. This is useful if the report directory contains several reports and you want to make sure you print the report you want. To view a report, follow the steps below.
6200 Main Menu

Reports
F8

Print/View
F8

Select processor
Select
F3

Cursor to report to view

View File
F10

Use [up arrow], [down arrow], [PageUp], [PageDown], [Home] and [End] to scroll up or down in the file; use [left arrow], [right arrow], [Ctrl-right arrow] and [Ctrl-left arrow] to move to the right or left.

20-25

Generating Prefaceand Printing Reports

Note

Keep the following in mind when viewing the File field of the Memory Usage report:

Each file used in a program is represented by a single file character.

Each file character (ranging from a to z) occupies a particular column and is placed on the line corresponding to each word of the file. Any file character can occupy any column. When a file is started, the file character is displayed in the left-hand column of the File field. When a word is used in more than one file, additional file characters are displayed from left to right. File characters are reused in such a way that the beginning of one file is not confused with the end of another file. Six columns are reserved for indicating file use; although 32 files can be tracked simultaneously, only six files are shown at any given time. Any time the status of a file being tracked is not shown, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the seventh column of the File field. Note When viewing the Memory Usage report, the Value field displays the same data value radix as that configured for a particular address type on the data monitor screen (excluding binary data values, which appear in hex).

20-26

Instruction Set Quick Reference

A
References to:

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction Set
The following table shows an example of the available PLC-5 instructions and provides a brief description of the example. For a more detailed description of each of these instructions, see the Instruction Set Reference manual.
Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60, -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5 processor, the software, and your

Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

application expertise.

A-1

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Table B.A Available PLC-5 Instructions

Relay Instructions
Instruction I:012 07 I:012 07 O:013 ( 01 O:013 ( L ) 01 O:013 (U ) 01 01 ( IIN ) Output Latch OTL ) Output Energize OTE Examine Off XIO Examine On XIC Description Examine data table bit I:012/07, which corresponds to terminal 7 of an input module in I/O rack 1, I/O group 2. If this data table bit is set (1), the instruction is true. Examine data table bit I:012/07, which corresponds to terminal 7 of an input module in I/O rack 1, I/O group 2. If this data table bit is reset (0), the instruction is true. If the input instructions preceding this output instruction on the same rung go true, set (1) bit O:013/01, which corresponds to terminal 1 of an output module in I/O rack 1, I/O group 3. If the input conditions preceding this output instruction on the same rung go true, set (1) bit O:013/01, which corresponds to terminal 1 of an output module in I/O rack 1, I/O group 3. This data table bit remains set until an OTU instruction resets the bit. If the input conditions preceding this output instruction on the same rung go true, reset (0) bit O:013/01, which corresponds to terminal 1 of an output module in I/O rack 1, I/O group 3. This is necessary to reset a bit that has been latched on. This instruction updates a word of input-image bits before the next normal input-image update. For a local chassis, program scan is interrupted while the inputs of the addressed I/O group are scanned; for a remote chassis, program scan is interrupted only to update the input image with the latest states as found in the remote I/O buffer. This instruction updates a word of output-image bits before the next normal output-image update. For a local chassis, program scan is interrupted while the outputs of the addressed I/O group are scanned; for a remote chassis, program scan is interrupted only to update the remote I/O buffer with the latest states as found in the output image. (Continued)

Output Unlatch OTU

Immediate Input IIN

01 ( IOT )

Immediate Output IOT

A-2

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction IDI IMMEDIATE DATA INPUT Data file offset Length Destination 232 10 N10:232 Immediate Data Input IDI (ControlNet PLC-5 processors only)

Description If the input conditions are true, an immediate ControlNet data input is initiated that updates the destination file from the ControlNet memory buffers before the next normal input-image update. The Data File Offset (232) is where the data is stored it can be an immediate value ranging from 0 to 999 or a logical address that specifies the data image file offset. The Length (10) identifies the number of words in the transfer it can be an immediate value ranging from 0 to 64 or a logical address that specifies the number of words to be transferred. The Destination (N10:232) is the destination of the words to be transferred. If the input conditions are true, an immediate ControlNet data output is initiated that updates the ControlNet memory output buffers from the source file before the next normal output-image update. The Data File Offset (232) is where the data is stored it can be an immediate value ranging from 0 to 999 or a logical address that specifies the data image file offset. The Length (10) identifies the number of words in the transfer it can be an immediate value ranging from 0 to 64 or a logical address that specifies the number of words to be transferred. The Source (N7:232) is the source of the words to be transferred.

IDO IMMEDIATE DATA OUTPUT Data file offset Length Source 232 10 N7:232

Immediate Data Output IDO (ControlNet PLC-5 processors only)

Timer Instructions
Instruction TON TIMER ON DELAY Timer T4:1 1.0 Time Base Preset 15 Accum 0 Timer On Delay TON Status Bits: EN Enable TT Timer Timing DN Done Description If the input conditions go true, timer T4:1 starts incrementing in 1-second intervals. When the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value (15), the timer stops and sets the timer done bit. Rung Condition False True True EN 15 0 1 1 TT 14 0 1 0 DN 13 0 0 1 ACC Value 0 increase >= preset TON Status Reset Timing Done (Continued)

A-3

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction TOF TIMER OFF DELAY Timer T4:1 .01 Time Base Preset 180 Accum 0 Timer Off Delay TOF Status Bits: EN Enable TT Timer Timing DN Done

Description If the input conditions are false, timer T4:1 starts incrementing in 10 ms intervals as long as the rung remains false. When the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value (180), the timer stops and resets the timer done bit. Rung Condition True False False Retentive Timer On RTO EN 15 1 0 0 TT 14 0 1 0 DN 13 1 1 0 ACC Value 0 increase >= preset TOF Status Reset Timing Done

RTO RETENTIVE TIMER ON Timer T4:10 1.0 Time Base Preset 10 0 Accum

Status Bits: EN Enable TT Timer Timing DN Done

If the input conditions go true, timer T4:10 starts incrementing in 1-second intervals as long as the rung remains true. When the rung goes false, the timer stops. If the rung goes true again, the timer continues. When the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset (10), the timer stops and sets the timer done bit. The timer is not reset. Rung Condition False True False True EN 15 0 1 0 1 TT 14 0 1 0 0 DN 13 0 0 0 1 ACC Value 0 increase maintains >= preset RTO Status Reset Timing Disabled Done

T4:1 ( RES )

Timer Reset RES

If the input conditions go true, timer T4:1 is reset. This instruction resets timers and counters, as well as control blocks. This is necessary to reset the RTO accumulated value.

A-4

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Counter Instructions
Instruction CTU COUNT UP Counter Preset Accum C5:1 10 0 Status Bits: CU CountUp CD CountDown DN Done OV Overflow UN Underflow Count Up CTU Description If the input conditions go true, counter C5:1 starts counting, incrementing by 1 every time the rung goes from false-to-true. When the accumulated value is greater than or equal to the preset value (10), the counter sets the counter done bit. Rung Condition False Toggle True True True CTD COUNT DOWN Counter C5:1 Preset 10 Accum 35 Count Down CTD CU 15 0 1 1 1 DN 13 0 0 1 1 OV 12 0 0 0 1 ACC Value 0 incr by 1 >= preset >32767 CTU Status Reset Counting Done Overflow

If the input conditions go true, counter C5:1 starts counting, decrementing by 1 every time the rung goes from false-to-true. When the accumulated value is less than the preset value (10), the counter resets the counter done bit. CD 14 0 0 1 1 1 DN 13 0 1 1 0 0 UN 11 0 0 0 0 1 ACC Value 0 >= preset dec by 1 < preset < 32768 CTD Status Reset Preload Counting Done Underflow

Status Bits: CU CountUp CD CountDown DN Done OV Overflow UN Underflow

Rung Condition False False Toggle True True True

A-5

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Compare Instructions
Instruction LIM LIMIT TEST (CIRC) Low limit N7:10 3 Test N7:15 4 High limit N7:20 22 Limit Test LIM Description If the Test value (N7:15) is >= the Low Limit (N7:10) and <= the High Limit (N7:20), this instruction is true. Low Limit 0 -5 5 10 10 10 MEQ MASKED EQUAL Source D9:5 0000 0 Mask D9:6 0000 Compare D9:10 0000 Mask Compare Equal MEQ Test 0 5 11 0 5 11 High Limit 10 10 10 0 -5 5 LIM T T F T F T

The processor takes the value in the Source (D9:5) and passes that value through the Mask (D9:6). Then the processor compares the result to the Compare value (D9:10). If the result and this comparison values are equal, the instruction is true. Source 0008 0008 0087 0087 Mask 0008 0001 000F 00F0 Compare 0009 0001 0007 0007 MEQ F F T F (Continued)

A-6

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction CMP COMPARE Expression N7:5 = N7:10 xxx xxxxxxxxxxxxx Source A Source B N7:5 3 N7:10 1 Compare CMP

Description If the expression is true, this input instruction is true. The CMP instruction can perform these operations: equal (=), less than (<), less than or equal (<=), greater than (>), greater than or equal (>=), not equal (<>). Complex expressions (up to 80 characters) are valid with Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. Source A 10 5 21 -30 -15 Equal to EQU Greater than or Equal GEQ Greater than GRT Less than or Equal LEQ Less than LES Not Equal NEQ Source B 10 6 20 -31 -14 EQU T F F F F GEQ T F T T F GRT F F T T F LEQ T T F F T LES F T F F T NEQ F T T T T

If the value in Source A (N7:5) is = to the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true. If the value in Source A (N7:5) is > or = the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true. If the value in Source A (N7:5) is > the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true. If the value in Source A (N7:5) is < or = the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true. If the value in Source A (N7:5) is < the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true. If the value in Source A (N7:5) is not equal to the value in Source B (N7:10), this instruction is true.

A-7

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Compute Instructions
Instruction CPT COMPUTE Dest N7:3 3 Compute CPT Description If the input conditions go true, evaluate the Expression N7:4 (N7:6 * N7:10) and store the result in the Destination (N7:3). The CPT instruction can perform these operations: add (+), subtract ( ),multiply (*), divide (|), convert from BCD (FRD), convert to BCD (TOD), square root (SQR), logical and (AND), logical or (OR), logical not (NOT), exclusive or (XOR), negate ( ),clear (0), and move. In addition, Enhanced PLC-5 processors can do: X to the power of Y (**), radians (RAD), degrees (DEG), log (LOG), natural log (LN), sine (SIN), cosine (COS), tangent (TAN), inverse sine (ASN), inverse cosine (ACS), inverse tangent (ATN). Complex expressions (up to 80 characters) are valid with Enhanced PLC-5 processors only. If input conditions go true, take the arc cosine of the value in F8:19 and store the result in F8:20 Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets always resets (Continued)

Expression N7:4 (N7:6 * N7:10)

ACS ARCCOSINE Source F8:19 0.7853982 Dest F8:20 0.6674572

Arc cosine ACS (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

A-8

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction ADD ADD Source A Source B Dest N7:3 3 N7:4 1 N7:12 4 Addition ADD

Description When the input conditions are true, add the value in Source A (N7:3) to the value in Source B (N7:4) and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). Status Bit C Description sets if carry is generated; otherwise resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

S ASN ARCSINE Source Dest F8:17 0.7853982 F8:18 0.9033391 Arc sine ASN (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

When input conditions go true, take the arc sine of the value in F8:17 and store the result in F8:18. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets always resets (Continued)

A-9

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction ATN ARCTANGENT Source F8:21 0.7853982 Dest F8:22 0.6657737 Arc tangent ATN (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Description When input conditions go true, take the arc tangent of the value in F8:21 and store the result in F8:22. Status Bit C V Z S Average AVE (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done bit ER Error Bit Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

AVE AVERAGE FILE File Dest Control Length Position #N7:1 N7:0 R6:0 4 0

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, add N7:1, N7:2, N7:3, and N7:4. Divide the sum by 4 and store the result in N7:0. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

CLR CLR Dest D9:34 0000

Clear CLR

When the input conditions are true, clear decimal file 9, word 34 (set to zero). Status Bit C V Z S Description always reset always reset always set always reset (Continued)

A-10

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction COS COSINE Source Dest F8:13 0.7853982 F8:14 0.7071068 Cosine COS (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Description When input conditions go true, take the cosine of the value in F8:13 and store the result in F8:14. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

DIV DIVIDE Source A Source B Dest N7:3 3 N7:4 1 N7:12 3

Division DIV

When the input conditions are true, divide the value in Source A (N7:3) by the value in Source B (N7:4) and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if division by zero or overflow; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

LN NATURAL LOG Source Dest N7:0 5

Natural log LN (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

When input conditions go true, take the natural log of the value in N7:0 and store the result in F8:20. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets (Continued)

F8:20 1.609438

A-11

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction LOG LOG BASE 10 Source Dest N7:2 5 Log to base 10 LOG (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Description When input conditions go true, take the log base 10 of the value in N7:2 and store the result in F8:3. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

F8:3 0.6989700

MUL MULTIPLY Source A Source B Dest N7:3 3 N7:4 1 N7:12 3

Multiply MUL

When the input conditions are true, multiply the value in Source A (N7:3) by the value in Source B (N7:4) store the result in the Destination (N7:12). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

STD STANDARD DEVIATION File #N7:1 Dest N7:0 Control R6:0 Length 4 Position 0

Standard Deviation STD (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the elements in N7:1, N7:2, N7:3 and N7:4 are used to calculate the standard deviation of the values and store the result in the Destination (N7:0). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets (Continued)

A-12

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction NEG NEGATE Source Dest N7:3 3 N7:12 3 Negate NEG

Description When the input conditions are true, take the opposite sign of the Source (N7:3) and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). This instruction turns positive values into negative values and negative values into positive values. Status Bit C V Z S Description sets if the operation generates a carry; otherwise resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

SIN SINE Source Dest F8:11 0.7853982 F8:12 0.7071068

Sine SIN (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

When input conditions go true, take the sine of the value in F8:11 and store the result in F8:12. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

SQR SQUARE ROOT N7:3 Source 25 Dest N7:12 5

Square Root SQR

When the input conditions are true, take the square root of the Source (N7:3) and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow occurs during floating point to integer conversion; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets always reset (Continued)

A-13

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction SRT SORT File Control Length Position SUB SUBTRACT Source A Source B Dest N7:3 3 N7:4 1 N7:12 2 #N7:1 R6:0 4 0 Sort SRT (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Description When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the values in N7:1, N7:2, N7:3.and N7:4 are sorted into ascending order.

Subtract SUB

When the input conditions are true, subtract the value in Source B (N7:4) from the value in Source A (N7:3) and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). Status Bit C V Z S Description sets if borrow is generated; otherwise resets sets if underflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets (Continued)

A-14

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction TAN TANGENT Source Dest F8:15 0.7853982 F8:16 1.000000 Tangent TAN (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Description When input conditions go true, take the tangent of the value in F8:15 and store the result in F8:16. Status Bit C V Z S X to the power of Y XPY (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

XPY X TO POWER OF Y Source A N7:4 5 Source B N7:5 2 Dest N7:6 25

When input conditions go true, take the the value in N7:4 , raise it to the power stored in N7:5, and store the result n N7:6. Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow is generated; otherwise resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the result is negative; otherwise resets

A-15

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Logical Instructions
Instruction AND BITWISE AND Source A Source B Dest D9:3 3F37 D9:4 00FF D9:5 0037 NOT Operation D9:3 00FF D9:5 FF00 OR AND Description When the input conditions are true, the processor evaluates an AND operation (bit-by-bit) between Source A (D9:3) and Source B (D9:4) and stores the result in the Destination (D9:5). The truth table for an AND operation is: Source A Source B Result 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 When the input conditions are true, the processor performs a NOT (takes the opposite of) operation (bit-by-bit) on the Source (D9:3) and stores the result in the Destination (D9:5). The truth table for a NOT operation is: Source 0 1 Destination 1 0

NOT NOT Source A Dest

OR BITWISE INCLUSIVE OR Source A D9:3 3F37 Source B D9:4 00FF Dest D9:5 3FFF

When the input conditions are true, the processor evaluates an OR operation (bit-by-bit) between Source A (D9:3) and Source B (D9:4) and stores the result in the Destination (D9:5). The truth table for an OR operation is: Source A Source B Result 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 (Continued)

A-16

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction XOR BITWISE EXCLUSIVE OR D9:3 Source A 3F37 Source B D9:4 3F37 Dest D9:5 0000 Exclusive OR XOR

Description When the input conditions are true, the processor evaluates an exclusive OR operation (bit-by-bit) between Source A (D9:3) and Source B (D9:4) and stores the result in the Destination (D9:5). The truth table for an XOR operation is: Source A Source B Result 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets always resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if the most significant bit (bit 15 for decimal or bit 17 for octal) is set (1); otherwise resets

Conversion Instructions
Instruction FRD FROM BCD Source Dest D9:3 0037 N7:12 37 Convert from BCD FRD Description When the input conditions are true, convert the value in the Source (D9:3) to a integer value and store the result in the Destination (N7:12). The source must be in the range of 0-9999 (BCD). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets always resets sets if the destination value is zero; otherwise resets always resets (Continued)

A-17

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction TOD TO BCD Source Dest N7:3 44 D9:5 0044 Convert to BCD TOD

Description When the input conditions are true, convert the value in Source (N7:3) to a BCD format and store the result in the Destination (D9:5). Status Bit C V Description always resets sets if the source value is negative or greater than 9999 (i.e. outside of the range of 0-9999) sets if the destination value is zero; otherwise resets always resets

Z S DEG RADIANS TO DEGREE F8:7 Source 0.7853982 F8:8 Dest 45 Convert to Degrees DEG (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Converts radians (the value in Source A) to degrees and stores the result in the Destination (Source times 180/p). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow generated; otherwise resets sets if result is zero; otherwise resets sets if result is negative; otherwise resets

RAD DEGREES TO RADIAN N7:9 Source 45 Dest F8:10 0.7853982

Convert to Radians RAD (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

Converts degrees (the value in Source A) to radians and stores the result in the Destination (Source times p/180). Status Bit C V Z S Description always resets sets if overflow generated; otherwise resets sets if result is zero; otherwise resets sets if result is negative; otherwise resets

A-18

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Bit Modify and Move Instructions

Instruction MOV MOVE Source Dest N7:3 0 N7:12 0 Move MOV Description When the input conditions are true, move a copy of the value in Source (N7:3) to the Destination (N7:12). This overwrites the original value in the Destination. Status Bit C V Description always resets sets if overflow is generated during floating point-to-integer conversion; otherwise resets sets if the destination value is zero; otherwise resets S MVM MASKED MOVE D9:3 Source 478F Mask D9:5 00FF Dest D9:12 008F Masked Move MVM sets if result is negative; otherwise resets When the input conditions are true, the processor passes the value in the Source (D9:3) through the Mask (D9:5) and stores the result in the Destination (D9:12). This overwrites the original value in the Destination. Status Bit C V Z S BTD BIT FIELD DISTRIB Source N7:3 0 Source bit 3 Dest N7:4 0 Dest bit 10 Length 6 Bit Distribute BTD Description always resets always resets sets if the result is zero; otherwise resets sets if result is negative; otherwise resets

When the input conditions are true, the processor copies the number of bits specified by Length, starting with the Source bit (3) of the Source (N7:3), and placing the values in the Destination (N7:4), starting with the Destination bit (10).

A-19

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

File Instructions
Instruction FAL FILE ARITH/LOGICAL Control R6:1 Length 8 Position 0 Mode ALL Dest #N15:10 Expression #N14:0 256 File Arithmetic and Logic FAL Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit Description When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor reads 8 elements of N14:0, and subtracts 256 (a constant) from each element. This example shows the result being stored in the eight elements beginning with N15:10. The control element R6:1 controls the operation. The Mode determines whether the processor performs the expression on all elements in the files (ALL) per program scan, one element in the files (INC) per false-to-true transition, or a specific number of elements (NUM) per scan. The FAL instruction can perform these operations: add (+), subtract ( ),multiply (*), divide (|), convert from BCD (FRD), convert to BCD (TOD), square root (SQR), logical and (AND), logical or (OR), logical not (NOT), exclusive or (XOR), negate ( ),clear (0), move, and the new math instructions (see the CPT list). FSC FILE SEARCH/COMPARE Control R9:0 Length 90 Position 0 Mode 10 Expression #B4:0 <> #B5:0 File Search and Compare FSC Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit IN Inhibit Bit FD Found Bit When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor performs the not-equal-to comparison on 10 elements between files B4:0 and B5:0. The Mode determines whether the processor performs the expression on all elements in the files (ALL) per program scan, one element in the files (INC) per false-to-true transition, or a specific number of elements (NUM) per scan. The control element R9:0 controls the operation. When the corresponding source elements are not equal (element B4:4 and B5:4 in this example), the processor stops the search and sets the found .FD and inhibit .IN bits so your ladder program can take appropriate action. To continue the search comparison, you must reset the .IN bit. To see a list of the available comparisons, see the comparisons listed under the CMP instruction. COP COPY FILE Source Dest Length FLL FILL FILE Source Dest Length N10:6 #N12:0 5 #N7:0 #N12:0 5 File Fill FLL File Copy COP When the input conditions are true, the processor copies the contents of the Source file (N7) into the Destination file (N12). The source remains unchanged. The COP instruction copies the number of elements from the source as specified by the Length.

When the input conditions are true, the processor copies the value in Source (N10:6) to the elements in the Destination (N12). The FLL instruction only fills as many elements in the destination as specified in the Length.

A-20

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Diagnostic Instructions
Instruction FBC FILE BIT COMPARE Source #I:031 Reference #B3:1 Result #N7:0 Cmp Control R6:4 Length 48 Position 0 Result Control R6:5 Length 10 Position 0 DDT DIAGNOSTIC DETECT Source #I:030 Reference #B3:1 Result #N10:0 Cmp Control R6:0 Length 20 Position 0 Result Control R6:1 Length 5 Position 0 File Bit Compare FBC Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit IN Inhibit Bit FD Found Bit Description When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor compares the number of bits specified in the Cmp Control Length (48) of the Source file (#I:031) with the bits in the Reference file (#B3:1). The processor stores the results (mismatched bit numbers) in the Result file (#N7:0). Control element R6:4 controls the compare and control element R6:5 controls the file that contains the results. The file containing the results can hold up to 10 (the number specified in the Length field) mismatches between the compared files.

Diagnostic Detect DDT Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit IN Inhibit Bit FD Found Bit

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor compares the number of bits specified in the Cmp Control Length (20) of the Source file (# I:030) with the bits in the Reference file (#B3:1). The processor stores the results (mismatched bit numbers) in the Result file (#N10:0). Control element R6:0 controls the compare and the control element R6:1 controls the file that contains the results (#N10:0). The file containing the results can hold up to 5 (the number specified in the Length field) mismatches between the compared files. The processor copies the source bits to the reference file for the next comparison. The difference between the DDT and FBC instruction is that each time the DDT instruction finds a mismatch, the processor changes the reference bit to match the source bit. You can use the DDT instruction to update your reference file to reflect changing machine or process conditions.

DTR DATA TRANSITION Source I:002 Mask 0FFF Reference N63:11

Data Transition DTR

The DTR instruction compares the bits in the Source (I:002) through a Mask (0FFF) with the bits in the Reference (N63:11). When the masked source is different than the reference, the instruction is true for only 1 scan. The source bits are written into the reference address for the next comparison. When the masked source and the reference are the same, the instruction remains false.

A-21

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Shift Register Instructions

Instruction BSL BIT SHIFT LEFT File #B3:1 Control R6:53 Bit Address I:022/12 Length 5 BSR BIT SHIFT RIGHT File #B3:2 Control R6:54 Bit Address I:023/06 Length 3 FFL FIFO LOAD Source FIFO Control Length Position FFU FIFO UNLOAD FIFO Dest Control Length Position #N60:3 N60:2 R6:51 64 0 N60:1 #N60:3 R6:51 64 0 Bit Shift Left BSL Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload Bit Bit Shift Right BSR Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload Bit FIFO Load FFL Status Bits: EN Enable Load DN Done Bit EM Empty Bit FIFO Unload FFU Status Bits: EU Enable Unload DN Done Bit EM Empty Bit Description If the input conditions go from false-to-true, the BSL instruction shifts the number of bits specified by Length (5) in File (B3), starting at bit 16 (B3:1/0 = B3/16), to the left by one bit position. The source bit (I:022/12) shifts into the first bit position, B3:1/0 (B3/16). The fifth bit, B3:1/4 (B3/20), is shifted into the UL bit of the control structure (R6:53).

If the input conditions go from false-to-true, the BSR instruction shifts the number of bits specified by Length (3) in File (B3), starting with B3:2/0 (=B3/32), to the right by one bit position. The source bit (I:023/06) shifts into the third bit position B3/34. The first bit (B3/32) is shifted into the UL bit of the control element (R6:54).

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor loads N60:1 into the next available element in the FIFO file, #N60:3, as pointed to by R6:51. Each time the rung goes from false-to-true, the processor loads another element. When the FIFO file (stack) is full, (64 words loaded), the DN bit is set.

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor unloads a value from N60:3 into N60:2. Each time the rung goes from false-to-true, the processor unloads another value. All the data in file #N60:3 is shifted one position toward N60:3. When the file is empty, the EM bit is set.

(Continued)

A-22

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction LFL LIFO LOAD Source LIFO Control Length Position LFU LIFO UNLOAD LIFO Dest Control Length Position #N70:3 N70:2 R6:61 64 0 N70:1 #N70:3 R6:61 64 0 LIFO Load LFL (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: EN Enable Load DN Done Bit EM Empty Bit LIFO Unload LFU (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: EN Enable Load EU Enable Unload DN Done Bit EM Empty Bit

Description When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor loads N70:1 into the next available element in the LIFO file #N70:3, as pointed to by R6:61. Each time the rung goes from false-to-true, the processor loads another element. When the LIFO file (stack) is full (64 words have been loaded), the DN bit is set.

When the input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor unloads the last element from #N70:3 and puts it into N70:2. Each time the rung goes from false-to-true, the processor unloads another element. When the LIFO file is empty, the EM bit is set.

A-23

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Sequencer Instructions
Instruction SQI SEQUENCER INPUT File #N7:11 Mask FFF0 Source #I:031 Control R6:21 Length 4 Position 0 SQL SEQUENCER LOAD File #N7:20 Source I:002 Control R6:22 Length 5 Position 0 SQO SEQUENCER OUTPUT File #N7:1 Mask 0F0F Dest O:014 Control R6:20 Length 4 Position 0 Sequencer Input SQI Description The SQI instruction compares the Source (#I:031) input image data to a Mask (FFF0) to Reference data (#N7:11) to see if the two files are equal. The operation is controlled by the information in the control file R6:21. When the status of all unmasked bits of the word pointed to by control element R6:21 matches the corresponding reference bits, the rung instruction goes true.

Sequencer Load SQL Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit Sequencer Output SQO Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit

The SQL instruction loads data into the sequencer File (#N7:20) from the source word (I:002) by stepping through the number of elements specified by Length (5) of the Source (I:002), starting at the Position (0). The operation is controlled by the information in the control file R6:22. When the rung goes from false-to-true, the SQL instruction increments the next step in the sequencer file and loads the data into it for every scan that the rung remains true. When the rung goes from false-to-true, the SQO instruction increments to the next step in the sequencer File (#N7:1). The data in the sequencer file is transferred through a Mask (0F0F) to the Destination (O:014) for every scan that the rung remains true.

Program Control Instructions

Instruction ( MCR ) Master Control Reset MCR Description If the input conditions are true, the program scans the rungs between MCR instruction rungs and processes the outputs normally. If the input conditions are false, all non-retentive outputs between the MCR-instruction rung are reset. If the input conditions are true, the processor skips rungs by jumping to the rung identified by the label (10). (Continued)

10 ( JMP )

Jump JMP

A-24

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction 10 LBL Label LBL

Description When the processor reads a JMP instruction that corresponds to label 10, the processor jumps to the rung containing the label and starts executing. (Must be the first instruction on a rung.) The processor executes the rungs between the FOR and the NXT instruction repeatedly in one program scan, until it reaches the terminal value (10) or until a BRK instruction aborts the operation. Step size is how the loop is incremented.

FOR FOR Label Number Index Initial Value Terminal Value Step Size NXT NEXT Label Number 0 0 N7:0 0 10 1

FOR Loop FOR

Next NXT

The NXT instruction returns the processor to the corresponding FOR instruction, identified by the label number specified in the FOR instruction. NXT must be programmed on an unconditional rung that is the last rung to be repeated in a For-Next loop. When the input conditions go true, the BRK instruction aborts a For-Next loop. If the input conditions are true, the processor starts running a subroutine Program File (90). The processor uses the Input Parameters (N16:23, N16:24, 231) in the subroutine and passes Return Parameters (N19:11, N19:12) back to the main program, where the processor encountered the JSR instruction.

BRK JSR JUMP TO SUBROUTINE Program File 90 Input par N16:23 Input par N16:24 Input par 231 Return par N19:11 Return par N19:12 SBR SUBROUTINE Input par Input par Input par RET RETURN ( ) Return par Return par AFI N43:3 N43:4 N43:0 N43:1 N43:2

Break BRK Jump to Subroutine JSR

Subroutine SBR

The SBR instruction is the first instruction in a subroutine file. This instruction identifies Input Parameters (N43:0, N43:1, N43:2) the processor receives from the corresponding JSR instruction. You do not need the SBR instruction if you do not pass input parameters to the subroutine. The RET instruction ends the subroutine and stores the Return Parameters (N43:3, N43:4) to be returned to the JSR instruction in the main program.

Return RET

Always False AFI

The AFI instruction disables the rung (i.e., the rung is always false). (Continued)
A-25

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction ( TND ) Temporary End TND One Shot ONS

Description The TND instruction stops the processor from scanning the rest of the program (i.e., this instruction temporarily ends the program). If the input conditions preceding the ONS instructions on the same rung go from false-to-true, the ONS instruction conditions the rung so that the output is true for one scan. The rung is false on successive scans. The OSF instruction triggers an event to occur one time. Use the OSF instruction whenever an event must start based on the change of state of a rung from true-to-false, not on the resulting rung status. The output bit (N7:0/15) is set (1) for one program scan when the rung goes from true-to-false.

B3 ONS 110 OSF ONE SHOT FALLING Storage Bit B3/0 Output Bit 15 Output Word N7:0

One Shot Falling OSF (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: OB Output Bit* SB Storage Bit* One Shot Rising OSR (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) Status Bits: OB Output Bit* SB Storage Bit* SFC Reset SFR (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

OSR ONE SHOT RISING Storage Bit B3/0 Output Bit 15 Output Word N7:0

The OSR instruction triggers an event to occur one time. Use the OSR instruction whenever an event must start based on the change of state of a rung from false-to-true, not on the resulting rung status. The output bit (N7:0/15) is set (1) for one program scan when the rung goes from false-to-true.

SFR SFC Reset Prog File Number Restart Step At

The SFR instruction resets the logic in a sequential function chart. When the SFR instruction goes true, the processor performs a lastscan/postscan on all active steps and actions in the selected file, and then resets the logic in the SFC on the next program scan. The chart remains in this reset state until the SFR instruction goes false. The EOT instruction should be the last instruction in a transition file. If you do not use an EOT instruction, the processor always evaluates the transition as true. The UID instruction temporarily disables an interrupt-driven ladder program (such as an STI or PII) from interrupting the currently executing program. The UIE instruction re-enables the interrupt-driven ladder program to interrupt the currently executing ladder program.

( EOT )

End of Transition EOT User Interrupt Disable UID (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only) User Interrupt Enable UIE (Enhanced PLC-5 processors only)

( UID )

( UIE )

* These bits are for display purposes only; there is no logical address for them.

A-26

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Process Control, Message Instructions

Instruction PID PID Control Block Proc Variable Tieback Control Output N10:0 N15:13 N15:14 N20:21 Proportional, Integral, and Derivative PID Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit Description If the input conditions go false-to-true, the processor performs PID calculations and calculates a new control output (for Classic PLC-5 processors). The control block (N10:0) contains the instruction information for the PID. The PID gets the process variable from N15:13 and sends the PID output to N20:21. The tieback stored in N15:14 handles the manual control station. For Enhanced PLC-5 processors, you can use the PD control block. (If you use PD control block, then there is no done bit.) Also, the rung input conditions only need to be true for these processors. MSG SEND/RECEIVE MESSAGE Control Block N7:10 Message MSG If the input conditions are true, the data is transferred according to the instruction parameters you set when you entered the message instruction. The Control Block (N7:10) contains status and instruction parameters. For Enhanced PLC-5 processors, you can use the MG control block. Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Status Bits EN Enable ST Start Bit DN Done Bit ER Error Bit CO Continuous EW Enabled-Waiting NR No Response TO Time Out Bit For continuous MSGs, condition the rung to be true for only one scan. You cannot use integer (N) control blocks for sending messages over the ControlNet or Ethernet networks.

A-27

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Block Transfer Instructions

Integer (N) control block Word Offset 0 1 2 3 4 Description status bits (see below) requested word count transmitted word count file number element number Block Transfer (BT) control block Word Description Mnemonic .EN thru .RW .RLEN .DLEN .FILE .ELEM .RGS Word 0 15 EN 14 ST 13 DN 12 ER 11 CO 10 EW 09 NR 08 TO 07 RW 06 05 rack 04 03 02 group 01 00 slot status bits requested length transmitted word length/error code file number element number rack/group/slot

Instruction BTR BLOCK TRANSFER READ Rack 1 Group 0 Module 0 Control Block N10:100 Data File N10:110 Length 40 Continuous Y Block Transfer Read BTR

Description If the input conditions go from false-to-true, a block transfer read is initiated for the I/O module located at rack 1, group 0, module 0. The Control Block (N10:100 6-word file) contains status for the transfer. The Data File (N10:110) is where the data read from the module is stored. The BT Length (40) identifies the number of words in the transfer. A non-continuous block transfer is queued and run only once on a false-to-true rung transition; a continuous block transfer is repeatedly requeued. Note that Enhanced PLC-5 processors can use the BT data type for the control block.

A-28

Instruction Set Quick Reference

PLC-5/25, -5/30, -5/V30, -5/V30B -5/40, -5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/V40, -5/V40B, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5.80C, -5/V80 S:7 BT queue bit # full for rack 08* 09* 10* 11* 12 13 14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PLC-5/40,-5/40L, -5/40E, -5/40C, -5/V40, -5/V40B, -5/V40L, -5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5V80 S:32 BT queue bit # full for rack 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

PLC-5/60, -5/60C, -5/60L, -5/80, -5/80E, -5/80C, -5/V80 S:34 bit # 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 BT queue full for rack 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27

* PLC-5/10, -5/11, -5/12, -5/15, -5/20, -5/20E, -5/20C processors also

Instruction BTW BLOCK TRNSFR WRITE Rack 1 Group 0 Module 0 Control Block N10:0 Data File N10:10 Length 40 Continuous Y Block Transfer Write BTW

Description If the input conditions go from false-to-true, the block transfer write is initiated for the I/O module located at rack 1, group 0, module 0. The Control Block (N10:0 5-word file) contains status for the transfer. The Data File contains the data to write to the module (N10:10). The BT Length (40) identifies the number of words in the transfer. A non-continuous block transfer is queued and run only once on a false-to-true rung transition; a continuous block transfer is repeatedly requeued. Note that Enhanced PLC-5 processors can use the BT data type for the control block.

A-29

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

ControlNet I/O Transfer Instruction

Instruction CIO CNET I/O TRANSFER Control Block CT21:50 ControlNet I/O Transfer CIO (ControlNet PLC-5 processors only) Bit # 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Status Bits EN Enable ST Start Bit DN Done Bit ER Error Bit CO Continuous EW Enabled-Waiting NR No Response TO Time Out Bit Description If the input conditions go from false-to-true, the data is transferred according to the instruction parameters you set when you enter the ControlNet I/O Transfer (CIO) instruction. The Control Block (CT21:50) contains status and instruction parameters. For continuous CIOs, condition the rung to be true for only one scan. You cannot use integer (N) control blocks with this instruction.

ASCII Instructions Enhanced PLC-5 Processors Only

Status Bits: EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit Instruction ABL ASCII TEST FOR LINE Channel 0 Control R6:32 Characters ACB ASCII CHARS IN BUFFER Channel 0 Control R6:32 Characters ASCII Test for Line ABL EM Empty Bit EU Queue FD Found Bit Description If input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor reports the number of characters in the buffer, up to and including the end-of-line characters and puts this value into the position word of the control structure (R6:32.POS). The processor also displays this value in the characters field of the display. If input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor reports the total number of characters in the buffer and puts this value into the position word (.POS) of the control structure. The processor also displays this value in the characters field of the display. (Continued)

ASCII Characters in Buffer ACB

A-30

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction ACI STRING TO INTEGER CONVERSION Source ST38:90 Dest N7:123 75 Convert ASCII String to Integer ACI

Description If input conditions are true, the processor converts the string in ST38:90 to an integer and stores the result in N7:123. Status Bit C V Z S Description set if source is negative; otherwise resets set if source is >= 32,768 or <= 32,768,otherwise resets set if source is zero; otherwise resets set if destination is negative; otherwise resets

ACN STRING CONCATENATE ST38:90 Source A ST37:91 Source B Dest ST52:76 AEX STRING EXTRACT Source ST38:40 Index 42 Number 10 Dest ST52:75 AIC INTEGER TO STRING CONVERSION Source 876 ST38:42 Dest AHL ASCII HANDSHAKE LINE Channel 0 AND Mask 0001 OR Mask 0003 Control R6:23 Channel Status

ASCII String Concatenate ACN

If input conditions are true, the processor concatenates the string in ST38:90 with the string in ST37:91 and store the result in ST52:76.

ASCII String Extract AEX

If input conditions are true, the processor extracts 10 characters starting at the 42nd character of ST38:40 and store the result in ST52:75.

Convert Integer to ASCII String AIC

If input conditions are true, the processor converts the value 876 to a string and stores the result in ST38:42.

ASCII Handshake Lines AHL

If input conditions go from false-to-true, the processor uses the AND and OR masks to determine whether to set or reset the DTR (bit 0) and RTS (bit 1) lines, or leave them unchanged. Bit 0 and 1 of the AND mask cause the line(s) to reset if 1 and leave the line(s) unchanged if 0. BIt 0 and 1 of the OR mask cause the line(s) to set if 1 and leave the line(s) unchanged if 0. (Continued)

A-31

Instruction Set Quick Reference Preface

Instruction ARD ASCII READ Channel 0 Dest ST52:76 Control R6:32 String Length 50 Characters Read ASCII Read ARD Status Bits EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload EM Empty EU Queue ASCII Read Line ARL Status Bits EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload EM Empty EU Queue ASCII String Search ASC

Description If input conditions go from false-to-true, read 50 characters from the buffer and move them to ST52:76. The number of characters read is stored in R6:32.POS and displayed in the Characters Read Field of the instruction display.

ARL ASCII READ LINE Channel 0 Dest ST50:72 Control R6:30 String Length 18 Characters Read

If input conditions go from false-to-true, read 18 characters (or until end-of-line) from the buffer and move them to ST50:72. The number of characters read is stored in R6:30.POS and displayed in the Characters Read Field of the instruction display.

ASC STRING SEARCH Source ST38:40 Index 35 Search ST52:80 Result 42 ASR ASCII STRING COMPARE Source A ST37:42 ST38:90 Source B

If input conditions are true, search ST52:80 starting at the 35th character, for the string found in ST38:40. In this example, the string was found at index 42. If the string is not found, the ASCII instruction minor fault bit S:17/8 is set and the result is zero. If the string in ST37:42 is identical to the string in ST38:90, the instruction is true. Note that this is an input instruction. An invalid string length causes the ASCII instruction error minor fault bit S:17/8 to be set, and the instruction is false. (Continued)

ASCII String Compare ASR

A-32

Instruction Set Quick Reference

Instruction AWA ASCII WRITE APPEND Channel 0 Source ST52:76 Control R6:32 String Length 50 Characters Sent ASCII Write Append AWA Status Bits EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload EM Empty EU Queue ASCII Write AWT Status Bits EN Enable DN Done Bit ER Error Bit UL Unload EM Empty EU Queue

Description If input conditions go from false-to-true, read 50 characters from ST52:76 and write it to channel 0 and append the two character configuration in the channel configuration (default CR/LF). The number of characters sent is stored in R6:32.POS and displayed in the characters sent field of the instruction display.

AWT ASCII WRITE Channel 0 Source ST37:40 Control R6:23 String Length 40 Characters Sent

If input conditions go from false-to-true, write 40 characters from ST37:40 to channel 0. The number of characters sent is stored in R6:23.POS and displayed in the characters sent field of the instruction display.

A-33

ControlNet I/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

ControlNet I/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

I/O Map Entry Status Words

The ControlNet status file is an integer data-table file that you specify and configure with the I/O map for scheduled-I/O usage, containing status information about all of the ControlNet networks scheduled I/O connections. Each I/O map-table entry has a status-file offset field pointing to three status words associated with the connection. First Word
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

Reserved

Data Invalid Connection Error

Reserved

Inhibit

Reset

Second and Third Words

15 15 14 14 13 13 12 12 11 11 10 10 09 08 07 Error Messages 09 08 07 06 06 05 05 04 04 03 03 02 02 01 01 00 00

If these status words are for a 1794 Flex I/O module and there is no connection error, any 1s set in bits 00 through 07 of the third word indicate errors in the corresponding slots (numbered 0 through 7).

If these status words are for a Peer In or a Peer Out and there is no connection error, a 1 set in bit 00 of the third word indicates that the other (peer) processor is in Run mode.

B-1

ControlNet PrefaceI/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

I/O Map Entry Error Messages

Table B.A contains a list of ControlNet error codes, messages, possible causes, and possible corrective actions.

Table B.A ControlNet I/O Map Entry Error Codes, Messages, Possible Causes, and Possible Corrective Actions
Decimal Code: Various Hex Code: Various Error Message: CONFIGURATION DATA CORRUPTED Explanation or Possible Cause(s): More than one configured and/or programmed data transfer is trying to use the same location in the data table. There are too many words scheduled for transmission. The network update time (NUT) is too small. The target node is not configured. Possible Corrective Actions: Re-configure map entry overlapping map-table locations. or Re-enter overlapping ladder instructions. Reduce the number of words scheduled for transmission. Increase the network update time (NUT). Correctly configure the target node as an active node on the ControlNet network and save your ControlNet configuration. Fix and/or reconnect the ControlNet cable to the target node. Supply power to the device at the target node. Correctly configure the target node as an active node on the ControlNet network and save your ControlNet configuration. (Continued)

0x0002

SCHED BANDWIDTH NOT AVAILABLE

18

0x0012

TARGET NODE NOT RESPONDING

The ControlNet cable to the target node is broken and/or disconnected. No power is being received by the target node. The target node is offline.

B-2

ControlNet I/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

Decimal Code: 20

Hex Code: 0x0014

Error Message: DEST SLOT/MSG NOT PRESENT

Explanation or Possible Cause(s): The slot number that you entered for an adapter is not in the valid range. The number that you entered for a peer-to-peer message is not in the valid range. The peer-to-peer message map-table entry in the target node is inhibited.

Possible Corrective Actions: Correct the map-table entry.

Clear the inhibit bit in the map-table entry of the target node. No action required connection can be re-established after the target node times out the old connection. Correct the map table entry. or Replace the target node with the node type entered in the map table. Delete or inhibit any other nodes connection so that the preferred node can open the connection. No action required.

256

0x0100

CONNECTION IN USE

The connection that the originating node is trying to use is already in use.

260

0x0104

NODE TYPE MISMATCH

You entered a node type in the map table that does not match the target node.

262

0x0106

CONNECTION USED BY OTHER NODE

The originating node attempted to open a connection that is already being used by another node. The connection the originating node is trying to close is already closed. The originating node attempted to open a connection with a larger size than the target node can support.

263

0x0107

CONNECTION ALREADY CLOSED INVALID CONNECTION SIZE

265

0x0109

Reduce the size that is entered in the map table. or Use a rack with more slots. or Use a rack with higher density. Correctly configure the target node as an active node on the ControlNet network and save your ControlNet configuration. (Continued)

272

0x0110

NODE NOT CONFIGURED

The target node is offline. The target node is not configured.

B-3

ControlNet PrefaceI/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

Decimal Code: 273

Hex Code: 0x0111

Error Message: EXP NET PCKT TIME INVALID

Explanation or Possible Cause(s): The target node cannot produce the data at, or faster than, the expected net packet time entered in the map table. The ControlNet cable to the target node is broken and/or disconnected. No power is being received by the device at the target node. The target node is offline.

Possible Corrective Actions: Increase the expected net packet time entered in the map table.

511

0x01FF

INVALID WHEN NODE IS IDLE

Fix and/or reconnect the ControlNet cable to the ControlNet node. Supply power to the device at the target node. Correctly configure the target node as an active node on the ControlNet network and save your ControlNet configuration. Press the restart button on the target adapter. No action required.

The target adapter is in Processor Restart Lockout. 513 0x0201 CONNECTION ALREADY CLOSED The connection the originating node is trying to close has not been opened by the target node. The ControlNet cable to the target node has become broken and/or disconnected. Power is no longer being received by the device at the target node. 65281 0xFF01 CONNECTION REJECTED The ControlNet cable to the target node is broken and/or disconnected. No power is being received by the target node. The target node is offline.

515

0x0203

CONNECTION TIMED OUT

Fix and/or reconnect the ControlNet cable to the target node. Supply power to the device at the target node. Fix and/or reconnect the ControlNet cable to the target node. Supply power to the device at the target node. Correctly configure the target node as an active node on the ControlNet network and save your ControlNet configuration. (Continued)

B-4

ControlNet I/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

Decimal Code: 65294

Hex Code: 0xFF0E

Error Message: ATTRIBUTE CANNOT BE SET

Explanation or Possible Cause(s): Your program attempted to set an attribute that cannot be set for a specific module e.g.,a CIO instruction attempted to send safe-state data to a flex module that does not support safe-state data. The length is zero. The processor data table is too small.

Possible Corrective Actions: Change your program so that it does not attempt to set the attribute. or Insert a module that can have this attribute set.

65299

0xFF13

NOT ENOUGH DATA

Increase the length of the data. Increase the size of the data table. Decrease the length of the transfer. Fix and/or reconnect the ControlNet cable to the target node. Supply power to the target node. Insert the proper module in the correct slot of the target node. Enter the correct module type in the map-table entry. Keep the number of active CIOs at or under the maximum of 32. Insert the proper module in the correct slot of the target node. Enter the correct module type in the map-table entry. Make sure that the proper module is securely seated in the correct slot of the target node. Make sure that the correct module type is entered in the map-table entry. (Continued)

65301 65522

0xFF15 0xFFF2

TOO MUCH DATA CONFIG FROM MAP ENTRY FAILED

The transfer length is too large. The ControlNet cable to the target node is broken and/or disconnected. No power is being received by the target node. The node or slot contains the wrong module type. An incorrect module type was entered in the map table.

65523

0xFFF3

CONTROLNET TRANSFER QUEUE FULL MODULE TIMED OUT

The immediate CIO transfer could not be executed because the queue is full. The node or slot contains the wrong module type. An incorrect module type was entered in the map table.

65527

0xFFF7

65529

0xFFF9

COMM ERROR CAUSED LOSS OF DATA

A communication error between the module and the adapter caused data to be lost.

B-5

ControlNet PrefaceI/O Map Entry Status Words and Error Messages

Decimal Code: 65530

Hex Code: 0xFFFA

Error Message: MODULE DECLARED INVALID LENGTH

Explanation or Possible Cause(s): The module or slot contains the wrong module type. An incorrect module type was entered in the map table.

Possible Corrective Actions: Insert the proper module in the correct slot of the target node. Enter the correct module type in the map-table entry. Insert the proper module in the correct slot of the target node. Enter the correct module type in the map-table entry. Insert the proper module in the correct slot of the target node. Enter the correct module type in the map-table entry. Increase the size of the data table.

65531

0xFFFB

READ DATA INVALID

The module or slot contains the wrong module type. An incorrect module type was entered in the map table.

65532

0xFFFC

WRITE DATA INVALID

The module or slot contains the wrong module type. An incorrect module type was entered in the map table.

65533

0xFFFD

DATA TABLE TOO SMALL

The processor data table is too small.

B-6

Master Index

Master Index
If you see this entry: See this manual: Config/Maint Program Instruction I/OConfig Configuration and Maintenance Programming Instruction Set Reference I/O Configuration Utility

Symbols
.ACH to .AF5 convert: Program A-1 .AF5 to .ACH convert: Program A-1 .AF5 to .X5 convert: Program B-1 .X5 file format: Program B-1 .X5 to .AF5 convert: Program B-1; Config/Maint 7-6 ??WARNING?? UNABLE TO APPLY PORT CONFIGURATION TO CHANNEL xx, error message: Program 3-9 &B: Instruction 3-3, 4-6 &H: Instruction 3-3, 4-6 &O: Instruction 3-3, 4-6 **Too Many Files**, error message: Program 1-3; Config/Maint 7-3

Numbers
1400-PB configuring I/O: I/OConfig 5-1 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 5-9 1400-PD configuring I/O: I/OConfig 5-1 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 5-9 1402-LS51 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 6-1 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 6-6 1770-KFC configuring: Config/Maint 6-20 ControlNet: Config/Maint 6-20

1770-KFCD configuring: Config/Maint 6-20 ControlNet: Config/Maint 6-20 1771-CFM configuring I/O: I/OConfig 4-11 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 4-18 1771-IFE auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-7 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-2 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-5 1771-IFE Series C, auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-7 1771-IL, configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-8 1771-IL/B, monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-17 1771-IR auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-25 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-19 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-23 1771-IR Series B, auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-25 1771-IXE auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-33 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-27 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-31 1771-IXE Series B, auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-33 1771-IXHR auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-41 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-35 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-39 1771-IXHR Series A, auto-calibrating I/O: I/OConfig 2-41 1771-OFE configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-43 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-46 1771-SDN configuring I/O: I/OConfig 2-48 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 2-50

I-1

Master Index Preface

1771-VHSC configuring I/O: I/OConfig 4-1, 4-2 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 4-7 1771-SDN/A, displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 2-53 1784-KL configuring: Config/Maint 6-38 DH+: Config/Maint 6-38 DH+ routing: Config/Maint 6-38 1784-KT, addressing: Config/Maint 6-9 1784-KT/KT2 configuring: Config/Maint 6-7 DH II: Config/Maint 6-7 DH+: Config/Maint 6-7 DH+ routing: Config/Maint 6-7 1784-KT2, addressing: Config/Maint 6-11 1784-KTC configuring: Config/Maint 6-12 ControlNet: Config/Maint 6-12 1784-KTX/KTXD addressing: Config/Maint 6-16 configuring: Config/Maint 6-16 DH II: Config/Maint 6-16 DH+: Config/Maint 6-16 DH+ routing: Config/Maint 6-16 1784-PCMK addressing: Config/Maint 6-17 configuring: Config/Maint 6-17 DH II: Config/Maint 6-17 DH+: Config/Maint 6-17 DH+ routing: Config/Maint 6-17 1784-T47, adjusting the color display: Config/Maint 5-5 1791 configuring analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-1 monitoring analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-4 1794, configuring flex I/O modules: I/OConfig 8-1

1794-IE4XOE2 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 8-6 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 8-8 1794-IE8 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 8-10 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 8-12 1794-IR8 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 8-13 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 8-15 1794-IR8/A, displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 8-17 1794-IT8 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 8-18 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 8-20 1794-IT8/A, displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 8-22 1794-OE4 configuring I/O: I/OConfig 8-2 monitoring I/O: I/OConfig 8-4 6171-IDH COM1, COM2: Config/Maint 1-7 IRQ settings: Config/Maint 1-7 using with the software: Config/Maint 1-6 6174-DMB9: Config/Maint 1-2 6200 programming software capturing screens: Config/Maint 3-7 DOS mouse driver: Config/Maint 1-3 exiting: Config/Maint 2-10 function keys: Config/Maint 3-6 improving performance: Config/Maint 1-10 input keys: Config/Maint 3-3 installing: Config/Maint 1-1 keys: Config/Maint 3-3 main menu: Config/Maint 3-1 navigational keys: Config/Maint 3-3 registration: Config/Maint 1-18

I-2

Master Index

starting: Config/Maint 2-1 ControlNet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 DH+ WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Ethernet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Smart Menu: Config/Maint 2-1 with an executable: Config/Maint 2-4 user configuration: Config/Maint 2-8 6200 series to A.I. Series conversion: Program B-1 6200 series to WINTelligent LOGIC 5 conversion: Program B-1

A
ABL instruction: Instruction 17-5 ABMENU adding entries: Config/Maint 1-18 modifying: Config/Maint 1-15 ABMENU.EXE: Config/Maint 2-3 ACB instruction: Instruction 17-7 accepting edits 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-1 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-1 I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-21 power monitor devices: I/OConfig 5-1 review errors: I/OConfig 1-21 ACI instruction: Instruction 17-9 ACN instruction: Instruction 17-10 ACS instruction: Instruction 4-13 active node identification screen, ControlNet WHO ACTIVE: Config/Maint 8-26 active node list. See status information, active node active node status screen, ControlNet WHO ACTIVE: Config/Maint 8-28 adapter channel response, configuring: Config/Maint 11-9

adapter mode configuring channels 1A-2B: Config/Maint 13-32 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-22 transferring data determining processor status: Config/Maint 14-25 determining status of supervisory processor: Config/Maint 14-26 transferring bits with supervisory processor: Config/Maint 14-24 ADD instruction: Instruction 4-14 adding a module, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-13 adding a module to the database, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-13 adding or copying, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-13 Addition instruction, ADD: Instruction 4-14 addressing data files: Config/Maint 9-1, 9-11 frequently used files: Config/Maint 9-8 I/O image: Config/Maint 9-17 I/O status file: Config/Maint 11-15 indexed: Config/Maint 9-20 indirect: Config/Maint 9-19 logical: Config/Maint 9-12 mnemonics: Config/Maint 9-14 symbolic: Config/Maint 9-22 AEX instruction: Instruction 17-11 AFI instruction: Instruction 13-19 AHL instruction: Instruction 17-12 A.I. Series to 6200 series conversion: Program B-1; Config/Maint 7-6 AIC instruction: Instruction 17-14 Always False instruction: Instruction 13-19 analog modules, configuring: I/OConfig 2-1 AND instruction: Instruction 5-2 AND Operation instruction, AND: Instruction 5-2 ANSI.SYS: Config/Maint 1-3

I-3

Master Index Preface

applying default values, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-21 Arc Cosine instruction, ACS: Instruction 4-13 Arc Sine instruction, ASN: Instruction 4-15 Arc Tangent instruction, ATN: Instruction 4-16 archive files See also processor memory .AF5 files: Program A-1 ARD instruction: Instruction 17-15 arithmetic flags. See status information, arithmetic ARL instruction: Instruction 17-18 ASC instruction: Instruction 17-21 ASCII ABL: Instruction 17-5 ACB: Instruction 17-7 ACI: Instruction 17-9 ACN: Instruction 17-10 AEX: Instruction 17-11 AHL: Instruction 17-12 AIC: Instruction 17-14 ARD: Instruction 17-15 ARL: Instruction 17-18 ASC: Instruction 17-21 ASR: Instruction 17-22 AWA: Instruction 17-23 AWT: Instruction 17-26 configuring serial port: Config/Maint 13-20 documenting file: Program 7-13 import/export: Program 6-2 status: Config/Maint 14-10 ASCII characters: Program 17-18 ASCII instructions, strings: Instruction 17-4 ASCII Integer to String instruction: Instruction 17-14 ASCII Read Characters instruction: Instruction 17-15 ASCII Read Line instruction: Instruction 17-18 ASCII Set Handshake Lines instruction: Instruction 17-12

ASCII String Compare instruction: Instruction 17-22 ASCII String Concatenate instruction: Instruction 17-10 ASCII String Extract instruction: Instruction 17-11 ASCII String Search instruction: Instruction 17-21 ASCII String to Integer instruction: Instruction 17-9 ASCII Write Append instruction: Instruction 17-23 ASCII Write instruction: Instruction 17-26 ASN instruction: Instruction 4-15 ASR instruction: Instruction 17-22 ATN instruction: Instruction 4-16 Attention 32 to 16-bit conversion: Instruction 4-11 assign unique diagnostic file: Config/Maint 13-3, 13-8, 13-26, 13-29, 13-33, 13-37, 13-44, 13-63, 13-67 AVE indexed address: Instruction 4-18 change index value: Instruction 13-10 control structure addressing: Instruction 10-4 deleting processor memory: Config/Maint 20-14 DTR online programming: Instruction 10-8 edit online: Program 14-2 edit SFC: Program 8-13 entering input addresses: Instruction 1-8 entering output addresses: Instruction 1-9 FAL indexed address: Instruction 9-2 FOR and NXT with output branches: Instruction 13-8 FOR and NXT within branches: Instruction 13-8 forcing a transition: Config/Maint 18-8 forcing an output: Config/Maint 18-7 forcing I/O: Program 3-7

I-4

Master Index

forcing transitions: Program 12-8 indexed addressing: Instruction 8-2 inverse logic: Program 13-4 jumped timers and counters: Instruction 13-5 MCR zone, overlapping or nesting: Instruction 13-3 MCR zones, timers and counters: Instruction 13-3 modify status bits of BTR/BTW: Instruction 15-8 MSG modify status bits: Instruction 16-12 status bits .ST and .EW: Instruction 15-28, 16-12 on-line programming with ONS: Instruction 13-20 pairing stack instructions: Instruction 11-6 passwords and privileges, limitations of: Config/Maint 15-6 PID change engineering unit max: Instruction 14-27 change engineering unit min: Instruction 14-27 change inputs or units: Instruction 14-23 changing scaling: Instruction 14-7 resume last state: Instruction 14-14 setting temperature limits: Instruction 14-33 update time: Instruction 14-27 placement of critical counters: Instruction 2-18, 2-20 resetting TON and TOF: Instruction 2-10, 2-25 set or clear the reset and inhibit bits: Config/Maint 11-17 SRT indexed address: Instruction 4-30 status of BTR/BTW bits: Instruction 15-9 STD indexed address: Instruction 4-33 use of control address: Instruction 12-3 using control addresses: Instruction 8-3

using control addresses for instructions: Instruction 11-2 using indexed addresses: Config/Maint 9-20 zeroes written in the global status file: Config/Maint 13-26 auto configuration: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 auto document: Program 14-7 auto-calibrating 1771-IFE/C: I/OConfig 2-7 1771-IR/B: I/OConfig 2-25 1771-IXE/B: I/OConfig 2-33 1771-IXHR/A: I/OConfig 2-41 AUTOEXEC.BAT: Config/Maint 1-7, 1-17, 2-3 setting: Config/Maint 1-8 automatic configuration: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 AVE instruction: Instruction 4-17 Average File instruction, AVE: Instruction 4-17 AWA instruction: Instruction 17-23 AWT instruction: Instruction 17-26

B
baud rate, using a 6171-IDH: Config/Maint 1-7 beep associated with error messages, disabling: Config/Maint 1-8 bit, data storage: Config/Maint 9-3 Bit Distribute instruction, BTD: Instruction 7-2 Bit Shift Left (BSL) instruction: Instruction 11-2 Bit Shift Right (BSR) instruction: Instruction 11-2 block transfer BTR instruction: Instruction 15-4 BTW instruction: Instruction 15-4 direct communication mode: Instruction 15-2 entering information, PLC-5: I/OConfig 1-16 I/O scan mode: Instruction 15-2 instructions: Instruction 15-1 programming examples: Instruction 15-18 timing: Instruction 15-15, 15-17

I-5

Master Index Preface

block transfer example disk: I/OConfig 1-10 Block Transfer Read instruction, BTR: Instruction 15-4 Block Transfer Write instruction, BTW: Instruction 15-4 branches: Program 13-6 entering multiple: Program 15-13 extending: Program 15-14 ladder editor adding: Program 15-12 nested: Program 15-16 Break (BRK) instruction: Instruction 13-8 BRK instruction: Instruction 13-8 BSL instruction: Instruction 11-2 BSR instruction: Instruction 11-2 BTD instruction: Instruction 7-2 BTR instruction: Instruction 15-4 BTR, BTW instruction, monitoring: Config/Maint 16-8 BTW instruction: Instruction 15-4 building, SFCs: Program 9-6, 10-24 building blocks path: Program 8-4 selection branch: Program 8-5 SFC: Program 8-3 simultaneous branch: Program 8-6 step: Program 8-3 transition: Program 8-4

C
calibrating 1791 analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-6 N-Series modules: I/OConfig 3-35 CANT CONNECT TO A SLC WITH CURRENT CONFIGURATION, error message: Config/Maint 8-8 capturing 6200 programming software screens, Windows ASCII text: Config/Maint 4-26 bit map graphics: Config/Maint 4-22 tip: Config/Maint 4-21
I-6

CAR utility: Instruction 18-1 restoring files: Program 3-10 changing width of existing databases, tip: Config/Maint 5-10 channel, privileges: Config/Maint 15-11 channel 0 configuration: Config/Maint 13-8 DF1 master status: Config/Maint 14-7 DF1 point-to-point status: Config/Maint 14-6 DF1 slave status: Config/Maint 14-7 interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-5 user mode (ASCII): Config/Maint 14-10 channel 1A-2B, monitoring Data Highway Plus: Config/Maint 14-12 remote I/O adapter: Config/Maint 14-22 remote I/O scanner: Config/Maint 14-18 channel 2 configuring: Config/Maint 13-39 monitoring ControlNet: Config/Maint 14-30 Ethernet: Config/Maint 14-27 extended local I/O: Config/Maint 14-33 channel 3A, monitoring, PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module: Config/Maint 14-36 channel configuration 1A: Config/Maint 13-24 1B: Config/Maint 13-24 2A: Config/Maint 13-24 2B: Config/Maint 13-24 adapter, remote I/O: Config/Maint 13-32 channel 0: Config/Maint 13-8 Data Highway Plus: Config/Maint 13-24 extended local I/O: Config/Maint 13-61 monitoring: Config/Maint 14-1 saving edits: Config/Maint 13-7 scanner, remote I/O: Config/Maint 13-28 unused mode: Config/Maint 13-35 channel edits, saving: Config/Maint 13-7 channel functions, default: Config/Maint 13-1 Channel Overview screen: Config/Maint 13-5

Master Index

channel status interpreting for channel 0: Config/Maint 14-5 interpreting for ControlNet: Config/Maint 14-30 interpreting for Data Highway Plus: Config/Maint 14-12 interpreting for Ethernet: Config/Maint 14-27 interpreting for extended local I/O: Config/Maint 14-33 interpreting for PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module: Config/Maint 14-36 interpreting for remote I/O adapter: Config/Maint 14-22 interpreting for remote I/O scanner: Config/Maint 14-18 channel status screen, ControlNet WHO ACTIVE: Config/Maint 8-29 choosing a catalog number, N-Series: I/OConfig 3-1 choosing a module type, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-15 CIO instruction: Instruction 15-25 monitoring: Instruction 15-27; Config/Maint 16-10 status bits: Instruction 15-28 using: Instruction 15-26 classes, privileges: Config/Maint 15-8 Classic PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 Clear instruction, CLR: Instruction 4-20 clearing, memory: Config/Maint 3-18 CLR instruction: Instruction 4-20 CMP, instruction: Instruction 3-3 collisions, importing documentation: Program 6-6 color display, adjusting on a 1784-T47: Config/Maint 5-5 colors. See Programming Terminal, configuring COM1, COM2 communications: Config/Maint 6-20 setting the baud rate: Config/Maint 1-7

comments address: Program 17-21 import/export. See importing, documentation instruction: Program 17-22 rung: Program 17-22 SFC: Program 10-22 communication mode change characters used: Config/Maint 13-22 configuring serial port: Config/Maint 13-22 communication scan time, configuring: Config/Maint 11-11 communication time slice. See configuring, communication scan time communications boards: Config/Maint 6-1 DH+: Config/Maint 6-19 modem: Config/Maint 6-25 serial: Config/Maint 6-20 using DH+: Config/Maint 8-1 using Ethernet: Config/Maint 8-1 compare EQU: Instruction 3-6 expression: Instruction 3-3 GEQ: Instruction 3-7, 3-8 instructions: Instruction 3-3 length of expressions: Instruction 3-4 LEQ: Instruction 3-9 LES: Instruction 3-10 NEQ: Instruction 3-15 comparing data table entries: Program 4-1 force table entries: Program 4-1 ladder program: Program 4-1 options: Program 4-5 processor memory: Program 4-2 program directory: Program 4-1

I-7

Master Index Preface

compute ACS: Instruction 4-13 ADD: Instruction 4-14 ASN: Instruction 4-15 ATN: Instruction 4-16 AVE: Instruction 4-17 CLR: Instruction 4-20 COS: Instruction 4-21 CPT: Instruction 4-5 DEG: Instruction 6-5 DIV: Instruction 4-22 EOT: Instruction 13-24 expression: Instruction 4-6 FSC: Instruction 9-15 functions: Instruction 4-11 IOT: Instruction 1-9 length of expressions: Instruction 4-8 LN: Instruction 4-23 LOG: Instruction 4-24 MUL: Instruction 4-25 NEG: Instruction 4-26 ONS: Instruction 13-20 order of operation: Instruction 4-9 RAD: Instruction 6-6 SIN: Instruction 4-27 SQR: Instruction 4-28 SRT: Instruction 4-29 STD: Instruction 4-31 SUB: Instruction 4-34 TAN: Instruction 4-35 XPY: Instruction 4-36 Compute instruction, CPT: Instruction 4-5 computers, supported by 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-11 concepts, data storage: Config/Maint 9-1 CONFIG.SYS FILES and BUFFERS: Config/Maint 1-3 mouse support: Config/Maint 1-3 setting: Config/Maint 1-2

configurable application routine. See CAR utility configuration files: Config/Maint 2-8 I/O. See I/O configuration system: Config/Maint 5-2 configuring 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-2 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-2 1402-LS51/A: I/OConfig 6-1 1770-KFC: Config/Maint 6-20 1770-KFCD: Config/Maint 6-20 1771-CFM: I/OConfig 4-11 1771-IFE/A: I/OConfig 2-2 1771-IFE/B: I/OConfig 2-2 1771-IFE/C: I/OConfig 2-2 1771-IL/A: I/OConfig 2-8 1771-IR/A: I/OConfig 2-19 1771-IR/B: I/OConfig 2-19 1771-IXE/A: I/OConfig 2-27 1771-IXE/B: I/OConfig 2-27 1771-IXHR/A: I/OConfig 2-35 1771-OFE/A: I/OConfig 2-43 1771-OFE/B: I/OConfig 2-43 1771-SDN/A: I/OConfig 2-48 1771-VHSC: I/OConfig 4-2 1784-KL: Config/Maint 6-38 1784-KT/KT2: Config/Maint 6-7 1784-KTC: Config/Maint 6-12 1784-KTX/KTXD: Config/Maint 6-16 1784-PCMK: Config/Maint 6-17 1791 analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-1 1794 flex I/O modules: I/OConfig 8-1 1794-IE4XOE2/A: I/OConfig 8-6 1794-IE4XOE2/B: I/OConfig 8-6 1794-IE8/A: I/OConfig 8-10 1794-IE8/B: I/OConfig 8-10 1794-IR8/A: I/OConfig 8-13 1794-IT8/A: I/OConfig 8-18 1794-OE4/A: I/OConfig 8-2 1794-OE4/B: I/OConfig 8-2

I-8

Master Index

adapter channel response: Config/Maint 11-9 adapter image file: Config/Maint 11-19 analog modules: I/OConfig 2-1 channel 0 ASCII (user mode): Config/Maint 13-20 communication mode change: Config/Maint 13-22 DF1 master: Config/Maint 13-15 DF1 point-to-point: Config/Maint 13-10 DF1 slave: Config/Maint 13-12 channel 2: Config/Maint 13-39 channels 1A-2B as Data Highway Plus: Config/Maint 13-24 as remote I/O adapter: Config/Maint 13-32 as remote I/O scanner: Config/Maint 13-28 colors: Config/Maint 5-4 communication scan time: Config/Maint 11-11 directory paths: Config/Maint 5-7 display: Config/Maint 5-1 documentation, export utility: Program 6-12 fault routine: Config/Maint 11-12 I/O, automatic: Config/Maint 12-34 I/O status file: Config/Maint 11-14 import documentation: Program 6-5 ladder editor: Program 14-5 link mode: Config/Maint 5-6 main control programs: Config/Maint 11-24 memory protect feature: Config/Maint 11-10 N-Series modules: I/OConfig 3-4 offline: Config/Maint 7-2 PII: Config/Maint 11-20 PLC-5/VME status file: Config/Maint 11-18 printer: Config/Maint 5-7, 20-21 processor: Config/Maint 11-1 processor channels: Config/Maint 13-1 processor memory file, import: Program 7-4 processor memory files, export: Program 7-7 processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility: Config/Maint 11-8

processor resident rack address: Config/Maint 11-7 programming terminal: Config/Maint 5-1 serial port: Config/Maint 6-20, 13-8 ASCII (user mode): Config/Maint 13-20 communication mode change: Config/Maint 13-22 DF1 master: Config/Maint 13-15 DF1 point-to-point: Config/Maint 13-10 DF1 slave: Config/Maint 13-12 Serial to KFC/KFCD (CNET): Config/Maint 6-20 SFC display: Program 8-15 startup procedure: Config/Maint 11-5 STI: Config/Maint 11-22 watchdog timer: Config/Maint 11-13 Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX: Config/Maint 6-30 Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet): Config/Maint 6-32 configuring a module: I/OConfig 1-5 accepting edits: I/OConfig 1-21 applying default values: I/OConfig 1-21 displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 1-25 editing a module: I/OConfig 1-19 I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-17 monitoring a module: I/OConfig 1-23 review errors: I/OConfig 1-21 configuring channel 2 ControlNet I/O action edit: Config/Maint 13-59 monitor: Config/Maint 13-58 ControlNet I/O mapping edit: Config/Maint 13-48 monitor: Config/Maint 13-46 ControlNet local rack characteristics: Config/Maint 13-40 ControlNet map entries status: Config/Maint 13-56

I-9

Master Index Preface

ControlNet node information edit: Config/Maint 13-43 monitor: Config/Maint 13-39 ControlNet view times: Config/Maint 13-55 configuring documented modules channel configuration, ControlNet PLC-5 processor: I/OConfig 1-5 ladder editor: I/OConfig 1-5 configuring N-Series Modules, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 3-1 connecting to Ethernet PLC-5 processors using hostnames, tip: Instruction 16-7 constructing, rungs: Program 13-4 contact histogram generating: Config/Maint 19-1 printing: Config/Maint 19-5 using masks: Config/Maint 19-4 control bits. See user control bits control file, example: Instruction 8-3 ControlNet interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-30 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-30 ControlNet Channel 2 Status Screen: Config/Maint 14-30 ControlNet communication: Config/Maint 8-24 ControlNet I/O action editing: Config/Maint 13-59 monitoring: Config/Maint 13-58 ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen: Config/Maint 13-58 ControlNet I/O Action Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen: Config/Maint 13-58 ControlNet I/O map-entry error messages: Config/Maint B-1 status words: Config/Maint B-1 ControlNet I/O mapping editing: Config/Maint 13-48 monitoring: Config/Maint 13-46 ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen: Config/Maint 13-46
I-10

ControlNet I/O Mapping Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen: Config/Maint 13-46 ControlNet I/O transfer entering information, PLC-5: I/OConfig 1-16 instruction: Instruction 15-25 ControlNet Local Rack Characteristics Screen: Config/Maint 13-40 ControlNet Map Entries Status Screen: Config/Maint 13-56 ControlNet node information editing: Config/Maint 13-43 monitoring: Config/Maint 13-39 ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Edit) Screen: Config/Maint 13-39 ControlNet Node Information Channel 2 Configuration (Monitor) Screen: Config/Maint 13-39 ControlNet PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 ControlNet View Times Screen: Config/Maint 13-55 ControlNet WHO, using: Config/Maint 8-25 ControlNet WHO ACTIVE active node identification screen: Config/Maint 8-26 active node status screen: Config/Maint 8-28 channel status screen: Config/Maint 8-29 network status screen: Config/Maint 8-31 ControlNet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 convergent, scan time: Instruction B-16 conversion BCD: Instruction 6-3 FRD: Instruction 6-4 PLC-5 files to PLC-5/250 files: Program A-1 Convert from BCD instruction, FRD: Instruction 6-4 convert PLC-5 files to PLC-5/250 files: Program A-1

Master Index

Convert to BCD instruction, TOD: Instruction 6-3 converting machine statements, ladder logic: Program 13-2 COP instruction: Instruction 9-20 copy documentation files, from backup to save directory: Program 5-5 copy PMF, from backup to save directory: Program 5-5 copy rungs: Program 16-16 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17 copying, files: Program 5-8, 5-9 COS instruction: Instruction 4-21 Cosine instruction, COS: Instruction 4-21 Count Down instruction: Instruction 2-20 Count Up instruction: Instruction 2-18 counter CTD: Instruction 2-20 CTU: Instruction 2-18 RES: Instruction 2-25 counters, instructions: Instruction 2-16 CPT instruction: Instruction 4-5 creating offline files: Config/Maint 7-4 program files: Program 2-5 reports: Config/Maint 20-3 SFCs: Program 9-1, 10-1 undefined program files: Program 10-26 cross reference displaying: Program 13-9; Config/Maint 16-6 regenerate: Program 13-10 report: Config/Maint 20-9, 20-11 CTD instruction: Instruction 2-20 CTU instruction: Instruction 2-18 custom application routine. See CAR utility cut rungs: Program 16-16 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17

D
data monitor, message: Config/Maint 16-11, 16-14 data block: Config/Maint 9-3 organizing: Config/Maint 9-4 user-defined: Config/Maint 9-3 data file addressing: Config/Maint 9-1 creating: Config/Maint 10-2 default: Config/Maint 9-6 deleting: Config/Maint 10-5 extending: Config/Maint 10-4 manipulating: Instruction 8-4 memory used: Config/Maint 9-6 organizing: Config/Maint 9-1, 9-4 privileges: Config/Maint 15-18 report: Config/Maint 20-12 size: Config/Maint 9-6 types of: Config/Maint 9-6 unused: Config/Maint 9-4 data files range of values: Instruction C-1; Config/Maint 9-10 types of: Config/Maint 9-12 types of addressing: Config/Maint 9-11 Data Highway Plus configuring channels 1A-2B: Config/Maint 13-24 interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-12 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-12 data monitor: Config/Maint 16-2 block transfer: Config/Maint 16-8 changing the radix: Config/Maint 16-3 displaying cross reference: Config/Maint 16-6 entering data: Config/Maint 16-6 specific address: Config/Maint 16-5

I-11

Master Index Preface

data storage bit: Config/Maint 9-3 concepts: Config/Maint 9-1 data block: Config/Maint 9-3 files: Config/Maint 9-3 I/O image files: Instruction 1-2 sub-member: Config/Maint 9-3 type: Config/Maint 9-3 user-defined: Config/Maint 9-3 words: Config/Maint 9-3 data table file defaults: Config/Maint 9-7 report: Config/Maint 20-12 Data Transitional instruction, DTR: Instruction 10-8 database, determining width: Program 5-4 database editor address comment: Program 17-21 displaying cross reference: Program 13-9 instruction comment: Program 17-22 modes: Program 17-23 regenerating cross reference: Program 13-10 replacing: Program 17-26 rung comment: Program 17-22 search order: Program 17-25 using: Program 17-18 database revision checking: Program 17-4 database width, specifying: Config/Maint 5-10 databases for comments and symbols, compatibility: Program 17-4 DDT instruction: Instruction 10-2 default channel configuration: Config/Maint 13-1 data table: Config/Maint 9-6 defining, privilege class: Config/Maint 15-8 DEG instruction: Instruction 6-5 Degree instruction, DEG: Instruction 6-5 deleting, files: Program 5-12 deleting a module, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-26
I-12

derivative smoothing: Instruction 14-5 DF1 Master Configuration, polling scheme: Config/Maint 13-17 DFA instruction: Instruction 18-1 DH II, serial port configuring: Config/Maint 6-20 DH+ active nodes: Config/Maint 12-17 communications: Config/Maint 8-1 between DH+ networks: Config/Maint 6-19 serial port configuring: Config/Maint 6-20 DH+ communications: Config/Maint 8-1 DH+ Network Menu: Config/Maint 8-6 DH+ station. See status information, DH+ DH+ WHO active: Config/Maint 8-6 listen: Config/Maint 8-4 SLC 5/04 support: Config/Maint 8-7 station diagnostics, displaying: Config/Maint 8-9 using: Config/Maint 8-3 DH+ WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 diagnostic DDT: Instruction 10-2 DTR: Instruction 10-8 FBC: Instruction 10-2 parameters: Instruction 10-4, 10-8 search mode: Instruction 10-2 status: Instruction 10-5 Diagnostic Detect instruction, DDT: Instruction 10-2 Diagnostic Fault Annunciator Instruction: Instruction 18-1 diagnostic instructions: Instruction 10-1 diagnostics: Config/Maint 8-9 digital I/O, example instructions: Program 13-3 direct communication, block transfer: Instruction 15-2 directory paths, defining: Config/Maint 5-7 disabling, I/O forces: Config/Maint 18-7 discrete-transfer data

Master Index

determining status of adapter-mode processor: Config/Maint 14-25 determining status of supervisory processor: Config/Maint 14-26 transferring bits with supervisory processor: Config/Maint 14-24 disk files: Program 1-2 display configuring: Config/Maint 5-1 ladder editor: Program 14-5 SFC: Program 8-15 displaying block transfer data 1771-SDN/A: I/OConfig 2-53 1794-IR8/A: I/OConfig 8-17 1794-IT8/A: I/OConfig 8-22 I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-25 DIV instruction: Instruction 4-22 divergent, scan time: Instruction B-16 Divide instruction, DIV: Instruction 4-22 documentation exporting: Program 6-10 importing: Program 6-3 documented modules, configuring: I/OConfig 1-5 documenting, ASCII file: Program 7-13 documenting a module: I/OConfig 1-3, 1-5 adding a module to the database: I/OConfig 1-13 channel configuration, ControlNet PLC-5 processor: I/OConfig 1-4 ladder editor: I/OConfig 1-4 programming BT instructions: I/OConfig 1-5 documenting program files: Program 17-2 auto document: Program 14-7 editing keys: Program 17-14 entering comments: Program 17-3 entering symbols: Program 17-16 guidelines: Program 17-13 using the database editor: Program 17-18

documenting programs page breaks: Program 17-5 page headers: Program 17-5 DOS: Config/Maint 1-2 prompt: Config/Maint 1-12, 1-19 DOS extender: Config/Maint 1-8 DOS mouse driver, 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-3 drawing an SFC: Program 8-1, 8-10 DTR instruction: Instruction 10-8

E
edit mode, SFCs: Program 8-17 editing, SFC: Program 12-2 editing a module, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-19 editing, advanced address comments: Program 17-7 aligning text: Program 17-7 copying: Program 17-7 cutting: Program 17-7 instruction comments: Program 17-7 pasting: Program 17-7 rung comments: Program 17-7 searching: Program 17-7 structured text: Program 17-7 edits, testing: Program 16-22 EEPROM, writing to: Program 3-11 EEPROM SUCCESSFULLY BURNED, error message: Program 3-11 effects of, online ladder editing: Program 16-1 element manipulation LIM: Instruction 3-11 MEQ: Instruction 3-13 MOV: Instruction 7-4 MVM: Instruction 7-5 enabling, I/O forces: Config/Maint 18-7 End of Transmission instruction, EOT: Instruction 13-24 engineering units, scaling: Instruction 14-7
I-13

Master Index Preface

Enhanced PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 entering step actions, transitions: Program 10-4 step/transition pairs: Program 9-4 entering block transfer information, I/O configuration, PLC-5: I/OConfig 1-16 entering ControlNet I/O transfer information, I/O configuration, PLC-5: I/OConfig 1-16 environment, using 6200 programming software in Windows: Config/Maint 4-1 EOT instruction: Instruction 13-24 using: Program 9-4, 10-4 EQU instruction: Instruction 3-6 Equal To instruction: Instruction 3-6 ERR: Program 15-3 ERROR RNASTR v3.1 is already running, error message: Config/Maint 4-10 error message ??WARNING?? UNABLE TO APPLY PORT CONFIGURATION TO CHANNEL xx: Program 3-9 **Too Many Files**: Program 1-3; Config/Maint 7-3 CANT CONNECT TO A SLC WITH CURRENT CONFIGURATION: Config/Maint 8-8 EEPROM SUCCESSFULLY BURNED: Program 3-11 ERROR RNASTR v3.1 is already running: Config/Maint 4-10 INVALID OPERAND: Instruction 4-4 NO ACCESS OR PRIVILEGE VIOLATION: Config/Maint 15-22 NO BACKUP DIRECTORIES ARE CONFIGURED: Program 5-5

NO MORE DATA: Config/Maint 12-34 NO PRIVILEGE TO READ FILE N7: Config/Maint 15-22 OUTDATED VERSION. CANT CONNECT: Config/Maint 6-18 PROCESSOR FILES ALREADY EXIST; NO DOCUMENTATION FILES EXIST ON SOURCE DRIVE! DOCUMENTATION FILES WILL BE DELETED ON TARGET DRIVE! Proceed?: Program 5-10 SYMBOL MUST NOT EXCEED 10 CHARACTERS: Program 5-4 UNABLE TO ATTACH TO THIS STATION: Config/Maint 8-8 WARNING no KT/KL/KT2 devices available: Config/Maint 4-10 WARNING no ports available on driver 1: Config/Maint 4-10 error messages, ControlNet I/O map-entry status: Config/Maint B-1 errors, review: I/OConfig 1-21 Ethernet communications: Config/Maint 8-1 interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-27 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-27 Ethernet communications: Config/Maint 8-18 Ethernet PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 Ethernet WHO active: Config/Maint 8-20 active host diagnostics: Config/Maint 8-21 host list editor: Config/Maint 8-22 using: Config/Maint 8-19 Ethernet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Examine Off instruction: Instruction 1-4 Examine On instruction: Instruction 1-3

I-14

Master Index

example indexed addressing: Config/Maint 9-21 privilege classes: Config/Maint 15-8 rung: Program 13-5 executable, starting the software: Config/Maint 2-4 exiting, 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 2-10 expanded local I/O, configuring channel 2: Config/Maint 13-61 expanded memory: Config/Maint 1-8 exporting creating Rockwell Software Inc. ASCII file: Program 6-17, 7-9 documentation: Program 6-10 configuring: Program 6-12 documentation files: Program 6-1 examining results: Program 7-8 processor memory files: Program 7-6 configuring: Program 7-7 documenting: Program 7-13 expression, determining the length of: Instruction 3-4, 4-8 extended characters: Program 17-18 extended local I/O concepts: Config/Maint 13-61 configuration table: Config/Maint 14-34 interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-33 monitoring: Config/Maint 14-34 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-33 extended memory: Config/Maint 1-8 extending, data files: Config/Maint 10-4 extensions, reports: Config/Maint 20-18 external format processor memory file: Program B-1

F
FAL logical instruction: Instruction 9-13 fault routine, configuring: Config/Maint 11-12

faults clearing: Config/Maint 12-9, 17-1 codes: Config/Maint 12-8, 12-9, 17-5 major: Config/Maint 12-9 codes: Config/Maint 17-5 major and minor: Config/Maint 12-8 minor: Config/Maint 12-9 types of: Config/Maint 17-9 minor fault word 1 description: Config/Maint 17-9 minor fault word 2 description: Config/Maint 17-10 remote I/O rack: Config/Maint 12-8 status information: Config/Maint 12-8 where faulted: Config/Maint 12-10 FBC instruction: Instruction 10-2 FFL instruction: Instruction 11-5 FFU instruction: Instruction 11-5 FIFO Load (FFL) instruction: Instruction 11-5 FIFO Unload (FFU) instruction: Instruction 11-5 file, search and compare operations: Instruction 9-18 File Arithmetic and Logic instruction, FAL: Instruction 9-2 File Bit Comparison instruction, FBC: Instruction 10-2 file concepts control structure: Instruction 8-3 manipulating data: Instruction 8-4 modes of operation: Instruction 8-7 parameters: Instruction 8-1 file convert utility .ACH to/from .AF5: Program A-1 .AF5 to/from .X5: Program B-1 6200 series to/from A.I. Series: Program B-1 6200 series to/from WINTelligent LOGIC 5: Program B-1 File Copy instruction, COP: Instruction 9-20 File Fill instruction, FLL: Instruction 9-21 file instructions, logical: Instruction 9-13
I-15

Master Index Preface

file number, selecting: Program 2-2 File Search and Compare instruction, FSC: Instruction 9-15 files archive. See Processor Memory Files arithmetic operations: Instruction 9-7 converting PLC-5 to PLC-5/250: Program A-1 copy operations: Instruction 9-5 copying same directory: Program 5-8 to/from floppy: Program 5-9 data storage: Config/Maint 9-3 deleting: Program 5-12; Config/Maint 10-5 disk: Program 1-2 documenting: Program 17-2 editing keys: Program 17-14 guidelines: Program 17-13 entering symbols: Program 17-16 extending: Config/Maint 10-4 extensions: Program 1-3 frequently used: Config/Maint 9-8 functions: Instruction 9-14 instruction COP: Instruction 9-20 FLL: Instruction 9-21 logical operations: Instruction 9-13 merging documentation: Program 5-13 merging processor memory: Program 3-12 offline, selecting: Config/Maint 7-5 operation modes: Instruction 8-7 passwords: Config/Maint 15-3 privileges: Config/Maint 15-17 processor: Program 1-7; Config/Maint 7-4 program: Program 2-1 renaming: Program 5-7 reports: Config/Maint 20-18 restoring: Program 3-7 saving: Program 3-1 types of: Program 1-1

understanding: Program 1-1 user configuration: Config/Maint 2-8 utilities: Program 5-1 filesharing SHARE.EXE: Config/Maint 1-3, 4-4 using the software off line: Config/Maint 7-3 finding address switch settings for 1784-KT, ABHELP, tip: Config/Maint 6-10 FLL instruction: Instruction 9-21 floating point, valid value range: Instruction C-1; Config/Maint 9-10 For (FOR) instruction: Instruction 13-8 FOR instruction: Instruction 13-8 forcing, SFC transitions: Program 12-8; Config/Maint 18-8 forcing I/O disabling: Config/Maint 18-7 enabling: Config/Maint 18-7 from Force Monitor: Config/Maint 18-3 from ladder editor: Config/Maint 18-2 removing forces: Config/Maint 18-5 formatting, keywords: Program 6-7 FRD instruction: Instruction 6-4 FSC instruction: Instruction 9-15 function keys: Config/Maint 3-6

G
gain constants: Instruction 14-4 gapping: Config/Maint 9-4 generating contact histogram: Config/Maint 19-1 reports: Config/Maint 20-1 GEQ instruction: Instruction 3-7, 3-8 global control bits: Config/Maint 12-29 global inhibit bits, clearing: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 global status bits: Config/Maint 12-27 global status flags file: Config/Maint 13-27

I-16

Master Index

GO TO placing: Program 11-10 using: Program 11-9 Greater Than or Equal To instruction: Instruction 3-7, 3-8

H
help: Config/Maint 3-7 histogram. See contact histogram history, of data table values. See contact histogram host list editor: Config/Maint 8-22 hot keys available throughout 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 3-3 moving between screens: Config/Maint 3-3 SFC Editor: Program 8-20

I
I/O, automatic configuration: Config/Maint 12-34 I/O configuration accepting edits: I/OConfig 1-21 review errors: I/OConfig 1-21 adding a module: I/OConfig 1-13 adding or copying: I/OConfig 1-13 applying default values: I/OConfig 1-21 auto-calibrating 1771-IFE Series C: I/OConfig 2-7 auto-calibrating 1771-IR Series B: I/OConfig 2-25 auto-calibrating 1771-IXE Series B: I/OConfig 2-33 auto-calibrating 1771-IXHR Series A: I/OConfig 2-41 availability: I/OConfig 1-1 calibrating an N-Series module: I/OConfig 3-35 capturing screens: I/OConfig xi, 1-26 choosing a catalog number: I/OConfig 3-1 choosing a module type: I/OConfig 1-15 configuring 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-1

configuring 1400-PB or 1400-PD, entering password: I/OConfig 5-2 configuring 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-1 configuring 1402-LS51: I/OConfig 6-1 configuring 1771-CFM: I/OConfig 4-11 configuring 1771-IFE: I/OConfig 2-2 configuring 1771-IL: I/OConfig 2-8 configuring 1771-IR: I/OConfig 2-19 configuring 1771-IXE: I/OConfig 2-27 configuring 1771-IXHR: I/OConfig 2-35 configuring 1771-OFE: I/OConfig 2-43 configuring 1771-SDN: I/OConfig 2-48 configuring 1771-VHSC: I/OConfig 4-1, 4-2 configuring 1791 analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-1 configuring 1794 flex I/O modules: I/OConfig 8-1 configuring 1794-IE4XOE2: I/OConfig 8-6 configuring 1794-IE8: I/OConfig 8-10 configuring 1794-IR8: I/OConfig 8-13 configuring 1794-IT8: I/OConfig 8-18 configuring 1794-OE4: I/OConfig 8-2 configuring a module: I/OConfig 1-5, 1-17 accepting edits: I/OConfig 1-21 applying default values: I/OConfig 1-21 displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 1-25 editing a module: I/OConfig 1-19 monitoring a module: I/OConfig 1-23 review errors: I/OConfig 1-21 configuring an N-Series module: I/OConfig 3-4 configuring analog modules: I/OConfig 2-1 configuring line synchronization modules: I/OConfig 6-1 configuring N-Series modules: I/OConfig 3-1 configuring power monitor devices: I/OConfig 5-1 database: I/OConfig 1-3 deleting a module: I/OConfig 1-26
I-17

Master Index Preface

displaying block transfer data: I/OConfig 1-25 documenting a module: I/OConfig 1-3 adding a module to the database: I/OConfig 1-13 adding or copying: I/OConfig 1-13 programming BT instructions: I/OConfig 1-5 editing a module: I/OConfig 1-19 monitoring 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-9 monitoring 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-9 monitoring 1402-LS51: I/OConfig 6-6 monitoring 1771-CFM: I/OConfig 4-18 monitoring 1771-IFE: I/OConfig 2-5 monitoring 1771-IL/B: I/OConfig 2-17 monitoring 1771-IR: I/OConfig 2-23 monitoring 1771-IXE: I/OConfig 2-31 monitoring 1771-IXHR: I/OConfig 2-39 monitoring 1771-OFE: I/OConfig 2-46 monitoring 1771-SDN: I/OConfig 2-50 monitoring 1771-VHSC: I/OConfig 4-7 monitoring 1791 analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-4 monitoring 1794-IE4XOE2: I/OConfig 8-8 monitoring 1794-IE8: I/OConfig 8-12 monitoring 1794-IR8: I/OConfig 8-15 monitoring 1794-IT8: I/OConfig 8-20 monitoring 1794-OE4: I/OConfig 8-4 monitoring a module: I/OConfig 1-23 monitoring an N-Series module: I/OConfig 3-33 moving around on screens: I/OConfig 1-1 navigational keys: I/OConfig 1-1 N-Series modules 5 V input: I/OConfig 3-6 10 V input: I/OConfig 3-9 10 V output: I/OConfig 3-24 100 mV thermocouple input: I/OConfig 3-15 20 mA sourcing/sinking input: I/OConfig 3-21
I-18

25 mA output: I/OConfig 3-27 50 mA output: I/OConfig 3-30 55 mV thermocouple input: I/OConfig 3-12 65 ohm RTD input: I/OConfig 3-18 PLC-5 entering BT information: I/OConfig 1-16 entering CIO information: I/OConfig 1-16 programming BT instructions: I/OConfig 1-5 review errors: I/OConfig 1-21 standalone utility: I/OConfig 1-13, 3-1 starting the I/O configuration utility: I/OConfig 1-12 starting the utility: I/OConfig 1-12 supported processors: I/OConfig 1-1 using the I/O configuration utility: I/OConfig 1-1 I/O configuration utility: I/OConfig 1-1, 1-4 using: I/OConfig 1-1 I/O image, address: Config/Maint 9-17 I/O image files: Instruction 1-2 I/O rack, configuration table: Config/Maint 14-20 I/O scan mode, block transfer: Instruction 15-2 I/O status: Config/Maint 12-23 monitoring: Config/Maint 14-20 rack configuration tables: Config/Maint 12-32 I/O status file addressing: Config/Maint 11-15 configuring: Config/Maint 11-14 IDI instruction: Instruction 1-10 using: Instruction 1-12 IDO instruction: Instruction 1-11 using: Instruction 1-12 IEC 1131-3, international programming language standard: Program 8-1 IIN instruction: Instruction 1-8 Immediate Data Input, instruction: Instruction 1-10 Immediate Data Output, instruction: Instruction 1-11 Immediate Input instruction: Instruction 1-8

Master Index

Immediate Output instruction, IOT: Instruction 1-9 importing comments/symbols. See importing, documentation creating Rockwell Software Inc. ASCII file: Program 6-17, 7-9 documentation: Program 6-3 configuring: Program 6-5 data collisions: Program 6-6 examining results: Program 6-9 documentation files: Program 6-1 documenting ASCII: Program 6-21 examining results: Program 7-5 processor memory files: Program 7-2 configuring: Program 7-4 documenting: Program 7-13 importing and exporting .X5 to/from .AF5: Program B-1 6200 series to/from A.I. Series: Program B-1 6200 series to/from WINTelligent LOGIC 5: Program B-1 A.I. Series to/from 6200 series: Program B-1 documentation files: Program 6-1 WINTelligent LOGIC 5 to/from 6200 series: Program B-1 improving performance, 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-10 improving search performance, tip: Program 16-3 incremental mode: Instruction 8-10 indexed address: Config/Maint 9-20 addressing example: Config/Maint 9-21 indexed addressing offset. See status information, indexed indirect, address: Config/Maint 9-19 input keys: Config/Maint 3-3

installing 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-1 verifying: Config/Maint 1-18 instruction ControlNet I/O transfer: Instruction 15-25 immediate data input: Instruction 1-10 immediate data output: Instruction 1-11 instructions arranging: Program 13-4, 13-8 ASCII: Instruction 17-1 block transfer: Instruction 15-1 BTR, BTW, monitoring: Config/Maint 16-8 CIO, monitoring: Instruction 15-27; Config/Maint 16-10 compare: Instruction 3-3 diagnostic: Instruction 10-1 entering: Program 15-4 examples: Program 13-3 memory requirements: Instruction A-1 message: Instruction 16-1 MSG, monitoring: Config/Maint 16-11 operands: Instruction C-2 PID, monitoring: Config/Maint 16-14 program flow: Instruction 13-1 quick reference: Config/Maint A-1 relay type: Instruction 1-1, 2-1 sequencer: Instruction 12-1 shift register: Instruction 11-1 timer: Instruction 2-2 timing: Instruction A-1 INTERCHANGE: Config/Maint 6-35 INTERCHANGE compliant software, using 6200 software with: Config/Maint 4-30 internal modem: Config/Maint 6-27 INVALID OPERAND, error message: Instruction 4-4 IOT instruction: Instruction 1-9 IRD marking: Program 15-3 IRQ, setting: Config/Maint 4-5 IRQ settings: Config/Maint 1-7, 6-21
I-19

Master Index Preface

IT executable: Config/Maint 2-4 See also programming software, starting

J
JMP instruction: Instruction 13-5 JSR instruction: Instruction 13-12 Jump instruction: Instruction 13-5 Jump to Subroutine instruction: Instruction 13-12

K
keys function: Config/Maint 3-6 input: Config/Maint 3-3 ladder editor: Program 14-4 navigational: Config/Maint 3-3 keywords %WIDTH: Program 6-8 formatting: Program 6-7 using: Program 6-7

L
Label (LBL) instruction: Instruction 13-8 Label instruction: Instruction 13-5 labels: Program 11-9 placing: Program 11-10 ladder editing, effects of online: Program 16-1 ladder editor auto document: Program 14-7 branches adding: Program 15-12 extending: Program 15-14 multiple: Program 15-13 nested: Program 15-16 configuring: Program 14-5 copy rungs: Program 16-16 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17

cut rungs: Program 16-16 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17 documenting program files: Program 17-2 editing keys: Program 17-14 entering comments: Program 17-3 guidelines: Program 17-13 entering instructions: Program 15-4 rungs: Program 15-2 symbols: Program 17-16 forcing I/O: Config/Maint 18-2 getting started: Program 14-1 IRD marking: Program 15-3 moving to rungs: Program 14-8 navigational keys: Program 14-4 online help: Config/Maint 3-7 paste rungs: Program 16-16 paste errors: Program 16-21 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17 viewing paste file: Program 16-20 searching: Program 16-3 configuring: Program 16-14 standard search: Program 16-6 selecting rungs: Program 14-7 status messages: Program 14-9 testing edits: Program 16-22 using the database editor: Program 17-18 ladder logic branch: Program 13-6 entering: Program 15-2, 15-4 writing: Program 13-4 ladder program comparing: Program 4-1 report: Config/Maint 20-10 LBL instruction: Instruction 13-5, 13-8 LEQ instruction: Instruction 3-9 LES instruction: Instruction 3-10

I-20

Master Index

Less Than instruction: Instruction 3-10 Less Than or Equal To instruction: Instruction 3-9 LFL instruction: Instruction 11-5 LFU instruction: Instruction 11-5 LIFO Load (LFL) instruction: Instruction 11-5 LIFO Unload (LFU) instruction: Instruction 11-5 LIM instruction: Instruction 3-11 Limit Test instruction: Instruction 3-11 link mode. See Programming Terminal, configuring LN instruction: Instruction 4-23 LOG, instruction: Instruction 4-24 Log to the base 10 instruction, LOG: Instruction 4-24 logic branch: Program 13-6 writing: Program 13-4 logical AND: Instruction 5-2 NOT: Instruction 5-4 OR: Instruction 5-6 XOR: Instruction 5-8 logical address: Config/Maint 9-12 mnemonic: Config/Maint 9-14

M
machine statements, converting to logic: Program 13-2 macros: Program 11-12 assigning comments: Program 11-13 creating: Program 11-12 deleting step/tran: Program 11-13 searching within: Program 11-14 main control programs: Program 2-3, 8-2 configuring: Config/Maint 11-24 main menu, using: Config/Maint 3-1 manipulating, file data: Instruction 8-4 Masked Comparison for Equal instruction: Instruction 3-13 Masked Move instruction: Instruction 7-5

Master Control Reset instruction: Instruction 13-3 MCP. See main control programs MCR instruction: Instruction 13-3 memory choosing memory size: Config/Maint 3-14 clearing: Config/Maint 3-18 expanded or extended: Config/Maint 1-8 gapping: Config/Maint 9-4 hard disk: Config/Maint 1-1 instruction requirements: Instruction A-1 processor files: Config/Maint 7-4 SFC requirements: Instruction B-4 size, offline: Config/Maint 3-14 system requirements: Config/Maint 1-1 usage report: Config/Maint 20-14 memory protect feature: Config/Maint 11-10 MEQ instruction: Instruction 3-13 merging files configuring: Program 5-14 documentation: Program 5-13 processor memory: Program 3-12 rules: Program 3-13 message instruction: Instruction 16-1 ladder editor: Program 14-9 minor fault word 1 description: Config/Maint 17-9 word 2 description: Config/Maint 17-10 mnemonic, addressing: Config/Maint 9-14 modem using: Config/Maint 6-25 using an internal: Config/Maint 6-27 modes, file operation: Instruction 8-7 modifying, Smart Menu: Config/Maint 1-15 monitor, status information: Config/Maint 12-6 monitor mode, SFCs: Program 8-17

I-21

Master Index Preface

monitoring 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-9 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-9 1402-LS51/A: I/OConfig 6-6 1771-CFM: I/OConfig 4-18 1771-IFE/A: I/OConfig 2-5 1771-IFE/B: I/OConfig 2-5 1771-IFE/C: I/OConfig 2-5 1771-IL/B: I/OConfig 2-17 1771-IR/A: I/OConfig 2-23 1771-IR/B: I/OConfig 2-23 1771-IXE/A: I/OConfig 2-31 1771-IXE/B: I/OConfig 2-31 1771-IXHR/A: I/OConfig 2-39 1771-OFE/A: I/OConfig 2-46 1771-OFE/B: I/OConfig 2-46 1771-SDN/A: I/OConfig 2-50 1771-VHSC: I/OConfig 4-7 1791 analog I/O blocks: I/OConfig 7-4 1794-IE4XOE2/A: I/OConfig 8-8 1794-IE4XOE2/B: I/OConfig 8-8 1794-IE8/A: I/OConfig 8-12 1794-IE8/B: I/OConfig 8-12 1794-IR8/A: I/OConfig 8-15 1794-IT8/A: I/OConfig 8-20 1794-OE4/A: I/OConfig 8-4 1794-OE4/B: I/OConfig 8-4 active steps: Program 12-11 BTR, BTW instructions: Config/Maint 16-8 changing radix: Config/Maint 16-3 CIO instructions: Instruction 15-27; Config/Maint 16-10 data: Config/Maint 16-2 entering data: Config/Maint 16-6 I/O status: Config/Maint 12-1 MSG instructions: Config/Maint 16-11 N-Series modules: I/OConfig 3-33 PID instructions: Config/Maint 16-14 processor channels: Config/Maint 14-1

processor status: Config/Maint 12-1 specific addresses: Config/Maint 16-5 status data, processor: Config/Maint 12-1 monitoring a module, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-23 MOV instruction: Instruction 7-4 Move instruction, MOV: Instruction 7-4 moving, to rungs: Program 14-8 moving around on screens, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-1 MSG, instruction entry: Instruction 16-11 MSG instruction: Instruction 16-1 monitoring: Config/Maint 16-11 using: Instruction 16-10 MUL instruction: Instruction 4-25 multi-session driver configuring: Config/Maint 4-8 installing: Config/Maint 4-9 removing: Config/Maint 4-11 multiple communication cards, using: Config/Maint 4-8 Multiply instruction, MUL: Instruction 4-25 MVM instruction: Instruction 7-5

N
N-Series modules 5 V input: I/OConfig 3-6 10 V input: I/OConfig 3-9 10 V output: I/OConfig 3-24 100 mV thermocouple input: I/OConfig 3-15 20 mA sourcing/sinking input: I/OConfig 3-21 25 mA output: I/OConfig 3-27 50 mA output: I/OConfig 3-30 55 mV input: I/OConfig 3-12 650 ohms RTD input: I/OConfig 3-18 N-Series standalone utility, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-13, 3-1 Natural Log instruction, LN: Instruction 4-23

I-22

Master Index

navigational keys: Config/Maint 3-3 I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-1 NEG instruction: Instruction 4-26 Negate instruction, NEG: Instruction 4-26 NEQ instruction: Instruction 3-15 network status screen, ControlNet WHO ACTIVE: Config/Maint 8-31 Next (NXT) instruction: Instruction 13-8 NO ACCESS OR PRIVILEGE VIOLATION, error message: Config/Maint 15-22 NO BACKUP DIRECTORIES ARE CONFIGURED, error message: Program 5-5 NO MORE DATA, error message: Config/Maint 12-34 NO PRIVILEGE TO READ FILE N7, error message: Config/Maint 15-22 node, privileges: Config/Maint 15-14 Not Equal To instruction: Instruction 3-15 NOT instruction: Instruction 5-4 NOT Operation instruction, NOT: Instruction 5-4 Number of Char in Buffer instruction: Instruction 17-7 NXT instruction: Instruction 13-8

O
offline clearing memory: Config/Maint 3-18 configuring: Config/Maint 7-2 creating files: Config/Maint 7-4 reports: Config/Maint 20-5 memory size: Config/Maint 3-14 processor series: Config/Maint 3-12 programming: Config/Maint 7-1 selecting files: Config/Maint 7-5 offline file, privileges: Config/Maint 15-11 offline programming: Config/Maint 3-10 multiple users: Config/Maint 7-3 SFC considerations: Program 9-3, 10-2

One Shot Falling (OSF) instruction: Instruction 13-22 One Shot instruction, ONS: Instruction 13-20 One Shot Rising (OSR) instruction: Instruction 13-21 online communications: Config/Maint 6-1 creating reports: Config/Maint 20-3 programming: Config/Maint 3-8 online communication, configuring: Config/Maint 4-31 ONS instruction: Instruction 13-20 operands, instructions: Instruction C-2 OR instruction: Instruction 5-6 OR Operation instruction, OR: Instruction 5-6 order of operation: Instruction 4-9 organizing data: Config/Maint 9-4 data files: Config/Maint 9-1 program files: Program 2-1 OSF instruction: Instruction 13-22 OSR instruction: Instruction 13-21 OTE instruction: Instruction 1-5 OTL instruction: Instruction 1-6 OTU instruction: Instruction 1-7 OUTDATED VERSION. CANT CONNECT, error message: Config/Maint 6-18 Output Energize instruction: Instruction 1-5 Output Latch instruction: Instruction 1-6 Output Unlatch instruction: Instruction 1-7

P
page breaks, processing: Config/Maint 20-11 page header: Program 17-5 text color: Config/Maint 5-5 page headers, processing: Config/Maint 20-11 pairs, step/transition: Program 9-4

I-23

Master Index Preface

passwords: Config/Maint 15-1 1400-PB: I/OConfig 5-2 1400-PD: I/OConfig 5-2 adding to file: Config/Maint 15-3 changing to a different class: Config/Maint 15-7 power monitor devices: I/OConfig 5-2 passwords and privileges: Config/Maint 15-1 paste rungs: Program 16-16 paste errors: Program 16-21 using disk files: Program 16-19 using the buffer: Program 16-17 viewing paste file: Program 16-20 PC/TCP software, programming over Ethernet: Config/Maint 6-34 performance of 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-10 PID biasing: Instruction 14-13 equations: Instruction 14-3 examples: Instruction 14-35 instruction: Instruction 14-15 integer examples: Instruction 14-35 PD examples: Instruction 14-40 selecting derivative term: Instruction 14-9 setting output alarms: Instruction 14-9 using manual mode: Instruction 14-11 using output limiting: Instruction 14-10 PID instruction: Instruction 14-1 monitoring: Config/Maint 16-14 PII configuration fields: Config/Maint 11-20 configuring: Config/Maint 11-20 status: Config/Maint 12-21 placing GOTO statements: Program 11-10 instructions: Program 13-8 labels: Program 11-10 PLC-2 compatibility file: Instruction 16-16

PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-36 monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-36 PLC-5 files, converting to PLC-5/250 files: Program A-1 PLC-5 to PLC-5/250 convert: Program A-1 PLC-5 processor, choosing series/revision: Config/Maint 3-12 PLC-5/VME status file, configuring: Config/Maint 11-18 PLC-5 processors, data table, file structure and size: Config/Maint 9-6 Polling schemes: Config/Maint 13-17 preventing forces with the memory protect feature, tip: Config/Maint 18-1 printer, configuring: Config/Maint 5-7 printing contact histogram: Config/Maint 19-5 reports: Config/Maint 20-17 privileges: Config/Maint 15-1 assigning to channels: Config/Maint 15-11 assigning to data files: Config/Maint 15-18 assigning to nodes: Config/Maint 15-14 assigning to offline files: Config/Maint 15-11 assigning to program files: Config/Maint 15-17 defining classes: Config/Maint 15-8 overview: Config/Maint 15-5 restoring defaults: Config/Maint 15-20 types of: Config/Maint 15-5 process control biasing: Instruction 14-13 derivative smoothing: Instruction 14-5 equations: Instruction 14-3 gain constants: Instruction 14-4 integer PID examples: Instruction 14-35 PD PID examples: Instruction 14-40 PID: Instruction 14-15 PID examples: Instruction 14-35 PID instruction: Instruction 14-1 selecting derivative term: Instruction 14-9

I-24

Master Index

setting output alarms: Instruction 14-9 using manual mode: Instruction 14-11 using output limiting: Instruction 14-10 processor configuring: Config/Maint 11-1 files: Program 1-7 functions: Config/Maint 3-12 PLC-5/10: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/11: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/12: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/15: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/20: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/20C: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/20E: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/25: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/26: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/30: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/40: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1

PLC-5/40C: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/40E: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/40L: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/46: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/60: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/60C: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/60L: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/80: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/80C: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/80E: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/86: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/V30: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/V40: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1

I-25

Master Index Preface

PLC-5/V40L: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/V80: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 PLC-5/VME: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 programming features: Program 2-9 status: Config/Maint 12-11 processor channels, configuring: Config/Maint 13-1 processor configuration adapter channel response: Config/Maint 11-9 adapter image file: Config/Maint 11-19 communication scan time: Config/Maint 11-11 fault routine: Config/Maint 11-12 I/O status file: Config/Maint 11-14 main control programs: Config/Maint 11-24 memory protect feature: Config/Maint 11-10 PII: Config/Maint 11-20 processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility: Config/Maint 11-8 processor resident rack address: Config/Maint 11-7 start-up procedure: Config/Maint 11-5 STI: Config/Maint 11-22 processor configuration screen, Enhanced PLC-5 processors: Config/Maint 11-4 PROCESSOR FILES ALREADY EXIST; NO DOCUMENTATION FILES EXIST ON SOURCE DRIVE! DOCUMENTATION FILES WILL BE DELETED ON TARGET DRIVE! Proceed?, error message: Program 5-10 Processor Input Interrupt. See PII processor memory comparing: Program 4-2 files, passwords: Config/Maint 15-3 processor memory file, SFC, example ASCII: Program 7-20
I-26

processor memory files backing up duplicate copies: Program 3-5 documenting: Program 17-2 editing keys: Program 17-14 guidelines: Program 17-13 entering symbols: Program 17-16 export: Program 7-6 importing: Program 7-2 ladder, example ASCII: Program 7-14 merging: Program 3-12 naming: Program 2-7 primary and secondary backup directories: Program 3-5 primary and secondary save directories: Program 3-5 restoring: Program 3-7 save and continue: Program 3-2 save and restore: Program 3-3 saving: Program 3-1 saving duplicate copies: Program 3-5 using database editor: Program 17-18 processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility, configuring: Config/Maint 11-8 processor resident rack address, configuring: Config/Maint 11-7 processor startup procedure: Config/Maint 11-5 processor status: Config/Maint 12-1, 12-6 chassis backplane settings: Config/Maint 12-15 file layout: Config/Maint 12-1 runtime date and time: Config/Maint 12-14 processor status file: Config/Maint 12-1 layout: Config/Maint 12-1 processor status screen, Classic PLC-5 processors: Config/Maint 11-3 program, ladder, report: Config/Maint 20-10 program constant, valid value range: Instruction C-1; Config/Maint 9-10 program constants, &H, &O, &B: Instruction 3-3, 4-6

Master Index

program directory: Program 2-2 comparing: Program 4-1 offline: Config/Maint 3-10 online: Config/Maint 3-8 program files creating: Program 2-1, 2-5 documenting: Program 17-2 editing keys: Program 17-14 guidelines: Program 17-13 entering symbols: Program 17-16 merging: Program 3-12 naming: Program 2-7 numbering: Program 2-3, 8-14 organizing: Program 2-1 overview: Program 2-3 privileges: Config/Maint 15-17 undefined: Program 9-7, 10-26 using the database editor: Program 17-18 program flow AFI: Instruction 13-19 JMP and LBL: Instruction 13-5 JSR, SBR, and RET: Instruction 13-12 MCR: Instruction 13-3 UID: Instruction 13-25 UIE: Instruction 13-26 program flow instruction FOR, BRK, LBL, and RET: Instruction 13-8 OSF: Instruction 13-22 OSR: Instruction 13-21 SFR: Instruction 13-23; Program 11-18 program flow instructions: Instruction 13-1 program group, creating: Config/Maint 4-12 program scan main control program: Config/Maint 12-19, 12-26 overall: Config/Maint 12-18 Programming, SDS instruction: Instruction 18-2

programming DH+ to DH+: Config/Maint 6-19 instructions, operands: Instruction C-2 offline: Config/Maint 3-10 online: Config/Maint 3-8 programming BT instructions, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-5 programming features: Program 2-9 ladder logic: Program 2-9 MCPs: Program 2-9 SFCs: Program 2-9 structured text: Program 2-9 subroutines: Program 2-9 programming over Ethernet, PC/TCP software: Config/Maint 6-34 programming software offline: Config/Maint 7-1 online: Config/Maint 6-1 using, 6171-IDH: Config/Maint 1-6 verifying installation: Config/Maint 1-18 programming terminal configuring: Config/Maint 5-1 on DH+: Config/Maint 8-6 online: Config/Maint 6-1 privileges: Config/Maint 15-14 supported by 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-11 Proportional, Integral, and Derivative instruction: Instruction 14-15 Protected PLC-5 processors: Config/Maint 15-21 Protected PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 protecting programs: Config/Maint 15-1

Q
quadrants: Program 8-18

I-27

Master Index Preface

R
rack configuration tables: Config/Maint 12-32 inhibiting: Config/Maint 12-32 resetting: Config/Maint 12-31 rack addressing: Config/Maint 13-61 rack fault, status information: Config/Maint 12-33 rack inhibit, status information: Config/Maint 12-33 rack reset, status information: Config/Maint 12-33 rack size, configuring in remote I/O scanner: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 RAD instruction: Instruction 6-6 Radian instruction, RAD: Instruction 6-6 radix, changing: Config/Maint 16-3 relay type IIN: Instruction 1-8 OTE: Instruction 1-5 OTL: Instruction 1-6 OTU: Instruction 1-7 XIC: Instruction 1-3 XIO: Instruction 1-4 remote I/O, adapter image file: Config/Maint 11-19 remote I/O adapter, interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-22 remote I/O scanner, interpreting status: Config/Maint 14-18 remote programming: Config/Maint 6-19 See also DH+ renaming, files: Program 5-7 replacing, database editor: Program 17-26 report header: Program 17-5 reports changing title: Config/Maint 20-16 configuring printer: Config/Maint 20-21 creating offline: Config/Maint 20-5 creating online: Config/Maint 20-3 file extensions: Config/Maint 20-18 generating: Config/Maint 20-1
I-28

options: Config/Maint 20-15 printing: Config/Maint 20-17 types of: Config/Maint 20-1, 20-7 viewing: Config/Maint 20-25 requirements, system: Config/Maint 1-1 RES instruction: Instruction 2-25 Reset instruction: Instruction 2-25 restore documentation files, to primary save directory: Program 5-5 restore PMF, to primary save directory: Program 5-5 restoring CAR files: Program 3-10 files: Program 3-7 RET instruction: Instruction 13-12 Retentive Timer On instruction: Instruction 2-13 Return instruction: Instruction 13-12 review errors, I/O configuration: I/OConfig 1-21 RS232C, RS422, RS423, configuration: Config/Maint 13-8 RTO instruction: Instruction 2-13 run times, determining: Instruction B-15 rung creating: Program 13-4 definition: Program 13-2 entering: Program 15-2 example: Program 13-5 example format: Program 13-2 logic, writing: Program 13-4 moving: Program 14-8 selecting: Program 14-7 rungs, cut or copy, compatibility: Program 16-17

S
save and continue: Program 3-2 saving, processor memory: Program 3-4 saving files: Program 3-1 SBR instruction: Instruction 13-12 scaling, to engineering units: Instruction 14-7

Master Index

scan list creating extended local I/O: Config/Maint 13-64 remote I/O: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 extended local I/O: Config/Maint 13-62, 14-34 limitations: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 modifying extended local I/O: Config/Maint 13-64 remote I/O: Config/Maint 13-30 remote I/O: Config/Maint 14-20 scan sequence, SFC: Instruction B-8 scan time convergent: Instruction B-16 divergent: Instruction B-16 steady-state: Instruction B-16 scanner, monitoring status: Config/Maint 14-18 scanner mode, configuring: Instruction 15-16, 15-17 scanner, extended local I/O creating a scan list: Config/Maint 13-64 modifying a scan list: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 scanner, remote I/O configuring channels 1A-2B: Config/Maint 13-28 creating a scan list: Config/Maint 13-30, 13-64 screens capturing: I/OConfig xi, 1-26; Config/Maint 3-7 printing: I/OConfig 1-26; Config/Maint 3-7 SDS instruction: Instruction 18-1 searching configuring: Program 16-14 database editor, replacing: Program 17-26 ladder editor: Program 16-3 macros: Program 11-14 SFC: Program 12-3 standard: Program 16-6 Selectable Timed Interrupt. See STI

selecting offline files: Config/Maint 7-5 rungs: Program 14-7 selection branch: Program 8-5, 8-6 entering: Program 11-5, 11-7 scanning sequence: Instruction B-9 sequencer applying: Instruction 12-1 instructions: Instruction 12-1 SQI: Instruction 12-2 SQL: Instruction 12-2 SQO: Instruction 12-2 Sequencer Input instruction: Instruction 12-2 Sequencer Load instruction: Instruction 12-2 Sequencer Output instruction: Instruction 12-2 sequential function chart See also SFC building: Program 10-24 Sequential Function Chart Reset instruction: Instruction 13-23; Program 11-18 serial port communications: Config/Maint 6-20, 6-24 configuration: Config/Maint 13-8 configuring: Config/Maint 6-20 ASCII (user mode): Config/Maint 13-20 communication mode change: Config/Maint 13-22 DF1 master: Config/Maint 13-15 DF1 point-to-point: Config/Maint 13-10 DF1 slave: Config/Maint 13-12 DF1 master status: Config/Maint 14-7 DF1 point-to-point status: Config/Maint 14-6 DF1 slave status: Config/Maint 14-7 modem: Config/Maint 6-25 monitoring: Config/Maint 14-5 protocols: Config/Maint 13-8 user mode (ASCII): Config/Maint 14-10 Serial to KFC/KFCD (CNET), configuring: Config/Maint 6-20

I-29

Master Index Preface

setting CONFIG.SYS, SHARE.EXE: Config/Maint 1-3, 4-4 SFC assigning step/tran names: Program 10-21 building: Program 9-6, 10-3, 10-24 building blocks: Program 8-3 constraints: Instruction B-6 conversion: Program 12-2 creating: Program 9-1, 10-1 macros: Program 11-12 structures: Program 11-1 display, configuring: Program 8-15 drawing: Program 8-1, 8-10 edit mode: Program 8-17 editing: Program 12-2 editor, program mode: Program 12-4 entering selection branch: Program 11-5, 11-7 simultaneous branch: Program 11-6, 11-8 step actions, transitions: Program 10-4 step/transition pairs: Program 9-4 entering comments: Program 10-22 example scanning sequence: Instruction B-13 standard building blocks: Program 8-12 example ASCII export file: Program 7-20 forcing transitions: Program 12-8; Config/Maint 18-8 getting started: Program 8-1 GOTOs and labels: Program 11-9 macros: Program 11-12 assigning comments: Program 11-13 creating: Program 11-12 deleting step/tran: Program 11-13 searching: Program 11-14, 12-4 searching within: Program 11-14 memory requirements: Instruction B-4 monitor mode: Program 8-17 path: Program 8-4 postscan configuration: Program 12-10
I-30

programming offline: Program 9-3, 10-2 quadrants: Program 8-18 reports: Config/Maint 20-8 scan configuration: Program 12-10 scan sequences, considerations: Program 8-21 scanning sequence example: Instruction B-13 selection branch: Instruction B-9 simultaneous branch: Instruction B-10 scanning sequences, step/transition: Instruction B-8 searching: Program 12-3 selection branch: Program 8-5, 8-6 simultaneous branch: Program 8-6, 8-7 special structures: Program 8-21 specifying a qualifier: Program 10-8 status information: Instruction B-2; Program 12-10 step: Program 8-2 step actions: Program 8-3 subcharts: Program 11-15 transition: Program 8-4 zooming: Program 12-7 SFR instruction: Instruction 13-23; Program 11-18 SHARE.EXE: Config/Maint 1-3, 4-4 shift register instruction applying: Instruction 11-1 BSL and BSR: Instruction 11-2 FFL and FFU: Instruction 11-5 LFL and LFU: Instruction 11-5 short cuts: Config/Maint 3-3 simultaneous branch: Program 8-6 entering: Program 11-6, 11-8 post scan mode: Program 8-7 scanning sequence: Instruction B-10 SIN instruction: Instruction 4-27 Sine instruction, SIN: Instruction 4-27 SLC 5/04 support, DH+ WHO: Config/Maint 8-7

Master Index

Smart Directed Sequencer (SDS) Instruction overview: Instruction 18-2 programming: Instruction 18-2 Smart Directed Sequencer Instruction: Instruction 18-1 Smart Menu modifying: Config/Maint 1-15 specifying 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 1-18 other software: Config/Maint 1-18 starting: Config/Maint 2-3 starting 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 2-1 using: Config/Maint 2-2 software offline: Config/Maint 7-1 online: Config/Maint 6-1 starting ControlNet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 DH+ WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Ethernet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Sort File instruction, SRT: Instruction 4-29 SQI instruction: Instruction 12-2 SQL instruction: Instruction 12-2 SQO instruction: Instruction 12-2 SQR instruction: Instruction 4-28 Square Root instruction, SQR: Instruction 4-28 SRT instruction: Instruction 4-29 Standard Deviation instruction, STD: Instruction 4-31 standard searching: Program 16-6 starting 6200 programming software: Config/Maint 2-1 clearing memory: Config/Maint 3-18 ControlNet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5

DH+ WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Ethernet WHO Network Menu: Config/Maint 2-5 Smart Menu: Config/Maint 2-1 starting I/O group: Config/Maint 12-33 startup routines: Config/Maint 11-6 station, privileges: Config/Maint 15-14, 15-17 status Local I/O: Config/Maint 14-34 monitoring the processor: Config/Maint 12-1 of I/O racks: Config/Maint 14-20 processor, layout: Config/Maint 12-1 processor channels: Config/Maint 14-1 status bits CIO instruction: Instruction 15-28 global control: Config/Maint 12-29 global status: Config/Maint 12-27 status data, serial port DF1 master: Config/Maint 14-7 DF1 point-to-point: Config/Maint 14-6 DF1 slave: Config/Maint 14-7 user mode (ASCII): Config/Maint 14-10 status file, size: Config/Maint 9-6 status information active node table: Config/Maint 12-17 arithmetic flags: Config/Maint 12-16 chassis addressing: Config/Maint 12-15 EEPROM status: Config/Maint 12-15 I/O: Config/Maint 12-23 indexed addressing offset: Config/Maint 12-16 main control program scan: Config/Maint 12-19, 12-26 PIIs: Config/Maint 12-21 processor: Config/Maint 12-11, 12-13 See also processor status processor memory protection: Config/Maint 12-15 processor station address: Config/Maint 12-17 program scan: Config/Maint 12-18

I-31

Master Index Preface

RAM backup: Config/Maint 12-15 SFC: Instruction B-2 STIs: Config/Maint 12-22 status messages, ladder editor: Program 14-9 status words, ControlNet I/O map-entry status: Config/Maint B-1 STD instruction: Instruction 4-31 steady-state, scan time: Instruction B-16 step actions: Program 8-3, 9-1, 10-1 display configuration: Program 8-15 entering: Program 10-5 reference numbers: Program 8-15 assigning names: Program 10-21 building block: Program 8-3 entering comments: Program 10-22 monitoring: Program 12-11 scanning sequence: Instruction B-8 step/transition pairs: Program 9-4 STI configuration fields: Config/Maint 11-22 configuring: Config/Maint 11-22 STIs, status: Config/Maint 12-22 string data copying: Config/Maint 16-17 deleting: Config/Maint 16-17 entering: Config/Maint 16-17 structured text listing, report: Config/Maint 20-9 SUB instruction: Instruction 4-34 sub-member, data storage: Config/Maint 9-3 subcharts: Program 11-15 Subroutine Header instruction: Instruction 13-12 Subtract instruction, SUB: Instruction 4-34 symbol, address: Config/Maint 9-22 SYMBOL MUST NOT EXCEED 10 CHARACTERS, error message: Program 5-4 symbols import/export. See importing, documentation report: Config/Maint 20-12 syntax errors, responding: Program 6-9
I-32

system mode, status: Config/Maint 14-6 system requirements: Config/Maint 1-1

T
TAN instruction: Instruction 4-35 Tangent instruction, TAN: Instruction 4-35 Temporary End, instruction: Instruction 13-19 Temporary End instruction: Instruction 13-26 terminal. See programming terminal Test Buffer For Line instruction: Instruction 17-5 testing, edits: Program 16-22 timer accuracy: Instruction 2-4 instruction parameters: Instruction 2-2, 2-16 RES: Instruction 2-25 RTO: Instruction 2-13 TOF: Instruction 2-9 TON instruction: Instruction 2-5 Timer Off Delay instruction: Instruction 2-9 Timer On Delay instruction: Instruction 2-5 timers: Instruction 2-2 timing block transfer: Instruction 15-15, 15-17 instructions: Instruction A-1 tip capturing 6200 programming software screens, Windows: Config/Maint 4-21 changing width of existing databases: Config/Maint 5-10 connecting to Ethernet PLC-5 processors using hostnames: Instruction 16-7 cross reference database: Program 13-10 finding address switch settings for 1784-KT, ABHELP: Config/Maint 6-10 improving search performance: Program 16-3 multiple header commands, printed reports: Program 17-5 preventing forces with the memory protect feature: Config/Maint 18-1

Master Index

regenerating cross reference database: Program 13-10 toggling through default options: Config/Maint 6-2 topical help: Config/Maint 3-7 undocumented addresses report, completing the program: Config/Maint 20-13 title page, printed reports, multiple header commands: Program 17-5 title, report: Config/Maint 20-16 TND, instruction: Instruction 13-19 TND instruction: Instruction 13-25, 13-26 TOD instruction: Instruction 6-3 TOF instruction: Instruction 2-9 toggling through default options, tip: Config/Maint 6-2 TON instruction: Instruction 2-5 topical help, tip: Config/Maint 3-7 transition assigning names: Program 10-21 building block: Program 8-4 entering comments: Program 10-22 forcing: Program 12-8; Config/Maint 18-8 scanning sequence: Instruction B-8 transitions, entering: Program 10-14 type, data storage: Config/Maint 9-3

unused addresses, reports: Config/Maint 20-12 user configuration files: Config/Maint 2-8 user control bits adapter channel response: Config/Maint 11-9 memory protect feature: Config/Maint 11-10 processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility: Config/Maint 11-8 processor resident rack address: Config/Maint 11-7 start-up procedure: Config/Maint 11-5 User Interrupt Disable, UID: Instruction 13-25 User Interrupt Enable, UIE: Instruction 13-26 using CIO instruction: Instruction 15-26 IDI instruction: Instruction 1-12 IDO instruction: Instruction 1-12 keywords: Program 6-7 MSG instruction: Instruction 16-10 undefined program files: Program 9-7 using 6200 programming software, Windows: Config/Maint 4-1 using communications: Config/Maint 8-1 using the I/O configuration utility: I/OConfig 1-1 using the WHO utility, 1784-PCMK: Config/Maint 6-18 utilities, files: Program 5-1

U
UNABLE TO ATTACH TO THIS STATION, error message: Config/Maint 8-8 undefined program file, memory used: Program 2-5 understanding, files: Program 1-1 undocumented addresses, reports: Config/Maint 20-13 undocumented addresses report, completing the program, tip: Config/Maint 20-13 units, engineering, scaling: Instruction 14-7 unused, channel configuration: Config/Maint 13-35

V
viewing, reports: Config/Maint 20-25 VME Driver, using: Config/Maint 6-28 VME PLC-5 processors: Instruction vii; Program viii; I/OConfig viii; Config/Maint viii, 11-1, 12-1, 13-1, 14-1, 17-1, A-1 VSHARE.386: Config/Maint 4-4

W
WARNING no KT/KL/KT2 devices available, error message: Config/Maint 4-10

I-33

Master Index Preface

WARNING no ports available on driver 1, error message: Config/Maint 4-10 watchdog timer, configuring: Config/Maint 11-13 WHO: Config/Maint 2-7 See also DH+ Network Menu station diagnostics Classic PLC-5 processors: Config/Maint 8-11 Enhanced PLC-5 processors: Config/Maint 8-12 PLC-2: Config/Maint 8-9 PLC-3: Config/Maint 8-11 PLC-5/250: Config/Maint 8-16 Windows: Config/Maint 4-5 definitions: Config/Maint 4-2 requirements for running 6200 software under: Config/Maint 4-3 running 6200 software under: Config/Maint 4-19 using 6200 programming software under: Config/Maint 4-1 Windows KL/KT/KT2/PCMK/KTX configuring: Config/Maint 6-30 DH+: Config/Maint 6-30 DH+ routing: Config/Maint 6-30

Windows terminology: Config/Maint 4-2 Windows/DOS KTC (ControlNet), configuring: Config/Maint 6-32 WINTelligent LOGIC 5 to 6200 series conversion: Program B-1; Config/Maint 7-6 words, data storage: Config/Maint 9-3 writing branch logic: Program 13-6 rung logic: Program 13-4 to an EEPROM: Program 3-11

X
X to the Power of Y instruction, XPY: Instruction 4-36 XIC instruction: Instruction 1-3 XIO instruction: Instruction 1-4 XOR instruction: Instruction 5-8 XOR Operation instruction, XOR: Instruction 5-8 XPY instruction: Instruction 4-36

Z
zooming: Program 12-7

I-34

Preface

How to Use Your Documentation

Your PLC-5 programmable controller documentation is organized into manuals according to the tasks you perform. This organization lets you easily find the information you want without reading through information that is not related to your current task. The arrow points to the book you are currently using.

Preface Preface

Figure 1 PLC-5 Programmable Controller Documentation Library

HARDWARE
Classic PLC-5 Processors:
1785 PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Design Manual Explanation of processor functionality, system design, and programming considerations 1785 PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Design Worksheets Worksheets to help the designer plan the system and the installer to install the system

SOFTWARE
Classic and Enhanced PLC-5 Processors:
Software Configuration and Maintenance Installing 6200 programming software Defining data table files Configuring processor Processor/channel status Clearing faults Printing reports

1785 PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Quick Reference Quick access to switches, status bits, indicators, instructions, software screens

1785 PLC-5 Hardware Installation How to install and set switches for chassis, PLC-5 processor, how to wire and ground your system

I/O Configuration Utility Configuring intelligent I/O modules

Structured Text User Manual Program considerations Program examples Mnemonic explanations Using PowerTextt Instruction parameters and syntax

Enhanced PLC-5 Processors:

Enhanced and Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual Placing system hardware Addressing I/O and processor memory Communicating with devices on a DH+, serial, and Ethernet link

Programming Creating/managing files Saving/restoring files Importing/exporting Creating/editing SFCs Creating/editing/ documenting ladder logic programs

Optional: for use with 9313-ST5

Enhanced PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions Handling the Enhanced PLC-5 processor Connecting a remote, extended local, and DH+ link

Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions Handling the Enhanced PLC-5 processor Connecting a remote, extended local, and DH+ link

Instruction Set Reference Instruction execution, parameters, status bits and examples

For more information about PLC-5 programmable controllers or these publications, contact your local sales office, distributor, or system integrator.

ii

Preface

Where to Start
To use 6200 programming software:

If you are a new user of a Classic PLC-5 processor, use the Hardware Installation Manual to make sure your PLC-5 system is correctly installed; then see the Design Manual and the Design Worksheets for programming guidelines for your PLC-5 system. If you are a new user of an Enhanced PLC-5 processor, use the Enhanced PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions or the Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers Installation Instructions to make sure your PLC-5 system is correctly installed; then see the Enhanced and Ethernet PLC-5 Programmable Controllers User Manual for programming guidelines for your PLC-5 system.

For Classic PLC-5 and Enhanced PLC-5 processors, start with the Software Configuration and Maintenance manual to learn how to get your software running. Use the remaining manuals in Figure 1 that are designated for your type of processor to plan, create, and test your programs. After your system is up and running, use the Quick Reference manual for help in maintaining your system.

If you are already familiar with 6200 programming software, you may only need the Instruction Set Reference manual or the Structured Text User Manual.

iii

Preface Preface

Conventions
This manual uses the following conventions to describe how to enter information:

References to:

Unless otherwise stated:

Include these Allen-Bradley Processors: PLC-5/10, -5/12, -5/15, -5/25, and -5/VME processors. PLC-5/11, -5/20, -5/30, -5/40, -5/40L, -5/60 , -5/60L, and -5/80 processors. Note: Unless otherwise specified, Enhanced PLC-5 processors include Ethernet PLC-5, ControlNet PLC-5, Protected PLC-5 and VME PLC-5 processors. PLC-5/20E, -5/40E, and -5/80E processors. PLC-5/20C, -5/40C, -5/60C, and -5/80C processors. PLC-5/26, -5/46, and -5/86 processors. PLC-5/V30, -5/V40, -5/V40L, and -5/V80 processors. See the PLC-5/VME VMEbus Programmable Controllers User Manual for more information.
System security is a combination of the Protected PLC-5

Classic PLC-5 processors Enhanced PLC-5 processors

Ethernet PLC-5 processors ControlNet PLC-5 processors Protected PLC-5 processors 1 VME PLC-5 processors

1 Protected PLC-5 processors alone do not ensure PLC-5 system security.

processor, the software, and your application expertise.

iv

Preface

any Ladder Editor screen

Pictures of keys and/or screens represent actual keys that you press or screens that you see. For example, in the procedure for accessing the online help utility, you see:

Alt

From the Documentation screen, you can enter rung, instruction, and address comments, as well as define symbols for addresses. This screen also provides access to the database editor, from which you can modify comments and symbols. See also: comment database editor save & continue symbol

Press F1 to select additional information about a related topic or instruction, or press Esc to return to the Ladder Editor. Enter the topic or mnemonic for which you want additional information. You can only specify topics that appear on the topic help screen or specify any valid instruction mnemonic for the current processor.

Active Navigational Keys: Change processor mode Documentation Cross reference

[ALT C] [ALT T] [ALT X]

Press <F1> for more help. To exit, press <ESCAPE>. Rem Prog Topical Help F1 Forces:None Edits:None 5/250 Addr 20 LIMIT

What the procedure shows is that from any ladder screen, you can press [Alt-H] to view online help for that screen. From the main online help screen, pictured above, you can press the [F1] key to find additional help information about related topics or instructions. Or, you can return to the Ladder Editor by pressing [Esc]. The instructions above the arrow tell you how to use the online help screen.

Words in square brackets represent actual keys that you press. For example: [Enter] or [F1] Online Programming/Documentation Words that describe information that you have to provide are shown in italics. For example, if you have to type a file name, this is shown as: filename Messages and prompts that the terminal displays are shown as: Press a function key

Preface Preface

Using the Index

At the back of each software manual, there is a master index for the complete software documentation set. The page reference for the item you are looking for appears in the following format: data file addressing: Config/Maint 9-1 creating: Config/Maint 10-2 where the name of the manual that the entry can be found in is in italics, followed by the page reference. For example, the entry for data file addressing (Config/Maint) is in the Software Configuration and Maintenance manual. You would go to the Software Configuration and Maintenance manual, and then find the page number.

vi

Summary of Changes

Summary of Changes
New Information Added to this Manual
The table below summarizes the changes that have been made to the Software Configuration and Maintenance manual since the last printing:
For this New Information: ControlNet connectivity Address comments displayed on status line Setting the RSI_6200_NOBEEP environment variable DOS Extender Specify new database width Using 6200 programming software with Windows 95 Converting 6200 Series (.AF5 Files) to/from AI or WINtelligent Logic 5 (.X5 Files) Configuring processor resident local I/O block transfer compatibility Configuring adapter channel response Configuring memory protect feature PLC-5 Ethernet Interface Module communications Cross reference enhancements for Data Monitor Undocumented Addresses report See Chapter: throughout throughout 1 1 5 6 7 11 11 11, 12 13, 14 16 20

To help you find new information and updated information in this release of the manual, we have included change bars as shown to the right of this paragraph.

iii

Software Configuration and Maintenance Preface Copyright Notice E1996 Rockwell Software, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the United States of America. Portions copyrighted by Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. and used with permission. The manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software, Inc. Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software, Inc. is strictly prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details. Trademark Notices PLC, PLC-2, PLC-3, PLC-5, PLC-5/10, PLC-5/11, PLC-5/12, PLC-5/15, PLC-5/20, PLC-5/20E, PLC-5/20C, PLC-5/25, PLC-5/26, PLC-5/30, PLC-5/V30, PLC-5/40, PLC-5/40L, PLC-5/40E,PLC-5/40C, PLC-5/V40, PLC-5/V40L, PLC-5/46, PLC-5/60, PLC-5/60C, PLC-5/60L, PLC-5/80, PLC-5/80E, PLC-5/80C, PLC-5/V80, PLC-5/86, and PLC-5/VME, PLC-5/250, DH+, ControlNet, Pyramid Integrator, SLC 500, SLC 5/03, and SLC 5/04 are trademarks of Allen-Bradley Company, Inc. The Rockwell Software logo, INTERCHANGE, PowerText, WINtelligent, and WINtelligent LOGIC 5 are trademarks of Rockwell Software, Inc. IBM and PS/2 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows 3.1, Windows for Workgroups 3.11, and Windows 95 are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. Important User Information This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The products performance will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other related factors. The products implementation may vary among users. This manual is as up-to-date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software may have changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained in this manual or the software at anytime without prior notice. The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details of variations in the equipment, procedure, or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation, operation, or maintenance. Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards. The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Allen-Bradley does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication. Allen-Bradley publication SGI-1.1, Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control (available from your local Allen-Bradley office), describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and electromechanical devices that should be taken into consideration when applying products such as those described in this publication. Throughout this manual we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations:

Attention: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage or economic loss.
Attention statements help you to: identify a hazard avoid the hazard recognize the consequences

Note

Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

ii

Customer Support
If you need additional assistance in using your software, Allen-Bradley offers telephone and on-site product support at Customer Support Centers worldwide. For technical assistance on the telephone, first contact your local sales office, distributor, or system integrator. If additional assistance is needed, then contact your local Customer Support Center or contact System Support Services.

In the United States and Canada

If you have a SupportPlus agreement or your software is under warranty, you can contact System Support Services at: 1-800-289-2279. Have your support contract or software registration number available. For assistance that requires on-site support, contact your local sales office, distributor, or system integrator. During non-office hours, contact the Allen-Bradley 24-hour Hot Line at 1-800-422-4913.

Outside of the United States

Contact your local Customer Support Center at:
Region or Area Canada (Cambridge, Ontario) Latin America (Mexico) United Kingdom (Milton Keynes) France (Paris) Germany (Gruiten) Italy (Milan) Asia Pacific (Hong Kong) Spain (Barcelona) Customer Support Center Telephone Number 519-623-1810 52-5-259-0040 44-908 838800 (33-1) 3067-7200 (49) 2104 6900 (39-2) 939-721 (852) 887-4788 (34-3) 331-7004

For assistance that requires on-site support, contact your local office, distributor, or system integrator. During non-office hours, contact your local Customer Support Center.